JP2020178944A - Game machine - Google Patents

Abstract

To provide a game machine capable of suitably increasing a degree of attention to a game.SOLUTION: A guide passage 500E includes a horizontally long upstream-side passage part 501E, and a middle passage part 502E extended downward from an edge on a downstream side of the upstream-side passage part 501E. An upstream-side variable winning device 64E disposed side by side with the middle passage part 502E includes: an upper large winning hole 311E that is positioned on the extension of the upstream-side passage part 501E and is disposed side by side with a third specific area SE3 of the middle passage part 502E; and a plate-like shutter 315E switched to an open position for permitting entry of game balls into the upper large winning hole 311E and to a closed position for disabling entry of game balls into the upper large winning hole 311E by slidably moving in a longitudinal direction. The shutter 315E is disposed such that the plate surface faces sideways and opposes an exit part 501aE of the upstream-side passage part 501E. When the shutter 315E is disposed at an open position, a third specific area SE3 in the middle passage part 502E communicates with the upper large winning hole 311E.SELECTED DRAWING: Figure 70

Description

The present invention relates to a game machine.

Some gaming machines such as pachinko machines include a game board in which a game area is formed, and a game ball launching means for launching a game ball into the game area based on a launch operation by the player. When the game ball launched from the game ball launching means enters the ball entry portion provided in the game area, a privilege such as paying out a predetermined number of game balls is given to the player. The game is diversified by making the ball entry part variable and switching between a guidance state in which the game ball is guided to the ball entry part and a non-guidance state in which the guidance is not performed according to the game situation (for example, patent). Reference 1).

JP-A-2002-78904

In the above-mentioned type of gaming machine, there is still room for improvement in the configuration related to the ball entry portion in order to improve the degree of attention to the game.

The present invention has been made in view of the above-exemplified circumstances and the like, and an object of the present invention is to provide a game machine capable of suitably improving the degree of attention to the game.

The present invention
A game machine provided with a game board on which a game area is formed, and the game board is provided with a ball passage through which a game ball flowing down the game area passes.
The ball passage includes a horizontal passage portion constituting the upstream side of the ball passage and a vertical passage portion extending downward from the downstream end portion of the horizontal passage portion.
The ball entry port is located on the extension of the horizontal passage portion and is provided so as to be side by side with the passage area of the game ball in the vertical passage portion, and the ball entry is displaced in the thickness direction of the game board. It is provided with a variable ball entry section having a shutter that switches between a receiving state that allows ball entry into the mouth and a non-accepting state that prohibits ball entry into the ball entry port.
The shutter has a plate shape, and is arranged so that the plate surface faces sideways and faces the outlet portion of the lateral passage portion.
When the shutter is in the receiving state, the passing area and the ball entry port are communicated with each other, and when the shutter is in the non-receiving state, the shutter is in the passing area and the ball entering state. Functions as a partition that separates the mouth
When the shutter is switched from the non-accepting state to the receiving state under the situation where the game ball is located in the passing area, the game ball located in the passing area flows into the entrance. It is characterized by having a structure.

According to the present invention, the degree of attention to the game can be suitably improved.

It is a perspective view which shows the pachinko machine in one Embodiment. It is a perspective view which shows the main structure of a pachinko machine in development. It is a perspective view which shows the main structure of a pachinko machine in development. (A) A front view showing the configuration of the game board, and (b) a front view of the main display unit. It is a front view of the upper variable winning device. It is a front view of the ball entry unit. It is a front perspective view of (a) the right side actuating ball entry part, and (b) is the schematic view which shows the passage structure which concerns on the right side actuating ball entry part. It is a schematic diagram which shows the relationship between the passage length and the time required for passage. It is a block diagram which shows the electric structure of a pachinko machine. It is a schematic diagram for demonstrating the contents of various counters used for a winning / failing lottery. It is a schematic diagram which shows the right / wrong table for the lower operation opening. It is the schematic which shows the right-and-empty table for the right actuation opening. It is a schematic diagram which shows (a) the distribution table for the lower operation port, and (b) is the schematic diagram which shows the distribution table for the right operation port. It is a flowchart which shows the timer interrupt processing executed by MPU of a main control unit. It is a flowchart which shows the normal process which is executed by MPU of a main control unit. It is a flowchart which shows the game time control process. It is a flowchart which shows the control process for a lower operation port. It is a flowchart which shows the fluctuation start processing for a lower operation port. It is a flowchart which shows the control process for a right working port. It is a flowchart which shows the fluctuation start processing for a right actuation opening. It is a flowchart which shows the game state transition process. It is a flowchart which shows the opening and closing process of a big winning opening. It is a flowchart which shows the 1st opening / closing process. It is a flowchart which shows the 2nd opening / closing process. It is a flowchart which shows the transition process at the end of the opening / closing execution mode. It is a flowchart which shows the process for electric service support. It is the schematic which compared the variable display time and the fixed display time for each support mode. It is a flowchart which shows the electric service opening / closing process. It is a flowchart which shows the variation display time setting process for a lower operation port. It is a flowchart which shows the variation display time setting process for a right actuation opening. It is the schematic which shows the difference of the variable display time and the fixed display time for each game state. It is a schematic diagram which shows the relationship between the type of a jackpot result and the number of times of continuation of a high frequency support mode. It is a block diagram which shows the relationship of each game state. It is the schematic which illustrates the movement of the game ball in the 2nd normal game state and the 4th normal game state. It is the schematic which exemplifies the movement of the game ball in the 3rd normal game state. It is the schematic which exemplifies the movement of the game ball in the 3rd normal game state. It is a timing chart which shows the increase / decrease of the possession ball with the progress of a game. (A) A timing chart showing the flow of the game in the second normal game state, and (b) A timing chart showing the flow of the game in the third normal game state. It is a timing chart which shows the change of the number of reserved information with the progress of a game. It is a timing chart which shows the flow of the game at the time of transition to the 2nd normal game state. It is a timing chart which shows the flow of the game at the time of transition to the 2nd normal game state. It is the schematic which shows the right side actuating ball entry part. (A) A timing chart showing a display mode of the through-gate display unit in the low-frequency support mode, and (b) a timing chart showing a display mode of the through-gate display unit in the high-frequency support mode. It is a block diagram which shows the electrical structure which concerns on the notification / effect control device and the display control device. It is the schematic for demonstrating the display content on the display screen of a symbol display device. It is the schematic for demonstrating the display content on the display screen of a symbol display device. It is the schematic for demonstrating the display content on the display screen of a symbol display device. It is a schematic diagram which shows the relationship between the game state and the variation display area of a pattern. It is a flowchart which shows the information display control process which is executed by MPU of a notification / effect control device. It is a flowchart which shows the display control processing for a special game state. It is a schematic diagram which shows the flow of display at the time of transitioning from a 1st special game state to a 2nd normal game state. It is a flowchart which shows the display control process for a normal game state. It is a flowchart which shows the target display control processing. (A) is a schematic diagram illustrating the relationship between the number of games played and the size of the target display area in the second normal gaming state, and (b) is a schematic diagram showing the relationship between the target display area and the variable display area of the symbol. It is a flowchart which shows the counter display control processing corresponding to the right operation port. It is a flowchart which shows the counter display control processing corresponding to the lower operation port. It is the schematic which shows the state of the update of the counter display. (A) is a schematic diagram showing a flow when shifting to a third normal gaming state, and (b) is a schematic diagram showing a flow when shifting to a first special gaming state. It is a timing chart which shows the flow of a game. It is a timing chart which shows the flow of the game at the time of transitioning to the 3rd normal game state in 3rd Embodiment. It is the schematic which shows the subtraction pattern of the counter display in 4th Embodiment. It is the schematic which shows the subtraction pattern of a counter display. It is the schematic which shows the flow of the update of the counter display in 5th Embodiment. It is the schematic which shows the flow of the update of a counter display. It is a front view of the ball entry unit in the sixth embodiment. It is the schematic which shows the flow of a ball entering. (A) is a schematic view showing a movement path of a game ball in a comparative example, and (b) is a schematic view showing a movement path of a game ball in the ball entry unit shown in the sixth embodiment. It is the schematic which shows the modification of the lower variable winning apparatus. It is the schematic which shows the modification of the lower variable winning apparatus. It is a schematic diagram which shows the upper variable winning apparatus in 7th Embodiment. It is the schematic which shows the flow of a ball entering. It is the schematic which shows the modification of the upper variable winning apparatus.

<First Embodiment>
Hereinafter, a first embodiment of a pachinko gaming machine (hereinafter, referred to as “pachinko machine”), which is a type of gaming machine, will be described in detail with reference to the drawings. FIG. 1 is a perspective view of the pachinko machine 10 as viewed from the front side, and FIGS. 2 and 3 are perspective views showing the main configurations of the pachinko machine 10. In FIG. 2, for convenience, the configuration of the pachinko machine 10 in the game area PE is omitted.

As shown in FIG. 1, the pachinko machine 10 has an outer frame 11 forming the outer shell of the pachinko machine 10 and a game machine main portion 12 attached to the outer frame 11.

The outer frame 11 is formed by connecting plate members on all four sides and has a rectangular frame shape. By attaching and fixing the outer frame 11 to the island facility, the pachinko machine 10 is installed in the game hall. The outer frame 11 is not an indispensable configuration for the pachinko machine 10, and the outer frame 11 may be provided on the island equipment of the amusement park.

The game machine main portion 12 is supported by an outer frame 11 in a state where it can be opened and closed. Specifically, the upper support metal fitting 17 is fixed to the connecting portion between the upper frame portion and the left frame portion in the outer frame 11, and further below to the connecting portion between the lower frame portion and the left frame portion in the outer frame 11. A side support metal fitting 18 is provided. A support mechanism is composed of the upper support metal fittings 17 and the lower support metal fittings 18, and the support mechanism causes the game machine main portion 12 to rotate on the left side of the pachinko machine 10 with respect to the outer frame 11. , The right side is the rotation tip side, and the pachinko machine 10 can be rotated forward (see FIGS. 2 and 3).

As shown in FIG. 2, the game machine main portion 12 includes an inner frame 13 as a base body, a front door frame 14 arranged in front of the inner frame 13, and a back pack arranged behind the inner frame 13. It is equipped with a unit 15. The inner frame 13 of the game machine main portion 12 is rotatably supported with respect to the outer frame 11. Specifically, the inner frame 13 can rotate forward with the left side as the rotation base end side and the right side as the rotation tip side in front view.

The front door frame 14 is rotatably supported on the inner frame 13, and is rotatable forward with the left side as the rotation base end side and the right side as the rotation tip side in front view. Further, the back pack unit 15 is rotatably supported on the inner frame 13, and can be rotated rearward with the left side as the rotation base end side and the right side as the rotation tip side when viewed from the front. (See FIG. 3).

(Front door frame 14)
Next, the front door frame 14 will be described. As shown in FIG. 2, the front door frame 14 is mainly composed of a synthetic resin frame 20 having an outer shape substantially the same as that of the outer frame 11, and covers almost the entire front surface of the inner frame 13. There is. A substantially elliptical window portion 21 is formed in the central portion of the frame body 20 so that almost the entire area of the game area PE described later can be visually recognized from the front, and the window portion 21 is the same by the glass unit 22. It is closed from the back side of the front door frame 14.

The glass unit 22 includes a plurality of transparent glass panels 23 and a glass holder for holding the glass panels 23. The glass holder is formed with a partition portion that partitions the holding area of the glass panel 23 back and forth, and both glass panels 23 face each other in the front and rear with the partition portion interposed therebetween. That is, by securing a predetermined gap between the two glass panels 23, the game area PE is doubly covered from the front side of the pachinko machine 10 by the glass panels 23 while avoiding interference between the glass panels 23. It is in a state.

It is not always necessary to unitize both glass panels 23 by using a glass holder, and each glass panel 23 may be individually attached to the frame body 20. Further, the number of glass panels is arbitrary, and may be one or three or more. However, from the viewpoint of improving safety and crime prevention, it is preferable to employ a plurality of glass panels and to face each of these glass panels in the front-rear direction with a predetermined gap in between. Incidentally, it is also possible to use a transparent synthetic resin panel member instead of the glass panel.

As shown in FIG. 1, light emitting means such as various lamps are provided around the glass unit 22 (specifically, the window portion 21). For example, an annular illumination portion 26 having a built-in light emitting means such as an LED is provided along the peripheral edge of the window portion 21. The annular illumination unit 26 is lit or blinked according to a change in the gaming state at the time of a big hit or a predetermined reach. In addition, an error display lamp unit 27 that lights up when a predetermined error occurs is provided at the center of the annular illumination unit 26 and at the top of the pachinko machine 10, and a prize that lights up during the payout of the prize ball is provided on the left and right sides thereof. A ball lamp portion 28 is provided. Further, a speaker unit 29 for outputting a sound effect or the like according to the game state is provided at a position close to the left and right prize ball lamp units 28.

Below the window portion 21 in the front door frame 14 (frame body 20), an upper bulging portion 31 bulging toward the front side and a lower bulging portion 32 are vertically arranged side by side. An upper plate 33 that opens upward is provided inside the upper bulging portion 31, and a lower plate 34 that also opens upward is provided inside the lower bulging portion 32. The upper plate 33 has a function of temporarily storing the game balls paid out from the payout device described later and guiding them to the game ball launching mechanism side described later while arranging them in a row. Further, the lower plate 34 has a function of storing the surplus game balls in the upper plate 33.

A game ball launch handle 41 is provided on the right side of the lower bulging portion 32 so as to project toward the front side. By operating the game ball launch handle 41, the game ball is launched from the game ball launch mechanism described later.

As shown in FIG. 2, a passage forming unit 45 is attached to the back surface of the front door frame 14. The passage forming unit 45 is formed of synthetic resin and has a front door side upper plate passage leading to the upper plate 33 and a front door side lower plate passage leading to the lower plate 34. In the passage forming unit 45, a receiving portion that protrudes rearward and is opened upward is formed in the upper corner portion thereof, and the entrance portion of the upper plate passage on the front door side is formed by partitioning the receiving portion to the left and right by a partition wall. A section is formed between the portion and the entrance portion of the lower plate passage on the front door side. The game ball entering the front door side upper plate passage is guided to the upper plate 33, and the game ball entering the front door side lower plate passage is guided to the lower plate 34.

On the rotation base end side on the back surface of the front door frame 14, protrusion shafts are provided at the upper end and the lower end thereof. These protrusion shafts form an assembly mechanism for the inner frame 13. Further, as shown in FIG. 2, a plurality of hook metal fittings 49 extending rearward are arranged side by side in the vertical direction on the rotating tip side on the back surface of the front door frame 14. These hook metal fittings 49 form a locking mechanism for the inner frame 13.

(Inner frame 13)
Next, the inner frame 13 will be described in detail with reference to FIGS. 2 and 3. The inner frame 13 is mainly composed of a resin base 50 having a substantially rectangular outer shape like the outer frame 11. The height dimension of the resin base 50 is set to be slightly smaller than the height dimension of the outer frame 11. Further, the resin base 50 is arranged close to the upper frame portion of the outer frame 11, and a slight gap is formed between the lower frame portion of the outer frame 11 and the resin base 50. A curtain plate is attached to the outer frame 11 so as to close this gap. The curtain plate is arranged below the resin base 50 (specifically, the lower end thereof), and the resin base 50 is placed on the curtain plate when the inner frame 13 is closed with respect to the outer frame 11. ..

Support metal fittings 51 and 52 are attached to the upper end and the lower end of the rotation base end side of the front surface of the resin base 50. Shaft holes are formed in the support metal fittings 51 and 52, and the front door frame 14 is rotatably supported with respect to the inner frame 13 by inserting the protruding shaft of the front door frame 14 into the shaft holes. ing.

Insertion holes for inserting the hook metal fittings 49 provided on the back surface of the front door frame 14 are provided on the rotation tip side of the front surface of the resin base 50. As shown in FIG. 3, the pachinko machine 10 has a configuration in which a locking device 55 for locking the inner frame 13 and the front door frame 14 is hidden behind the inner frame 13. Therefore, when the hook metal fitting 49 is locked to the locking device 55 (specifically, the hook receiving member for the front door) through the insertion hole, the front door frame 14 is locked to the inner frame 13 in an unopenable manner. Further, the locking device 55 has an inner frame hook member 57 extending rearward of the inner frame 13. By hooking the inner frame hook member 57 on the hook receiving member 19 of the outer frame 11, the game machine main portion 12 is locked in a closed state with respect to the outer frame 11.

A cylinder lock 58 for unlocking the locking device 55 is installed in the lower right corner of the resin base 50. The cylinder lock 58 is integrated with the locking device 55, and when the key inserted into the keyhole of the cylinder lock 58 is turned to the right, the front door frame 14 is unlocked from the inner frame 13 and inserted into the keyhole of the cylinder lock 58. The locking device 55 is configured so that the inner frame 13 is unlocked with respect to the outer frame 11 when the key is turned counterclockwise.

A substantially elliptical window hole 54 is formed in the central portion of the resin base 50, and the window hole 54 is closed from the rear by a game board 60 mounted on the resin base 50. The game board 60 has a wooden plywood and a sheet material covering the front side plate surface of the plywood, and the front surface thereof is exposed to the front side of the resin base 50 through the window hole 54. A game area PE through which the game ball flows down is formed on the exposed portion, that is, on the front surface of the game board 60. The game board 60 is not limited to wood, and may be made of synthetic resin.

Hereinafter, the game board 60 (particularly various configurations arranged in the game area PE) will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 4 is a front view of the game board 60.

(Game board 60)
The game board 60 is formed with a plurality of large and small openings penetrating in the thickness direction (front-back direction) of the game board 60. A general winning opening 61, an operating ball entry portion 62, 63, a variable winning device 64, 65, a through gate 66, a variable display unit 67, and the like are arranged in each opening. When a ball enters a ball entry section such as a general winning opening 61, an actuating ball entry section 62, 63, or a variable winning device 64, 65, it is detected by a detection sensor, and a predetermined number of prizes are awarded based on the detection result. Benefits such as paying out balls are given to the player.

Specifically, when a ball enters the general winning opening 61, 10 game balls are paid out, and when a ball enters the lower actuating entry portion 62, 4 balls are paid out. When the payout of the game ball is executed and the ball enters the right-hand actuated ball entry unit 63, one game ball is paid out, and when the ball enters the upper variable winning device 64, the ball is paid out. The payout of 14 game balls is executed, and when a ball is entered into the lower variable winning device 65, the payout of 10 game balls is executed.

An out port 68 is provided at the lowermost portion of the game board 60, and game balls that have not entered the various entry sections are discharged from the game area PE through the out port 68. Here, the entry ball means that the game ball passes through a predetermined opening portion, and the game ball has passed through the opening portion as well as the mode in which the game ball is discharged from the game area PE after passing through the opening portion. A mode in which the game area PE is not discharged later is also included. In the following description, in order to clearly distinguish from the entry of the game ball into the out opening 68, the entry into the general winning opening 61, the operating entry section 62, 63, the variable winning devices 64, 65, and the through gate 66. Is also expressed as a prize.

Further, in the game board 60, a large number of nails 69 are planted in order to appropriately disperse and adjust the flow path of the game ball, and various members (accessories) such as a windmill are arranged. The flow path of the game ball is differentiated by various configurations of the nail 69, the windmill, and the like, and is adjusted so that the above-mentioned general winning opening 61 and the like are won with an appropriate probability.

The variable display unit 67 is arranged in the center of the game board 60, and the actuating ball entry portions 62, 63 and the like are arranged around the variable display unit 67. The actuated ball entry portions 62 and 63 are large in the lower actuated ball entry portion 62 arranged below the variable display unit 67 and the right actuate ball entry portion 63 arranged on the right side of the variable display unit 67. Separately, the right-side actuating ball entry unit 63 is provided with an electric accessory 71 as an opening / closing type ball entry assisting device (ball entry assisting means) or an opening / closing member (opening / closing means). The electric accessory 71 includes a shutter and a solenoid-type drive unit that drives the shutter, and the position of the shutter is changed by the drive unit, so that the right-side actuating ball entry portion 63 (right actuating port 63a) It is possible to switch between an open state (accepted state) in which the ball can be entered into the ball and a closed state (non-accepted state) in which the ball cannot be entered. The electric accessory 71 attached to the right-side actuating ball entry unit 63 may be switched between a state in which the ball can easily enter the right-hand operation port 63a and a state in which it is more difficult to enter the ball.

The through gate 66 is arranged in the game area PE (detailed on the right route described later) at a position on the upstream side of the right-hand actuating entry portion 63, specifically on the side (right side) of the variable display unit 67. There is. The through gate 66 allows game balls to pass in the vertical direction, and the game balls that have won the through gate 66 flow down to the downstream side of the game area PE without being discharged from the game area PE. There is. When a lottery triggered by the passage of the through gate 66 of the game ball is won, the electric accessory 71 is switched from the closed state to the open state for a predetermined time.

The upper variable winning device 64 is arranged at a position between the through gate 66 and the right-handed ball entry portion 63 on the right route. The upper variable winning device 64 is formed with an upper prize opening that allows a plurality of game balls to enter at the same time, and is provided with an opening / closing mechanism as an opening / closing means for opening / closing the upper prize opening. The opening / closing mechanism includes a shutter as an opening / closing member for a large winning opening. The shutter can be switched between an open state (auxiliary state or accepting state) that allows or facilitates the entry of a game ball, and a closed state (non-assisted or non-accepting state) that makes it impossible or difficult to enter the game ball. It has become. In addition, the shutter is connected to a variable winning drive unit (more specifically, a solenoid), and the shutter is maintained in the closed state in the normal state, and in the above internal lottery, the opening / closing execution mode (special game state or opening / closing execution state) is entered. It is possible to switch to the open state when the transition result of.

The lower variable winning device 65 is arranged at a position on the right route on the downstream side of the right-handed ball entry portion 63. The lower variable winning device 65 is formed with a lower large winning opening capable of simultaneously entering a plurality of game balls, and is provided with an opening / closing mechanism as an opening / closing means for opening / closing the lower large winning opening. The opening / closing mechanism includes a shutter as an opening / closing member for a large winning opening. The shutter can be switched between an open state (accepted state) in which the game ball can be entered and a closed state (non-accepted state) in which the same ball cannot be entered. In addition, the shutter is connected to a variable winning drive unit (more specifically, a solenoid), and the shutter is maintained in the closed state in the normal state, and in the above internal lottery, the opening / closing execution mode (special game state or opening / closing execution state) is entered. It is possible to switch to the open state when the transition result of.

Here, the open / close execution mode is a mode that shifts to a big hit or a special hit. As an opening mode of the variable winning device 65 in the opening / closing execution mode, for example, a predetermined period (30 sec or 0.8 sec in the present embodiment) elapses or a predetermined number (9 in the present embodiment) of winning is 1 As the rounds, the shutter is set to be released up to a predetermined number of rounds (1, 2, 6, 8, 16 rounds in the present embodiment) as the upper limit.

Next, the variable display unit 67 will be described. The variable display unit 67 has a symbol display device 75 that variably displays (variably displays) the symbols triggered by winning a prize in the actuated ball entry units 62 and 63.

The symbol display device 75 is configured as a liquid crystal display device provided with a liquid crystal display, and the display content on the display screen 75a is controlled by a display control device described later. On the display screen 75a of the symbol display device 75, for example, symbols are displayed side by side on the left, middle, and right, and these symbols are variably displayed so as to be scrolled in the vertical direction. Then, in the case of a big hit or a special hit, a predetermined combination of symbols is stopped and displayed on the preset effective line, and the mode shifts to the opening / closing execution mode. The symbol display device 75 does not necessarily have to be a liquid crystal display device, and may be a dot matrix or a 7-segment type display device.

Further, in the variable display unit 67, a center frame 76 is arranged so as to surround the symbol display device 75. The center frame 76 is fixed to the game board 60 from the front side thereof, and in such a fixed state, the center frame 76 and the glass unit 22 stand up from the front side of the game board 60. The clearance between the glass and the ball is configured to be smaller than the diameter of the game ball. As a result, the game ball flowing down the game area PE is prevented from colliding with the symbol display device 75, and the flow path of the game ball flowing down the game area PE is on the right side of the variable display unit 67 (specifically, the center frame 76). It is roughly divided into the above right route that detours from and the left route that detours from the left side.

The above-mentioned right-hand actuated ball entry unit 63, variable winning devices 64, 65, and through gate 66 are arranged on the right route, and for game balls flowing down the left route, the right-side actuating ball entry unit 63, variable winning part Winning of the devices 64 and 65 and the through gate 66 is avoided. On the other hand, the lower actuating ball entry portion 62 is arranged on the left route, and the game ball flowing down the right route is prevented from winning the lower actuating ball entry section 62. By selecting the launch destination of the game ball (the flow path of the game ball) from the right route / the left route according to the game situation, the player can advance the game advantageously.

A main display unit 81 is arranged on a protective member for the guide rail 100 arranged outside the game area PE. The front surface of the main display unit 81 faces the glass unit 22 (specifically, the glass panel 23 on the rear side) that makes the game area PE visible from the front of the pachinko machine 10, and the facing portion thereof is A main display unit D for displaying a predetermined pattern or the like is provided. The main display unit 81 is electrically connected to a main control device described later, and the display content of the main display unit D is controlled by the main control device.

The main display unit D includes a display unit DL for the lower operating port that displays the lottery result based on winning a prize in the lower operating ball entry unit 62 (lower operating port 62a), and a right operating ball entry unit 63 (right operating port 63a). ) Is provided with a display unit DR for the right operating port that displays the result of the lottery performed based on the winning.

In the display unit DL for the lower operating port, a variation display of the pattern is performed triggered by winning a prize in the lower operating ball entry unit 62 (lower operating port 62a), and as a result of stopping the variation display, the lower operating ball entry unit 62. The result of the internal lottery based on the winning of 62 is specified. If the result of the internal lottery based on the winning of the lower operating ball entry unit 62 is the winning result corresponding to the transition to the open / close execution mode, the variable display is stopped on the display unit DL for the lower operating port. After the predetermined pattern is displayed as the stop result, the mode shifts to the open / close execution mode.

In the display unit DR for the right operating port, a variation display of the pattern is performed triggered by winning a prize in the right operating ball entry unit 63, and as a result of stopping the variation display, the right operating ball entry unit 63 (right operating port 63a) is displayed. The result of the internal lottery based on the winning prize will be specified. If the result of the internal lottery based on the winning of the right-handed ball entry unit 63 is a winning result corresponding to a big hit or a special hit, the variable display is stopped on the display unit DR for the right-handed opening, and as a stop result. After the predetermined pattern is displayed, the mode shifts to the opening / closing execution mode according to the result.

Here, based on the winning of any of the operating ball entry units 62 and 63, the variation display is started on the corresponding operation port display units DL and DR, a predetermined stop result is displayed, and the above variation display is stopped. Until it is played, it corresponds to one game. However, one game round is not limited to the above contents, and for example, a single display area is provided, and even if any of the actuated ball entry portions 62 and 63 is awarded, the single display area is provided. In a configuration in which variable display is performed in one display area, the variable display is started in the single display area, and the game is played until the variable display is stopped while displaying a predetermined stop result. It will be once.

The main display unit D of the main display unit 81 is provided with a hold number display unit SL for the lower operation port and a hold number display unit SR for the right operation port. The lower operating port hold number display unit SL corresponds to the lower operating port 62a, and the number of times the game ball wins the lower operating port 62a is held up to 4 times by lighting the lower operating port hold number display unit SL. The number of holdings is displayed. The right operating port hold number display unit SR corresponds to the right operating port 63a, and the number of times the game ball wins the right operating port 63a is held up to 4 times, and the right operating port hold number display unit SR lights up. The number of holdings is displayed by.

In addition to the various display units, the main display unit 81 of the main display unit 81 is provided with a through gate display unit DS that displays lottery results based on winning a prize in the through gate 66. In the through gate display unit DS, the variation display of the pattern is performed by triggering the winning of the through gate 66, and as the result of stopping the variation display, the result of the internal lottery performed based on the winning of the through gate 66 is obtained. Be specified. If the result of the internal lottery based on the winning of the through gate 66 is the winning result corresponding to the transition to the electric service open state, the predetermined stop result is displayed on the through gate display unit DS and the variable display is displayed. After being stopped, it shifts to the electric service open state. In the electric service open state, the electric accessory 71 attached to the right-side actuating ball entry portion 63 is opened in a predetermined manner.

Further, in the present embodiment, the number of times the game ball has passed through the through gate 66 is held up to 4 times, but the number of times held is displayed on the main display unit D of the main display unit 81. A through gate holding number display unit SS is provided.

Explaining the configuration of the inner frame 13 again with reference to FIG. 2, the game ball is directed toward the game area PE below the mounting area of the game board 60 in the resin base 50 based on the operation of the game ball launch handle 41. A game ball launching mechanism 110 for firing is provided. The game ball launch mechanism 110 includes a solenoid 111 that launches a game ball arranged at a predetermined launch standby position, a launch rail 112 that defines a launch direction of the game ball launched by the solenoid 111, and a game at the launch standby position. A ball feeding device 113 for supplying balls and a base plate 114 on which these various configurations 111 to 113 are mounted are provided as a main configuration, and the base plate 114 is fixed to the resin base 50 to be attached to the resin base 50. On the other hand, it is integrated.

The launch rail 112 is fixed to the base plate 114 in a state of being inclined obliquely so as to be inclined upward toward the game board 60 side. At a position closer to the downstream end (that is, the lower end) of the launch rail 112, a ball stopper that holds the game ball supplied from the ball feeding device 113 to the launch standby position described above is arranged. The solenoid 111 is arranged at a position further downstream from the ball stopper.

The solenoid 111 is electrically connected to a power supply / emission control device described later. The output shaft of the solenoid 111 reciprocates in the expansion and contraction direction based on the output of the electric signal from the power supply / launch control device, so that the game ball placed in the launch standby position is on the game board 60 side, in detail, the game. It is launched toward the guide rail 100 mounted on the board 60.

In the guide rail 100, the game area PE is divided into sections so that the outer shape of the game area PE is substantially circular. Further, the guide rail 100 is composed of an inner rail 101 and an outer rail 102 arranged so as to face each other with a gap slightly larger than the diameter of the game ball, and the guide passage 103 is divided by both rails 101 and 102. It is formed. The guidance passage 103 has an entrance portion opened to the tip end side (obliquely downward) of the launch rail 112 and an exit portion located above the game area PE. The game ball launched based on the operation of the solenoid 111 is guided to the game area PE by moving in the order of the launch rail 112 → the guidance rail 100 (entrance portion → exit portion). By adjusting the operation amount of the game ball launch handle 41, the game ball can be divided into an area on the left side of the variable display unit 67 in the game area PE and an area on the right side of the variable display unit 67 in the same game area PE. It is possible.

In the game board 60, a reverse return prevention member 106 for preventing the game ball that has reached the game area PE from returning to the same guidance passage 103 is attached to the front side of the exit portion, specifically, near the tip of the inner rail 101. This prevents the game ball that has reached the game area PE first from hindering the subsequent launch of the game ball.

The guide rail 100 (see FIG. 4) and the launch rail 112 are arranged so that the entrance portion of the guide rail 100 and the tip portion of the launch rail 112 diagonally face each other with the lower end edge of the game board 60 interposed therebetween. That is, both of the rails 100 and 112 are arranged so that the inlet portion of the guide rail 100 and the tip portion of the launch rail 112 are displaced to the left and right near the lower end edge of the game board 60. As a result, both rails 100 and 112 are brought closer to the lower end edge of the game board 60, and a gap of a predetermined interval is formed between the inlet portion of the guide rail 100 and the launch rail 112.

A foul ball passage 46 is arranged below the gap formed in this way. The foul ball passage 46 is integrally molded with the passage forming unit 45 of the front door frame 14. If the game ball launched from the game ball launch mechanism 110 does not reach the game area PE and returns in the guidance passage 103 as a foul ball, the foul ball enters the foul ball passage 46 through the gap. It becomes. The foul ball passage 46 leads to the lower plate passage on the front door side, and the game ball that has entered the foul ball passage 46 is discharged to the lower plate 34 shown in FIG. As a result, the interference between the foul ball and the game ball to be launched next is suppressed.

In the resin base 50, a through hole is formed on the left side of the launch rail 112 (specifically, the side supporting the front door frame 14) through the resin base 50 in the front-rear direction, and a passage forming member is formed in this through hole. 121 is arranged. The passage forming member 121 is screwed to the resin base 50 and has an upper plate passage on the main body side and a lower plate passage on the main body side. The upstream side of the main body side upper plate passage and the main body side lower plate passage leads to a game ball distribution section described later. Further, the receiving portion of the passage forming unit 45 attached to the front door frame 14 is inserted below the passage forming member 121, and the front door side upper plate passage is arranged below the main body side upper plate passage. The front door side upper plate passage is arranged below the main body side lower plate passage.

In the resin base 50, below the passage forming member 121, an opening / closing member 124 for opening and closing the main body side upper plate passage and the main body side lower plate passage is attached. The opening / closing member 124 is rotatably supported in the front-rear direction by a support shaft provided at the lower end thereof, and an urging member that urges the front position to close the upper plate passage on the main body side and the lower plate passage on the main body side. It is provided. Therefore, when the front door frame 14 is opened with respect to the inner frame 13, the opening / closing member 124 rises as shown in the drawing and closes the main body side upper plate passage and the main body side lower plate passage. As a result, when the front door frame 14 is opened while the game balls are stored in the upper plate passage on the main body side or the lower plate passage on the main body side, the inconvenience that the stored balls are spilled can be prevented. On the other hand, when the front door frame 14 is closed, the opening / closing member 124 is pushed open against the urging force by the receiving portion provided in the passage forming unit 45 of the front door frame 14. In this state, the main body side upper plate passage and the front door side upper plate passage communicate with each other, and the main body side lower plate passage and the front door side lower plate passage communicate with each other.

Next, the back configuration of the inner frame 13 (resin base 50 and game board 60) will be described with reference to FIG.

Bearing metal fittings 132 are arranged vertically on the rotation base end side on the back surface of the resin base 50. Bearing portions are formed on the bearing fitting 132 so as to be separated from each other in the vertical direction, and the back pack unit 15 is rotatably attached to the inner frame 13 by these bearing portions.

A plurality of locking metal fittings 135 are provided on the back surface of the resin base 50, and the game board 60 is attached to the resin base 50 by these locking metal fittings 135 as described above. Here, the configuration of the back surface of the game board 60 will be described.

A display control device is attached to the variable display unit 67 arranged at the center of the game board 60 so as to cover the variable display unit 67 from behind (not shown). A notification / effect control device unit 142 is mounted behind the display control device so as to overlap the display control device. The notification / effect control device unit 142 is configured to include a notification / effect control device 143 and a mounting base 144, and the notification / effect control device 143 is mounted on the mounting base 144.

The notification / effect control device 143 includes a notification / effect control board that controls voice and lamp display and control of the display control device according to instructions from the main control device described later, and the notification / effect control board is made of a transparent resin material. It is configured to be housed in a substrate box 145 made of the above.

On the back surface of the game board 60, as shown in FIG. 3, a set plate 150 is provided below the variable display unit 67. The collecting plate 150 is provided with a game ball collection mechanism for collecting the game balls that have won in various winning openings, a detection mechanism for detecting the entry of the game balls into various winning openings, and the like.

Explaining the game ball collection mechanism, the collecting plate 150 is provided with collection passages individually corresponding to various entry portions such as the general winning opening 61. These collection passages descend from the ball entry portion along the back surface of the game board 60, and define a fall path for the game ball. The collection passages meet near the lower end of the game board 60, and all the game balls that have passed through the entry part such as the general winning opening 61 gather at the lower part of the game board 60 through the collection passage. It becomes. The outlet portion of each collection passage is open downward, and a discharge passage described later is provided on the front side thereof (specifically, below the game board 60). The game balls gathered below the game board 60 by the collection passage are led out to the discharge passage. The out port 68 is also connected to the discharge passage, and the game ball that has not won any prize is also led out to the discharge passage through the out port 68.

Explaining the detection mechanism, the collecting plate 150 is provided with detection sensors individually corresponding to various entry portions such as the general winning opening 61. These various detection sensors are arranged in the middle of each collection passage connected to the ball entry portion such as the general winning opening 61, and the game ball is in a state where the drop path of the game ball is defined in the collection passage. Detect passage. More specifically, each detection sensor detects the entry of the ball into the entry opening such as the general winning opening 61 by passing the game ball through the detection area provided in the middle of each collection passage. Specifically, a magnetic sensor that grasps a change in the magnetic field that occurs when the game ball passes through the detection region is adopted.

These various detection sensors are electrically connected to the main control device unit 160 (specifically, the main control device) provided on the back side of the game board 60, and the detection signals in these detection sensors are transmitted to the main control device. Is output. Hereinafter, the main controller unit 160 and its associated configuration will be described.

The main control device unit 160 is mounted on the game board 60 so as to cover the collecting plate 150 from the rear side, and is mounted on the game board 60 by a mounting base 161 made of synthetic resin and a main control device 162 mounted on the mounting base 161. It is configured. The main control device 162 includes a main control board having a function of controlling the main control of the game (main control circuit) and a function of monitoring the power supply (power failure monitoring circuit), and the main control board is made of a transparent resin material. It is configured to be housed in a substrate box 163 made of the above.

The substrate box 163 includes a box base (front case body) having a substantially rectangular parallelepiped shape and a box cover (back case body) that covers the opening of the box base. The box base and the box cover are unopenably connected by a sealing portion as a sealing means, whereby the substrate box 163 is sealed. A plurality of sealing portions are provided on the long side portion of the substrate box 163, and at least one of them is used to perform the sealing process.

Any configuration can be applied to the sealing part as long as the box base and the box cover cannot be opened, but the box base and the box cover can be separated by inserting a locking claw into the elongated hole constituting the sealing part. It is designed to be combined so that it cannot be opened. The sealing process by the sealing part prevents unauthorized opening after the sealing, and makes it possible to detect such a situation early and easily even if the unauthorized opening is performed, and once opened. It is possible to perform the sealing process again later. That is, the sealing process is performed by inserting the locking claw into at least one elongated hole among the plurality of sealing portions. When the board box 163 is opened, such as when a defect occurs in the housed main control board or when the main control board is inspected, the connecting portion between the sealing portion into which the locking claw is inserted and another sealing portion is connected. Disconnect. As a result, the box base of the board box 163 and the box cover are separated, and the main control board inside can be taken out. After that, when the sealing process is performed again, the locking claw is inserted into the elongated hole of the other sealing portion. If the history of opening the substrate box 163 is left in the substrate box 163, it can be easily found that the unauthorized opening has been performed by looking at the substrate box 163.

A plurality of bonding pieces are provided on one short side portion of the substrate box 163 so as to project laterally. These bonding pieces have a one-to-one correspondence with a plurality of bonded pieces formed on the mounting base 161, and the bonding pieces and the bonded pieces perform a sealing process between the substrate box 163 and the mounting base 161. Will be.

(Back pack unit 15)
Next, the back pack unit 15 will be described with reference to FIGS. 2 and 3.

As shown in FIG. 2, the inner frame 13 is covered from the rear by the back pack unit 15. The back pack unit 15 includes a back pack 201, and a payout mechanism unit 202, a discharge passage board, and a control device collecting unit 204 are attached to the back pack 201.

The back pack 201 is formed of a transparent synthetic resin, and as shown in FIG. 3, a base portion 211 to which the payout mechanism portion 202 and the like are attached, and a protective cover portion 212 protruding rearward of the pachinko machine 10 to form a substantially rectangular parallelepiped shape. And have. The protective cover portion 212 has a shape in which the left and right side surfaces and the upper surface are closed and only the lower surface is open, and has a size sufficient to surround at least the variable display unit 67.

The base portion 211 is provided with an external terminal plate 213 on the upper right portion thereof. Various output terminals are provided on the external terminal plate 213, and various signals are output to the management control device on the game hall side through these output terminals. Further, the base portion 211 is provided with a pair of upper and lower hooking pins at the right end when viewed from the rear of the pachinko machine 10, and the hooking pins are inserted into a bearing metal fitting 132 (specifically, a bearing portion) provided on the inner frame 13. By allowing the back pack unit 15, the back pack unit 15 is rotatably supported with respect to the inner frame 13. Further, the rotating tip portion of the base portion 211 is provided with a fastener for fastening to the hole to be fastened provided in the inner frame 13, and by fitting the fastener into the hole to be fastened. The back pack unit 15 is fixed to the inner frame 13.

The payout mechanism portion 202 is arranged on the base portion 211 so as to bypass the protective cover portion 212. The payout mechanism unit 202 is provided with a tank 221 arranged at the top of the back pack 201 and opened upward, and game balls supplied from the island equipment of the game hall are sequentially replenished to the tank 221. To. A tank rail that gently inclines toward the downstream side is connected below the tank 221 and a case rail that extends in the vertical direction is connected to the downstream side of the tank rail. A payout device 222 is provided at the most downstream portion of the case rail. The game balls paid out from the payout device 222 are supplied to the game ball distribution unit provided in the base portion 211 of the back pack 201 through the payout passage provided on the downstream side of the payout device 222.

The game ball distribution unit has a function of distributing the game balls paid out from the payout device 222 to any of the upper plate 33, the lower plate 34, or the discharge passage described later, and the inner opening is on the main body side described above. It is formed so as to lead to the upper plate 33 via the upper plate passage and the upper plate passage on the front door side, and to lead to the lower plate 34 via the lower plate passage on the main body side and the lower plate passage on the front door side. ..

As shown in FIG. 3, a discharge passage board and a control device collective unit 204 are attached to the lower end portion of the base portion 211 so as to sandwich the lower end portion back and forth. The discharge passage board 203 is formed with a discharge passage that is open to the rear on a surface facing the control device assembly unit 204, and the open portion of the discharge passage is closed by the control device assembly unit 204. The discharge passage is formed so as to discharge the game ball to the island equipment of the game hall, etc., and the game ball led out from the above-mentioned collection passage or the like to the discharge passage passes through the discharge passage to the outside of the pachinko machine 10. It is discharged.

The control device collective unit 204 has a horizontally long mounting base, and the payout control device 181 and the power supply / firing control device 191 are mounted on the mounting base. The payout control device 181 and the power supply / launch control device 191 are arranged so as to be stacked in the front-rear direction so that the payout control device 181 is behind the pachinko machine 10.

In the payout control device 181, a payout control board for controlling the payout device 222 is housed in the board box, and a state return switch provided on the payout control board projects out of the board box. For example, when the state return switch is pressed when a payout error such as ball clogging in the payout device 222 occurs, the ball clogging can be cleared.

In the power supply / launch control device 191, a power supply / launch control board is housed in a board box, and a predetermined power source required by various control devices and the like is generated and output by the board, and a game ball is launched by a player. The launch of the game ball is controlled according to the operation of the handle 41. Further, the power supply / emission control device 191 is provided with a RAM erase switch. This pachinko machine 10 has a storage and retention function for various data so that it can retain the state at the time of a power failure even in the unlikely event of a power failure and can return to the state at the time of a power failure when recovering from the power failure. It has become. Therefore, if the power is shut off in the normal procedure, for example, when the game hall is closed, the state before the shutoff is stored in memory, but if the power is turned on while pressing the RAM erase switch, the RAM data is initialized. It has become.

In the present embodiment, the configuration relating to the right-handed ball entry portion 63 and the variable winning devices 64 and 65 arranged on the right route is characteristic. Hereinafter, the various entry portions will be supplementarily described with reference to the schematic views of FIGS. 5 to 8. 5 is a front view of the upper variable winning device 64, FIG. 6 is a front view of the ball entry unit, FIG. 7 (a) is a perspective view of the right-side actuating ball entry unit 63 as viewed from the front side, and FIG. 7 (b) is the right side. FIG. 8 is a schematic view showing a passage structure in the actuated ball entry portion 63, and FIG. 8 is a schematic view showing a relationship between the passage length and the required passage time.

(Upper variable winning device 64)
The upper variable winning device 64 includes a housing 310 in which a ball passage 312 through which a game ball passes is formed, and the housing 310 bulges from the front surface of the game board 60 to the front of the game machine. It is attached to the game board 60. The housing 310 is made of a transparent synthetic resin, and a game ball or the like flowing down the ball passage 312 can be visually recognized through the outer shell portion of the housing 310.

In the portion of the housing 310 that bulges toward the front surface of the game board 60, the upper prize opening 311 that constitutes the entrance portion of the ball passage 312 is formed. The upper prize opening 311 faces the middle stream part (the part extending up and down) on the right route from the side (right side) of the game machine, and the upper prize opening 311 is the game ball on the right route. The shutter 315 is arranged so as to cover from the flow-down region side (right side).

The shutter 315 is pivotally supported so as to be rotatable parallel to the front surface of the game board 60, and is closed to prevent the inflow of the game ball into the upper prize opening 311 by rotating around the shaft support portion. It is configured to be displaced to a position and an open position that allows the inflow of game balls into the upper prize opening 311.

The drive unit (specifically, the solenoid) for the shutter 315 is connected to the main control device 162, and operates based on the drive signal from the main control device 162. The shutter 315 is configured to stand by in a closed position in a state where a drive signal is not output from the main control device 162 (non-excited state).

In the state where the shutter 315 is arranged in the open position (open state), about half of the flow area (flow path) in the middle stream portion of the right route is cut off by the shutter 315, and most of the game balls flowing down the right route. It is configured to flow into the upper variable winning device 64 (ball passage 312) through the upper large winning opening 311.

The ball passage 312 branches into a first branch passage 313 and a second branch passage 314 at an intermediate position thereof. A flow path switching member 316 capable of switching the flow destination of the game ball to the first branch passage 313 and the second branch passage 314 is arranged in this branch portion. The drive unit (specifically, the solenoid) for the flow path switching member 316 is connected to the main control device 162, and operates based on the drive signal from the main control device 162. The flow path switching member 316 is configured to stand by at a protruding position protruding into the ball passage 312 in a state where a drive signal is not output from the main control device 162 (non-excited state).

In the state where the flow path switching member 316 is arranged at the protruding position, the entrance portion of the second branch passage 314 is blocked by the flow path switching member 316. In this state, the inflow of the game balls that have reached the branch portion into the second branch passage 314 is avoided, and the game balls flow into the first branch passage 313.

When the drive unit drive signal for the flow path switching member 316 is output from the main control device 162, the flow path switching member 316 moves to a retracted position where the protrusion to the ball passage 312 is avoided, and the second branch passage 314 The entrance is opened. As a result, the inflow destination of the game ball is changed. In this state, the inflow of the game balls that have reached the branch portion into the first branch passage 313 is avoided, and the game balls flow into the second branch passage 314.

Here, the movement of the flow path switching member 316 is predetermined according to the type of jackpot result. Specifically, when a normal jackpot result described later is obtained, the flow path switching member 316 moves to the retracted position as the shutter 315 moves from the closed position to the open position, and the flow path switching member 316 moves. Immediately after that, it is specified to return to the protruding position. Specifically, the time required for the flow path switching member 316 to return to the protruding position is shorter than the time required for the game ball flowing into the upper prize winning opening 311 to reach the branch portion. Therefore, in the case of a normal jackpot result, the inflow to the second branch passage 314 is substantially avoided.

On the other hand, when the probability variation jackpot result described later is obtained, the flow path switching member 316 moves to the retracted position as the shutter 315 moves from the closed position to the open position, but the shutter 315 is closed thereafter. It is specified to wait in the protruding position until it returns to the position. Therefore, in the case of a probability variation jackpot result, most of the game balls that have flowed into the upper prize winning opening 311 will flow into the second branch passage 314.

An upstream side detection sensor 317 is arranged in a portion of the ball passage 312 that is upstream of the branch portion, and a portion that is downstream of the branch portion, specifically, the first branch passage 313 and the second. Downstream detection sensors 318 and 319 are arranged in the branch passage 314. The upstream side detection sensor 317 and the downstream side detection sensors 318 and 319 are connected to the main control device 162, and the main control device 162 uses the upper variable winning device 64 based on the detection information (detection signal) from the upstream side detection sensor 317. The presence or absence of a prize is specified, and if a prize is generated, a predetermined number of game balls are paid out. Further, the remaining state of the game ball is monitored based on the detection information (detection signal) from the upstream side detection sensor 317 and the downstream side detection sensors 318 and 319.

In the main control device 162 shown in the present embodiment, the ball enters the second branch passage 314 during the open / close execution mode based on the detection information (detection signal) from the downstream detection sensor 318 attached to the first branch passage 313. When it is specified that the occurrence has occurred, the lottery mode is switched from the low probability mode to the high probability mode after the opening / closing execution mode ends. Although the details will be described later, in the high probability mode, the probability of a jackpot result is higher than in the low probability mode, and the player can advance the game advantageously. Hereinafter, for convenience of explanation, the second branch passage 314 will be referred to as an "advantageous entry portion 314".

Of the game balls launched to the right route, most of the game balls that have passed through the upper variable winning device 64 head toward the ball entry unit 70 arranged on the downstream side of the upper variable winning device 64 on the right route. Become. The ball entry unit 70 is formed by integrating the right-side actuating ball entry unit 63 and the lower variable winning device 65 described above. Hereinafter, the ball entry unit 70 will be described with reference to FIG.

(Entering ball unit 70)
The ball entry unit 70 has a housing 320 in which a ball passage 321 forming a part of the right route (specifically, a downstream area) is formed, and the housing 320 bulges forward from the front surface of the game board 60. It is fixed to the game board 60 in the state. The ball passage 321 extends from the outside (right side) of the game area PE to the center side (left side). The entrance portion 321a of the ball entry unit 70 (ball passage 321) is formed in the upper right portion of the bulging portion of the housing 320 so as to face upward, and the exit portion of the ball entry unit 70 (ball passage 321) is formed in the lower left portion. 321b is formed so as to face left.

The outlet portion 321b is located directly below the lower actuating entry portion 62, and the game ball flowing out from the outlet portion 321b is guided below the lower actuating entry portion 62. As a result, entry of the game ball that has passed through the ball passage 321 into the lower actuating entry portion 62 is avoided.

The housing 320 is made of a transparent synthetic resin, and is configured so that the inside of the housing 320 (for example, a game ball flowing down the ball passage 321) can be visually recognized from the front of the game machine. Incidentally, in order to emphasize the sense of unity between the right-side actuating ball entry portion 63 and the lower variable winning device 65, the housing 320 may be made opaque so that the internal structure is difficult or impossible to see.

The ball passage 321 has a passage width, a passage height, and the like defined so that a plurality of game balls cannot pass through the same place at the same time, and is formed in a crank shape so that a step is generated in the middle position in the passage direction. Specifically, the ball passage 321 is composed of a horizontally long upstream passage portion 322 that constitutes an upstream portion of the ball passage 321 and is inclined downward toward the center side of the game machine, and a downstream portion of the ball passage 321. The horizontally long downstream passage portion 324, which is inclined downward to the center side, is provided so as to have a height difference so that the former is on the upper side and the latter is on the lower side. The 322 and the downstream passage portion 324 are connected by an intermediate passage portion 323 (corresponding to a "communication passage portion") extending in the vertical direction.

The right-side actuating ball entry portion 63 is attached to the upstream side passage portion 322. Specifically, the right operating port 63a of the right operating ball entry portion 63 is opened upward, and the upstream passage portion 322 is formed so as to cross above the right operating opening 63a. Regarding the electric accessory 71 attached to the right-side actuating ball entry unit 63, a shutter 331 that can slide back and forth (in the thickness direction of the game board 60) and an electric accessory drive unit 332 (solenoid) for the shutter 331 Must have. The electric accessory drive unit 332 is connected to the main control device 162 and operates based on the drive signal from the main control device 162. In the non-driving state (non-excited state) in which the drive signal is not output from the main control device 162, the shutter 331 is arranged in a closed position covering the right operating port 63a from above, and the drive signal is output to drive the electric accessory. When the unit 332 is in the driving state (excited state), it moves (backward) to an open position that does not cover the right operating port 63a.

Here, in the state where the shutter 331 is arranged in the closed position, the shutter 331 forms the bottom portion of the upstream passage portion 322, that is, the rolling surface of the game ball. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 7A, the housing 320 has an upstream bottom portion 322a forming a bottom portion on the upstream side of the right operating port 63a in the passage direction of the upstream side passage portion 322, and a right operating port 63a. A downstream bottom portion 322b that forms a bottom portion on the downstream side is provided, and a rolling surface of the game ball is formed by the upstream side bottom portion 322a, the downstream side bottom portion 322b, and the shutter 331. In the following description, the region where the flow path is formed (complemented) by the shutter 331 in the upstream passage portion 322, that is, the region where the shutter 331 is sandwiched between the upstream passage portion 322 and confronts the right operating port 63a 1 specific region SE1 ”(see FIG. 6).

The game ball that has reached the first specific region SE1 under the condition that the shutter 331 is arranged in the open position and the upstream passage portion 322 (specifically, the rolling surface) is cut off is in the passage direction of the upstream passage portion 322. It becomes difficult to move to, and the air flows into the right operating port 63a.

In the present embodiment, the first specific region SE1 is devised to decelerate the game ball passing through the first specific region SE1 to increase the chance of winning a prize in the right operating port 63a. Hereinafter, the device will be described with reference to FIG. 7B. In addition, in FIG. 6B, the path (flow path) through which the game ball passes is illustrated by using the alternate long and short dash line.

The front wall portion 335 and the rear wall portion 336 that partition the passage of the upstream side passage portion 322 in the housing 320 are provided with ridge portions 335a and 336a that project toward the first specific region SE1 side. .. The ridges 335a and 336a extend vertically so as to be orthogonal to the passage direction of the upstream passage portion 322. In the following description, the ridge portion 335a arranged on the front wall portion 335 is referred to as "front ridge portion 335a", and the ridge portion 336a arranged on the rear wall portion 336 is referred to as "rear ridge portion 336a". ".

The gap dimension D1 between the rear wall portion 336 and the front ridge portion 335a is set to be larger than the diameter dimension D of the game ball, and the gap dimension D2 between the front wall portion 335 and the rear ridge portion 336a is also set. It is set to be larger than the diameter dimension D of the game ball. A plurality of front ridges 335a (two in the present embodiment) are arranged in the passage direction (guidance direction) of the upstream passage 322 with a gap larger than the diameter dimension D of the game ball. A plurality of side ridges 336a (two in the present embodiment) are arranged in the passage direction (guidance direction) of the upstream passage 322 with a gap larger than the diameter dimension D of the game ball. By alternately arranging the front ridges 335a and the rear ridges 336a, the flow path of the game ball is devised so as to meander back and forth with respect to the passage direction of the upstream passage 322.

Here, when the amount of protrusion of the front ridge portion 335a, the amount of protrusion of the rear ridge portion 336a, and the diameter dimension D of the game ball are added, the width of the passage portion 322 is larger than that of the upstream passage portion 322. It is configured (D3 <D). As a result, the game ball is prevented from running through the first specific region SE1 so as to avoid a collision with the protrusions 335a and 336a.

The game ball passing through the upstream passage portion 322 collides with the ridge portions 335a and 336a. Due to such a collision, the moving speed of the game ball in the first specific region SE1 decreases (decelerates). That is, the first specific region SE1 of the upstream passage portion 322 functions as a deceleration section for forcibly decelerating the game ball. By decelerating the game ball passing through the upstream passage portion 322 in this way, the game ball passes through the first specific region SE1 as compared with the case where the ridge portions 335a and 336a are not provided. The time required for this is being extended.

The ridges 335a and 336a are arranged so as to be biased toward the intermediate passage portion 323 in the first specific region SE1. As a result, the game ball is decelerated at a position directly upstream of the intermediate passage portion 323.

In the present embodiment, the degree of deceleration is defined as follows. That is, the time required for the game ball to pass through the first specific area SE1 is calculated from the sum (1.2 sec) of the variable display time and the final display time of the pattern of the through gate display unit DS in the low frequency support mode. Is also short, and is specified to be longer than the firing cycle (0.6 sec) of the game ball. The details will be described later, but when the game ball is continuously fired to the right route during the low frequency support mode, the game ball flowing down the right route passes through the right-handed ball entry unit 63 and is on the lower side. The configuration is such that at least one ball is entered in most cases when the variable winning device 65 is reached and the right-side actuating entry portion 63 is in the open state.

The game ball that has not flowed into the right operating port 63a continues to move along the ball passage 321 as it is, and most of them reach the downstream passage portion 324. Here, with reference to FIG. 6 again, the downstream side passage portion 324 and the lower variable winning device 65 associated therewith will be described.

The lower grand prize opening 341 of the lower variable winning device 65 is open upward, and the downstream passage portion 324 is formed so as to cross above the lower grand winning opening 341. The lower variable winning device 65 includes a shutter 345 that can slide forward and backward (in the thickness direction of the game board 60) and a drive unit (solenoid) for the shutter 345. The drive unit for the shutter 345 is connected to the main control device 162 and operates based on the drive signal from the main control device 162. In the non-driving state (non-excited state) in which the drive signal is not output from the main control device 162, the shutter 345 is arranged in a closed position covering the lower prize opening 341 from above, and the drive signal is output to the drive unit. Is in the driving state (excited state) and moves (backward) to an open position that does not cover the lower prize winning opening 341.

Here, in the state where the shutter 345 is arranged in the closed position, the shutter 345 forms the bottom portion of the downstream passage portion 324, that is, the rolling surface of the game ball. Specifically, the housing 320 is provided with a downstream bottom portion that forms a bottom portion on the downstream side of the lower prize opening 341 in the passage direction of the downstream side passage portion 324, and the game ball is provided by these downstream side bottom portions and the shutter 345. The rolling surface of is formed. In the following description, the region where the flow path is formed (complemented) by the shutter 345 in the downstream passage portion 324, that is, the region where the shutter 345 is sandwiched by the downstream passage portion 324 and confronts the lower prize opening 341 is referred to as ". It is called "second specific area SE2".

The game ball that has reached the second specific region SE2 under the condition that the shutter 345 is arranged in the open position and the downstream passage portion 324 (specifically, the rolling surface) is cut off is in the passage direction of the downstream passage portion 324. It will be difficult to move to, and it will flow into the lower prize opening 341.

The second specific area SE2 is also provided with a deceleration section consisting of ridges 375a and 376a (see FIG. 8), but the specific configuration related to the deceleration section is the same as that of the first specific area SE1. Therefore, the explanation is used.

The above-mentioned intermediate passage portion 323 extends upward from the upstream end portion of the shutter 345. The left passage wall surface forming the intermediate passage portion 323 is located on the extension of the upstream passage portion 322, and the game ball passing through the upstream passage portion 322 is oriented by colliding with the left passage wall surface. Is changed, and the intermediate passage portion 323 is dropped toward the shutter 345.

An opening through which a game ball can pass is formed in the right passage wall surface forming the intermediate passage portion 323, and a part of the game ball passing through the intermediate passage portion 323 flows into the opening. A discharge passage is formed between the right-side actuating ball entry unit 63 and the lower variable winning device 65 to discharge the game ball flowing into the opening from the ball entry unit 70. A part of the game ball flowing down the ball passage 321 is discharged from the ball entry unit 70 through the opening → discharge passage before reaching the lower variable winning device 65 (shutter 345). Since the game ball passing through the discharge passage is guided to the back side of the game board 60 as it is, the movement to the out port 68 is avoided.

Next, with reference to FIG. 8, the relationship between the passage length of each part of the ball passage 321 and the passage time required for the game ball will be supplementarily described. FIG. 8 is a schematic view of the internal structure of the ball entry unit 70 as viewed from the front. In the following description, the passage length of the first specific area SE1 in the front view of the game machine is "passage length PL1", the time required to pass through the first specific area SE1 is "time required T1", and in the front view of the game machine. The passage length of the second specific area SE2 is "passage length PL3", the time required to pass through the second specific area SE2 is "time required T3", and between the first specific area SE1 and the second specific area SE2. The passage length is referred to as "passage length PL2", and the time required to pass between the first specific area SE1 and the second specific area SE2 is referred to as "required time T3".

Comparing the passage lengths PL1 to PL3, the passage lengths PL2 <passage length PL1 <passage length PL3 are longer in this order. As described above, the passage path of the game ball is meandering in the first specific region SE1 and the second specific region SE2, but even if this meandering portion is taken into consideration, the passage length PL2 <passage length PL1 <passage length It becomes longer in the order of PL3.

Then, as will be described in detail later, regarding the required time T1 in the first specific region SE1, the minimum interval time (0.7 sec) when the right-handed ball entry unit 63 is continuously opened in the low-frequency support mode. It is set to be longer and shorter than the minimum interval time (1.2 sec) when the right-handed ball entry unit 63 is continuously opened in the high-frequency support mode, and the required time in the second specific region SE2. T3 is set to be longer than the minimum interval time (1.7 sec) when the lower variable winning device 65 is continuously opened when the special hits are continuous.

For example, when the lower variable winning device 65 is in the open state, the game ball avoiding the right-side actuating ball entry unit 63 heads toward the lower variable winning device 65. By reducing the distance between the right-side actuating ball-entry unit 63 and the lower variable winning device 65, the game ball avoiding the right-side actuating ball-entry unit 63 gives the impression that it quickly heads toward the lower variable-winning device 65. It's getting easier. As a result, the expectation of winning the lower variable winning device 65 can be suitably increased.

(Electrical configuration of pachinko machine 10)
Next, the electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10 will be described with reference to the block diagram of FIG.

The MPU 602 is mounted on the main control board 601 provided in the main control device 162. The MPU 602 is a ROM 603 that stores various control programs and fixed value data executed by the MPU 602, and a memory for temporarily storing various data and the like when the control program stored in the ROM 603 is executed. It is an element in which a certain RAM 604, an interrupt circuit, a timer circuit, a data input / output circuit, various counter circuits as a random number generator, and the like are built-in. It should be noted that a configuration may be configured in which a part of the functions of the MPU 602, for example, the function of the ROM 603 and the function of the RAM 604, are provided as another element.

The MPU 602 is provided with an input port and an output port, respectively. A power failure monitoring board 605, a payout control device 181, various detection sensors, and the like provided in the main control device 162 are connected to the input side of the MPU 602. A power supply / emission control device 191 is connected to the power failure monitoring board 605, and power is supplied to the MPU 602 via the power failure monitoring board 605. Further, as a part of various detection sensors, a detection sensor 391a for the general winning opening 61, a detection sensor 391b for the lower actuating ball entry portion 62, a detection sensor 391c for the right side actuating ball entry section 63, and an upper variable winning device 64. Detection sensors 317 to 318, detection sensors 391d for the lower variable winning device 65, and detection sensors 391e for the through gate 66 are connected, and detection information from these various detection sensors 317 to 318, 391a to 391e ( Based on the detection signal), the MPU 602 of the main control device 162 executes a winning determination (ball entry determination) or the like for each ball entry unit. Further, in the MPU 602, a big hit generation lottery is executed based on winning a prize in the lower actuating ball entry portion 62 (lower actuating opening 62a) and the right actuating ball entry section 63 (right actuating opening 63a).

A power failure monitoring board 605, a payout control device 181 and a notification / effect control device 143 (specifically, a notification / effect control board 651) are connected to the output side of the MPU 602. A prize ball command is output to the payout control device 181 based on, for example, a winning determination result for the winning ball unit corresponding to the winning. In this case, the command information storage area 625 of the ROM 603 is referred to when the prize ball command is output. Then, when the winning to the general winning opening 61 is specified, the prize ball command corresponding to the payout of the three game balls is output, and when the winning to the upper prize opening 311 is specified, 14 games are played. A prize ball command corresponding to the payout of balls is output, and when a prize is specified for the lower large prize opening 341, a prize ball command corresponding to the payout of 10 game balls is output, and the prize ball command corresponding to the payout of 10 game balls is output to the lower operating port 62a. When a prize is specified, a prize ball command corresponding to the payout of four game balls is output, and when a prize is specified for the right operating port 63a, a prize ball command corresponding to the payout of one game ball is output. Is output.

Various commands such as a fluctuation start command, a type command, a fluctuation end command, an opening command, and an ending command are output to the notification / effect control device 143. In this case, the command information storage area 625 of the ROM 603 is referred to when outputting these various commands. Details of these various commands will be described later. It should be noted that each of the above commands is configured as information on a predetermined number of bytes, and includes various information as information on the predetermined number of bytes.

Further, on the output side of the MPU 602, an electric accessory drive unit 332 that drives the electric accessory 71 attached to the right-side actuating ball entry unit 63, a variable winning drive unit 451 that drives the shutter 315 of the upper variable winning device 64, and an upper side. A flow path switching drive unit 452 that drives the flow path switching member 316 of the variable winning device 64, a variable winning drive unit 461 that drives the shutter 345 of the lower variable winning device 65, a main display unit 81, and the like are connected. Various driver circuits are provided on the main control board 601. Through the driver circuits, the MPU 602 executes drive control of various drive units and the like.

That is, in the MPU 602, the variable winning drive unit 451 of the upper variable winning device 64 and the variable winning drive unit of the lower variable winning device 65 are opened and closed so that the upper prize opening 311 and the lower prize opening 341 are opened and closed in the open / close execution mode. The drive control of 461 is executed. Further, for example, at each game round, the display control of the lower operating port display unit DL and the right operating port display unit DR in the main display unit D of the main display unit 81 is executed in the MPU 602.

Further, an external terminal plate 213 is connected to the output side of the MPU 602. The external terminal plate 213 is provided with a jackpot signal output terminal or the like as an output terminal for outputting a signal at the time of state transition. For example, when the game result is a big hit result, the MPU 602 can output a big hit signal to the management control device on the game hall side through the big hit signal output terminal. Specifically, in the normal state, the LOW level signal is output from the jackpot signal output terminal, and when the jackpot result is obtained, the HI level signal is output. The output mode of this signal may be reversed.

The power failure monitoring board 605 relays between the main control board 601 and the power supply / emission control device 191 and monitors the DC stable 24 volt voltage, which is the maximum voltage output from the power supply / emission control device 191. The payout control device 181 controls the payout of prize balls and rental balls by the payout device 222 based on the prize ball command input from the main control device 162.

The power supply / launch control device 191 is connected to, for example, a commercial power supply (external power supply) in a playground or the like. Then, based on the external power supplied from the commercial power source, the operating power required for each of the main control board 601 and the payout control device 181 is generated, and the generated operating power is supplied through a predetermined power path. To do.

Further, the power supply / launch control device 191 is responsible for launch control of the game ball launch mechanism 110, and the game ball launch mechanism 110 (specifically, the solenoid 111) is driven when a predetermined launch condition is satisfied. More specifically, the power supply / launch control device 191 is connected to an operation level detection sensor and a touch sensor provided on the game ball launch handle 41. The operation level detection sensor is a sensor that detects the operation amount (rotation amount) of the game ball launch handle 41, and the launch intensity (rate of fire) of the game ball by the game ball launch mechanism 110 based on the information from the operation level detection sensor. ) Will be decided. The touch sensor is configured to output information when the player touches the game ball launch handle 41, and the power supply / launch control device 191 allows the player to touch the game ball launch handle 41 based on this information. It is configured so that it can be grasped whether or not it is. When it is determined that the player is touching the game ball launch handle 41 based on the information from the touch sensor, and the operation level detection sensor determines that the game ball launch handle 41 is being operated, the game ball is launched. Will be allowed.

The information from the touch sensor is transmitted to the main control device 162, the notification / effect control device 143, and the display control device 710 via the power supply / emission control device 191.

The notification / effect control device 143 includes a notification / effect control board 651 on which the MPU 652 is mounted, and the MPU 652 includes a ROM 653 that stores various control programs and fixed value data, and a control program stored in the ROM 653. RAM 654, which is a memory for temporarily storing various data and the like at the time of execution of the above, is built in.

The notification / effect control device 143 drives and controls the lamp units 26 to 28 and the speaker unit 29 provided on the front door frame 14 based on various commands input from the main control device 162, and also controls the display control device 710. It is a thing. Specifically, in the notification / effect control device 143, based on various commands input from the main control device 162, a variation display mode of the symbol in the symbol display device 75 and a stop display mode of the symbol to be finally stopped and displayed (for example, of the symbol). The type of combination) is determined, the presence / absence of reach occurrence, the content of the reach effect, and the like are determined, and the determined content is added to the above command and transferred to the display control device 710.

The display control device 710 has a display control board on which the MPU is mounted, and the MPU has a ROM that stores various control programs and fixed value data, and various data when executing the control program stored in the ROM. A RAM that is a memory for temporarily storing such data, a video display processor (VDP), a character ROM that stores image data, a video RAM that temporarily stores image data read from the character ROM, and the like are built-in. There is. The MPU executes display control of the variable display unit 67 (specifically, the symbol display device 75) based on the command input from the notification / effect control device 143.

Here, the display contents of the symbol display device 75 will be described. The display screen 75a of the symbol display device 75 is provided with a variable display area in which three symbol sequences of left, middle, and right are displayed. On the display screen 75a, the symbols in each of these symbol rows are variably displayed so as to scroll in a predetermined direction (for example, from top to bottom) with periodicity.

Although the details will be described later, in each variable display area, one symbol is stopped and displayed for each symbol row, and a total of three symbols are stopped and displayed. For example, if the variable display stops in the order of left symbol column → right symbol column → middle symbol column, and the variable display of all symbol columns ends with a predetermined symbol combination formed on the effective line, the jackpot result or special hit result A video or the like showing the transition to the special gaming state corresponding to is displayed.

In view of the fact that the variable display of each symbol row is stopped as described above, the left symbol row is the first symbol row (or the first symbol row), and the right symbol row is the second symbol row (or the second symbol row). The row) and the middle symbol row can be referred to as a third symbol row (or a third symbol row).

Incidentally, the mode of variable display of symbols in the symbol display device 75 is not limited to the above, and is arbitrary, such as the number of symbol rows, the direction of variable display of symbols in the symbol rows, the number of symbols in each symbol row, and the like. Can be changed as appropriate. For example, a plurality of symbol rows may be set to be arranged vertically, and the direction of the variation display of the symbols in the symbol row may be set to be horizontal.

A hold display area is set at the bottom of the display screen 75a. The hold display area is a display of the number of holds for the upper operation port, in which the same number of unit hold display areas as the maximum number of holds when the game ball wins the lower operation port 62a are arranged in the left-right direction. Depending on the area and the holding number display area for the lower working opening, the unit holding display area of the same number as the maximum number of holdings when the game ball wins the right operating opening 63a is arranged in the left-right direction. It is configured.

Specifically, when the game ball wins the lower operating port 62a, the maximum number of holdings is 4, and in correspondence with this, the holding number display area for the lower operating opening is the first unit holding display area. , The second unit hold display area, the third unit hold display area, and the fourth unit hold display area are set. Further, when the game ball wins the right operating port 63a, the maximum number of holdings is 4, and correspondingly, the holding number display area for the right operating port includes the first unit holding display area and the second unit. The hold display area, the third unit hold display area, and the fourth unit hold display area are set.

For example, when the number of holdings is one when the game ball wins in the lower operating port 62a, a predetermined holding image is displayed only in the first unit holding display area, and the game ball is moved to the lower operating port 62a. When the number of holdings is four when a prize is won, a predetermined holding image is displayed in all of the first unit holding display area to the fourth unit holding display area.

(About various counters)
Next, with reference to the schematic diagram of FIG. 10, the configuration related to the operation of the pachinko machine 10 configured as described above will be described.

The MPU 602 uses various counter information during the game to perform a lottery to shift to a special game state (open / close execution mode), set the display of the main display unit 81 (main display unit D), set the symbol display of the symbol display device 75, and the like. Specifically, the hit random number counter C1 used for the lottery for the occurrence of big hits and special hits, the hit type counter C2 used for determining the type when a big hit result is obtained, and the symbol display. Generation of reach display when the device 75 disengages and fluctuates The reach random number counter C3 used for lottery, the random number initial value counter CINI used for setting the initial value of the hit random number counter C1, and the display for the ball entry part of the main display unit 81. It is decided to use the variation type counter CS that determines the variation display time of the symbol in the unit and the variation display time of the symbol in the symbol display device 75. Further, an open random number counter C4 used for a lottery as to whether or not to open the electric accessory 71 attached to the right-side actuating ball entry unit 63 is used.

Each of the counters C1 to C4, CINI, and CS is a loop counter in which 1 is added to the previous value each time the counter is updated, and the counter returns to 0 after reaching the maximum value. Each counter is updated at short intervals, and the updated value is appropriately stored in the lottery counter buffer 631 set in a predetermined area of the RAM 604.

The RAM 604 includes a lower working port holding area Ra, a right working port holding area Rb, a first execution area AE1 for the lower working port holding area Ra, and a second execution area Rb for the right working port holding area Rb. A hold ball storage area 632 including an area AE2 and a total hold number storage area is provided. Then, in the reserved ball storage area 632, the values of the hit random number counter C1, the hit type counter C2, and the reach random number counter C3 are time-series in accordance with the winning history of the game ball to the lower operating port 62a or the right operating port 63a. It is designed to be stored as a target.

More specifically, the hit random number counter C1 is configured to add 1 in order within the range of, for example, "0" to "599", reach the maximum value (that is, 599), and then return to 0. In particular, when the hit random number counter C1 makes one round, the value of the random number initial value counter CINI at that time is read as the initial value of the hit random number counter C1. The random number initial value counter CINI is a loop counter similar to the hit random number counter C1 (value = "0" to "599"). The hit random number counter C1 is periodically updated, and is stored in the reserved ball storage area 632 of the RAM 604 at the timing when the game ball wins the lower operating port 62a or the right operating port 63a. More specifically, it is stored in the lower operating port holding area Ra of the RAM 604 when the game ball wins in the lower operating port 62a, and is stored in the right operating port holding area Rb of the RAM 604 when the game ball wins in the right operating port 63a. Stored in.

The value of the random number that wins the big hit and the value of the random number that wins the special hit are stored as a win / loss table (win / fail information group) in the win / fail table storage area 621 as the win / loss information group storage means in the ROM 603. Here, the contents of the pass / fail table will be described with reference to the schematic views of FIGS. 11 and 12. As the winning / failing table, a winning / failing table for the lower operating port 62a (see FIG. 11) and a winning / failing table for the right operating port 63a (see FIG. 12) are provided, and in a lottery based on entering the ball into the lower operating port 62a. Refers to the winning / failing table for the lower operating port 62a, and refers to the winning / failing table for the right operating port 63a in the lottery based on the entry of the ball into the right operating port 63a.

(Win / fail table for lower operating port)
In the winning / failing table for the lower operating port 62a, which is referred to when the lottery mode is the low probability mode, as shown in FIG. 11A, the random number values corresponding to the jackpot results are "7" and " There are two of "507". That is, among the values of the hit random number counters C1 from "0" to "599", "7" and "507" correspond to the jackpot results, and the probability of winning the jackpot is 2/600. The low-probability mode-compatible hit / fail table for the lower operating port 62a does not have a random number value corresponding to the special hit result, and the lottery result is out of order and corresponds to the result except for the random number value that is the big hit result. There is.

In the hit / fail table for the lower operating port 62a, which is referred to when the lottery mode is the high probability mode, as shown in FIG. 11 (b), the random number values corresponding to the jackpot results are "7", " There are six pieces, "107", "207", "307", "407", and "507". That is, among the values of the hit random number counter C1 from "0" to "599", "7", "107", "207", "307", "407", and "507" correspond to the jackpot results. The probability of winning a jackpot is 6/600. The high-probability mode-compatible hit / fail table for the lower operating port 62a is not provided with a random number value corresponding to the special hit result, and the lottery result is out of order and corresponds to the result except for the random number value that is the big hit result. There is.

(Win / fail table for right operating port)
In the winning / failing table for the right operating port 63a, which is referred to when the lottery mode is the low probability mode, as shown in FIG. 12A, the random number values corresponding to the jackpot results are "7" and " There are two of "507". That is, among the values of the hit random number counter C1 of "0 to 599", "7" and "507" correspond to the jackpot result, and the probability of winning the jackpot is 2/600. It is the same as the pass / fail table for. However, in the hit / fail table for the right operating port 63a, "1", "2", "3" ... "597", "598", "599" correspond to the special hit result, and the special hit The resulting probability is 593/600. In addition, other than the value of the random number that becomes the big hit result and the value of the random number that becomes the special hit result, in detail, the lottery results are out of the results for "4", "104", "204", "404", and "504". It is configured as follows.

In the winning / failing table for the right operating port 63a, which is referred to when the lottery mode is in the high probability mode, as shown in FIG. 12B, the random number values corresponding to the jackpot results are "7", " There are six pieces, "107", "207", "307", "407", and "507". That is, among the values of the hit random number counter C1 from "0" to "599", "7", "107", "207", "307", "407", and "507" correspond to the jackpot results. The probability of winning a jackpot is 6/600, which is the same as the hit / fail table for the lower operating port 62a. However, in the hit / fail table for the right operating port 63a, "1", "2", "3" ... "597", "598", "599" correspond to the special hit result, and the special hit The resulting probability is 593/600. In addition to the value of the random number that is the big hit result and the value of the random number that is the special hit result, in detail, "404" is configured so that the lottery result is out of order.

As described above, regardless of which of the lower operating port 62a and the right operating port 63a is won, the probability of a big hit result is common. However, when the lower operating port 62a and the right operating port 63a are compared, the possibility of a special hit result is set higher for the right operating port 63a. That is, the right operating port 63a is given preferential treatment over the lower operating port 62a when compared with the probability that some balls can be expected.

Returning to the description of FIG. 10, the hit type counter C2 is incremented by 1 in order within the range of "0" to "99", reaches the maximum value (that is, "99"), and then returns to 0. There is. The hit type counter C2 is periodically updated, and is stored in the reserved ball storage area 632 of the RAM 604 at the timing when the game ball wins the lower operating port 62a or the right operating port 63a. More specifically, it is stored in the lower operating port holding area Ra of the RAM 604 when the game ball wins in the lower operating port 62a, and is stored in the right operating port holding area Rb of the RAM 604 when the game ball wins in the right operating port 63a. Stored in.

The distribution destination of the game result with respect to the hit type counter C2 is stored as a distribution table (distribution information group) in the distribution table storage area 622 as the distribution information group storage means in the ROM 603. In the present embodiment, the type of the jackpot result is determined with reference to the hit type counter C2 and the distribution table. As the jackpot results, 2R normal jackpot result, 8R normal jackpot result, 2R probability variation jackpot result, 6R probability variation jackpot result A, 6R probability variation jackpot result B, 6R probability variation jackpot result C, 6R probability variation jackpot result D, 6R probability variation jackpot result E, The 8R probability variation jackpot result, the 16R probability variation jackpot result A, and the 16R probability variation jackpot result B are provided.

(Distribution table for lower operating port)
As shown in FIG. 13 (a), in the lower working port distribution table, a total of 50 of the values of the hit type counters C2 of "0" to "99", "0" to "49", are 8R normal jackpots. Corresponding to the result, a total of 10 pieces of "50" to "59" correspond to the 6R probability variation jackpot result A, and a total of 8 pieces of "60" to "67" correspond to the 6R probability variation jackpot result B. A total of 6 pieces from "68" to "73" correspond to the 6R probability variation jackpot result C, and a total of 4 pieces from "74" to "77" correspond to the 6R probability variation jackpot result D. A total of 2 pieces from "78" to "79" correspond to the 6R probability variation jackpot result E, and a total of 18 pieces from "80" to "97" correspond to the 16R probability variation jackpot result A, and "98" to "98" to " A total of two "99" correspond to the 16R probability variation jackpot result B.

(Distribution table for right operating port)
As shown in FIG. 13 (b), in the distribution table for the right operating port, a total of 35 of the values of the hit type counters C2 of "0" to "99", "0" to "34", are 2R normal jackpots. Corresponding to the result, a total of 5 pieces of "35" to "39" correspond to the 2R probability variation jackpot result, and a total of 10 pieces of "40" to "49" correspond to the 6R probability variation jackpot result A. A total of four "50" to "53" correspond to the 6R probability variation jackpot result B, and a total of three "54" to "56" correspond to the 6R probability variation jackpot result C, "57". "To" 58 "corresponds to the 6R probability variation jackpot result D," 59 "corresponds to the 6R probability variation jackpot result E, and" 60 "to" 95 "corresponds to the 16R probability variation jackpot result A. A total of four "96" to "99" correspond to the 16R probability variation jackpot result B.

Returning to the description of FIG. 10 again, the reach random number counter C3 is configured to be incremented by 1 in order within the range of 0 to 238, and return to 0 after reaching the maximum value (that is, 238). The reach random number counter C3 is periodically updated, and is stored in the reserved ball storage area 632 of the RAM 604 at the timing when the game ball wins the lower operating port 62a or the right operating port 63a. More specifically, it is stored in the lower operating port holding area Ra of the RAM 604 when the game ball wins in the lower operating port 62a, and is stored in the right operating port holding area Rb of the RAM 604 when the game ball wins in the right operating port 63a. Stored in. Then, it is decided whether or not to generate the reach display (reach state) based on the reach table stored in the reach table storage area of the ROM 603.

Here, the reach display is provided with a symbol display device 75 capable of variable display (or variable display) of a symbol (picture), and the game result fluctuates in the game times when the game result corresponds to the open / close execution mode. In a gaming machine in which the stop display result after display can be a special display result, after the variable display (or variable display) of the symbol (picture) on the symbol display device 75 is started, before the stop display result is derived and displayed. It refers to a display state for making the player think that it is a variable display state that tends to be the special display result.

In other words, by stopping and displaying some of the symbols among the plurality of symbol rows displayed on the display screen 75a of the symbol display device 75, a combination of symbols corresponding to the occurrence of the open / close execution mode is established. It is a display state in which a combination of possible reach symbols is displayed, and in that state, the symbols are variablely displayed in the remaining symbol rows.

More specifically, as a pre-stage for ending the variable display of the symbol, a combination of symbols corresponding to the occurrence of the open / close execution mode is established on the preset effective line in the display screen 75a of the symbol display device 75. A reach line is formed by stopping and displaying a combination of possible reach symbols, and in a situation where the reach line is formed, a variable display of symbols is performed by the final stop symbol sequence.

Explaining the display contents on the display screen 75a in more detail, in the state where the variation display of the symbol is first completed in the right symbol column and then the variation display of the symbol is completed in the left symbol column, one of the effective lines is hit and the symbol is hit. A reach line is formed by stopping and displaying the main symbols with numbers that make up the combination, and in a situation where the reach line is formed, a variable display of the symbols is performed in the middle symbol row to reach. It becomes a display. Then, when a big hit occurs, the main symbols forming the reach line and the main symbols with the numbers constituting the combination of the hit symbols are stopped and displayed on the reach line, and the fluctuation display of the symbols in the middle symbol row is displayed. Is terminated.

Further, in the reach display, in the state where the combination of reach symbols is displayed as described above, the remaining symbol strings are displayed in a variable manner, and a predetermined character or the like is displayed as a moving image on the background screen to reach the reach. Includes those that perform an effect, and those that perform a reach effect by displaying a predetermined character or the like as a moving image on substantially the entire display screen 75a after reducing or hiding the combination of reach symbols. In addition, when the reach display is performed or before the reach display, it is determined whether or not to perform the notice display using a predetermined image such as a predetermined character by using the reach random number counter C3 or another counter. You may.

The variation type counter CS is configured to be incremented by 1 in order in the range of 0 to 198, and returns to 0 after reaching the maximum value (that is, 198). The variation type counter CS includes the variation display time of the symbol in the lower operating port display unit DL and the right operating port display unit DR of the main display unit 81 (main display unit D) and the variation display time of the symbol in the symbol display device 75. And are used in determining in MPU 602. The variation type counter CS is updated once every time the normal process described later is executed once, and is repeatedly updated even within the remaining time in the normal process. Then, the buffer value of the variation type counter CS is acquired when the variation pattern is determined at the start of the variation display in the display unit DL for the lower operating port and the display unit DR for the right operating port (at the start of the variation of the symbol by the symbol display device 75). To.

The open random number counter C4 for the electric accessory 71 is configured to, for example, add 1 in order within the range of 0 to 249, reach a maximum value, and then return to 0. The open random number counter C4 is periodically updated and stored in the electric service storage area 633 of the RAM 604 at the timing when the game ball wins the through gate 66. Then, at a predetermined timing, the electric accessory 71 is referred to by the value of the stored open random number counter C4 and the support lottery table (win / fail information group) stored in the pass / fail table storage area 621 of the ROM 603. An open lottery (support lottery) is held to determine whether or not to control the open state. The probability of winning support in high-frequency support mode (detailed 249/250) is higher than the probability of winning support in low-frequency support mode (detailed 248/250), and high-frequency support Mode is preferred.

(About various processes executed by MPU 602 of the main controller 162)
Next, the timer interrupt processing and the normal processing executed in order to advance the game in each game time by the MPU 602 in the main control device 162 will be described. In the MPU 602, in addition to the timer interrupt processing and the normal processing, the main processing activated when the power is turned on and the NMI interrupt processing activated by inputting a power failure signal to the NMI terminal (non-maskable terminal) are executed. , The description of these processes will be omitted.

(Timer interrupt processing)
First, the timer interrupt processing will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. This process is started periodically (for example, at a cycle of 2 msec) by the MPU 602.

In step S101, reading processing of various detection sensors (for example, the detection sensors 317 to 319, 391a to 391e) is executed. That is, the state of various detection sensors connected to the main control device 162 is read, the state of the detection sensor (detection information from the detection sensor) is determined, and the detection information (winning detection information) is saved. For example, when it is determined that a prize has been generated in the lower operating port 62a, the winning detection flag for the lower operating port is stored in the various flag storage areas 635 of the RAM 604, and it is determined that a prize has been generated in the right operating port 63a. If this is the case, the winning detection flags for the right operating port are stored in the various flag storage areas 635, and if it is determined that a prize has been generated in the upper variable winning device 64, the various flag storage areas 635 are used for the upper large winning opening. When it is determined that a prize has been generated in the advantageous ball portion 314, the prize detection flag for the advantageous ball section is stored in the various flag storage areas 635, and the lower variable winning device 65 is stored. When it is determined that a prize has been generated, the prize detection flag for the lower prize opening is stored in the various flag storage areas 635.

After that, in step S102, the random number initial value counter CINI is updated. Specifically, the random number initial value counter CINI is incremented by 1 and cleared to 0 when the counter value reaches the maximum value. Then, the updated value of the random number initial value counter CINI is stored in the corresponding buffer area of the RAM 604.

In the following step S103, the hit random number counter C1, the hit type counter C2, the reach random number counter C3, and the open random number counter C4 are updated. Specifically, the hit random number counter C1, the hit type counter C2, the reach random number counter C3, and the open random number counter C4 are each incremented by 1, and when the counter values reach the maximum value, they are cleared to 0, respectively. Then, the updated values of the counters C1 to C4 are stored in the corresponding buffer area of the RAM 604.

After that, in step S104, the winning process for the through port accompanying the winning of the through gate 66 is executed, and in the following step S105, the winning process for the operating port accompanying the winning of the operating ports 62a and 63a is executed. Terminates timer interrupt processing.

(Prize processing for through)
In the through winning process in step S104, first, it is determined whether or not the game ball has won the through gate 66. When the game ball wins the through gate 66 and the character holding memory number SN is less than the upper limit (specifically, 4), the character holding memory number SN is incremented by 1 and updated in step S103 above. The value of the open random number counter C4 is stored in the first free storage area of the electric service storage area 633 of the RAM 604. After that, the main winning process is completed.

If it is determined that the game ball has not won the through gate 66, or if it is determined that the game ball has won the through gate 66 but the character holding memory number SN has reached the upper limit, the value of the open random number counter C4 is set. The main winning process is completed without storing.

In the through winning process, the display control process of the through gate hold number display unit SS of the main display unit 81 is executed. Specifically, the light emission control process is executed for the through-gate hold number display unit SS composed of four light emitters (LEDs) so that the same number of light emitters as the accessory hold storage number SN are lit.

(Prize processing for operating port)
In the winning process for the operating port, first, whether or not the game ball has won (starting winning) in the lower operating ball entry portion 62 (lower operating port 62a) is set in the various flag storage areas 635 of the RAM 604 for the lower operating port. Judgment is made based on whether or not the winning detection flag is stored. When it is determined that the winning detection flag is stored, that is, when the game ball receives a detection signal indicating that a winning has occurred in the lower operating entry portion 62 (lower operating port 62a), the payout control is performed. A prize ball command for paying out four game balls is set in the device 181. Then, an external signal setting process is performed so as to output information indicating that the game ball has won a prize to the lower operating ball entry unit 62 (lower operating port 62a) to the hall computer HC on the game hall side. As a result, the hall computer HC grasps that a prize has been generated for the lower operating ball entry portion 62 (lower operating port 62a).

After that, the value (starting hold storage number) stored in the hold number storage area of the hold area Ra for the lower operation port is updated (1 addition). Subsequently, information acquisition processing for storing each value of the hit random number counter C1, the hit type counter C2, and the reach random number counter C3 is performed, and the main winning process is completed.

On the other hand, when the winning detection flag for the lower operating port is not stored in the various flag storage areas 635 of the RAM 604 and the winning detection flag for the right operating port is stored, the payout control device 181 stores the winning detection flag. Set a prize ball command to pay out one game ball. The set prize ball command is transmitted to the payout control device 181 in the external output process of the normal process described later.

Subsequently, an external signal setting process is performed so that information indicating that the game ball has won a prize is output to the hall computer HC on the game hall side to the right side operating ball entry unit 63 (right operating port 63a). As a result, the hall computer HC grasps that a prize has been generated for the right-handed ball entry unit 63 (right-handed opening 63a).

After that, the value (starting hold storage number) stored in the hold number storage area of the hold area Rb for the right operating port is updated (1 addition). Subsequently, information acquisition processing for storing each value of the hit random number counter C1, the hit type counter C2, and the reach random number counter C3 is performed, and the main winning process is completed.

If the game ball does not win in any of the lower actuating ball entry section 62 and the right actuating ball entry section 63, the main winning process is terminated as it is.

(Normal processing)
Next, the flow of normal processing will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. The normal process is a process that is started after the main process that is started when the power is turned on is executed, and in the normal process, the main process of the game is executed. As an outline, the processes of steps S201 to S207 are executed as periodic processes having a cycle of 4 msec, and the counter update processes of steps S209 and S210 are executed in the remaining time.

In the normal processing, in step S201, output data such as a command set in the timer interrupt processing or the previous normal processing is transmitted to each control device on the sub side. Specifically, the presence or absence of the prize ball command is determined, and if the prize ball command is set, it is transmitted to the payout control device 181. In addition, if a command for production such as a command corresponding to the production for game rounds such as a fluctuation start command, a type command, and a fluctuation end command or a command corresponding to the production for open / close execution mode is set, it is notified. -Transmit to the effect control device 143. Further, the output is set for the external terminal plate 213 according to the information set in the external output buffer of the RAM 604.

Next, in step S202, the variation type counter CS is updated. Specifically, the fluctuation type counter CS is incremented by 1, and when the counter value reaches the maximum value, the counter value is cleared to 0. Then, the update value of the variation type counter CS is stored in the corresponding buffer area of the RAM 604.

In the following step S203, a game time control process for advancing the game of each game time is executed. In this game time control process, a hit / fail judgment such as a big hit and a distribution judgment of a big hit type are performed, a change display of a symbol is set by the symbol display device 75, and a display for an operation port in the main display unit 81 (main display unit D). Controls the display of DL, DR, etc.

After that, in step S204, a game state transition process for shifting the game state is executed. Although the details will be described later, the game state shifts to the open / close execution mode, the high probability mode, and the like by this game state transition process.

In the following step S205, an electric service support process for driving and controlling the electric accessory 71 attached to the right-side actuating ball entry unit 63 is executed. In this electric service support process, it is determined whether or not to open the electric accessory 71 using the information stored in the electric service storage area of the RAM 604, and the electric accessory 71 is opened / closed and through. Controls the display of the gate display unit DS.

In the following step S206, the game ball launch control process is executed. In the game ball launch control process, a predetermined launch condition is provided on the condition that the launch permission signal output from the power supply / launch control device 191 is input based on the launch operation being performed on the game ball launch handle 41. The solenoid 111 of the game ball launching mechanism 110 is excited once during the firing period (0.6 sec in the present embodiment). As a result, the game ball is launched toward the game area PE. That is, when an irregular hit such as a so-called stop hit is not performed, the launch of the game ball is repeated at a predetermined cycle on condition that the launch operation is performed.

In the following step S207, it is determined whether or not the power failure flag is set in the various flag storage areas 635 of the RAM 604. The power failure flag is a flag that is set when the occurrence of a power failure is confirmed on the power failure monitoring board 605 and a power failure signal is input from the power failure monitoring board 605 to the NMI terminal of the MPU 602, and is erased in the next main process.

If the power failure flag is not set, it means that the last processing of the plurality of processes to be repeatedly executed has been completed. Therefore, whether or not the execution timing of the next normal processing has been reached in step S208, that is, the previous normal processing It is determined whether or not a predetermined time (4 msec in this embodiment) has elapsed from the start of the process. Then, the random number initial value counter CINI and the variation type counter CS are repeatedly updated within the remaining time until the execution timing of the next normal process is reached. That is, the random number initial value counter CINI is updated in step S209, and the variation type counter CS is updated in step S210.

Here, since the execution time of each process of steps S201 to S206 changes according to the state of the game, the remaining time until the execution timing of the next normal process is not constant and fluctuates. Therefore, by repeatedly updating the random number initial value counter CINI using the remaining time, the random number initial value counter CINI (that is, the initial value of the hit random number counter C1) can be randomly updated, and similarly. The variable type counter CS can also be updated at random.

On the other hand, if it is determined in step S207 that the power failure flag is set, it means that the power supply has been cut off, so the power failure processing after step S211 is executed. Specifically, after prohibiting the occurrence of timer interrupt processing in step S211, calculating and saving the RAM determination value in step S212, and prohibiting access to RAM 604 in step S213, the power supply is completely shut off. And continue the infinite loop until the process cannot be executed.

(Game times control process)
Here, with reference to the flowcharts of FIGS. 16 to 20, the game rotation control process of step S203 will be supplementarily described. As shown in FIG. 16, in the game rotation control process shown in the present embodiment, first, in step S301, it is determined whether or not the game is in the special game state (open / close execution mode). Specifically, it is determined whether or not the open / close execution mode flag (open / close execution state information) is stored (stored) in the open / close execution mode flag storage area (open / close execution state information storage means) in the various flag storage areas 635 of the RAM 604. To do. The open / close execution mode flag is stored when the game state is shifted to the open / close execution mode in the game state transition process described later, and is deleted when the open / close execution mode is terminated in the game state transition process.

If an affirmative determination is made in step S301, the game round control process is terminated as it is. If a negative determination is made in step S301, the game rotation control process for the game rotation related to the winning of the lower operating ball entry portion 62 (lower operating port 62a) in step S302 (game rotation control corresponding to the lower operating port). Process, lower actuating port control process) is executed, and in step S303, the game turn control process (game turn control for the right actuating port) related to winning a prize in the right actuating entry unit 63 (right actuating port 63a). After executing the process (control process for the right operating port), the game round control process is terminated. The basic flow of these two control processes is the same. Hereinafter, the control process for the lower operating port will be described with reference to FIGS. 17 and 18, and then the control process for the lower operating port will be mainly referred to with reference to FIGS. 19 and 20 for the right operating port. The control process will be described.

(Control processing for lower operating port)
As shown in FIG. 17, in the lower operation port control process, first, in step S401, it is determined whether or not the game rotation related to the lower operation port 62a is in progress. Specifically, it is determined whether or not the display unit DL for the lower operating port of the main display unit 81 is in the variable display to the final display, that is, whether or not the game for one game is being executed. In this determination, the game rotation flag (game rotation information) for the lower operating port is stored (stored) in the game rotation flag storage area (variation display information storage means) in the various flag storage areas 635 of the RAM 604. This is done by determining whether or not it is. The game rotation flag for the lower operating port is stored when the variable display is started on the lower operating port display unit DL, and is deleted when the pattern is stopped and the final display is completed.

If the game is not in progress, a negative determination is made in step S401, and the process proceeds to step S402. In step S402, it is determined whether or not the game is being rotated according to the right operating port 63a. Specifically, it is determined whether or not the display unit DR for the right operating port of the main display unit 81 is in the variable display to the final display, that is, whether or not the game for one game is being executed. In this determination, the game rotation flag (variation display information) for the right operating port is stored (stored) in the game rotation flag storage area (variation display information storage means) in the various flag storage areas 635 of the RAM 604. This is done by determining whether or not it is. The game rotation flag for the right operating port is stored when the variable display is started on the display unit DR for the right operating port, and the pattern etc. corresponding to the lottery result (game result) is stopped and displayed, and the confirmation display ends. Will be erased if you do.

If an affirmative determination is made in step S402, the process proceeds to step S403. In step S403, it is determined whether or not it is the timing to stop and display the pattern corresponding to the big hit result or the special hit result in the game round related to the right operating port 63a. If an affirmative determination is made in step S403, the control process for the lower working port is terminated as it is. If a negative determination is made in step S403 or step S402, the process proceeds to step S404. In step S404, the total number of hold storage areas of the hold ball storage area 632 is referred to, and the number of hold information for the lower operating port, which is the number of hold information stored on hold, is CRN (specifically, the hold information related to the lower operation port 62a). It is determined whether or not the number) is "0". When the reserved storage number CRN for the lower operating port is "0", the game times control process is terminated as it is. On the other hand, if the reserved storage number CRN for the lower operating port is not "0", the process proceeds to step S405. In step S405, data setting processing is performed.

In the data setting process of the lower operating port 62a, first, the reserved storage number CRN for the lower operating port is decremented by 1. After that, the data stored in the first area of the lower operating port holding area Ra is moved to the first execution area AE1 (see FIG. 10), and the data stored in the storage area of the lower operating port holding area Ra is shifted. Execute the process to make it.

This data shift process is a process of shifting the data stored in the first to fourth areas in order to the lower area side, and the data in the first area is cleared and the second area → the first area, The data in each area is shifted in the order of the third area → the second area, the fourth area → the third area, and so on. Then, one LED that is lit is turned off at the hold number display unit for the lower operating port. In this extinguishing process, contrary to the lighting process executed when the hold information is added, the LEDs of the hold number display unit SL for the lower operating port are turned off in order from the lower side.

After performing the data setting process described in detail above, in step S406, the variation display for the lower operating port for starting the variation display of the pattern on the display unit DL for the lower operation port and the variation display of the symbol on the symbol display device 75. After executing the start process (variation start process for the lower operating port), the game turn control process is terminated. Here, with reference to FIG. 18, the variation start processing for the lower working port of step S406 will be described.

(Variation start processing for lower operating port)
In the fluctuation start processing for the lower operating port, first, the hit / fail determination processing is executed in step S501. In the hit / fail determination process, the hit / fail determination information among the information stored in the first execution area AE1, that is, the numerical information acquired from the hit random number counter C1, is the jackpot numerical value described above with reference to the hit / miss table for the lower operating port. Determine if it matches the information. If the determination result in step S501 is a jackpot result, an affirmative determination is made in step S502 and the process proceeds to step S503.

In step S503, the type determination process is executed. In the type determination process, among the information stored in the first execution area AE1, the information for type determination, that is, the numerical information acquired from the hit type counter C2 is grasped. Further, with reference to the distribution table stored in the distribution table storage area 622 of the ROM 603, the above-identified information for type determination corresponds to the information group corresponding to the 8R normal jackpot result and the 6R probability variation jackpot result A. Information group, information group corresponding to 6R probability variation jackpot result B, information group corresponding to 6R probability variation jackpot result C, information group corresponding to 6R probability variation jackpot result D, information group corresponding to 6R probability variation jackpot result E, 16R probability variation jackpot It is specified whether it is included in the information group corresponding to the result A or the information group corresponding to the 16R probability variation jackpot result B.

In step S504, the stop result setting process for the jackpot result is executed. Specifically, the stop result table for the jackpot result in which the pattern to be finally stopped and displayed on the main display unit D (display unit DL for the lower operating port) of the main display unit 81 in the game round is stored in advance in the ROM 603. The identified information is stored in the RAM 604. A plurality of patterns to be stopped and displayed on the main display unit D are set in the stop result table for the jackpot result, and in step S504, information indicating the symbols corresponding to the jackpot result is stored in the RAM 604. Further, in step S504, the game results of this time are 8R normal jackpot result, 6R probability variation jackpot result A, 6R probability variation jackpot result B, 6R probability variation jackpot result C, 6R probability variation jackpot result D, 6R probability variation jackpot result E, 16R probability variation jackpot result E, 16R probability variation jackpot result. Information for specifying which of the result A and the 16R probability variation jackpot result B is in the MPU 602 is stored in the various flag storage areas 635 of the RAM 604. Specifically, if it is an 8R normal jackpot result, the 8R normal flag is stored, if it is a 6R probability variation jackpot result A, the 6R probability variation A flag is stored, and if it is a 6R probability variation jackpot result B, 6R. The probability variation B flag is stored, the 6R probability variation C flag is stored when the 6R probability variation jackpot result C, the 6R probability variation D flag is stored when the 6R probability variation jackpot result D, and the 6R probability variation jackpot result E. In this case, the 6R probability variation E flag is stored, the 16R probability variation A flag is stored when the 16R probability variation jackpot result A is stored, and the 16R probability variation B flag is stored when the 16R probability variation jackpot result B is obtained.

After executing the setting process of step S504, the process proceeds to step S505. In step S505, it is determined whether or not the game round related to the right operating port 63a is being executed. If an affirmative determination is made in step S505, the process proceeds to step S506. In step S506, the forced termination flag is stored in the various flag storage areas 635 of the RAM 604. When the game times (pattern variation display) related to the right operating port 63a are being executed, the game times (picture variation display) related to the right operating port 63a are forcibly performed on the way based on this forced end flag. It will be terminated. More specifically, when the game times related to the lower operating port 62a correspond to the jackpot result, and the game times related to the right operating port 63a can be executed beyond the timing when the confirmation display is performed in the game times. In this case, the game times related to the right operating port 63a are shortened, and at the same time as the game times related to the lower operating port 62a are completed, the game times related to the right operating port 63a are also ended. In such a case, the pattern that is stopped and displayed in the game round related to the right operating port 63a corresponds to the disengagement result.

Returning to the description of step S502, if the determination result in step S501 is an incorrect result, a negative determination is made in the step S502, and the process proceeds to step S507. In step S507, the stop result setting process for the off result is executed.

Specifically, the pattern to be finally stopped and displayed on the main display unit D (display unit DL for the lower operating port) of the main display unit 81 in the game round related to the start of this fluctuation is stored in the ROM 603 in advance. It is specified from the stop result table for the result, and the specified information is stored in the RAM 604.

After executing the processes of steps S506 and S507, or when a negative determination is made in step S505, the process proceeds to step S508. In step S508, the variable display time (display duration) setting process is executed. Details of this setting process will be described later.

After executing the variation display time setting process in step S508, the variation start command and the type command are set in step S509. The fluctuation start command includes information on the fluctuation display time. Here, as described above, the variable display time acquired by referring to the non-reach variable display time table is different from the variable display time acquired by referring to the reach generated variable display time table, and therefore varies. Even if the start command does not include information on the presence or absence of reach occurrence, the notification / effect control device 143, which is a control device on the sub side, can specify the presence or absence of reach occurrence from the information on the fluctuation display time. .. In this respect, it can be said that the fluctuation start command includes information indicating whether or not reach has occurred. Note that the fluctuation start command may include information that directly indicates whether or not reach has occurred.

After executing the setting process of step S509, the process proceeds to step S510 to start the variable display of the lower operating port display unit DL in the main display unit 81, and then end the lower operating port variation start process. In the process of step S510, the game rotation flag for the lower operating port is stored in the various flag storage areas 635 of the RAM 604. As a result, in the subsequent processing, it is possible to identify that the game times (for example, variable display) related to the lower operating port 62a are being executed. In the present embodiment, the pattern on the operation port display units DL and DR and the variable display of the pattern on the symbol display device 75 are started according to the lottery, but the present invention is not limited to this. It is also possible to start the variable display of the symbol before the lottery.

Returning to the description of FIG. 17 again, if an affirmative determination is made in step S401, that is, if it is determined that the game is being rotated related to the lower operating port 62a, the process proceeds to step S407. In step S407, it is determined whether or not it is the timing to stop and display the pattern corresponding to the special hit result in the game round related to the right operating port 63a. If a negative determination is made in step S407, the process proceeds to step S408. In step S408, it is determined whether or not it is the timing to stop and display the pattern corresponding to the jackpot result in the game round related to the right operating port 63a. If a negative determination is made in step S407 and step S408, the process proceeds to step S409.

In step S409, it is determined whether or not the timing has elapsed the fluctuation display time set in step S508. If a negative determination is made in step S409, the variation display process is executed in step S410, and then the lower operation port control process is terminated. In the variable display process of step S410, the pattern is variablely displayed by turning on / off each LED constituting the lower operating port display unit DL.

If an affirmative determination is made in step S409, the process proceeds to step S412. In step S412, the variable end process is executed. In the variation end processing, the display control of the main display unit 81 is performed so that the pattern is stopped and displayed on the display unit DL for the lower operating port so as to be in a predetermined mode. That is, for example, the final display of the pattern corresponding to the lottery result (game result) is executed. The game rotation flag for the lower operating port stored in the various flag storage areas 635 of the RAM 604 is deleted when the confirmation display is completed.

After setting the variable end command in the following step S413, the game round control process ends. The variation end command set in step S413 is transmitted to the notification / effect control device 143 in step S201 in the normal process (FIG. 15). The notification / effect control device 143 executes a process for ending the effect in the game round based on the reception of the variable end command. Further, the variation end command is transmitted to the display control device 710 via the notification / effect control device 143, and the display control device 710 responds to the game result of the game by receiving the variation end command. The combination of the symbols is confirmed and displayed (final stop display) on the display screen 75a of the symbol display device 75. It should be noted that the notification / effect control device 143 and the display control device 710 may independently end the effect for the game round without transmitting the variation end command.

If an affirmative determination is made in any of step S407 and step S408, the stop pattern rewriting process is executed in step S410, each process of step S412 and step S413 is executed, and then the lower operation port End the control process. In the process of rewriting the stop result, first, it is determined whether or not the game times this time correspond to the special hit result. If it does not correspond to the special hit result, the rewriting of the stop pattern (the pattern corresponding to the deviation result) determined by the fluctuation start processing for the lower operating port is avoided. On the other hand, if the game result of this time corresponds to the special hit result, the stop pattern (the pattern corresponding to the special hit result) determined by the fluctuation start processing for the lower operating port is deviated and corresponds to the result. Rewrite to the pattern to be done.

Next, the control process for the right operating port will be described with reference to FIGS. 19 and 20.

(Control processing for right operating port)
As shown in FIG. 19, in the control process for the right operating port, first, in step S601, it is determined whether or not the game rotation related to the right operating port 63a is in progress. Specifically, it is determined whether or not the display unit DR for the right operating port of the main display unit 81 is in the variable display to the final display, that is, whether or not the game for one game is being executed. In this determination, the game rotation flag (variation display information) for the right operating port is stored (stored) in the game rotation flag storage area (variation display information storage means) in the various flag storage areas 635 of the RAM 604. This is done by determining whether or not it is. The game rotation flag for the right operating port is stored when the variable display is started on the display unit DR for the right operating port, and is deleted when the pattern is stopped and the final display is completed.

If the game is not in progress, a negative determination is made in step S601 and the process proceeds to step S602. In step S602, it is determined whether or not the game rotation related to the lower operating port 62a is in progress. Specifically, it is determined whether or not the display unit DL for the lower operating port of the main display unit 81 is in the variable display to the final display, that is, whether or not the game for one game is being executed.

If an affirmative determination is made in step S602, the process proceeds to step S603. In step S603, it is determined whether or not it is the timing to stop and display the pattern corresponding to the jackpot result in the game round related to the lower operating port 62a. If an affirmative determination is made in step S603, the control process for the right operating port is terminated as it is. If a negative determination is made in step S603, or if a negative determination is made in step S602, the process proceeds to step S604. In step S604, the total number of hold storage areas of the hold ball storage area 632 is referred to, and the number of hold information for the right operating port, which is the number of hold information stored on hold, is CRN (specifically, the hold information related to the right work port 63a). It is determined whether or not the number) is "0". When the reserved storage number CRN for the right operating port is "0", the game times control process is terminated as it is. On the other hand, if the reserved storage number CRN for the right operating port is not "0", the process proceeds to step S605. In step S605, data setting processing is performed.

In the data setting process of the right operating port 63a, first, the reserved storage number CRN for the right operating port is decremented by 1. After that, the data stored in the first area of the right working port holding area Rb is moved to the second execution area AE2 (see FIG. 10), and the data stored in the storage area of the right working port holding area Rb is shifted. Execute the process to make it.

This data shift process is a process of shifting the data stored in the first to fourth areas in order to the lower area side, and the data in the first area is cleared and the second area → the first area, The data in each area is shifted in the order of the third area → the second area, the fourth area → the third area, and so on. Then, one LED that is lit is turned off at the hold number display unit for the right operating port. In this extinguishing process, contrary to the lighting process executed when the hold information is added, the LEDs of the hold lamp portion for the right operating port are turned off in order from the lower side.

After performing the data setting process described in detail above, in step S606, the right operating port for starting the variable display of the symbol on the main display unit 81 (main display unit D) and the variable display of the symbol on the symbol display device 75. After executing the fluctuation start processing for the right operating port (variation start processing for the right operating port), the game round control processing is terminated.

Here, with reference to FIG. 20, the variation start processing for the right operating port in step S606 will be described.

(Variation start processing for right operating port)
In the variation start process for the right operating port, first, the pass / fail determination process is executed in step S701. In the hit / fail determination process, the hit / fail determination information among the various information stored in the second execution area AE2, that is, the numerical information related to the hit random number counter C1, is the jackpot numerical value described above with reference to the hit / miss table for the right operating port. Determine if it matches the information. If the determination result in step S701 is a jackpot result, an affirmative determination is made in step S702 and the process proceeds to step S703.

In step S703, the type determination process is executed. In the type determination process, among the various information stored in the second execution area AE2, the information for type determination, that is, the numerical information acquired from the hit type counter C2 and the distribution stored in the distribution table storage area 622 of the ROM 603. With reference to the table, the information for type determination grasped above is the information group corresponding to the 2R normal jackpot result, the information group corresponding to the 2R probability variation jackpot result, the information group corresponding to the 6R probability variation jackpot result A, and the 6R probability variation jackpot. Information group corresponding to result B, information group corresponding to 6R probability variation jackpot result C, information group corresponding to 6R probability variation jackpot result D, information group corresponding to 6R probability variation jackpot result E, information corresponding to 16R probability variation jackpot result A It is specified which of the group and the information group corresponding to the 16R probability variation jackpot result B is included.

In step S704, the stop result setting process for the jackpot result is executed. Specifically, the stop result table for the jackpot result in which the pattern to be finally stopped and displayed on the main display unit D (display unit DR for the right operating port) of the main display unit 81 in the game round is stored in advance in the ROM 603. The identified information is stored in the RAM 604. A plurality of patterns to be stopped and displayed on the main display unit D are set in the stop result table for the jackpot result, and in step S704, information indicating the symbols corresponding to the jackpot result is stored in the RAM 604. Further, in step S704, the game result of this time is 2R normal jackpot result, 2R probability variation jackpot result, 6R probability variation jackpot result A, 6R probability variation jackpot result B, 6R probability variation jackpot result C, 6R probability variation jackpot result D, 6R probability variation jackpot result. Information for specifying in the MPU 602 which of the E, 16R probability variation jackpot result A, and 16R probability variation jackpot result B is stored is stored in the various flag storage areas 635 of the RAM 604. Specifically, the 2R normal flag is stored when it is a 2R normal jackpot result, the 2R probability variation flag is stored when it is a 2R probability variation jackpot result, and the 6R probability variation A is stored when it is a 6R probability variation jackpot result A. The flag is stored, the 6R probability variation B flag is stored when the 6R probability variation jackpot result B is stored, the 6R probability variation C flag is stored when the 6R probability variation jackpot result C, and the 6R probability variation jackpot result D is obtained. Stores the 6R probability variation D flag, stores the 6R probability variation E flag when it is the 6R probability variation jackpot result E, stores the 16R probability variation A flag when it is the 16R probability variation jackpot result A, and stores the 16R probability variation jackpot result B. If, the 16R probability variation B flag is stored.

After executing the setting process of step S704, the process proceeds to step S705. In step S705, it is determined whether or not the game round related to the lower operating port 62a is being executed. If an affirmative determination is made in step S705, the process proceeds to step S706. In step S706, the forced termination flag is stored in the various flag storage areas 635 of the RAM 604. When the game times related to the lower operating port 62a (variation display of the pattern) are executed, the game times related to the lower operating port 62a (variation display of the pattern) are forcibly performed on the way based on this forced end flag. It will be terminated. More specifically, when the game times related to the right operating port 63a correspond to the jackpot result, and beyond the timing when the confirmation display is performed in the game times, the game times related to the lower operating port 62a (corresponding to the disengagement result). ) Can be executed, the game times related to the lower operating port 62a are shortened, and the game times related to the lower operating port 62a are also terminated at the same time as the game times related to the right operating port 63a are completed. In such a case, the pattern that is stopped and displayed in the game round related to the lower operating port 62a corresponds to the disengagement result.

Returning to the description of step S702, if the determination result in step S701 is a special hit result, a negative determination is made in step S702 and an affirmative determination is made in step S707, and the process proceeds to step S708.

In step S708, the stop result setting process for the special hit result is executed. Specifically, the stop result for the special hit result in which the pattern to be finally stopped and displayed on the main display unit D (display unit DR for the right operating port) of the main display unit 81 in the game round is stored in advance in the ROM 603. It is specified from the table, and the specified information is stored in the RAM 604. A plurality of patterns to be stopped and displayed on the main display unit D are set in the stop result table for the special hit result, and in step S703, information indicating the pattern corresponding to the special hit result is stored in the RAM 604. If the game result this time is a special hit result, the special hit flag is stored in the various flag storage areas 635 of the RAM 604.

After executing the process of step S707, the process of steps S704 and S705 described above is executed.

If the determination result in step S701 is an incorrect result, a negative determination is made in step S702 and step S707, and the process proceeds to step S709. In step S709, the stop result setting process for the off result is executed. Specifically, the pattern to be finally stopped and displayed on the main display unit D (display unit DR for the right operating port) of the main display unit 81 in the game round related to the start of this fluctuation is stored in the ROM 603 in advance. It is specified from the stop result table for the result, and the specified information is stored in the RAM 604.

After executing the process of step S706 or step S709, or when a negative determination is made in step S705, the process proceeds to step S710. In step S710, the variable display time (display duration) setting process is executed. The details of the variable display time setting process will be described later.

After executing the variation display time setting process in step S710, the variation start command and the type command are set in step S711. The fluctuation start command includes information on the fluctuation display time. Here, as described above, the variable display time acquired by referring to the non-reach variable display time table is different from the variable display time acquired by referring to the reach generated variable display time table, and therefore varies. Even if the start command does not include information on the presence or absence of reach occurrence, the notification / effect control device 143, which is a control device on the sub side, can specify the presence or absence of reach occurrence from the information on the fluctuation display time. .. In this respect, it can be said that the fluctuation start command includes information indicating whether or not reach has occurred. Note that the fluctuation start command may include information that directly indicates whether or not reach has occurred. Incidentally, in the present embodiment, the pattern in the operation port display units DL and DR and the variable display of the design in the symbol display device 75 are started according to the lottery, but the present invention is not limited to this. It is also possible to start the variable display of the symbol before the lottery.

After executing the setting process of step S711, the process proceeds to step S712, the variation display of the right operating port display unit DR in the main display unit 81 is started, and then the variation start processing for the right operating port is completed. In the process of step S712, the game rotation flag for the right operating port is stored in the various flag storage areas 635 of the RAM 604. As a result, in the subsequent processing, it is possible to identify that the game times (for example, variable display) related to the right operating port 63a are being executed.

Returning to the description of FIG. 19 again, if an affirmative determination is made in step S601, that is, if it is determined that the game is in progress related to the right operating port 63a, the process proceeds to step S608. In step S608, it is determined whether or not it is the timing to stop and display the pattern corresponding to the jackpot result in the game round related to the lower operating port 62a. If a negative determination is made in step S608, the process proceeds to step S609.

In step S609, it is determined whether or not the timing has elapsed the variable display time. If a negative determination is made in step S609, the variation display process is executed in step S610, and then the control process for the right operating port is terminated. In the variable display process of step S610, the pattern is variablely displayed by turning on / off each LED constituting the display unit DR for the right operating port.

If positive stability is achieved in step S609, the process proceeds to step S612. In step S612, the variable end process is executed. In the variation end processing, the display control of the main display unit 81 is performed so that the pattern is stopped and displayed on the display unit DR for the right operating port so as to be in a predetermined mode.

After setting the variable end command in the following step S613, the game round control process ends. The variation end command set in step S613 is transmitted to the notification / effect control device 143 in step S201 in the normal process (FIG. 15). The notification / effect control device 143 executes a process for ending the effect in the game round based on the reception of the variable end command. Further, the variation end command is transmitted to the display control device 710 via the notification / effect control device 143, and the display control device 710 responds to the game result of the game by receiving the variation end command. The combination of the symbols is confirmed and displayed (final stop display) on the display screen 75a of the symbol display device 75. It should be noted that the notification / effect control device 143 and the display control device 710 may independently end the effect for the game round without transmitting the variation end command.

Returning to the description of step S608, if an affirmative determination is made in step S608, the process proceeds to step S611. That is, when it is the timing to stop and display the pattern corresponding to the jackpot result in the game round related to the lower operating port 62a, the process proceeds to step S611. In step S611, the stop result is rewritten.

In the process of rewriting the stop result, first, it is determined whether or not the game times this time correspond to the special hit result. If it does not correspond to the special hit result, the rewriting of the stop pattern (the pattern corresponding to the deviation result) determined by the fluctuation start processing for the right operating port is avoided. On the other hand, if the game result of this time corresponds to the special hit result, the stop pattern (the pattern corresponding to the special hit result) determined by the fluctuation start processing for the right operating port is deviated and corresponds to the result. Rewrite to the pattern to be done. After executing the process of step S611, each process of step S612 and step S613 is executed, and then the control process for the right operating port is terminated.

(Game state transition process)
Next, the game state transition process in step S204 will be described with reference to the flowcharts of FIGS. 21 to 25. As described above, in the present embodiment, the normal game state in which the game progresses based on the entry into the operating ports 62a and 63a and the special game state in which the variable winning devices 64 and 65 are opened (open / close execution mode). ) And are provided. Regarding the normal game state, the lottery mode is the low probability mode and the support mode by the electric accessory 71 is the low frequency support mode. The first normal game state, the lottery mode is the high probability mode and the support mode by the electric accessory 71 is high frequency. The second normal game state, which is the support mode, the lottery mode is the high probability mode, and the support mode by the electric accessory 71 is the low frequency support mode. The third normal game state, the lottery mode is the low probability mode and the support by the electric accessory 71. The mode is composed of a fourth normal game state in which the mode is a high-frequency support mode, and the first normal game state to the fourth normal game state are switched via a special game state corresponding to a jackpot result.

In the game state transition process, first, in step S801, it is determined whether or not the open / close execution mode is in progress. If it is not in the open / close execution mode, the process proceeds to step S802, and it is determined whether or not it is the timing when the game round (specifically, the confirmation display) is completed. If it is not the timing when the game round is finished, the main game state transition process is finished as it is.

If the game round has ended, more specifically, if the preset stop display time (fixed display time) has elapsed since the variable display ended, the process proceeds to step S803, and this time. It is determined whether or not the game result of the game times (the result of the above-mentioned winning / failing lottery) corresponds to the transition to the special game state (open / close execution mode). Specifically, the RAM 604 has the above-mentioned 8R normal flag, 2R normal flag, 2R probability change flag, 6R probability change A flag, 6R probability change B flag, 6R probability change C flag, 6R probability change D flag, 6R probability change E flag, 16R probability change A. It is determined whether or not the flag or the 16R probability variation B flag is stored. If none of the above flags are stored, the game state transition process is terminated as it is.

If any of the above flags is stored, the start processing of the open / close execution mode is executed in step S804. In the start process, first, the opening waiting time (starting waiting time) for making the variable winning device 65 stand by without starting the opening of the upper large winning opening 311 of the variable winning device 65 for the opening of the open / close execution mode. To set. Specifically, the waiting time information for the opening stored in advance in the ROM 603 is set in the waiting time counter area provided in the various counter areas 634 of the RAM 604.

The waiting time (opening time) for the opening in the present embodiment differs depending on the type of hit. Specifically, the waiting time for the opening in the case of a big hit result is 5 sec, while the waiting time for the opening in the case of a special hit result is shorter than that, specifically 8 msec. It has become.

In the following step S805, it is determined whether or not the opening / closing execution mode of this time corresponds to the jackpot result. If an affirmative determination is made in step S805, the process proceeds to step S806, and a value corresponding to the current jackpot result is set in the round number counter RC provided in various counter areas 634 of the RAM 604. Specifically, if the current jackpot result is a 2R jackpot result, the round number counter RC is set to "2", and if the current jackpot result is a 6R jackpot result, the round number counter RC is set to "6". If the jackpot result this time is an 8R jackpot result, set "8" to the round number counter RC, and if the jackpot result this time is a 16R jackpot result, set "16" to the round number counter RC. "Is set. The round number counter RC is subtracted each time the round progresses, and when the value of the round number counter RC becomes "0", the special game state of this time ends.

In the following step S807, when the high-frequency support mode flag is stored in the various flag storage areas 635 of the RAM 604, the high-frequency support mode flag is deleted. As a result, the support mode is maintained in the low frequency support mode during the special game state corresponding to the jackpot result.

Returning to the description of step S805, if a negative determination is made in step S805, that is, in a special gaming state triggered by a special hit result, the process proceeds to step S808. In step S808, the second winning mode flag is set in the various flag storage areas 635 of the RAM 604. After that, in step S809, "1" is set in the round number counter. In the subsequent processing, it is determined that the special game state this time corresponds to the special hit result based on the fact that the second winning mode flag is set.

After executing the process of step S807 or step S809, the process proceeds to step S810. In step S810, the opening command setting process is performed. This set opening command is transmitted to the notification / effect control device 143 and the display control device 710 in step S201 in the normal process (FIG. 15). The notification / effect control device 143 determines the content of the effect corresponding to the opening / closing execution mode based on the received opening command, and controls various devices so that the content of the determined effect is executed. The content of this effect includes a display mode in the symbol display device 75, and the determined display mode is output from the notification / effect control device 143 to the display control device 710 as a display content command. In the display control device 710, based on the opening command received from the main control device 162 and the display content command received from the notification / effect control device 143, the display corresponding to the opening / closing execution mode this time, for example, the display content corresponding to the jackpot The display control of the symbol display device 75 is executed so that the moving image of the character or the like and the background image can be switched.

After executing the opening command setting process in step S810, the external signal setting process is executed in step S811 to end the game state transition process. In the external signal setting process of step S811, it is determined whether or not any of the above-mentioned various jackpot flags and special hit flags is stored in the RAM 604, and if any of the flags is stored, the game hall side. A signal indicating that a big hit or a special hit has occurred is output to the management control device (hall computer HC). By receiving this external signal, it is grasped that the management control device has shifted to the special gaming state (open / close execution mode).

Returning to the description of step S801, if the open / close execution mode is in progress, an affirmative determination is made in step S801, and the process proceeds to step S812. In step S812, it is determined whether or not the waiting time for the opening has elapsed. If the waiting time for the opening has not elapsed, the game state transition process is terminated as it is. If the waiting time for the opening has elapsed, the large winning opening opening / closing process is executed in step S813.

Here, the large winning opening opening / closing process will be described with reference to the flowcharts of FIGS. 22 to 24.

(Opening and closing of the winning opening)
As shown in FIG. 22, in the large winning opening opening / closing process, first, in step S901, it is determined whether or not the second winning mode flag is stored in the various flag storage areas 635 of the RAM 604. If a negative determination is made in step S901, the process proceeds to step S902 to execute the first opening / closing process. The first opening / closing process is a process executed when the special game state (open / close execution mode) corresponding to the jackpot result is set.

(1st opening / closing process)
As shown in FIG. 23, in the first opening / closing process, first, in step S1001, it is determined whether or not the upper variable winning device 64 (upper large winning opening 311) is open. Specifically, the determination is made based on the driving state of the variable winning drive unit 451 of the upper variable winning device 64. If the upper prize opening 311 is not open, it is determined in step S1002 whether or not the value of the round number counter RC is “0”. If an affirmative determination is made in step S1002, the first opening / closing process is terminated as it is.

If a negative determination is made in step S1002, the process proceeds to step S1003. In step S1003, it is determined whether or not the value of the timer counter TC1 provided in the various counter areas 634 of the RAM 604 is “0”. The timer counter TC1 is a counter that is referred to when grasping the opening time, interval time (inter-round interval time), etc. of the upper prize winning opening 311, and is used every time the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 14) is executed. The value is subtracted by "1". If a negative determination is made in step S1003, the first opening / closing process is terminated.

If the value of the round number counter RC is not "0" and the value of the timer counter TC1 is "0", the process proceeds to step S1004, and the opening process of the upper variable winning device 64 (upper large winning opening 311) is executed. To do. Specifically, the variable winning drive unit 451 is set to the driving state in order to open the upper winning opening 311.

After that, the processes of steps S1005 to S1006 are executed as the closing condition setting process (opening setting process) corresponding to the upper variable winning device 64 (upper large winning opening 311). Specifically, in step S1005, "15000" (corresponding to 30 sec) is set in the timer counter TC1, and in subsequent step S1006, "9" is set in the winning counter PC.

In the following step S1007, it is determined whether or not it is the first round (first round) in the special gaming state this time. If an affirmative determination is made in step S1007, the process proceeds to step S1008. In step S1008, it is determined whether or not the current special game state corresponds to the probability variation jackpot result. If an affirmative determination is made in step S1008, the probability change flow path switching process is executed in step S1009. In the probability change flow path switching process, a drive signal is output to the flow path switching drive unit 452 to move the flow path switching member 316 from the protruding position to the retracted position, and the duration for continuing the output of the drive signal is set. .. This duration is the same as the maximum opening time of the upper prize opening 311. For this reason, when the game balls are continuously fired to the right route, a prize is generated in the advantageous ball entry portion 314 in most of the cases, and the transition to the high probability mode is confirmed.

If a negative determination is made in step S1008, the normal flow path switching process is executed in step S1010. In the normal flow path switching process, a drive signal is output to the flow path switching drive unit 452 to move the flow path switching member 316 from the protruding position to the retracted position, as in the probability changing flow path switching process. Set the duration to continue the output of. This duration is shorter than the maximum opening time of the upper prize opening 311. More specifically, a time shorter than the time required for the game ball flowing into the upper prize winning opening 311 to reach the advantageous entry portion 314 (specifically, the detection area of the detection sensor 319) is set. Therefore, even when the game balls are continuously fired to the right route, the winning of the advantageous ball entry portion 314 is basically avoided.

After executing the flow path switching process in steps S1009 and S1010, or when a negative determination is made in step S1007, the process proceeds to step S1011. In step S1011, the opening command indicating that the upper variable winning device 64 (upper large winning opening 311) has been opened is set, and the first opening / closing process is completed. This set release command is transmitted to the notification / effect control device 143 in step S201 in the normal process (see FIG. 15). The notification / effect control device 143 determines the content of the effect corresponding to the release based on the received release command, and controls various devices so that the content of the determined effect is executed.

Returning to the description of step S1001, if it is determined in step S1001 that the upper variable winning device 64 (upper large winning opening 311) is open, the process proceeds to step S1012. In step S1012, it is determined whether or not it is the timing to return the flow path switching member 316 to the protruding position. Specifically, it is determined whether or not the duration set in steps S1009 and S1010 has elapsed. If an affirmative determination is made in step S1012, the output of the drive signal to the flow path switching drive unit 452 is stopped in step S1013, and the flow path switching member 316 is returned to the protruding position.

If a negative determination is made in step S1012, or after the return process of step S1013 is executed, the process proceeds to step S1014. In step S1014, it is determined whether or not the value of the timer counter TC1 is “0”. If the value of the timer counter TC1 is not "0", the process proceeds to step S1015, and whether or not the game ball has won the upper prize winning opening 311 is determined from the upstream detection sensor 317 provided in the upper variable winning device 64. Judgment is made based on the detection information (detection signal) of.

If a prize has been won, the output process of the prize command is executed in step S1016. The winning command is output to the notification / effect control device 143, and the notification / effect control device 143 changes the display on the display screen 75a of the symbol display device 75 based on the winning command.

After executing the command output process in step S1016, the process proceeds to step S1017. In step S1017, the value of the winning counter PC is decremented by 1, and in the following step S1018, it is determined whether or not the value of the winning counter PC is "0". finish.

When an affirmative judgment is made in step S1018, that is, when the value of the winning counter PC is "0", or when a positive judgment is made in step S1014 (that is, it is determined that the value of the timer counter TC1 is "0". In the case of), it means that the conditions for closing the large winning opening have been met. In this case, in step S1019, the variable winning drive unit 451 is put into a non-driving state in order to close the upper variable winning device 64 (upper large winning opening 311).

In the following step S1020, it is determined whether or not the flow path switching member 316 is arranged at the retracted position. If an affirmative determination is made in step S1020, the output of the drive signal to the flow path switching drive unit 452 is stopped in step S1021, and the flow path switching member 316 is returned to the protruding position.

After executing the return process of step S1021 or when a negative determination is made in step S1020, the process proceeds to step S1022 to execute the update process of the round number counter RC. Specifically, when the value of the round number counter RC is not "0", the round number counter RC is decremented by 1, and when the value of the round number counter RC is "0", the round number counter RC is Keep the value of "0".

After that, in step S1023, it is determined whether or not the value of the updated round number counter RC is “0”. If a negative determination is made in step S1023, the process proceeds to step S1024, and "1000" (corresponding to 2.0 sec) is set in the timer counter TC1.

After executing the process of step S1024, a close command is set in step S1025 to end the first open / close process. This set closing command is transmitted to the notification / effect control device 143 in step S201 in the normal process (FIG. 15). The notification / effect control device 143 determines the content of the effect corresponding to the closing command based on the received closing command, and controls various devices so that the content of the determined effect is executed.

Returning to the description of step S1023, if it is determined in step S1023 that the value of the round number counter RC is “0”, the process proceeds to step S1026. In step S1026, the ending process is executed. In the start processing, an ending waiting time (5 sec in the present embodiment) for waiting without starting the next game round for the ending of the open / close execution mode is set. Specifically, the waiting time information for the ending stored in advance in the ROM 603 is set in the waiting time counter area provided in the various counter areas 634 of the RAM 604.

Then, in step S1027, after setting the ending command, the first opening / closing process is completed. The set ending command is transmitted to the notification / effect control device 143 in step S201 in the normal process (FIG. 15).

Returning to the description of FIG. 22, if an affirmative determination is made in step S901, the second opening / closing process of step S903 is executed. Hereinafter, the second opening / closing process will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. 24.

(Second opening / closing process)
In the second opening / closing process, first, in step S1101, it is determined whether or not the lower variable winning device 65 (lower large winning opening 341) is open. Specifically, the determination is made based on the driving state of the variable winning drive unit 461 of the lower variable winning device 65. If the lower prize opening 341 is not open, the lower variable winning device 65 (lower prize opening 341) is opened in step S1102. Specifically, the variable winning drive unit 461 is set to the driving state in order to open the lower prize winning opening 341.

After that, the processes of steps S1103 to S1104 are executed as the closing condition setting process (opening setting process) corresponding to the lower variable winning device 65 (lower large winning opening 341). Specifically, in step S1103, "400" (corresponding to 0.8 sec) is set in the timer counter TC1, and in subsequent step S1104, "9" is set in the winning counter PC.

Returning to the description of step S1101, if it is determined in step S1101 that the lower variable winning device 65 (lower large winning opening 341) is open, the process proceeds to step S1105, and the value of the timer counter TC1 is "0". Judge whether or not. If the value of the timer counter TC1 is not "0", the process proceeds to step S1106, and whether or not a game ball has won a prize in the lower prize winning opening 341 is determined from the winning ball detection sensor provided in the lower variable winning device 65. Judgment is made based on the detection signal.

If a prize has been won, the output process of the prize command is executed in step S1107. The winning command is output to the notification / effect control device 143, and the notification / effect control device 143 changes the display on the display screen 75a of the symbol display device 75 based on the winning command.

After executing the command output process in step S1107, the process proceeds to step S1108. In step S1108, the value of the winning counter PC is decremented by 1, and in the following step S1109, it is determined whether or not the value of the winning counter PC is "0". If it is not "0", the second opening / closing process is terminated as it is. To do.

When an affirmative judgment is made in step S1109, that is, when the value of the winning counter PC is "0", or when a positive judgment is made in step S1105 (that is, it is determined that the value of the timer counter TC1 is "0". In the case of), it means that the conditions for closing the large winning opening have been met. In this case, in step S1110, the variable winning drive unit 461 is put into a non-driving state in order to close the lower variable winning device 65 (lower large winning opening 341).

In the following step S1111, the ending process is executed. In the start processing, an ending waiting time (0.2 sec in the present embodiment) for waiting without starting the next game round for the ending of the open / close execution mode is set. Specifically, the waiting time information for the ending stored in advance in the ROM 603 is set in the waiting time counter area provided in the various counter areas 634 of the RAM 604.

After that, in step S1112, after setting the ending command, the opening / closing process of the main winning opening is completed. The set ending command is transmitted to the notification / effect control device 143 in step S201 in the normal process (FIG. 15).

Returning to the description of FIG. 21 again, after executing the large winning opening opening / closing process of step S813, the process proceeds to step S814. In step S814, it is determined whether or not the round number counter RC is “0”. If a negative determination is made in step S814, the game state transition process is terminated as it is. If an affirmative determination is made in step S814, the process proceeds to step S815. In step S815, it is determined whether or not the waiting time for the ending has elapsed. If the waiting time for the ending has not elapsed, the game state transition process is terminated as it is.

On the other hand, when the value of the round number counter RC is "0" and the waiting time for the ending has elapsed, in step S816, after executing the transition process at the end of the open / close execution mode, this game End the state transition process. Here, with reference to FIG. 25, the transition process at the end of the open / close execution mode will be described.

(Transition processing at the end of open / close execution mode)
In the transition process at the end of the open / close execution mode, it is first determined whether or not the special game state this time corresponds to the first winning mode. If it corresponds to the first winning mode, an affirmative determination is made in step S1201 and the process proceeds to step S1202. In step S1202, it is determined whether or not the ball has entered the advantageous ball-entry unit 314 during the special game state this time. When the ball has entered the advantageous ball entry unit 314, the high probability mode flag is set in the various flag storage areas 635 of the RAM 604 in step S1203. As a result, the lottery mode becomes the high probability mode in the subsequent normal game state.

After executing the process of step S1203, or when a negative determination is made in step S1202, the process proceeds to step S1204. In step S1204, it is determined whether or not the current special game state corresponds to the transition to the high frequency support mode. If an affirmative determination is made in step S1204, the high-frequency support mode flag is set in the various flag storage areas 635 of the RAM 604 in step S1205, and the number of games provided in the various counter areas 634 of the RAM 604 in the following step S1206. Set the value corresponding to this jackpot result in the counter. The game count counter is subtracted each time the game count is executed, and when the value of the game count counter becomes "0", the mode shifts from the high frequency support mode to the low frequency support mode.

Although the details will be described later, in the present embodiment, for example, when the 16R probability variation jackpot result is obtained based on the ball entering the right operating port 63a in the second normal game state to the third normal game state. , The configuration is such that the transition to the high frequency support mode is avoided.

After executing the process of step S1206, or when a negative determination is made in steps S1201 and S1204, the process proceeds to step S1207. In step S1207, various flags for the special game state (for example, a winning mode flag, a jackpot flag, etc.) stored in the various flag storage areas 635 of the RAM 604 are erased, and the main transition process is completed.

Next, with reference to FIGS. 26 to 28, the electric service support process executed in step S205 of the normal process (see FIG. 15) will be described. FIG. 26 is a flowchart showing the electric service support process, FIG. 27 is a schematic view comparing the low frequency support mode and the high frequency support mode, and FIG. 28 is a flowchart showing the electric service opening / closing process.

(Processing for electrical support)
In the electric service support process, first, in step S1301, it is determined whether or not the support is in progress. Specifically, it is determined whether or not the supporting flag is stored in the supporting flag storage area provided in the various flag storage areas 635 of the RAM 604. The supporting flag is a flag that is stored when the electric accessory 71 attached to the right operating port 63a is switched to the open state and is erased when the electric accessory 71 is returned to the closed state.

If the supporting flag is not stored, the process proceeds to step S1302, and it is determined whether or not the support winning flag is stored in the support winning flag storage area provided in the various flag storage areas 635 of the RAM 604. The support winning flag is a flag that is stored when the open lottery for whether or not to open the electric accessory 71 is won, and is deleted when the supporting flag is stored.

If the support winning flag is not stored, the process proceeds to step S1303, and it is determined whether or not the value of the timer counter TC2 provided in the various counter areas 634 of the RAM 604 is “0”. If the value of the timer counter TC2 is not "0", the main electric service support process is terminated as it is.

If the value of the timer counter TC2 is "0", the process proceeds to step S1304, and it is determined whether or not it is the end timing of the variation display of the pattern on the through-gate display unit DS. If it is the end timing of the variable display, in step S1305, after setting the off display and setting the timer counter TC2 to "250" (corresponding to 0.5 sec), the main electric service support process is terminated. .. When the off display is set, the variable display of the pattern on the through gate display unit DS is terminated in the state where the off display is stopped and displayed, and this off display is continued for 0.5 sec (FIG. 27). reference).

If the value of the timer counter TC2 is "0" and it is not the end timing of the fluctuation display, the process proceeds to step S1306, and it is determined whether or not the value of the accessory hold storage number SN is larger than "0". If the value of the character hold storage number SN is "0", the main electric service support process is terminated as it is. If the value of the accessory hold storage number SN is larger than "0", it is determined in step S1307 whether or not the support mode is the high frequency support mode.

If the high frequency support mode is in progress, an affirmative determination is made in step S1307, and the process proceeds to step S1308. In step S1308, it is determined by lottery (open lottery) whether or not to support by the electric accessory 71. Specifically, the value stored in the accessory holding ball storage area of the electric service storage area 633 is shifted and stored in the open random number counter C4 value shifted to the execution area and the pass / fail table storage area 621 of the ROM 603. The open lottery is performed with reference to the lottery table for the high frequency support mode. Further, at the same time as the open lottery, "100" (corresponding to 0.2 sec) is set in the timer counter TC2 with reference to the variable display time table corresponding to the high frequency support mode stored in the ROM 603. The timer counter TC2 is decremented by 1 each time the timer interrupt process is activated. After that, the variation display of the pattern on the through-gate display unit DS is continued until the value of the timer counter TC2 becomes “0”, that is, for 0.2 sec (see FIG. 27).

In the following step S1309, it is determined whether or not the result of the open lottery in step S1308 is the winning result (support winning). If the support is not won, the processing for main electric service support is terminated as it is. If the support is won, the support winning flag is set in the various flag storage areas 635 of the RAM 604 in step S1310, and the main electric service support process is terminated.

If the low frequency support mode is in progress, a negative determination is made in step S1307, and the process proceeds to step S1311. In step S1311, it is determined by lottery (open lottery) whether or not to support by the electric accessory 71. Specifically, the value stored in the accessory holding ball storage area of the electric service storage area 633 is shifted and stored in the open random number counter C4 value shifted to the execution area and the pass / fail table storage area 621 of the ROM 603. The open lottery is performed with reference to the lottery table for the low frequency support mode. Further, at the same time as the open lottery, "350" (that is, equivalent to 0.7 sec) is set in the timer counter TC2 with reference to the variable display time table corresponding to the low frequency support mode stored in the ROM 603. After that, the variation display of the pattern on the through-gate display unit DS is continued until the value of the timer counter TC2 becomes “0”, that is, for 0.7 sec (see FIG. 27).

In the following step S1312, it is determined whether or not the result of the open lottery in step S1311 is the winning result (support winning). If the support is not won, the processing for main electric service support is terminated as it is. If the support is won, the support winning flag is set in the various flag storage areas 635 of the RAM 604 in step S1313, and the main electric service support process is terminated.

The probability of winning support in high-frequency support mode (detailed 249/250) is higher than the probability of winning support in low-frequency support mode (detailed 248/250), and high-frequency support Mode is preferred.

Returning to the description of step S1302 in FIG. 26, when the support winning flag is stored in the various flag storage areas 635 of the RAM 604, an affirmative determination is made in step S1302, the process proceeds to step S1314, and the value of the timer counter TC2 is set. It is determined whether or not it is "0". If the value of the timer counter TC2 is not "0", the pattern variation display on the through-gate display unit DS is in progress, and the main electric service support process is terminated as it is. When the value of the timer counter TC2 is "0", the hit display is set in step S1315. As a result, the variable display of the pattern on the accessory display unit 44 is terminated in the state where the hit display is stopped and displayed. In the following step S1316, the supporting flag is set in the various flag storage areas 635, the support winning flag stored in the various flag storage areas 635 is erased, and then the main electric service support process is terminated.

Returning to the description of step S1301, when an affirmative determination is made in step S1301, that is, when the supporting flag is stored in the various flag storage areas 635 of the RAM 604, the process proceeds to step S1317 to open and close the electric accessory 71. After executing the electric service opening / closing process for control, the main electric service support process is terminated. Hereinafter, the electric service opening / closing process will be described with reference to FIG. 28.

(Electric service opening / closing process)
In the electric function opening / closing process, first, in step S1401, it is determined whether or not the electric accessory 71 is open. Whether or not the electric accessory 71 is open is determined by whether or not the electric accessory drive unit 332 is in the driving state. If the electric accessory 71 is open, the process proceeds to step S1402, and the number of winnings after opening the right operating port 63a to which the electric accessory 71 is attached reaches the upper limit (“10” in the present embodiment). Judge whether or not. If a negative determination is made in step S1402, the process proceeds to step S1403 to determine whether or not the value of the timer counter TC2 is "0".

If the value of the timer counter TC2 is not "0", the main electric function opening / closing process is terminated as it is. On the other hand, if the value of the timer counter TC2 is "0", or if it is determined in step S1402 that the number of winnings has reached the upper limit, the process proceeds to step S1404. In step S1404, the closing process of switching (returning) the electric accessory 71 to the closed state is performed. After that, in step S1405, the supporting flags stored in the various flag storage areas 635 are erased, and the main electric function opening / closing process is completed.

Returning to the description of step S1401, if the electric accessory 71 is not open, a negative determination is made in step S1401 and the process proceeds to step S1406. In step S1406, it is determined whether or not the timer counter TC2 is “0”. If the timer counter TC2 is not "0", the main electric function opening / closing process is terminated as it is. When the timer counter TC2 is "0", in step S1407, an opening process for switching the electric accessory 71 to the open state is executed.

After that, in step S1408, it is determined whether or not the high frequency support mode is in progress. When in the high frequency support mode, after setting "2850" (corresponding to 5.7 sec) in the timer counter TC2 in step S1409, the main electric service opening / closing process is terminated. On the other hand, in the low frequency support mode, after setting "40" (corresponding to 0.08 sec) in the timer counter TC2 in step S1410, the main electric function opening / closing process is terminated (see FIG. 27).

(Relationship between game status and variable display time)
As described above, in the present embodiment, the hold information is acquired based on the entry of the ball into the lower actuating port 62a and the right actuating port 63a, and the pattern or symbol in the game round is based on the acquired hold information. The configuration is such that variable display to confirmed display are executed. Here, the variable display time of the pattern or the pattern is set according to the game state. Hereinafter, with reference to FIGS. 29 to 31, the configuration related to the setting of the fluctuation display time and the like (variation in the fluctuation display time setting process (see FIG. 18) in the fluctuation start processing for the lower operating port and the fluctuation in the fluctuation start processing for the upper operating port). The display time setting process (see FIG. 19)) will be supplementarily described. FIG. 29 is a flowchart showing a variation display time setting process (variation display time setting process for the lower operating port) in the variation start process for the lower operating port, and FIG. 30 is a flowchart showing a variation display time setting process for the right operating port. Reference numeral 31 denotes a schematic diagram showing the relationship between the gaming state and the variable display time.

(Variable display time setting process for lower operating port)
As shown in FIG. 29, in the variable display time setting process for the lower operating port, first, in step S1501, it is determined whether or not the first normal gaming state is compatible with the low probability mode and the low frequency support mode. If an affirmative determination is made in step S1501, the first normal game state setting process is executed in step S1502, and then the variable display time setting process ends.

In the first normal game state setting process, a table corresponding to the current game time is selected from various variable display time tables for the first normal game state stored in the variable display time table storage area 623 of the ROM 603. Then, the variable display time is set according to the number of hold information stored in the hold area Ra for the lower operating port in the hold ball storage area 632 of the RAM 604, the result of the winning / failing lottery, and the presence / absence of reach.

Regarding the variable display time, when comparing the jackpot result and the off result, the former is more likely to be longer than the latter, and in the case of the off result and the reach display does not occur (complete off). In the case of), it is configured to become shorter as the number of stored information on hold increases. FIG. 31 (a1) illustrates the variation display time in the case of complete deviation in the first normal gaming state. For example, when the number of stored pending information is "0" or "1", either "12, 13, 14 sec" is set as the variable display time, and the stored pending information When the number is "2", either "7,8,9 sec" is set as the variable display time, and when the number of stored information on hold is "3" or "4", it is set. Any of "3, 4, 5 sec" is set as the variable display time. In the first normal game state, the final display time of the symbol on the display unit DL for the lower operating port and the final display time of the symbol on the symbol display device 75 are configured to be "0.5 sec".

Returning to the description of FIG. 29, if a negative determination is made in step S1501, the process proceeds to step S1503. In step S1503, it is determined whether or not the second normal gaming state corresponds to the high probability mode and the high frequency support mode. If an affirmative determination is made in step S1503, the second normal game state setting process is executed in step S1504, and then the variable display time setting process ends.

In the second normal game state setting process, a table corresponding to the current game time is selected from various variable display time tables for the second normal game state stored in the variable display time table storage area 623 of the ROM 603. And set the variable display time.

In the second normal game state, unlike the first normal game state, the selection candidate of the variable display time is limited to one regardless of various conditions such as the number of stored information and the result of the winning / failing lottery. ing. Specifically, in the second normal game state, the variable display time is "0.5 sec" and the fixed display time is "0.5 sec" for any of the game times (FIG. 31 (FIG. 31). (See a2)), the variable display time is shorter than that in the first normal game state.

Details will be described later, but in the second normal gaming state, by launching the game ball to the right route formed in the game area PE, the game is more advantageous to the player than when aiming at the left route. It will proceed. The game ball launched to the right route wins a prize in the right operating port 63a, and the game proceeds mainly based on the hold information related to the right operating port 63a. Under such circumstances, the player may be confused by interrupting the game times corresponding to the lower operating port 62a, which has a lower advantage than the right operating port 63a. In the present embodiment, in consideration of such circumstances, the occurrence of the above-mentioned inconvenience is suppressed by promptly digesting the game times corresponding to the lower operating port 62a after the transition to the second normal game state. ing.

If a negative determination is made in step S1503 of FIG. 29, the process proceeds to step S1505. In step S1505, it is determined whether or not the third normal gaming state corresponds to the high probability mode and the low frequency support mode. If an affirmative determination is made in step S1505, the third normal game state setting process is executed in step S1506, and then the variable display time setting process ends.

In the setting process for the third normal game state, a table corresponding to the current game time is selected from various variable display time tables for the third normal game state stored in the variable display time table storage area 623 of the ROM 603. And set the variable display time.

In the third normal game state, unlike the first normal game state, the selection candidate of the variable display time is limited to one regardless of various conditions such as the number of stored information and the result of the winning / failing lottery. ing. Specifically, in the third normal game state, the variable display time is "0.5 sec" and the fixed display time is "0.5 sec" for any of the game times (FIG. 31 (FIG. 31). See a3)).

If a negative determination is made in step S1505 of FIG. 29, that is, in the case of the fourth normal gaming state corresponding to the low probability mode and the high frequency support mode, the process proceeds to step S1507, and the setting process for the fourth normal gaming state is performed. After the execution, the variable display time setting process is terminated.

In the fourth normal game state setting process, a table corresponding to the current game time is selected from the various variable display time tables for the fourth normal game state stored in the variable display time table storage area 623 of the ROM 603. And set the variable display time.

In the fourth normal game state, unlike the first normal game state, the selection candidate of the variable display time is limited to one regardless of various conditions such as the number of stored information and the result of the winning / failing lottery. ing. Specifically, in the fourth normal game state, the variable display time is "0.5 sec" and the fixed display time is "0.5 sec" for any of the game times (FIG. 31 (FIG. 31). See a4)).

(Variable display time setting process for right operating port)
As shown in FIG. 30, in the variation display time setting process for the right operating port, first, in step S1601, it is determined whether or not the first normal gaming state is compatible with the low probability mode and the low frequency support mode. If an affirmative determination is made in step S1601, the first normal game state setting process is executed in step S1602, and then the variable display time setting process ends.

In the first normal game state setting process, a table corresponding to the current game time is selected from various variable display time tables for the first normal game state stored in the variable display time table storage area 623 of the ROM 603. And set the variable display time. The variable display time table referred to in the variable display time setting process for the right operating port is a different table from the variable display time table referred to in the variable display time setting process for the lower operating port.

In the first normal game state, regardless of various conditions such as the number of hold information stored in the hold area Rb for the right operating port in the hold ball storage area 632 of the RAM 604, the result of the winning / losing lottery, and the presence / absence of reach. The selection candidate of the variable display time is limited to one. Specifically, in the first normal game state, the variable display time is "600 sec" and the fixed display time is "1 sec" for each game (see FIG. 31 (b1)). .. A game ball launched to the right route in the first normal game state can win a prize in the right operating port 63a, but only "1" prize balls can be obtained by winning a prize in the right operating port 63a, and the right operating port 63a is operated. It is necessary to wait 600 seconds until the lottery result based on the winning of the mouth 63a is obtained. As a result, the act of launching a game ball aiming at the right route in the first normal game state and trying to advance the game in an advantageous manner is suppressed.

Returning to the description of FIG. 30, if a negative determination is made in step S1601, the process proceeds to step S1603. In step S1603, it is determined whether or not the second normal gaming state corresponds to the high probability mode and the high frequency support mode. If an affirmative determination is made in step S1603, the second normal game state setting process is executed in step S1604, and then the variable display time setting process ends.

In the second normal game state setting process, a table corresponding to the current game time is selected from various variable display time tables for the second normal game state stored in the variable display time table storage area 623 of the ROM 603. And set the variable display time.

Regarding the variable display time in the second normal game state, the former is more likely to be longer than the latter when comparing the jackpot result with the special hit result and the missed result. In particular, when the reach display does not occur in the case of the deviation result (in the case of complete deviation), the variable display time is shortened as the number of stored information is increased. In addition, in the case of a special hit result, the reach display does not occur as in the case of complete loss, and in this case as well, the variable display time is shortened as the number of stored information increases. ing.

FIG. 31 (b2) shows the variation display time in the case of a special hit or a complete loss in the first normal gaming state. For example, when the number of stored information on hold is "0", "13 sec" is set as the variable display time, and when the number of stored information on hold is "1". Is set to "8 sec" as the variable display time, and when the number of stored information on hold is "2", "4 sec" is set as the variable display time, and the number of stored information on hold is "3". "Or" 4 "," 1 sec "is set as the variable display time. In the second normal game state, the final display time of the symbol on the display unit DR for the right operating port and the final display time of the symbol on the symbol display device 75 are unified so as to be "1 sec".

If a negative determination is made in step S1603 of FIG. 30, the process proceeds to step S1605. In step S1605, it is determined whether or not the third normal gaming state corresponds to the high probability mode and the low frequency support mode. If an affirmative determination is made in step S1605, the third normal game state setting process is executed in step S1606, and then the variable display time setting process ends.

In the setting process for the third normal game state, a table corresponding to the current game time is selected from various variable display time tables for the third normal game state stored in the variable display time table storage area 623 of the ROM 603. And set the variable display time.

Regarding the variable display time in the third normal game state, the former is more likely to be longer than the latter when comparing the jackpot result with the special hit result and the missed result. In particular, when the reach display does not occur in the case of the deviation result (in the case of complete deviation), the fluctuation display time is shortened as the number of stored information is increased. In addition, in the case of a special hit result, the reach display does not occur as in the case of complete loss, and in this case as well, the variable display time is shortened as the number of stored information increases. ing.

FIG. 31 (b3) shows the variation display time in the case of a special hit or a complete loss in the third normal gaming state. For example, when the number of stored information on hold is "0" to "2", "4 sec" is set as the variable display time, and the number of stored information on hold is "3" to "3". If it is "4", "0.5 sec" is set as the variable display time. In the third normal game state, the final display time of the symbol on the display unit DR for the right operating port and the final display time of the symbol on the symbol display device 75 are unified so as to be "1 sec".

If a negative determination is made in step S1605 of FIG. 30, that is, in the case of the fourth normal gaming state corresponding to the low probability mode and the high frequency support mode, the process proceeds to step S1607 and the setting process for the fourth normal gaming state is performed. After the execution, the variable display time setting process is terminated.

In the fourth normal game state setting process, a table corresponding to the current game time is selected from the various variable display time tables for the fourth normal game state stored in the variable display time table storage area 623 of the ROM 603. And set the variable display time.

Regarding the variable display time in the fourth normal game state, the former is more likely to be longer than the latter when comparing the jackpot result with the special hit result and the missed result. In particular, when the reach display does not occur in the case of the deviation result (in the case of complete deviation), the fluctuation display time is shortened as the number of stored information is increased. In addition, in the case of a special hit result, the reach display does not occur as in the case of complete loss, and in this case as well, the variable display time is shortened as the number of stored information increases. ing.

FIG. 31 (b4) shows the variation display time in the case of complete deviation in the first normal gaming state. For example, when the number of stored information on hold is "0", "13 sec" is set as the variable display time, and when the number of stored information on hold is "1". Is set to "8 sec" as the variable display time, and when the number of stored information on hold is "2", "4 sec" is set as the variable display time, and the number of stored information on hold is "3". "Or" 4 "," 2.5 sec "is set as the variable display time. In the second normal game state, the final display time of the symbol on the display unit DR for the right operating port and the final display time of the symbol on the symbol display device 75 are unified so as to be "1 sec".

In the present embodiment, the diversification of the game is realized by switching from the first normal game state to the fourth normal game state. In particular, when shifting to the third normal game state after passing through the second normal game state, the hurdle is configured to depend on the number of games in which the high-frequency support mode is continued (hereinafter referred to as "time reduction number"). There is. Hereinafter, the relationship between the types of jackpot results and the number of time reductions will be described with reference to the schematic diagram of FIG.

(Time reduction)
If an 8R normal jackpot result is obtained based on the winning of the lower operating port 62a, the number of time reductions is "50" regardless of whether or not the ball has entered the advantageous entry section 314 and the game state at the time of winning. Is set. As described above, in the special game state (open / close execution mode) corresponding to the 8R normal jackpot result, the advantageous entry portion 314 is temporarily opened, but the game ball that has flowed into the upper prize opening 311 is advantageous. The advantageous entry portion 314 is closed before reaching the ball portion 314, so that entry into the advantageous entry portion 314 is substantially avoided.

If the 6R probability variation jackpot result A is obtained based on the winning of the lower operating port 62a, the number of time reductions is "100" regardless of whether or not the ball has entered the advantageous ball portion 314 and the game state at the time of winning. The times are set. When the 6R probability variation jackpot result B is obtained, "70" times are set as the number of time reductions regardless of whether or not the ball has entered the advantageous ball entry portion 314 and the game state at the time of winning. When the 6R probability variation jackpot result C is obtained, "50" times are set as the number of time reductions regardless of whether or not the ball has entered the advantageous ball entry portion 314 and the game state at the time of winning. When the 6R probability variation jackpot result D is obtained, "30" times are set as the number of time reductions regardless of whether or not the ball has entered the advantageous ball entry portion 314 and the game state at the time of winning. When the 6R probability variation jackpot result E is obtained, "10" times are set as the number of time reductions regardless of whether or not the ball has entered the advantageous ball entry portion 314 and the game state at the time of winning.

As described above, in the special game state (open / close execution mode) corresponding to the 6R probability variation jackpot results A to 6R probability variation jackpot results E, when the game ball is continuously launched toward the right route. Is configured so that the ball enters the advantageous ball entry portion 314 in most of the cases, and it is suppressed that the transition to the high probability mode is avoided even though the probability variation jackpot result is obtained. ..

When the 16R probability variation jackpot result A or the 16R probability variation jackpot result B is obtained based on the winning of the lower operating port 62a, regardless of whether or not the ball has entered the advantageous entry section 314 and the game state at the time of winning. "0" times are set as the number of time reductions. That is, these jackpot results do not shift to the normal game state corresponding to the high frequency support mode after the end of the special game state (open / close execution mode). Specifically, when a ball enters the advantageous entry section 314, it shifts to the second normal gaming state corresponding to the high probability mode and the low frequency support mode, and the entry into the advantageous entry section 314 occurs. If not, the game shifts to the first normal gaming state corresponding to the low probability mode and the low frequency support mode.

If a 2R normal jackpot result is obtained based on a prize in the right operating port 63a, the number of time reductions is "50" regardless of whether or not the ball has entered the advantageous ball portion 314 and the game state at the time of winning. Is set. As described above, in the special game state (open / close execution mode) corresponding to the 2R normal jackpot result, the advantageous entry portion 314 is temporarily opened, but the game ball that has flowed into the upper prize opening 311 is advantageous. The advantageous entry portion 314 is closed before reaching the ball portion 314, so that entry into the advantageous entry portion 314 is substantially avoided.

If a 2R probability variation jackpot result is obtained based on a prize in the right operating port 63a, the number of time reductions is "50" regardless of whether or not the ball has entered the advantageous ball portion 314 and the game state at the time of winning. Set.

If the 6R probability variation jackpot result A is obtained based on the winning of the right operating port 63a, but the ball does not enter the advantageous entry section 314, "100" is set as the number of time reductions. To. When the 6R probability variation jackpot result A is obtained and the ball enters the advantageous entry section 314, the number of time reductions set differs depending on the game state at the time when the 6R probability variation jackpot result A is obtained. If the 6R probability variation jackpot result A is obtained during the first normal game state, "1000" times is set as the number of time reductions, and the 6R probability variation jackpot result A is obtained during the second normal game state to the fourth normal game state. In that case, "100" times is set as the number of time reductions.

When the 6R probability variation jackpot result B is obtained based on the winning of the right operating port 63a, the number of time reductions is set according to the presence or absence of the ball entering the advantageous ball portion 314 and the gaming state at the time of winning. Specifically, if the ball does not enter the advantageous entry section 314 even though the 6R probability variation jackpot result B is obtained in the first normal game state, "100" times is set as the number of time reductions. If the ball does not enter the advantageous entry section 314 even though the 6R probability variation jackpot result B is obtained in the second normal game state to the fourth normal game state, the number of time reductions is ". "70" times are set. On the other hand, when the 6R probability variation jackpot result B is obtained in the first normal game state and the ball enters the advantageous entry section 314, "1000" times is set as the number of time reductions, and the second normal game state. -When the 6R probability variation jackpot result B is obtained in the fourth normal game state and the ball enters the advantageous entry section 314, "70 times" is set as the number of time reductions.

When the 6R probability variation jackpot result C is obtained based on the winning of the right operating port 63a, the number of time reductions is set according to the presence or absence of the ball entering the advantageous ball portion 314 and the gaming state at the time of winning. Specifically, if the ball does not enter the advantageous entry section 314 even though the 6R probability variation jackpot result is C in the first normal game state, "100" times is set as the number of time reductions. If the ball does not enter the advantageous entry section 314 even though the 6R probability variation jackpot result is C in the second normal game state to the fourth normal game state, the number of time reductions is ". "50" times is set. On the other hand, when the 6R probability variation jackpot result C is obtained in the first normal game state and the ball enters the advantageous entry section 314, "1000" times is set as the number of time reductions, and the second normal game state. -When a 6R probability variation jackpot result C is obtained in the fourth normal game state and a ball enters the advantageous entry section 314, "50 times" is set as the number of time reductions.

When the 6R probability variation jackpot result D is obtained based on the winning of the right operating port 63a, the number of time reductions is set according to the presence or absence of the ball entering the advantageous ball portion 314 and the gaming state at the time of winning. Specifically, if the ball does not enter the advantageous entry section 314 even though the 6R probability variation jackpot result D is obtained in the first normal game state, "100" times is set as the number of time reductions. If the ball does not enter the advantageous entry section 314 even though the 6R probability variation jackpot result is D in the second normal game state to the fourth normal game state, the number of time reductions is ". "30" times is set. On the other hand, when the 6R probability variation jackpot result D is obtained in the first normal game state and the ball enters the advantageous entry section 314, "1000" times is set as the number of time reductions, and the second normal game state. ~ In the fourth normal game state, when the 6R probability variation jackpot result D and the ball enters the advantageous ball entry portion 314 occurs, "30 times" is set as the number of time reductions.

When the 6R probability variation jackpot result E is obtained based on the winning of the right operating port 63a, the number of time reductions is set according to the presence or absence of the ball entering the advantageous ball portion 314 and the gaming state at the time of winning. Specifically, if the ball does not enter the advantageous entry section 314 even though the 6R probability variation jackpot result E is obtained in the first normal game state, "100" times are set as the number of time reductions. If the ball does not enter the advantageous entry section 314 even though the 6R probability variation jackpot result E is obtained in the second normal game state to the fourth normal game state, the number of time reductions is ". "10" times is set. On the other hand, when the 6R probability variation jackpot result E is obtained in the first normal game state and the ball enters the advantageous ball entry portion 314, "1000" times is set as the number of time reductions, and the second normal game state. -When the 6R probability variation jackpot result E is obtained in the fourth normal game state and the ball enters the advantageous ball entry portion 314, "10 times" is set as the number of time reductions.

When the 16R probability variation jackpot result A is obtained based on the winning of the right operating port 63a, the number of time reductions is set according to the presence or absence of the ball entering the advantageous ball portion 314 and the gaming state at the time of winning. Specifically, if the 16R probability variation jackpot result A is obtained in the first normal game state but the ball does not enter the advantageous entry section 314, "100" times are set as the number of time reductions. It is set and shifts to the high frequency support mode (shifts to the 4th normal game state). If the ball does not enter the advantageous entry section 314 even though the 6R probability variation jackpot result A is obtained in the second normal game state to the fourth normal game state, the number of time reductions is "0" times. Is set and does not shift to the high frequency support mode (shifts to the first normal game state). On the other hand, when the 16R probability variation jackpot result A is obtained in the first normal game state and the ball enters the advantageous entry section 314, "1000" times is set as the number of time reductions, and the high frequency support mode is entered. Transition (shift to the second normal game state). In the 2nd normal game state to the 4th normal game state, the 16R probability variation jackpot result A is obtained, and when a ball enters the advantageous entry section 314, "0" times are set as the number of time reductions, and the high frequency support mode Does not shift to (shifts to the second normal game state).

If the 16R probability variation jackpot result B is obtained based on the winning of the right operating port 63a, the number of time reductions is "0" regardless of whether or not the ball has entered the advantageous ball portion 314 and the game state at the time of winning. The times are set. Specifically, if the ball does not enter the advantageous ball entry section 314, it shifts to the first normal gaming state corresponding to the low probability mode and the low frequency support mode, and the ball enters the advantageous ball entry section 314. When the above occurs, the game shifts to the second normal gaming state corresponding to the high probability mode and the low frequency support mode.

Here, in the present embodiment, the special gaming state (open / close execution mode) that shifts when a big hit result is obtained is set to the first winning mode and the second winning mode in which the variable winning device to be opened and the opening / closing mode are different. It is roughly divided. If a big hit result is obtained, the game shifts to a special gaming state corresponding to the first winning mode. In the special gaming state corresponding to the first winning mode (hereinafter referred to as the first special gaming state), the upper variable winning device 64 is set as an opening target, and a predetermined opening time (30 sec in detail) elapses or a predetermined number (specifically, 30 sec) elapses. The opening is repeated with the occurrence of 9) balls as one round and the upper limit of multiple rounds. On the other hand, if a special hit result is obtained, the game shifts to a special game letter corresponding to the second winning mode. In the special gaming state corresponding to the second winning mode (hereinafter referred to as the second special gaming state), the lower variable winning device 65 is set as an opening target, and a predetermined opening time (0.8 sec in detail) elapses or a predetermined number. The second special gaming state ends when any of the occurrences of (9 in detail) is established. In this way, the first special game state is set so that the winning frequency is relatively high, and the second special game state is set so that the winning frequency is relatively low, and the number of prize balls that can be obtained is set. There is a difference.

(Flow of the game)
Next, the basic flow of the game will be described with reference to FIG. 33. FIG. 33 is a block diagram showing the flow of the game.

In the first normal gaming state corresponding to the low probability mode and the low frequency support mode, the jackpot lottery is executed by winning a prize in the lower operating port 62a arranged in the gaming area PE (left route). The first normal game state is set so that the player's advantage is lower than that of the other normal game states.

When various jackpot results are obtained in the first normal game state, the game shifts to the first special game state (open / close execution mode). In the first special game state, the advantageous entry portion 314 is opened according to the type of jackpot result. When a ball enters the advantageous entry unit 314 during the first special game state, the lottery mode after the end of the first special game state becomes the high probability mode. If the ball does not enter the advantageous entry unit 314 during the first special game state, the lottery mode after the end of the first special game state becomes the low probability mode.

Specifically, when the first special game state this time is triggered by the 8R normal jackpot result or the 2R normal jackpot result, the entry into the advantageous entry section 314 is substantially avoided. Therefore, the gaming state after the end of the first special gaming state becomes the fourth normal gaming state corresponding to the low probability mode and the high frequency support mode. When the fourth normal game state is maintained until the number of game times executed in the fourth normal game state reaches the specified number (50 times in the present embodiment), and the number of executed game times reaches the specified number. It shifts to the first normal game state set so that the player's advantage is lower than the fourth normal game state. Regarding the fourth normal game state, although the number of games is limited, the game can be advanced while suppressing the decrease in the number of balls held by the support of the electric accessory 71. Then, since it can be expected that the ball enters the right operating port 63a, which is given preferential treatment to the player in distributing the jackpot results, the second normal game state and the third normal game state, which are more advantageous than the fourth normal game state, are expected. It will be a chance to shift to the game state.

As described above, when a prize is generated in the right operating port 63a, a special winning result is obtained in most of the lottery based on the prize. That is, in the fourth normal game state, a special hit result is obtained in almost all game times, and the game shifts to the second special game state in each game time. When the state shifts to the second special gaming state, the lower variable winning device 65 is opened, but most of the gaming balls launched to the right route win a prize in the right operating port 63a and from the gaming area PE. It will be discharged, and the winning of the lower variable winning device 65 is suppressed. Hereinafter, the movement of the game ball in the fourth normal game state will be described with reference to the schematic view of FIG. 34.

In the fourth normal gaming state, the opening time of the electric accessory 71 is extended from 0.08 sec to 5.7 sec, so that the number of winnings to the right operating port 63a increases. Then, the fluctuation display time of the through gate display unit DS is shortened from 0.7 sec to 0.2 sec, so that the time (first interval time) in which the electric accessory 71 is maintained in the closed state is shortened, and the right operation is performed. The number of game balls passing through the mouth 63a is reduced. As a result, most of the game balls launched to the right route enter the right operating port 63a.

Specifically, as shown in FIGS. 34 (a) → 34 (b) → 34 (c), the shutter 331 of the electric accessory 71 is in the closed position based on the passage of the game ball through the through gate 66. The upstream passage portion 322 is cut off by moving from the to the open position. As a result, the game ball passing through the upstream passage portion 322 flows into the right operating port 63a. Here, the time required for the game ball to pass over the shutter 331 (the first specific region SE1) is set to be slightly longer than the first interval time, so that the time is directed toward the right route. When the game balls are continuously fired, most of the game balls flow into the right operating port 63a, and the movement to the lower variable winning device 65 side is avoided.

The number of prize balls paid out by winning the lower variable winning device 65 (lower large winning opening 341) is "10", and the prize paid out by winning the right operating ball portion 63 (right operating opening 63a). The number of spheres is more than "1". However, as described above, most of the game balls launched to the right route win the right operating opening 63a, and the winning balls by winning the lower prize opening 341 are rare. Therefore, in the fourth normal game state, the game can be advanced while suppressing the decrease in the number of balls held, but it is practically difficult to increase the number of balls held.

In the present embodiment, when the game balls are continuously fired to the right route in the fourth normal game state, the firing interval time is "0.6 sec", and the closing time of the electric accessory 71 is approximately ". "0.7 sec", the opening time of the electric accessory 71 is "5.7 sec", the time required for the game round is "2 sec", and the time required for the second special game state is "0.8 sec". For the above reasons, when the game balls are continuously fired to the right route in the 4th normal game state, a prize exceeding the holding upper limit of the right operating port 63a, that is, an over winning in which no new holding information is acquired. Will occur frequently. Even in this case, since the prize ball based on the winning of the right operating port 63a is secured, the reduction speed of the possessed ball is obviously slowed down.

Returning to the explanation of FIG. 33, when the first special game state of this time is triggered by the 6R probability variation jackpot result A to 6R probability variation jackpot result E or the 2R probability variation jackpot result, the launch of the game ball toward the right route is continued. As long as this is done, the ball will enter the advantageous ball entry section 314. Therefore, in most cases, the gaming state after the end of the first special gaming state becomes the second normal gaming state corresponding to the high probability mode and the high frequency support mode.

In the second normal game state, the second normal game state is maintained and executed until the number of game times executed in the second normal game state reaches a specified number (10 to 100 times in the present embodiment). When the number of games played reaches the specified number, the player shifts to the third normal game state, which is more advantageous to the player than the second normal game state.

During the second normal game state, the game count counter is displayed on the display screen 75a of the symbol display device 75 as information corresponding to the number of remaining games until the specified number is reached. The displayed game counter is counted down as the game progresses, and when the specified number is reached and the remaining number reaches "0", the display effect corresponds to the transition to the third normal game state. Will be executed. As a result, the transition to the third normal gaming state is specified.

The second normal game state also corresponds to the high frequency support mode as in the fourth normal game state, and the game can be advanced while suppressing the decrease of the number of balls held by the support of the electric accessory 71. At this time, although the lower variable winning device 65 is opened by winning the right operating port 63a, most of the game balls launched to the right route win the right operating port 63a and move to the downstream side of the right operating port 63a. Reaching to the arranged lower variable winning device 65 is suppressed. Therefore, it is practically difficult to increase the number of balls held in the second normal game state as in the fourth normal game state. Please refer to FIG. 34 for the flow of the game ball in the second normal game state.

When the number of reserved information (number of pending information) is "3" to "4" in the second normal game state, the variable display time is "1 sec", and the variable display time in the fourth normal game state (the variable display time). It is shorter than "2.5 sec"). By shortening the variable display time in this way, the second normal game state is differentiated so that the progress speed of the game is faster than that of the fourth normal game state.

When the number of game times digested without a big hit result is reached in the second normal game state, the support mode is switched from the high frequency support mode to the low frequency support mode. In the present embodiment, unlike the high-frequency support mode, the upper limit of the number of games is not set in the high-probability mode. Therefore, when the specified number is reached, the game shifts to the third normal gaming state corresponding to the high probability mode and the low frequency support mode.

As described above, when a prize is generated in the right operating port 63a, a special winning result is obtained in most of the lottery based on the prize. That is, in the third normal game state, a special hit result is obtained in almost all game times, and the game shifts to the second special game state in each game time. This point is the same as the second normal game state and the fourth normal game state.

However, when the state shifts to the second special game state, the lower variable winning device 65 will be opened, but a part of the game ball launched to the right route passes through the right operating port 63a and goes down. Heading toward the side variable winning device 65, the number of balls held will increase as a result of winning the lower variable winning device 65. Hereinafter, the movement of the game ball in the third normal game state will be described with reference to the schematic views of FIGS. 35 to 36.

The third normal game state corresponds to the low frequency support mode, the opening time of the electric accessory 71 is shortened from "5.7 sec" to "0.08 sec", and the fluctuation display of the through gate display unit DS. The time is extended from "0.2 sec" to "0.7 sec". That is, the period in which the electric accessory 71 is in the closed state becomes longer, and the period in which the electric accessory 71 is in the open state becomes shorter. Here, as described above, the shutter 331 is maintained in the closed state as the sum "1.2 sec" of the variable display time "0.7 sec" and the confirmed display time "0.5 sec" of the pattern on the through gate display unit DS. Time, that is, the actual interval time (hereinafter referred to as the second interval time). The second interval time is set to be longer than the time required for the game ball to pass above the shutter 331 (first specific region SE1). Therefore, a part of the game ball launched to the right route passes through the right operating port 63a and heads for the lower variable winning device 65. That is, the number of winnings to the right operating port 63a is reduced, and the number of game balls passing through the right operating port 63a is increased. As a result, the number of prizes in the lower prize opening 341 increases.

Specifically, as shown in FIGS. 35 (a) → 35 (b) → 35 (c), the shutter 331 of the electric accessory 71 is in the closed position based on the passage of the game ball through the through gate 66. The upstream passage portion 322 is cut off by moving from the to the open position. As a result, the game ball passing through the upstream passage portion 322 flows into the right operating port 63a. When a prize is generated in the right operating port 63a, most of the lottery results are special winning results, and the lower variable winning device 65 is opened.

As shown in FIG. 35 (d) → FIG. 36 (e), when a game ball passing through the right operating port 63a wins a prize on the lower variable winning device 65 side, “10” prize balls are paid out. The number of prize balls paid out by winning the lower variable winning device 65 (lower large winning opening 341) is the number of prize balls paid out by winning the right operating entry unit 63 (right operating opening 63a). There are more than one. As a result, the number of balls held will increase.

Here, the time required to pass through the first specific region SE1 is longer than the firing cycle "0.6 sec" of the game ball, and the electric accessory 71 is in the open state → closed state → open state. The interval time is "1.2 sec". The time "0.08 sec" for which the electric accessory 71 is maintained in the open state is longer than the time required for the game ball mounted on the shutter 331 to pass through the right operating port 63a. Therefore, when the game balls are continuously fired to the right route, a prize of 1 is generated in the right operating port 63a every time the electric accessory 71 is opened, and the ball entering unit 70 is reached. Approximately half of the game balls will win a prize in the right operating port 63a.

Further, in the third normal game state, when the number of stored information (holding number) is "3" to "4", the variation display time of the pattern of the display unit DR for the right operating port is 0.5 sec. Yes, the confirmed display time is 1 sec, and the ending time at the end of the second special game state is 0.2 sec. That is, the interval time required for the lower variable winning device 65 to change from the accepted state to the non-accepted state to the accepted state when the transition to the second special gaming state is continuous is "1.7 sec". The time required for the game ball that has reached the lower variable winning device 65 to pass through the second specific region SE2 is longer than the interval time. Therefore, among the game balls that have passed through the right operating port 63a, most of the game balls that have reached the lower variable winning device 65 will be awarded to the lower large winning opening 341 (FIG. 36 (e), FIG. 36 (f)). In general, although some thinning may occur, about one in two game balls launched on the right route and reaching the entry unit 70 win the right operating port 63a, and about one in two wins the lower prize opening. A configuration that wins 341 has been realized.

In the third normal game state, the number of prizes and the winning rate in the right operating port 63a are not as high as those in the second normal game state and the fourth normal game state, but the ball entering the right operating port 63a is constant. The game proceeds so that the number of pending information (number of pending information) related to the right operating port 63a changes from "3" to "4". However, strictly speaking, in the 2nd normal game state and the 4th normal game state, the winning number is frequently exceeded so as to greatly exceed the upper limit of the number of holds, whereas in the 3rd normal game state, the number of holds is increased. Only a few prizes will be awarded that slightly exceed the upper limit. However, considering that new hold information is not acquired when a prize exceeding the upper limit occurs, the actual transition of the number of holds is not affected as much as the difference in the number of prizes and the prize rate. In other words, in the second normal game state and the fourth normal game state, a prize is likely to occur so as to exceed the upper limit of the number of holds, and a prize in which hold information is not acquired as compared with the third normal game state is obtained. It is differentiated to be more.

Here, the condition for shifting from the second normal gaming state to the third normal gaming state is to digest the upper limit (specified number of times or time saving number of times) set at the time of shifting to the second normal gaming state. However, this upper limit differs depending on the type of jackpot result that triggered the transition to the second normal game state. For example, in the 2R probability variation jackpot result, "50" times is set as the upper limit, in the 6R probability variation jackpot result A, "100" times is set as the upper limit, in the 6R probability variation jackpot result B, "70" times is set as the upper limit, and 6R. In the probability variation jackpot result C, "50" times is set as the upper limit, in the 6R probability variation jackpot result D, "30" times is set as the upper limit, and in the 6R probability variation jackpot result E, "10" times is set as the upper limit. That is, the probability of transition to the third normal gaming state increases in the order of 6R probability variation jackpot result A <6R probability variation jackpot result B <6R probability variation jackpot result C, 2R probability variation jackpot result <6R probability variation jackpot result D <6R probability variation jackpot result E. It is configured as follows. By providing a difference in the transition hurdle to the third normal game state in this way, diversification of the game is realized.

If a big hit result is obtained in the third normal gaming state, the game shifts to the first special gaming state. If the first special gaming state this time is triggered by the 16R probability variation jackpot result A or the 16R probability variation jackpot result B, immediately after the end of the first special gaming state, it returns to the third normal gaming state and has. It will be a chance to increase the number of balls. On the other hand, if the third normal game state of this time is triggered by any of the 2R probability variation jackpot result, the 6R probability variation jackpot result A to the 6R probability variation jackpot result E, after the first special gaming state is completed, The game shifts to the second normal gaming state, and the game is performed with the aim of shifting to the third normal gaming state again.

In the present embodiment, although there is a chance of returning to the third normal gaming state in any of the normal gaming states of the second normal gaming state and the fourth normal gaming state, the second normal gaming state is passed through. When the return to the third normal game state is taken into consideration, a difference is provided so that the return to the second normal game state is easier than the fourth normal game state.

As described in detail above, the pachinko machine 10 shown in the present embodiment is configured to generate two states in which the number of balls held is different, and the combination of these two increases is advantageous for the player. It suppresses the progress of the game from becoming monotonous in the game state. Here, with reference to FIG. 37, the relationship between the flow of the game and the ball held by the pachinko machine 10 will be supplementarily described.

When the game ball is launched to the left route in the first normal game state, the number of balls held will decrease as the game progresses. In such a situation where investment continues, a big hit result is obtained, and when the player shifts to the first special gaming state, the number of balls held increases significantly due to frequent winning of the upper variable winning device 64. Specifically, the first special gaming state is configured such that substantially nine balls can be inserted during the round game. Since 14 game balls are paid out for each prize, 126 game balls can be obtained in one round. Then, since this round game is repeated a plurality of times after an interval time of 2 sec, it becomes a chance to acquire a large number of game balls at one time.

In the first round in the first special gaming state, the advantageous entry portion 314 is opened. When a ball enters the advantageous entry section 314 in this round, the state shifts to the second normal gaming state after the end of the first special gaming state. In the second normal game state, the support mode of the electric accessory 71 becomes the high frequency support mode. In the high-frequency support mode, most of the game balls launched to the right route win the right operating port 63a, but the number of winning balls paid out by winning the right operating port 63a is one. Then, considering that a part of the game balls launched to the right route is discharged from the game area PE without winning any prize ball-compatible ball entry portion, the ball is held even in the second normal game state. Will gradually decrease. However, since the prize ball can be obtained by winning the right operating port 63a, the rate of decrease of the ball possessed is slower than that in the first normal gaming state.

As described above, when the number of game times digested without a big hit result after the transition to the second normal gaming state reaches the above upper limit, the transition to the third normal gaming state is performed. In the third normal game state, although the high probability mode is maintained, the support mode is switched to the low frequency support mode, and the number of game balls passing through the right operating port 63a increases. Then, most of the game balls that have passed through the right operating port 63a will be awarded to the lower prize opening 341. As described above, about half of the game balls that have reached the winning unit 70 go to the lower variable winning device 65, and every time the lower variable winning device 65 is in the receiving state in the second special gaming state. Approximately one prize will be generated. Since the number of prize balls paid out by winning the lower variable winning device 65 is 10, the number of balls held increases by 10 each time the player shifts to the second special gaming state. That is, the number of balls held increases by about 10 for each game. In view of these circumstances, when the player shifts to the third normal gaming state, the transition to the third special gaming state may be repeated until the next big hit result is obtained. It will be a chance to greatly increase the number of balls.

(Time reduction)
As described in detail above, when the second normal gaming state corresponding to the high-probability mode and the high-frequency support mode is shifted to the third normal gaming state corresponding to the high-probability mode and the low-frequency support mode, the ball passes through the right-hand actuated ball entry unit 63. The number of game balls to be played increases, and those game balls enter the lower variable winning device 65, and many prize balls are paid out. As a result, the number of balls held by the player starts to increase. The third normal gaming state is continued until a jackpot result (normal jackpot result or probability variation jackpot result) is obtained during the third normal gaming state.

It becomes a big hit result and becomes a special hit result repeatedly until the third normal game state ends, and each time it shifts to the second special game state, it becomes a chance to greatly increase the number of balls held. Therefore, it is expected that the attention to the game is further increased in the third normal game state as compared with the second normal game state in which the number of balls held is not expected to increase, and the player's willingness to play is increased. The present embodiment is characterized in that by changing the rhythm of the game progress in accordance with such a change in the game state, a device is made to further enhance the uplifting feeling of the player as the advantage increases. It is one of. Hereinafter, the configuration related to the rhythm change of the game progress will be supplementarily described with reference to FIG. 31 again. As described above, FIG. 31 is a schematic diagram showing a variable display time and a fixed display time set in the game times corresponding to the deviation result (specifically, the complete deviation result not corresponding to the reach display) or the special hit result.

The variation display time of the pattern on the display unit DL for the lower operating port provided in the main display unit 81 is the same in the second normal game state and the third normal game state (FIGS. 31 (a2) and (a3). )reference). On the other hand, a difference is provided so that the variation display time of the pattern in the display unit DR for the right operating port is shorter in the third normal game state than in the second normal game state.

Specifically, in the second normal game state and the third normal game state, most of the lottery results based on the entry of the ball into the right operating port 63a are special hit results or miss results. As shown in FIG. 31 (b2), in the second normal gaming state, when the number of holdings related to the right operating port 63a is "0", the variable display time corresponding to the special hit result or the miss result is "13 sec". When the number of holds is "1", the variable display time corresponding to the special hit result or the miss result is "8 sec", and when the number of holds is "2", the variable display time corresponding to the special hit result or the miss result is "8 sec". Is "4 sec", and when the number of pending numbers is "3" to "4", the variable display time corresponding to the special hit result or the miss result is "1 sec". On the other hand, in the third normal gaming state, as shown in FIG. 31 (b3), when the number of holdings related to the right operating port 63a is "0" to "2", a special hit result or a miss result is obtained. The corresponding variable display time is "4 sec", and when the number of holdings is "3" to "4", the variable display time corresponding to the special hit result or the miss result is "0.5 sec".

As described above, in the second normal game state and the third normal game state, the game ball launched to the right route enters the right operating port 63a and is avoided from entering the lower operating port 62a. Then, under the situation where the game balls are continuously fired to the right route, the number of reservations related to the right operating port 63a is near the upper limit in both the second normal game state and the third normal game state (“3” to “3”. "4") is changed so that the ball enters constantly. Therefore, when the game balls are continuously fired to the right route, the fluctuation display time in most of the game times (the game machine related to the right operating port 63a) is "1 sec" in the second normal game state. In the third normal gaming state, the variation display time in most of the gaming times (the gaming times related to the right operating port 63a) is "0.5 sec".

Here, with reference to FIG. 38, the flow of the game in each game state will be described. FIG. 38 (a) is a timing chart showing the flow of the game in the second normal game state corresponding to the high probability mode and the high frequency support mode, and FIG. 38 (b) is the third normal game corresponding to the high probability mode and the low frequency support mode. It is a timing chart which shows the flow of a game in a state. In addition, in FIG. 38A, the number of reservations related to the right operating port 63a changes from "3" to "4" as the game progresses, and a special hit result is obtained at each game round related to the right operating port 63a. The case where the second normal gaming state and the second special gaming state loop is illustrated. Further, in FIG. 38 (b), the number of reservations related to the right operating port 63a changes from "3" to "4" as the game progresses, and a special hit result is obtained at each game round related to the right operating port 63a. The case where the third normal gaming state and the second special gaming state loop is illustrated.

As shown in FIG. 38 (a), in the second normal game state, after the variable display (1 sec) of the display unit DR for the right operating port is executed, the final display (1 sec) of the pattern corresponding to the lottery result is displayed. At the end (completion) timing, the game shifts to the second special game state. As a result, the lower variable winning device 65 switches from the closed state to the open state. Although the lower variable winning device 65 is maintained in the open state for "0.8 sec", most of the game balls flowing down the right route flow into the right operating port 63a and go to the lower variable winning device 65. Winning is virtually avoided. At the timing when the lower variable winning device 65 returns to the closed state and the ending time (0.2 sec) of the second special gaming state has elapsed, the variable display of the display unit DR for the right operating port is started again. After that, the game proceeds in such a way that the above-mentioned series of steps is repeated until a time-saving number of digestions or a big hit result is obtained.

As shown in FIG. 38 (b), in the third normal game state, after the variable display (0.5 sec) of the display unit DR for the right operating port is executed, the final display (1 sec) of the pattern corresponding to the lottery result is executed. ) Is completed (completed), the second special gaming state is entered, and the lower variable winning device 65 is switched from the closed state to the open state. Then, the lower variable winning device 65 is maintained in the open state for "0.8 sec" as in the case of passing through the second normal gaming state. Most of the game balls flowing down the right route flow into the right operating port 63a, but some of them pass through the right operating entry portion 63 and head toward the lower variable winning device 65. Then, each time those game balls win a prize in the lower variable winning device 65, a large number of prize balls will be paid out. When the lower variable winning device 65 returns to the closed state and the ending time (0.2 sec) has elapsed, the variable display of the display unit DR for the right operating port is started again, and thereafter, the first jackpot result is obtained. The game progresses in such a way that the above-mentioned series of flows is repeated until the transition to the special game state is made.

In the third normal game state, after the variation display of the pattern is started on the display unit DR for the right operating port, the confirmation display → the variation of the pattern on the display unit DR for the right operating port again after the second special game state. The interval time (2.5 sec) until the display is started is the final display → the second special game state after the variable display of the pattern is started on the display unit DR for the right operating port in the second normal game state. It is shorter than the interval time (3 sec) until the variable display of the pattern on the display unit DR for the right operating port is started again. That is, in the third normal game state, the progress speed of the game is slightly increased as compared with the second normal game state.

In the third normal gaming state, the ball enters the lower variable winning device 65, so that the attention to the second special gaming state increases. Therefore, the second special gaming state becomes more conspicuous than the second normal gaming state in which the ball entering the lower variable winning device 65 is substantially avoided. When going back and forth between the normal gaming state and the second special gaming state, it is highly possible that the player is given the impression that the progress of the game is slowed down by the conspicuous second special gaming state. It is feared that this will hinder the enhancement of the player's feeling of exhilaration. In this respect, as shown in the present embodiment, in the third normal game state, by increasing the progress speed of the game as compared with the second normal game state, it is possible to make it difficult to give such an impression, and the third By shifting to the normal gaming state, the effect of enhancing the uplifting feeling of the player can be suitably exhibited.

Further, when the lower variable winning device 65 is continuously switched to the open state in the third normal gaming state, the interval time (1.7 sec) in which the lower variable winning device 65 is maintained in the closed state is the second. When the lower variable winning device 65 continuously switches to the open state in the normal game state, it is shorter than the interval time (2.2 sec) in which the lower variable winning device 65 is maintained in the closed state, and the lower variable winning device 65 is changed. It is less likely that the game ball that has reached the winning device 65 will pass through the lower variable winning device 65. In this way, by shortening the interval time waiting for opening, it is possible to strengthen the impression that the game is accelerating while suppressing a significant change in time.

As described above, in the present embodiment, the support mode of the electric accessory 71 attached to the right-side actuating entry portion 63 can be switched between the low-frequency support mode and the high-frequency support mode, so that the right-actuating port It is possible to make a difference in the frequency of entering the 63a. In consideration of such circumstances, it is considered preferable to configure the variable display time to be shorter in the high frequency support mode in which the ball enters frequently in order to realize the smooth progress of the game. However, as described above, when comparing the high frequency support mode and the low frequency support mode, the high frequency support mode is preferential in that a large number of prize balls based on the entry into the right operating port 63a can be obtained. However, for the number of reserved information acquired based on the entry of a ball, a storage upper limit is set for the reserved information, and the storage upper limit is always exceeded in both the first normal gaming state and the third normal gaming state. There is no difference in that such a ball enters. Therefore, in the present embodiment, the speed of the game progress described above is realized by intentionally shortening the variable display time in the third normal game state corresponding to the low frequency support mode.

In the third normal gaming state, by repeating the transition to the second special gaming state, it is possible to expect an increase in the number of balls held by the player, which is different from the second normal gaming state. Then, in the third normal game state, it is possible to emphasize the lightness of the game by looping the third normal game state / the second special game state with good rhythm. Here, in the present embodiment, the game times related to the lower operating port 62a and the game times related to the right operating port 63a can proceed at the same time (performed in parallel), and FIG. 11 shows. As shown, there is no special hit result in the game times related to the lower operating port 62a. That is, if the game rotation related to the lower operating port 62a is executed even though the game has shifted to the third normal game state, the lightness in the third normal game state described above may not be transmitted well to the player, or it is useless. It may give the impression that the game has progressed as if it had been lost. One of the features of this embodiment is that it is devised in consideration of such circumstances. Hereinafter, the outline of the device will be described with reference to FIG. 39.

As described above, during the first special gaming state, neither the game times related to the lower operating port 62a nor the game times related to the right operating port 63a progress. Therefore, when the hold information related to the lower operating port 62a during the first normal gaming state results in a probable change jackpot and the player shifts to the second normal gaming state, the lower operating port 62a acquired during the first normal gaming state There is a possibility that the pending information related to the above will be carried over to the second normal gaming state.

In the second normal game state, the number of time reductions is basically set to be "10 times" to "100 times". Each time reduction number is subtracted by executing the game times related to the lower operating port 62a or the game times related to the right operating port 63a, and the second normal gaming state continues until the time saving number becomes "0 times". In that case, the first special gaming state is directly shifted to the third normal gaming state without going through. In the present embodiment, the number of time reductions set in the second normal game state is the third normal game even if the hold information related to the lower operating port 62a remains when the state shifts to the second normal game state. It is stipulated that all the reserved information can be digested before the transition to the state (during the second normal game state). In this way, by avoiding the carry-over of the hold information to the third normal game state, the game proceeds based on the hold information related to the right operating port 63a after the transition to the third normal game state. .. Hereinafter, a specific configuration for realizing such a function will be supplementarily described with reference to FIGS. 40 and 41. FIG. 40 exemplifies a case where the number of holdings related to the right operating port 63a is "0" at the time of transition to the second normal gaming state, and FIG. An example shows a case where the number of such reservations has reached the upper limit (“4”).

As shown in FIG. 40, when the number of reservations related to the lower operating port 62a reaches the upper limit of storage (“4”) at the timing of shifting to the second normal gaming state through the first special gaming state, the first 2 In the normal game state, the game times related to the lower operating port 62a are executed for the upper limit of memory (4 times). In the second normal game state, the variation display time of the pattern on the display unit DL for the lower operation port is "0.5 sec" and the final display time is "0.5 sec" regardless of the number of holds related to the lower operation port 62a. ing. Therefore, the required time required to execute the game times for the upper limit is (variable display time: 0.5 sec + fixed display time: 0.5 sec) × storage upper limit: 4 = 4 sec.

Since the route advantageous to the player is changed from the left route to the right route with the transition to the first special gaming state, the hold information related to the right operating port 63a is naturally acquired by launching the game ball to the right route. Will be done. However, during the first special gaming state, the upper variable winning device 64 arranged on the upstream side of the right operating opening 63a is switched to the open state, and the flow of the game ball toward the right operating entry portion 63 is hindered. Therefore, although the right-hand actuated ball entry portion 63 is switched to the open state even during the first special game state, most of the game balls do not reach the right-side actuated ball entry portion 63 and enter the right actuating opening 63a. Is suppressed.

In the example shown in FIG. 40, when the first special gaming state ends and the second normal gaming state is entered, a ball enters the right operating port 63a, and accordingly, a pattern is displayed on the display unit DR for the right operating port. Fluctuation display has started. At this shift timing, since the number of holdings related to the right operating port 63a is “0”, the fluctuation display time in the display unit DR for the right operating port is “13 sec”. Most of the game times related to the right operating port 63a result in a special hit result, but there is a grace period of at least "13 sec" before the confirmation display corresponding to the special hit result is executed in the right operating port 63a. .. This time is longer than the time required to digest all the reserved information related to the lower operating port 62a described above. Therefore, all the reserved information related to the lower operating port 62a is digested until the variable display of the pattern on the display unit DR for the right operating port is completed, that is, before the time saving number of times that triggers the transition to the third normal gaming state is exhausted. The Rukoto. The minimum number of time reductions to be set is larger than the upper limit of the reserved information related to the lower operating port 62a (specifically, the upper limit number + 1). Therefore, the transition to the third normal gaming state does not occur while the hold information related to the lower operating port 62a remains.

Here, as described above, most of the game balls launched to the game ball to the right route during the first special game state enter the upper variable winning device 64, but some of the game balls enter the upper variable winning device. Passing through 64, the ball enters the right operating port 63a. Most of the first special gaming states that go through when shifting from the first normal gaming state to the second normal gaming state are jackpot results with a relatively small number of rounds (for example, 6R probability variation jackpot results), and go to the right-hand actuated ball entry unit 63. Although the number of flowing game balls is suppressed, it cannot be denied that the number of reservations related to the right operating port 63a may reach the upper limit of memory during the first special game state due to accidental bias or the like. The right operating port display unit DR is set so that the larger the number of holdings related to the right operating port 63a, the shorter the variation display time of the pattern. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 31, when the number of holds is "4", the variable display time is shortened to "1 sec". Therefore, unlike the example shown in FIG. 40, it is impossible to digest all the reserved information related to the lower operating port 62a in one game round related to the right operating port 63a. However, even in such a case, all the reserved information related to the lower operating port 62a is digested before shifting to the third normal gaming state. The grounds for this will be described below with reference to the timing chart of FIG. 41.

In the example shown in FIG. 41, the number of holdings related to the lower operating port 62a has reached the upper limit of storage (“4”) at the timing of shifting to the second normal gaming state through the first special gaming state. In this case, after the transition to the second normal gaming state, the gaming times related to the lower operating port 62a are executed for the upper limit of memory (4 times). In the second normal game state, the variation display time of the pattern on the display unit DL for the lower operation port is "0.5 sec" and the final display time is "0.5 sec" regardless of the number of holds related to the lower operation port 62a. ing. Therefore, the required time required to execute the game times for the upper limit is (variable display time: 0.5 sec + fixed display time 0.5 sec) × storage upper limit: 4 = 4 sec.

If the number of holdings related to the right operating port 63a has reached the upper limit (“4”) at the transition timing to the second normal gaming state, the display for the right operating port is displayed at the transition timing to the second normal gaming state. The variable display of the pattern in the part DR is started. The fluctuation display time set in this fluctuation display is "1 sec". Since this hold information corresponds to the special hit result, the variable display time (1 sec) and the fixed display time (1 sec) of the pattern on the display unit DR for the right operating port have elapsed after the transition to the second normal game state. At the same time, the game shifts to the second special game state. That is, the number of reserved information related to the lower operating port 62a that is digested before the transition to the second special gaming state is two, and even after the end of the second special gaming state, there are two holding information related to the lower operating port 62a. It remains.

The time required for the second special game state is "1 sec", which is the sum of the time (0.8 sec) for the lower variable winning device 65 to be maintained in the open state and the ending time (0.2 sec). However, during this period, neither the game times related to the lower operating port 62a nor the game times related to the right operating port 63a progress, and at the timing when the second special gaming state ends and the second normal gaming state is restored. The game times related to the lower operating port 62a and the game times related to the right operating port 63a are started at the same time.

Here, even during the second special game state, the main entry destination of the game ball launched to the right route is the right operating port 63a. Therefore, if the game ball is continuously launched toward the right route, the ball enters the right operating port 63a during the second special gaming state, and the number of reserved balls related to the right operating port 63a is increased. The upper limit of memory may be reached again. In the example shown in FIG. 41, the number of reservations related to the right operating port 63a has reached the upper limit of memory during the second special gaming state, and is executed by the display unit DR for the right operating port after returning to the second normal gaming state. The variable display time of the pattern is "1 sec".

In the game times related to the lower operating port 62a, the variable display time is set to be "0.5 sec" regardless of the number of remaining holdings. Therefore, during the second game round related to the right operating port 63a, the third and fourth game rounds related to the lower operating port 62a are completed. That is, even if the game times related to the right operating port 63a are digested in the shortest time, all the game times related to the lower operating port 62a are performed while the game times related to the right operating port 63a are executed twice. It will be digested. The sum (6 times) of the game times (4 times) related to the lower operating port 62a and the game times (2 times) related to the right operating port 63a is the minimum value of the number of time reductions set in the second normal gaming state. Since it is less than (10 times), all the reserved information related to the lower operating port 62a is digested before the time saving number of times that triggers the transition to the third normal gaming state.

In other words, in the present embodiment, as long as the game ball is fired to the right route during the second normal game state, all the pending information related to the lower operating port 62a is all settled by the transition to the third normal game state. It is digested, and at least in the third normal game state, the game can be advanced only by the game times related to the right operating port 63a.

In order to realize such a function, it is possible to set the minimum value of the number of time reductions to 6 times instead of 10.

As described in detail above, the transition from the first normal gaming state to the second normal gaming state is configured via the first special gaming state, but from the second normal gaming state to the third normal gaming state. Is configured to shift directly, so that when the progress speed of the game is accelerated at the time of transition from the second normal gaming state to the third normal gaming state, the difference can be highlighted. With such a configuration, the change can be easily understood without excessively increasing the difference in the variation display time of the pattern between the second normal game state and the third normal game state. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the variable display time of the pattern from becoming extremely short by the configuration in which the progress speed of the game is changed, and to secure an opportunity to visually confirm the variable display of the pattern.

If the right-side actuating ball entry unit 63 is configured to be openable and closable, the frequency of entry of the game ball can be increased depending on the situation. By combining such a configuration with a configuration in which the variation display time of the pattern on the operation port display unit becomes shorter as the number of stored information is increased, it is possible to suitably increase the progress speed of the game. Here, the variable display time when the number of stored information on hold has reached the upper limit of storage is set as a target for shortening the period associated with the transition from the second normal gaming state, which is advantageous to the player, to the third normal gaming state, which is more advantageous. With the configuration including, the progress speed of the game can be increased in a situation where the ball enters the right-side actuating ball entry unit 63 frequently. Therefore, it is possible to preferably exert the effect of increasing the progress speed of the game with the transition from the second normal game state to the third normal game state.

In the second normal game state and the third normal game state, the fixed display time of the picture on the display unit DR for the right operating port is common, and the variable display time of the picture is set to be longer or shorter before and after switching the game state with respect to the fixed display time. If the configurations are different, the player paying attention to the pattern can compare the lengths of the variable display times based on the same standard (common fixed display time). As a result, it is possible to inform the player in an easy-to-understand manner that the progress speed of the game is increasing.

By shortening the variation display time of the pattern for the right operating port 63a, which is the main entry destination in the third normal game state, the effect of shortening the time can be suitably exhibited. Then, for the lower operating port 62a, which is not the main entry destination, the variation display time of the pattern is the same in the second normal game state and the third normal game state, so that the progress speed of the game is changed, which is refreshing. It is possible to prevent the improvement of the pattern from becoming a factor that excessively complicates the display control process of the pattern.

In the configuration shown in the present embodiment, the number of balls held can be expected to increase by repeating the transition to the second special gaming state in the third normal gaming state. Here, the pace of transition to the second special game state depends on the digestion speed of the game times. As described above, in the third normal game state, by increasing this digestion speed from the second normal game state, the increase speed of the holding ball is changed (faster) without excessively complicating various structures provided in the game area or the like. ) Can be made.

Further, when the transition to the second special gaming state occurs frequently in the third normal gaming state, the game progress may be delayed by securing the execution time of the second special gaming state. This can be a factor that hinders the increase in the progress speed of the game in the three normal game states. Therefore, if a special hit result is obtained in the second normal game state, the variation display time of the pattern is shortened so that the game can be played even when the transition to the second special game state is repeated. The progress speed can be increased to improve the exhilaration of the game.

When a probability change jackpot result is obtained in the first normal game state and the game shifts to the second normal game state, the number of game times that can be executed in the second normal game state is the number of time reductions (corresponding to the "reference number"). Set. Then, when the number of game times executed in the second normal game state reaches the set number of time reductions, the game shifts to the third normal game state. Here, the number of time reductions is stipulated so that all the special information related to the first ball entry portion can be digested during the second normal game state. Therefore, when the second normal game state → the third normal game state is changed without a big hit result, all the reserved information related to the lower operating port 62a is digested during the second normal game state. , The carry-over to the third normal game state will be avoided. That is, in the third normal game state, the game times proceed based on the hold information related to the right operating port 63a. In this way, by suppressing the intervention of the game times related to the lower operating port 62a, it is possible to advance the game in the third normal game state with good rhythm. In particular, in a configuration in which the lottery based on the right operating port 63a is given preferential treatment over the lottery based on the lower operating port 62a, the hold information related to the lower operating port 62a must be digested before shifting to the third normal gaming state. Therefore, it is possible to suppress a decrease in the superiority of the player in the third normal gaming state.

(Valid period of entry)
Regarding the right-hand actuated ball entry portion 63 shown in the present embodiment, the entrance portion (right actuating port 63a) is enlarged in order to increase the ball entry frequency of the game ball. Specifically, as shown in the schematic view of FIG. 42, the width dimension of the right operating port 63a is set to twice the diameter dimension of the game ball so that a plurality of game balls can pass through the right operating port 63a at the same time. Is also formed to be large. The game ball that has entered the right operating port 63a will be guided to the collection passage provided behind the game board 60 through a narrow passage for entering the ball so that a plurality of game balls cannot pass at the same time. .. The detection sensor 391d is arranged at an intermediate position of the ball entry passage as a ball entry detection means for detecting a game ball that has entered the right operating port 63a. That is, all the game balls that have entered the right operating port 63a pass through the detection sensor 391d (specifically, the detection area DE) and head toward the collection passage.

Here, when the right operating port 63a is enlarged to expand the acceptance range of the game ball in the right operating port 63a, the game ball flowing into the right operating port 63a is detected in the detection area due to the above-mentioned passage structure or the like. There is a certain time lag before passing through DE. In consideration of such a time lag, the effective time of the detection sensor 391d, specifically, the detection sensor 391 by the main control device 162, is adjusted according to the time required for the game ball flowing into the right operating port 63a to reach the detection area DE. The time allowed to read (accept) information from is extended (see FIG. 27). That is, even after the right-side actuating ball entry unit 63 is switched to the closed state, the detection of the game ball is valid until the required time elapses, and the game ball entered just before the switching to the closed state is included in the detection target. By making this possible, it is possible to prevent the player from being unable to obtain the privilege even though the ball has entered the right operating port 63a, which is a factor that reduces the player's willingness to play.

It should be noted that arranging the detection sensor 391d away from the right operating port 63a is not only preferable in regulating the detection area DE so that a plurality of game balls cannot pass at once in order to ensure the detection accuracy, but also an illegal tool. It is also preferable to suppress unauthorized access to the detection sensor 391d using the above.

In the present embodiment, the right-hand actuated ball entry unit 63 is formed by executing the variable display and the definite display of the pattern on the through-gate display unit DS by utilizing the effective time of the detection sensor 391d for the right actuating port 63a. One of the features is that it suppresses the extension during the interval time that is maintained in the closed state. Hereinafter, the relationship between the effective time and the pattern display on the through-gate display unit DS will be described with reference to FIG. 43. FIG. 43 (a) is a timing chart illustrating the flow of the game in the low frequency support mode, and FIG. 43 (b) is a timing chart illustrating the flow of the game machine in the high frequency support mode.

In the low-frequency support mode, the time for which the right-side actuating ball entry portion 63 is maintained in the open state is "0.08 sec". This opening time is sufficient for the game ball located on the shutter 331 arranged at the closed position to pass through the right operating port 63a when the game ball is dropped by its own weight due to the displacement of the shutter 331 to the opening position. Is set to. The detection sensor 391d was activated at the timing when the right-hand actuated ball entry unit 63 was switched to the open state, and was activated for "0.7 sec" even after the right-side actuated ball entry unit 63 was switched to the closed state. It will be maintained as it is.

Here, in the through-gate display unit DS, while the right-side actuating ball entry unit 63 is in the open state, the variation display of the pattern is not executed even if the electric service hold is stored. The variable display of the pattern is started at the timing when the right-side actuating ball entry unit 63 is switched to the closed state. That is, the configuration is such that the variable display of the pattern is started under the condition that the detection sensor 391d is enabled.

Since the variation display time of the pattern on the through gate display unit DS is "0.7 sec" during the low frequency support mode, the final display is started at the timing when the above effective time has elapsed.

The final display time of the pattern on the through-gate display unit DS is "0.5 sec". In the example of FIG. 43A, the case where the support lottery is won is illustrated, and the right-side actuating ball entry portion 63 is switched from the closed state to the open state at the timing when the confirmed display time has elapsed. In this way, when the right-side actuating ball entry unit 63 is repeatedly switched to the open state, the interval time maintained in the closed state is the variation display time of the pattern on the through-gate display unit DS (effective time of the detection sensor 391d). (Over portion: 0.7 sec) and the final display time (0.5 sec) of the pattern on the through-gate display unit DS (1.2 sec). As described above, the time required (1 sec) for the game ball rolling on the shutter 331 to pass through the first specific region SE1 is shorter than the interval time. That is, during the low frequency support mode, a part of the game ball that has reached the right-side actuating ball entry unit 63 passes through the right-side actuating ball-entry unit 63 and heads for the lower variable winning device 65.

In this way, in order to make the variation display of the through-gate display unit DS precede during the effective time of the detection sensor 391d, a part of the ball can be entered into the right-side actuating entry unit 63 while ensuring a certain amount of entry. There is a technical significance that the game ball is encouraged to enter the lower variable winning device 65 side.

On the other hand, in the high-frequency support mode, the time for which the right-side actuating ball entry unit 63 is maintained in the open state is longer than in the low-frequency support mode, and is extended to "5.7 sec". The detection sensor 391d was activated at the timing when the right-hand actuated ball entry unit 63 was switched to the open state, and was activated for "0.7 sec" even after the right-side actuated ball entry unit 63 was switched to the closed state. It will be maintained as it is. This time is the same as in the low frequency support mode.

Here, in the through-gate display unit DS, even if the electric service hold is stored while the right-hand operation entry unit 63 is in the open state, as in the low-frequency support mode. The variation display of the pattern is not executed, and the variation display of the pattern is started at the timing when the right-side actuating ball entry unit 63 is switched to the closed state. That is, the variation display of the pattern is started under the condition that the detection sensor 391d is enabled.

During the high-frequency support mode, the variation display time of the pattern on the through-gate display unit DS is shortened to "0.2 sec". The final display time of the pattern on the through-gate display unit DS is "0.5 sec", and the sum of the variable display time and the final display time (0.7 sec) is the excess of the effective time (0.7 sec). It will be the same length. In the example of FIG. 43B, the case where the support lottery is won is illustrated, and the right-side actuating ball entry portion 63 is switched from the closed state to the open state at the timing when the confirmed display time has elapsed. In this way, when the right-side actuating ball entry unit 63 is repeatedly switched to the open state, the interval time maintained in the closed state is the variation display time of the pattern on the through-gate display unit DS and the through-gate display unit DS. Since the sum (0.7 sec) with the definite display time of the pattern in the above, that is, the excess of the effective time of the detection sensor 391d, the state in which the detection sensor 391d is enabled is substantially continued.

As described above, the time required (1 sec) for the game ball rolling on the shutter 331 to pass through the first specific region SE1 is longer than the interval time. That is, during the high-frequency support mode, most of the game balls that have reached the right-side actuating ball entry unit 63 enter the right-side actuating ball-entry unit 63 and are suppressed from going to the lower variable winning device 65. There is.

The second normal game state corresponding to the high frequency support mode is configured so that the lower variable winning device 65 is hardly hit in order to differentiate from the third normal game state corresponding to the low frequency support mode. There is. By avoiding entering the lower variable winning device 65 in this way, the increase in the number of balls held in the second normal gaming state is suppressed. In the present embodiment, the effective time of the detection sensor 391d is used to execute the variable display and the definite display of the pattern of the through gate display unit DS, so that the right-hand side operating ball is promptly entered at the timing when the effective time has elapsed. The unit 63 is configured to switch to the open state. As a result, the interval time during which the right-side actuating ball entry unit 63 is maintained in the closed state can be suppressed to be shorter than the time required for the game ball to pass through the first specific region SE1.

As shown in the present embodiment, in the configuration in which the right-side actuating ball entry unit 63 frequently switches to the open state in both the low-frequency support mode and the high-frequency support mode, the effective time of the detection sensor 391d is used. By executing the variable display and the final display of the pattern of the display unit DS for the through gate, it is possible to contribute to the smooth progress of the game.

When the right-side actuating ball entry unit 63 is switched from the open state to the closed state, the effective state of ball entry is maintained for a predetermined time even after switching to the closed state. As a result, for example, the game ball that has flowed into the right operating port 63a at the same time as switching to the closed state can also be subject to the privilege grant. This is preferable in order to avoid a factor that lowers the player's willingness to play, such as not being able to obtain the benefits that should be originally obtained. Here, in the configuration shown in the present embodiment, when the electric service hold is stored before the right-side actuating ball entry unit 63 is switched to the closed state, the through-gate display is performed without waiting for the elapse of the effective time. The variable display of the pattern in the part DS is started. In this way, if the variable display of the pattern is started during the effective time and the effective time and the variable display time are overlapped at least in part, the right-side actuating ball entry unit 63 is opened → closed → open. It is possible to prevent the picture variation display time and the final display time of the pattern from becoming extremely short in order to quickly advance the game by switching to. This is preferable in order to improve the degree of attention to the game.

By setting the effective time based on the time required for the game ball to move from the right operating port 63a to the detection area DE, the effective time becomes excessively long in order to secure the profit of the player. Can be suppressed. This is also a preferable configuration for suppressing fraudulent acts related to the right-side actuating ball entry unit 63 while ensuring the profit of the player.

In the configuration in which the electric service hold is acquired based on the passage of the game ball through the through gate 66, the electric service hold is acquired and stored before the right-side actuating ball entry unit 63 switches from the open state to the closed state. Is not limited to this, and it may occur that the electric service hold is acquired → stored after switching to the closed state. Therefore, if the electric service hold is newly acquired during the effective time after switching to the closed state of the right-side actuating ball entry unit 63, the variation display of the pattern on the through-gate display unit DS is displayed during the effective time. By using the configuration to start, for example, it is possible to contribute to the smooth progress of the game as compared with the configuration in which the variable display of the pattern is started after the lapse of the effective time.

In the present embodiment, information indicating a third normal game state that shifts when the game progresses without a jackpot result in the second normal game state, and the remaining game until the shift to the third normal game state. Information such as the number of times is displayed on the symbol display device 75 (display screen 75a). Hereinafter, the electrical configuration related to the display of the above-mentioned various information will be supplementarily described with reference to the block diagram of FIG.

(Notification / effect control device 143 and display control device 710)
The MPU 602 is mounted on the notification / effect control board 651 of the notification / effect control device 143. The MPU 602 is a ROM 603 that stores various control programs and fixed value data executed by the MPU 602, and a memory for temporarily storing various data and the like when the control program stored in the ROM 603 is executed. The RAM 604 and various circuits such as an interrupt circuit, a timer circuit, and a data input / output circuit are built-in. It should be noted that it is not an essential configuration that the ROM 603 and the RAM 604 are integrated into one chip with respect to the MPU 602, and each may be individually chipped.

The MPU 602 is provided with an input port and an output port, respectively. A main control device 162 is connected to the input side of the MPU 602, and receives game times control commands (game times control information) such as the above-mentioned fluctuation start command, type command, and fluctuation end command from the main control device 162. .. In addition, it receives hold display control commands (hold display control information) such as shift commands and hold commands, and open / close execution mode commands (open / close execution mode information) such as opening commands and ending commands.

As described above, the lamp units 26 to 28, the speaker unit 29, and the display control device 710 provided on the front door frame 14 are connected to the output side of the MPU 602. Some of the various commands input from the main control device 162 to the notification / effect control device 143 are transmitted to the display control device 710 while maintaining the information form as it is.

The display control device 710 is a display control board 711 on which an MPU 712, which is an element in which a program ROM 713 and a work RAM 714 are combined into chips, a video display processor (VDP) 715, a character ROM 716, and a video RAM 717, respectively, are mounted. It has. It is not essential that the program ROM 713 and the work RAM 714 are integrated into one chip with respect to the MPU 712, and each may be individually chipped.

The MPU 712 of the display control device 710 analyzes various commands received from the main control device 162 via the notification / effect control device 143, or performs predetermined arithmetic processing based on the received commands to control the VDP 715 (specifically). Is to generate an internal command for VDP715). More specifically, the MPU 712 executes a process of specifying the variation display pattern of each game time in the symbol display device 75 based on the command transmitted from the notification / effect control device 143, and also processes related to the hold notice described later. Is executed, and the drawing process for VDP715 is executed according to the processing result. As a result, various images are displayed on the display screen 75a of the symbol display device 75.

The program ROM 713 is a memory for storing various control programs and fixed value data executed by the MPU 712, and also stores and holds JPEG format image data for a background image. The work RAM 714 is a memory for temporarily storing work data, flags, and the like used when executing various programs by the MPU 712. These work data, flags, and the like are stored in each area of the work RAM 714.

The VDP715 is a kind of drawing circuit that directly operates an image processing device as a liquid crystal display unit driver incorporated in the symbol display device 75. Since the VDP715 is an IC chip, it is also called a "drawing chip", and its substance can be said to be a microcomputer chip with a built-in firmware dedicated to drawing processing. The VDP 715 adjusts the timing of each of the MPU 712, the video RAM 717, and the like to intervene in reading and writing data, and reads the image data stored in the video RAM 717 from the character ROM 716 at a predetermined timing and displays the image data on the symbol display device 75.

The character ROM 716 plays a role as an image data library for storing character data such as a symbol displayed on the symbol display device 75. The character ROM 716 holds bitmap format image data of various display symbols, a color palette table to be referred to when determining the expression color of each dot of the bitmap image, and the like.

It is also possible to provide a plurality of character ROMs 716 and share the image data and the like in each character ROM 716. Further, it is also possible to have a configuration in which the JPEG format image data for the background image stored in the program ROM 713 is stored in the character ROM 716.

The video RAM 717 is a memory for storing display data to be displayed on the symbol display device 75, and the display content of the symbol display device 75 is changed by rewriting the content of the video RAM 717.

Here, with reference to FIGS. 45 to 47, the configuration related to the variation display of the symbol and the content of the variation display will be supplementarily described. 45 is a schematic view for explaining the display contents on the display screen 75a of the symbol display device 75, FIG. 46 is a schematic view showing an outline of the display in the first normal game state, and FIG. 47 (a) is the second normal game state. And a schematic view showing the outline of the display in the 4th normal game state, FIG. 47 (b) is a schematic view showing the outline of the display in the 3rd normal game state. In FIG. 46 and the like, for convenience of explanation, the variable display area of the symbol is divided and displayed by a two-dot chain line (virtual line).

The character ROM 716 of the display control device 710 includes data of nine types of main symbols indicating the numbers "1" to "9", the numbers "1" to "9", and decorations such as characters imitating fish. Data of nine types of sub-symbols (see FIGS. 45 (a) to 45 (i)) in which the above are combined are stored in advance.

The variation display area provided on the display screen 75a of the symbol display device 75 is roughly divided into a first variation display area ME1, a second variation display area ME2, and a third variation display area ME3. The first variable display area ME1 is arranged in the upper left of the display screen 75a, the second variable display area ME2 is arranged in the upper right of the display screen 75a, and the third variable display area ME3 is arranged in the center of the display screen 75a. Has been avoided.

In the first variable display area ME1, three symbol sequences of left, middle, and right are displayed. The main symbols are arranged in a predetermined order in each symbol row, and the symbols in each symbol row are variably displayed so as to scroll in a predetermined direction (specifically, from top to bottom) with periodicity. The first variable display area ME1 is linked to the pattern display on the lower operating port display unit DL of the main display unit D, and at the timing when the pattern variable display is started on the lower operating port display unit DL. The variation display of the symbol is started, and the variation display of the symbol ends (the confirmation display is started) at the timing when the variation display of the symbol ends (the timing when the confirmation display is started). Then, the symbol combination corresponding to the lottery result related to the lower operating port 62a is stopped and displayed, so that the player is notified of the game result (see FIG. 46). In the present embodiment, when a big hit result is obtained, the combination of the main symbols having the same number is stopped and displayed, and when a missed result or a special hit result is obtained, at least one number out of the three symbol strings is displayed. The combination of the main symbols different from the numbers in the other symbol columns is stopped and displayed.

In the second variable display area ME2, three symbol sequences of left, middle, and right are displayed. The main symbols are arranged in a predetermined order in each symbol row, and the symbols in each symbol row are variably displayed so as to scroll in a predetermined direction (specifically, from top to bottom) with periodicity. The second variable display area ME2 is linked to the pattern display on the right operating port display unit DR of the main display unit D, and at the timing when the pattern variable display is started on the right operating port display unit DR. The variation display of the symbol is started, and the variation display of the symbol ends (the confirmation display is started) at the timing when the variation display of the pattern ends (the timing when the confirmation display is started). Then, the symbol combination corresponding to the lottery result related to the right operating port 63a is stopped and displayed, so that the player is notified of the game result (see FIG. 47). In the present embodiment, for example, when a big hit result is obtained, the combination of the main symbols having the same number is stopped and displayed, and when a missed result or a special hit result is obtained, at least one number among the three symbol strings is displayed. Is stopped and displayed for combinations of main symbols that are different from the numbers in other symbol columns.

In the third variable display area ME3, three symbol sequences of left, middle, and right are displayed. Sub-symbols are arranged in a predetermined order in each symbol row, and the symbols in each symbol row are displayed in a variable manner so as to scroll in a predetermined direction (specifically, from top to bottom) with periodicity. Regarding the third variable display area ME3, the symbol display in the lower operating port display unit DL and the right operating port display unit DR of the main display unit D (the symbol display in the first variable display area ME1 and the second variable display area ME2). ) Is interlocked with, and the variation display of the pattern is started at the timing when the variation display of the pattern is started on the display unit DL for the lower operation port or the display unit DR for the right operation port, and the variation display of the pattern is finished. The configuration is such that the variation display of the symbol ends (confirmation display starts) at the timing (timing when the confirmation display starts). Then, the combination of the sub-symbols having the same number corresponding to the lottery result is stopped and displayed, so that the player is notified of the game result (see FIGS. 46 and 47 (a)). In the present embodiment, with some exceptions described later, when a big hit result is obtained, the combination of sub-symbols of the same number is stopped and displayed, and when a missed result or a special hit result is obtained, three The combination of the main symbols whose at least one number in the symbol string is different from the numbers in the other symbol strings is stopped and displayed.

The main symbol displayed in the first variable display area ME1 and the second variable display area ME2 is simpler than the sub symbol displayed in the third variable display area ME3. Therefore, it is easy to secure the discriminating power even if the size of the symbol is reduced. Based on such circumstances, the first variable display area ME1 and the second variable display area ME2 are smaller than the third variable display area ME3.

In the variable display areas ME1 to ME3, the display / non-display of the symbol is switched according to the game state. Here, with reference to FIGS. 46 to 48, the relationship between the game state and the variable display area to be displayed as a symbol will be described. FIG. 48 is a schematic diagram showing the relationship between the game state and the display / non-display of the symbol in each variable display area, and the one in which the symbol is displayed is classified as "○" and the one in which the symbol is not displayed is marked with "x". There is.

As described above, in the first normal game state, a difference is provided so that it is more advantageous for the player to shoot the game ball to the left route than to the right route. Therefore, if the game is to be advanced to the game even a little, it is assumed that the main launch destination of the game ball is the left route. The game ball launched to the left route enters the former of the lower operating port 62a and the right operating port 63a, and the entry into the latter is avoided. Therefore, in the first normal game state, the game proceeds mainly based on the entry of the ball into the lower operating port 62a. In this first normal gaming state, as shown in FIG. 46, symbols are displayed in the first variable display area ME1 and the third variable display area ME3, and some of the symbols in the second variable display area ME2 will be described later. It is hidden with the exception of. The display of the sub-symbol in the third variable display area ME3 is synchronized (linked) with the display of the main symbol in the first variable display area ME1. That is, in the first normal game state, the third variable display area ME3 is synchronized with (interlocked with) the display of the pattern on the display unit DL for the lower operating port.

Specifically, the variation display of the main symbol in the first variation display area ME1 and the variation display of the sub symbol in the third variation display area ME3 at the timing when the variation display of the symbol is started on the display unit DL for the lower operating port. Is started, and at the timing when the symbol is stopped and displayed on the display unit DL for the lower operating port, the main symbol in the first variable display area ME1 and the sub symbol in the third variable display area ME3 are stopped and displayed. The symbol combination stopped and displayed in the first variable display area ME1 and the third variable display area ME3 is a symbol combination corresponding to the lottery result related to the lower operating port 62a.

When the game round related to the right operating port 63a is executed in the first normal game state, the pattern is changed and confirmed on the right operating port display unit DR of the main display unit D. On the display screen 75a, the symbol is displayed in the second variable display area ME2 only during this period. That is, in the second variable display area ME2, the variable display-confirmed display of the main symbol is executed corresponding to the variable display-confirmed display of the pattern in the display unit DR for the right operating port, and the lottery result related to the right operating port 63a is clearly shown. However, when the game rotation related to the right operating port 63a is not progressing, the display of the main symbol in the second variable display area ME2 is avoided. In the first normal gaming state, the state in which the symbols are displayed in the first variable display area ME1 and the third variable display area ME3 is maintained even when the game times related to the lower operating port 62a are not progressing. However, the second variable display area ME2 is different in that such a resident function is not provided.

Incidentally, in the first normal game state, even when the game times related to the right operating port 63a are executed, it is possible to keep the symbol in the second variable display area ME2 hidden. is there.

As described above, the difference between the second normal game state to the fourth normal game state is provided so that it is more advantageous for the player to shoot the game ball to the right route than to the left route. Therefore, if the game is to be advanced to the game even a little, it is assumed that the main launch destination of the game ball is the right route. The game ball launched to the right route enters the latter of the lower operating port 62a to the right operating port 63a, and the entry into the latter is avoided. Therefore, in the second normal game state and the fourth normal game state, the game proceeds mainly based on the entry of the ball into the right operating port 63a. In these second normal game states to the fourth normal game state, as shown in FIG. 47 (a), symbols are displayed in the second variable display area ME2 and the third variable display area ME3, and the first variable display area The symbols in ME1 are hidden with some exceptions described later. The display of the sub-symbol in the third variable display area ME3 is synchronized (linked) with the display of the main symbol in the second variable display area ME2. That is, in the second normal game state, the third variable display area ME3 is synchronized (linked) with the display of the pattern on the display unit DR for the right operating port.

Specifically, at the timing when the variation display of the symbol is started on the display unit DR for the right operating port, the variation display of the main symbol in the second variation display area ME2 and the variation display of the sub symbol in the third variation display area ME3. Is started, and at the timing when the symbol is stopped and displayed on the display unit DR for the right operating port, the main symbol in the second variable display area ME2 and the sub symbol in the third variable display area ME3 are stopped and displayed. The symbol combination that is stopped and displayed in the second variable display area ME2 and the third variable display area ME3 is a symbol combination that corresponds to the lottery result related to the right operating port 63a.

When the game rotation related to the lower operating port 62a is executed in the second normal gaming state and the fourth normal gaming state, the pattern is changed and displayed on the lower operating port display unit DL of the main display unit D. Confirmed display. On the display screen 75a, the symbol is displayed in the first variable display area ME1 only during this period. That is, in the first variation display area ME1, the variation display-confirmation display of the main symbol is executed corresponding to the variation display-confirmation display of the pattern in the display unit DL for the lower operation port, and the lottery result related to the lower operation port 62a is clearly shown. However, when the game rotation related to the lower operating port 62a has not progressed, the display of the main symbol in the first variable display area ME1 is avoided. In the second normal game state and the fourth normal game state, the symbol is displayed in the second variable display area ME2 and the third variable display area ME3 even when the game times related to the right operating port 63a are not progressing. Although the state is maintained, the first variable display area ME1 is different in that such a resident function is not provided.

Incidentally, in the second normal game state and the fourth normal game state, even when the game times related to the lower operating port 62a are executed, the symbol in the second variable display area ME2 is kept hidden. It is also possible to.

In the present embodiment, the variable display area used in the fourth normal gaming state is shared with the variable display area used in the second normal gaming state, and the variable display mode and the like in the variable display area are also shared. ing. Furthermore, other displays on the display screen 75a are also shared in both normal gaming states. This makes it difficult to visually identify which of the second normal gaming state and the fourth normal gaming state is from the display content in the variable display area. By making it difficult to distinguish between the second normal game state and the fourth normal game state in this way, even in the case of the fourth normal game state which is more disadvantageous than the second normal game state, the third normal game state It is possible to give the player the expectation that it may shift to the gaming state.

It is also possible to distinguish the display mode of the display screen 75a in the fourth normal game state from the display mode of the display screen 75a in the second normal game state, and to clearly indicate which normal game state it is. ..

The third normal game state is a game state in which the game is assumed to proceed mainly based on the entry of the ball into the right operating port 63a, as in the second normal game state. In this second normal gaming state, as shown in FIG. 47 (b), a symbol is displayed in the second variable display area ME2 of the display screen 75a, and the symbol in the first variable display area ME1 will be partially described later. It is hidden with the exception of. Further, in the third variable display area ME3, a character image imitating a fairy is displayed instead of the above-mentioned sub-design, and the lottery result related to the right operating port 63a is notified by the movement of the character or the like. ing. Specifically, in the case of a big hit result, the character image imitating a fairy becomes a transformed image, and in the case of a special hit result, the effect displayed so as to surround the character emits a rainbow color, and in the case of a missed result. The effect is hidden in. As described above, the display in the third variable display area ME3 is synchronized with the display of the main symbol in the second variable display area ME2. In other words, in the third normal gaming state, the third variable display area ME3 is synchronized with the display of the pattern on the display unit DR for the right operating port.

For example, at the timing when the variation display of the pattern is started on the display unit DR for the right operating port, the variation display of the main symbol in the second variation display area ME2 and the operation of the character image in the third variation display area ME3 are started. , The main symbol in the second variable display area ME2 is stopped and displayed at the timing when the symbol is stopped and displayed on the display unit DR for the right operating port, and the character image or the like in the third variable display area ME3 shows the lottery result. Switch to. The symbol combination that is stopped and displayed in the second variable display area ME2 is the symbol combination corresponding to the lottery result related to the right operating port 63a, and the character display in the third variable display area ME3 is also the lottery result related to the right operating port 63a. The corresponding display will be displayed. That is, in the third normal gaming state, the second variable display area ME2 and the third variable display area ME3 are linked (see FIG. 48).

When the game round related to the lower operating port 62a is executed in the third normal gaming state, the pattern is changed and confirmed on the lower operating port display unit DL of the main display unit D. On the display screen 75a, the symbol is displayed in the first variable display area ME1 only during this period. That is, in the first variation display area ME1, the variation display-confirmation display of the main symbol is executed corresponding to the variation display-confirmation display of the pattern in the display unit DL for the lower operation port, and the lottery result related to the lower operation port 62a is clearly shown. However, when the game rotation related to the lower operating port 62a has not progressed, the display of the main symbol in the first variable display area ME1 is avoided. In the second normal game state, even when the game rotation related to the right operating port 63a is not progressing, the state in which the symbol or the character image is displayed in the second variable display area ME2 and the third variable display area ME3 is displayed. Although it is maintained, the first variable display area ME1 is different in that such a resident function is not provided.

The mode of variable display of symbols in the symbol display device 75 is not limited to the above, and is arbitrary, such as the number of symbol rows, the direction of variable display of symbols in the symbol row, the number of symbols in each symbol row, and the like. Can be changed as appropriate.

As described above, when the number of games executed in the second normal game state reaches the reference number of times, that is, the number of time reductions set at the time of transition to the second normal game state, the number of games executed is higher than that of the second normal game state. Further, it shifts to the third normal game state which is advantageous to the player. One of the features of the present embodiment is that information suggesting a transition to the third normal gaming state is displayed during the second normal gaming state.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 47 (a), the upper part of the display screen 75a (specifically, between the first variable display area ME1 and the second variable display area ME2) is in the third normal gaming state. The counter image CF, which is information indicating the number of remaining games until the transition, is displayed, and the remaining count display area CE, and the target image, which is information indicating the gaming state (for example, the third normal gaming state) that can be shifted by the reference number of times digestion An information display area IE including a migration destination display area TE on which TF is displayed is provided.

The counter image CF displayed in the remaining number of times display area CE displays the number of remaining games until the transition to the third normal game state by a number from "0" to "100". In the example shown in FIG. 47 (a), the value indicated by the counter image CF (hereinafter referred to as the counter value) is "100", and it is necessary to digest 100 game times in order to shift to the third normal game state. It is shown to that effect. The counter value is subtracted and displayed as the game times are exhausted, and after the counter value becomes "0", the counter image CF is hidden in accordance with the transition to the third normal game state.

The target image TF displayed in the transition destination display area TE is composed of the characters “SUPER RUSH” which is the name of the third normal gaming state. The target image TF is a restraint image LF composed of a plurality of restraint patterns imitating a chain wrapped around the target image TF as an image giving the player the impression that the transition to the third normal gaming state is hindered. Is attached. Although the details will be described later, the target image TF is enlarged as the number of digested game times increases, and the restraint image LF is enlarged in accordance with this expansion. Then, the number of restraint patterns constituting the restraint image LF decreases in accordance with this enlargement. This suggests that the player is approaching the third normal gaming state.

Here, the display control process (hereinafter, referred to as information display control process) of the information display area IE executed by the notification / effect control device 143 will be described. The information display control process is a process executed as a part of the periodic process in the MPU 602 of the notification / effect control device 143.

(Information display control processing)
As shown in the flowchart of FIG. 49, in the information display control process, first, in step S1701, it is determined whether or not the player is in the second normal game state or the first special game state corresponding to the transition to the fourth normal game state. To do. If an affirmative determination is made in step S1701, the process proceeds to step S1702, and the special game state display control process is executed.

As shown in the flowchart of FIG. 50, in the special game state display control process, first, it is determined in step S1801 whether or not the ending is in progress. If a negative determination is made in step S1801, the process proceeds to step S1802. In step S1802, it is determined whether or not it is the ending start timing. Specifically, it is determined whether or not it is the timing when the ending command is received from the main control device 162. If a negative determination is made in step S1802, the present display control process is terminated as it is.

If an affirmative determination is made in step S1802, the process proceeds to step S1803. In step S1803, the migration information display process is executed. Specifically, the transition information display command is output to the display control device 710, and the sound effect for starting the display of the transition information is output from the speaker unit 29. The display control device 710 displays the target image TF, the restraint image LF, and the counter image CF described above in the center of the display screen 75a based on the transition information display command. At this timing, the counter value of the counter image CF is scrolled and displayed (see FIG. 51 (a) → (b)), and the reference number of times (remaining number of games) set with the transition to the second normal game state is set. It is not specified.

Returning to the description of step S1801, if an affirmative determination is made in step S1801, the process proceeds to step S1804. In step S1804, it is determined whether or not it is the timing after the variable display of the counter value is terminated and the remaining number of games is fixedly displayed. If a negative determination is made in step S1804, the process proceeds to step S1805. In step S1805, it is determined whether or not it is time to confirm the number of remaining games. If a negative determination is made in step S1805, the present display control process is terminated as it is. If an affirmative determination is made in step S1805, the process proceeds to step S1806.

In step S1806, the confirmation display process is executed. Specifically, the confirmation display command is output to the display control device 710, and the sound effect for the confirmation display of the remaining number of games (initial value) is output from the speaker unit 29. The display control device 710 stops and displays the counter value during scroll display based on the reception of the confirmation display command. Specifically, the same value as the reference number of times that the high frequency support mode is continued in the second normal game state or the fourth normal game state of the transition destination is stopped and displayed (see FIGS. 51 (b) → (c)). .. Note that FIG. 51 (b) illustrates the case where the reference number of times is 100 times.

In the following step S1807, the same value as the reference number of times is set in the remaining number of times counters provided in the various counter areas 675 of the RAM 654. The value of the remaining number counter is updated (subtracted) every time the game starts in the second normal game state or the fourth normal game state, and the value of the counter image CF is the same as the value of the remaining number counter. It will be updated (subtracted) to the value.

Returning to the description of step S1804, if an affirmative determination is made in step S1805, that is, if the number of remaining games has been confirmed and displayed, the process proceeds to step S1808. In step S1808, it is determined whether or not it is time to reduce the target image TF or the like displayed in the center of the display screen 75a to the information display area IE above the display screen 75a. If a negative determination is made in step S1808, the present display control process is terminated as it is. If an affirmative determination is made in step S1808, the process proceeds to step S1809, the reduced display process is executed, and then the present display control process ends.

In the reduced display process in step S1809, the reduced display command is output to the display control device 710, and the reduced display sound effect is output from the speaker unit 29. Based on the reception of the reduced display command, the display control device 710 moves the target image TF, the restraint image LF, and the counter image CF displayed in the center of the display screen 75a to the upper part of the display screen 75a, and the target image TF. , The restraint image LF and the counter image CF are reduced and displayed in accordance with the above-mentioned information display area IE. As a result, the overlap between the target image TF and the like and the third variable display area ME3 is eliminated, and the symbol display is restarted in the third variable display area ME3 (see FIGS. 51 (c) → (d)). At this timing, the symbol display is restarted also in the second variable display area ME2, and the preparation for transition to the second normal gaming state or the fourth normal gaming state is completed.

Returning to the description of FIG. 49 again, if a negative determination is made in step S1701, the process proceeds to step S1703. In step S1703, it is determined whether or not the current gaming state is the second normal gaming state or the fourth normal gaming state. If it is not in any of the normal gaming states, the information display control process is terminated as it is. If an affirmative determination is made in step S1703, the process proceeds to step S1704, the normal game state display control process is executed, and then the information display control process ends.

As shown in the flowchart of FIG. 52, in the normal game state display control process, first, it is determined in step S1901 whether or not it is the timing to start the variable display of the symbol. Specifically, a fluctuation start command related to the lower operating port display unit DL (lower operating port 62a) or a fluctuation start command related to the right operating port display unit DR (right operating port 63a) was received from the main control device 162. Determine if it is timing. If an affirmative determination is made in step S1901, the process proceeds to step S1902, and the value of the remaining number of counters provided in the various counter areas 675 of the RAM 654 is updated (1 subtraction).

After executing the process of step S1902, or when a negative determination is made in step S1901, the display control process (target display control process) of the target image TF and the constrained image LF is executed in the following step S1903, and step S1904 After executing the display control process (counter display control process) of the counter image CF in, the present display control process is terminated. First, the target display control process will be described with reference to FIGS. 53 and 54. FIG. 53 is a flowchart showing the target control process, FIG. 54 (a) is a schematic view illustrating the relationship between the number of games and the size of the target image TF and the number of restraint patterns, and FIG. 54 (b) is the transition destination display area TE. It is a schematic diagram which shows.

(Target display control process)
In the target display control process, first, in step S2001, it is determined whether or not the current game times correspond to the jackpot result. If a negative determination is made in step S2001, the process proceeds to step S2002. In step S2002, it is determined whether or not it is the start timing of the variation display. Specifically, a fluctuation start command related to the lower operating port display unit DL (lower operating port 62a) or a fluctuation start command related to the right operating port display unit DR (right operating port 63a) was received from the main control device 162. Determine if it is timing.

If an affirmative determination is made in step S2002, the process proceeds to step S2003. In step S2003, it is determined whether or not the value of the remaining number of times counter of various counter areas 675 is the first predetermined number of times. The ROM 653 stores a first predetermined number of times setting table showing the correspondence relationship between each reference number of times set at the time of transition to the second normal gaming state or the fourth normal gaming state and the first predetermined number of times, and the second At the time of transition to the normal gaming state or the fourth normal gaming state, the first predetermined number of times is set with reference to the reference number of times and the first predetermined number of times setting table.

For example, when the reference number of times is 100, the first predetermined number of times is defined to be 70 times, 50 times, 30 times, 10 times, and 0 times (see FIG. 54 (a)), and the reference number of times is specified. When is 70 times, the first predetermined number of times is specified to be 50 times, 30 times, 10 times, 5 times, and 0 times, and when the reference number of times is 50 times, the first predetermined number of times is specified. Is stipulated to be 30 times, 10 times, 5 times, 3 times, and 0 times, and when the reference number of times is 30, the first predetermined number of times is 10 times, 5 times, 3 times, and 1 time. , 0 times, and when the reference number of times is 10, the first predetermined number of times is specified to be 5 times, 3 times, 2 times, 1 time, and 0 times.

If a negative determination is made in step S2003, the target display control process is terminated. If an affirmative determination is made in step S2003, the process proceeds to step S2004. In step S2004, the enlargement display processing of the target image TF and the restraint image LF is executed. Specifically, the enlarged display command is output to the display control device 710, and the enlarged display sound effect is output from the speaker unit 29. Based on the reception of the enlarged display command, the display control device 710 enlarges the target image TF and the constrained image LF being displayed, and partially hides each constrained pattern constituting the constrained image LF. As a result, the number of restraint patterns is reduced as the target image TF is enlarged.

For example, when the set reference number of times is 100 times, the size of the target image TF is "1/30" of the third variable display area ME3 and the restraint pattern until the started game number reaches 30 times. When the number of games reaches "8" (display level 1 (LV1)) and the number of started games reaches 30 (when the number of remaining games reaches 70), the size of the target image TF becomes the third. The variable display area ME3 has changed from "1/30" to "1/25" and the number of restraint patterns has changed from "8" to "7" (display level 2 (LV2)), and the number of started game times has reached 50. (When the number of remaining games is 50), the size of the target image TF changes from "1/25" to "1/20" of the third variable display area ME3, and the number of restraint patterns is "7". To "6" (display level 3 (LV3)), the size of the target image TF is displayed in the third variation when the started game times reach 70 times (when the remaining number of games reaches 30 times). When the area ME3 changes from "1/25" to "1/20" and the number of restraint patterns changes from "6" to "5" (display level 4 (LV4)) and the started game times reach 90 times. (When the number of remaining games is 10), the size of the target image TF changes from "1/20" to "1/15" of the third variable display area ME3, and the number of restraint patterns changes from "5" to "". 4 ”(display level 5 (LV5)), and when the started game times reach 100 times (when the remaining number of games becomes 0), the size of the target image TF becomes the third variable display area ME3. From "1/10" to "1/2" and the number of restraint patterns is from "4" to "3" (display level 6 (LV6)).

When the set reference number of times is 70 times, the size of the target image TF is "1/30" of the third variable display area ME3 and the number of restraint patterns until the started game number reaches 20 times. Becomes "8" (display level 1 (LV1)), and when the number of started games reaches 20 (when the number of remaining games reaches 50), the size of the target image TF is displayed in the third variation. When the area ME3 changes from "1/30" to "1/25" and the number of restraint patterns changes from "8" to "7" (display level 2 (LV2)) and the started game times reach 40 times. (When the number of remaining games is 30), the size of the target image TF changes from "1/25" to "1/20" of the third variable display area ME3, and the number of restraint patterns changes from "7" to "". 6 ”(display level 3 (LV3)), and when the number of started games reaches 60 (when the number of remaining games reaches 10), the size of the target image TF changes to the third variable display area ME3. When the number of restraint patterns changes from "6" to "5" (display level 4 (LV4)) and the number of started game times reaches 65 (remaining). (When the number of games is 5), the size of the target image TF changes from "1/20" to "1/15" of the third variable display area ME3, and the number of restraint patterns changes from "5" to "4". Next (display level 5 (LV5)), when the started game times reach 70 times (when the remaining number of games becomes 0), the size of the target image TF becomes "3rd variable display area ME3". The number of restraint patterns is changed from "1/10" to "1/2" and the number of restraint patterns is changed from "4" to "3" (display level 6 (LV6)).

When the set reference number of times is 50 times, the size of the target image TF is "1/30" of the third variable display area ME3 and the number of restraint patterns until the started game number reaches 20 times. Becomes "8" (display level 1 (LV1)), and when the number of started games reaches 20 (when the number of remaining games reaches 30), the size of the target image TF is displayed in the third variation. When the area ME3 changes from "1/30" to "1/25" and the number of restraint patterns changes from "8" to "7" (display level 2 (LV2)) and the started game times reach 40 times. (When the number of remaining games is 10), the size of the target image TF changes from "1/25" to "1/20" of the third variable display area ME3, and the number of restraint patterns changes from "7" to "". 6 ”(display level 3 (LV3)), and when the started game times reach 45 times (when the remaining number of games reaches 5 times), the size of the target image TF becomes the third variable display area ME3. When the number of restraint patterns changes from "6" to "5" (display level 4 (LV4)) and the number of started game times reaches 67 (remaining). When the number of games is 3), the size of the target image TF changes from "1/20" to "1/15" of the third variable display area ME3, and the number of restraint patterns changes from "5" to "4". Next (display level 5 (LV5)), when the started game times reach 50 times (when the remaining number of games becomes 0), the size of the target image TF becomes "3rd variable display area ME3". The number of restraint patterns is changed from "1/10" to "1/2" and the number of restraint patterns is changed from "4" to "3" (display level 6 (LV6)).

When the set reference number of times is 30, the size of the target image TF is "1/30" of the third variable display area ME3 and the number of restraint patterns until the started game number reaches 20 times. Becomes "8" (display level 1 (LV1)), and when the number of started games reaches 20 (when the number of remaining games reaches 10), the size of the target image TF is displayed in the third variation. When the area ME3 changes from "1/30" to "1/25" and the number of restraint patterns changes from "8" to "7" (display level 2 (LV2)) and the started game times reach 25 times. (When the number of remaining games is 5), the size of the target image TF changes from "1/25" to "1/20" of the third variable display area ME3, and the number of restraint patterns changes from "7" to "". 6 ”(display level 3 (LV3)), and when the started game times reach 27 times (when the remaining number of games reaches 3 times), the size of the target image TF becomes the third variable display area ME3. When the number of restraint patterns changes from "6" to "5" (display level 4 (LV4)) and the number of started game times reaches 29 (remaining). (When the number of games is one), the size of the target image TF changes from "1/20" to "1/15" of the third variable display area ME3, and the number of restraint patterns changes from "5" to "4". Next (display level 5 (LV5)), when the number of started games reaches 30 (when the number of remaining games becomes 0), the size of the target image TF becomes "3rd variable display area ME3". The number of restraint patterns is changed from "1/10" to "1/2" and the number of restraint patterns is changed from "4" to "3" (display level 6 (LV6)).

When the set reference number of times is 10, the size of the target image TF is "1/30" of the third variable display area ME3 and the number of restraint patterns until the started game number reaches 5 times. Becomes "8" (display level 1 (LV1)), and when the number of started games reaches 5 (when the number of remaining games reaches 5), the size of the target image TF is displayed in the third variation. When the number of restraint patterns changes from "8" to "7" (display level 2 (LV2)) and the number of started game times reaches 7 times from "1/30" to "1/25" in the area ME3. (When the number of remaining games is 3), the size of the target image TF changes from "1/25" to "1/20" of the third variable display area ME3, and the number of restraint patterns changes from "7" to "". 6 ”(display level 3 (LV3)), and when the number of started games reaches 8 (when the number of remaining games is 2), the size of the target image TF changes to the 3rd variable display area ME3. When the number of restraint patterns changes from "6" to "5" (display level 4 (LV4)) and the number of started game times reaches 9 (remaining). (When the number of games is one), the size of the target image TF changes from "1/20" to "1/15" of the third variable display area ME3, and the number of restraint patterns changes from "5" to "4". Next (display level 5 (LV5)), when the started game times reach 10 times (when the remaining number of games becomes 0), the size of the target image TF becomes "3rd variable display area ME3". The number of restraint patterns is changed from "1/10" to "1/2" and the number of restraint patterns is changed from "4" to "3" (display level 6 (LV6)).

When the display level is LV1 to LV5, the migration destination display area TE (information display area IE) is separated from the third variable display area ME3, but the transition destination display area is set to LV6. The TE (information display area IE) is expanded to a position including at least a part of the range in which the third variable display area ME3 is formed on the display screen 75a (see FIG. 54 (b)). This is a device that directs the player's attention to the target image TF and the counter image CF.

When the reference number of times is 100 times, the first predetermined number of times is specified to be 70 times, 50 times, 30 times, 10 times, and 0 times, and when the reference number of times is 70 times, the first It is specified that the predetermined number of times is 50 times, 30 times, 10 times, and 0 times, and when the reference number of times is 50 times, the first predetermined number of times is specified to be 30 times, 10 times, and 0 times. , When the reference number of times is 30, the first predetermined number of times is specified to be 10 times and 0 times, and when the reference number of times is 10, the first predetermined number of times is specified to be 0 times. It is also possible to do. In such a configuration, the initial display level when the reference number is 70 is the above LV2, the initial display level when the reference number is 50 is the above LV3, and the initial display level when the reference number is 30 is the initial. The display level of the above is LV4, the initial display level when the reference number of times is 10 is the above LV5, and the step-up of the enlarged display may be partially shortened.

Returning to the description of step S2002 of FIG. 53, if a negative determination is made in step S2002, that is, if it is not the start timing of the variation display, the process proceeds to step S2005. In step S2005, it is determined whether or not it is the transition timing to the confirmation display. Specifically, the main control device 162 received a fluctuation end command related to the lower operating port display DL (lower operating port 62a) or a variable end command related to the right operating port display DR (right operating port 63a). Determine if it is timing. If a negative determination is made in step S2005, the present display control process is terminated as it is. If an affirmative determination is made in step S2005, the process proceeds to step S2006.

In step S2006, it is determined whether or not this game is the final game (the game that reaches the reference number) in which the value of the remaining number counter is "0" in the second normal game state or the fourth normal game state. judge. If a negative determination is made in step S2006, the present display control process is terminated as it is. If an affirmative determination is made in step S2006, that is, if it is the timing when the confirmation display is started in the final game round, the process proceeds to step S2007.

In step S2007, the target image maximum display process is executed. Specifically, the maximum display command is output to the display control device 710, and the maximum display sound effect is output from the speaker unit 29. Based on the reception of the maximum display command, the display control device 710 erases all the restraint image LF being displayed and enlarges and displays the target image TF in the center of the display screen 75a (see FIG. 54 (b)). As a result, the player is notified that the second normal game state will be changed to the third normal game state. The maximized target image TF occupies almost the entire area of the third variable display area ME3. Although the details will be described later, the symbol display in the third variable display area ME3 is not executed in the final game round. By maximizing the target image TF and occupying almost the entire area of the third variable display area ME3, it is possible to suppress the occurrence of a sense of discomfort when the symbol is not displayed in the third variable display area ME3.

Returning to the description of step S2001, if an affirmative determination is made in step S2001, that is, if the game times correspond to the jackpot result, the process proceeds to step S2008. In step S2008, it is determined whether or not it is the transition timing to the confirmation display. Specifically, the main control device 162 received a fluctuation end command related to the lower operating port display DL (lower operating port 62a) or a variable end command related to the right operating port display DR (right operating port 63a). Determine if it is timing. If an affirmative determination is made in step S2008, the process proceeds to step S2009, and display processing corresponding to the jackpot result is executed. Specifically, the information for stopping and displaying the pattern creation corresponding to the jackpot result in the variable end command transferred to the display control device 710, and the display of the target image TF and the restraint image LF being displayed corresponding to the jackpot result. Add information to switch to. Then, the speaker unit 29 outputs a sound effect for a jackpot result during the second normal game state or the fourth normal game state.

This display is roughly divided into two modes. Specifically, it is divided into a display mode when a 16R probability variation jackpot result is obtained and a display mode when a jackpot result other than that is obtained. Regarding the former, the display of the target image TF is continued and the restraint image LF is hidden in order to notify the transition to the third normal gaming state. Regarding the latter, the target image TF and the restraint image LF being displayed are divided into small pieces in order to clearly show that the transition to the third normal gaming state has failed.

Returning to the description of step S2008, if a negative determination is made in step S2008, the process proceeds to step S2010. In step S2010, it is determined whether or not it is the confirmation display end timing. If a negative determination is made in step S2010, the target display control process is terminated as it is. If an affirmative determination is made in step S2010, the process proceeds to step S2011. In step S2011, it is determined whether or not the current jackpot result is a 16R probability variation jackpot result, that is, whether or not to shift to the third normal gaming state after the end of the first special gaming state. If an affirmative determination is made in step S2011, the present display control process is terminated as it is. As a result, the display of the target image TF is continued even in the first special gaming state. On the other hand, if a negative determination is made in step S2011, the target image TF is hidden in step S2012. Specifically, the target image non-display command is output to the display control device 710, and the non-display sound effect is output from the speaker unit 29. Based on the reception of the target image non-display command, the display control device 710 hides the target image TF and the constrained image LF that are divided and displayed in small pieces in the information display area IE.

Next, with reference to FIGS. 55 to 57, the counter display control process in step S1904 and the flow of the countdown display in the remaining number display area CE, which is executed to update the value of the counter image CF in the remaining number display area CE. Will be described. In the present embodiment, the main control device 162 is used in both cases where the game round is executed based on the winning of the lower operating port 62a and the game round is executed based on the winning of the right operating port 63a. The value of the game times counter is updated, and the value of the counter image CF is also updated accordingly. The counter display control process is executed in the counter display control process corresponding to the right operating port, which is executed in the game times based on the winning of the right operating port 63a, and in the game times based on the winning of the lower operating port 62a. It is roughly divided into counter display control processing corresponding to the lower operating port. FIG. 55 is a flowchart showing the counter display control process corresponding to the right operating port, FIG. 56 is a flowchart showing the counter display control processing corresponding to the lower operating port, and FIG. 57 is a schematic view showing the flow of the countdown display.

(Counter display control processing for right operating port)
As shown in FIG. 55, in the counter display control process corresponding to the right operating port, first, in step S2101, whether or not the current game number (game number based on winning the right operating port 63a) corresponds to the jackpot result. To judge. If a negative determination is made in step S2101, the process proceeds to step S2102. In step S2102, it is time to start the variation display of the symbol in the display unit DR for the right operating port, the variation display of the main symbol in the second variation display area ME2, and the variation display of the sub symbol in the third variation display area ME3. To judge. Specifically, it is determined whether or not it is the timing when the fluctuation start command related to the right operating port display unit DR (right operating port 63a) is received from the main control device 162. If an affirmative determination is made in step S2102, the process proceeds to step S2103.

In step S2103, it is determined whether or not the value of the remaining number of times counter in various counter areas 675 matches the second predetermined number of times. The ROM 653 stores a second predetermined number of times setting table showing the correspondence relationship between each reference number of times set at the time of transition to the second normal gaming state or the fourth normal gaming state and the second predetermined number of times. At the time of transition to the normal gaming state or the fourth normal gaming state, the second predetermined number of times is set with reference to the reference number of times and the second predetermined number of times setting table.

For example, when the set reference number of times is 100 times, the second predetermined number of times is 90 times, 80 times, 70 times, 60 times, 50 times, 40 times, 30 times, 20 times, 10 times, 9 times, It is specified to be 8 times, 7 times, 6 times, 5 times, 4 times, 3 times, 2 times, 1 time, 0 times, and when the reference number of times is 70 times, the second predetermined number of times is 60 times, 50 times, 40 times, 30 times, 20 times, 10 times, 9 times, 8 times, 7 times, 6 times, 5 times, 4 times, 3 times, 2 times, 1 time, 0 times When the reference number of times is 50 times, the second predetermined number of times is 40 times, 30 times, 20 times, 10 times, 9 times, 8 times, 7 times, 6 times, 5 times, 4 times. It is stipulated that the number of times is 3, 2, 1, 1 and 0, and when the reference number of times is 30, the second predetermined number of times is 20 times, 10 times, 9 times, 8 times and 7 times. , 6 times, 5 times, 4 times, 3 times, 2 times, 1 time, 0 times, and when the reference number of times is 10, the second predetermined number of times is 9 times, 8 times. , 7 times, 6 times, 5 times, 4 times, 3 times, 2 times, 1 time, 0 times.

If an affirmative determination is made in step S2103, the process proceeds to step S2014. In step S2104, the enlarged display process of the counter image CF is executed. Specifically, a counter enlargement display command is output to the display control device 710, and a sound effect for counter enlargement display is output from the speaker unit 29. In the present embodiment, the display state of the counter image CF is switched between the normal display state, the first enlarged display state which is one size larger than the normal display state, and the third enlarged display state which is larger than the first enlarged display state. It is possible. When the value of the remaining number counter is a specific number (0 times) of the first predetermined number, the second enlarged display command is output as the counter enlarged display command, and the value of the remaining number counter is the first predetermined number. The first enlarged display command is output as the counter enlarged display command when the number of times is other than the above-mentioned specific number of times (0 times). The display control device 710 switches the display state of the counter image CF to the first enlarged display state based on the reception of the first enlarged display command, and displays the counter image CF based on the reception of the second enlarged display command. The state is switched to the second enlarged display state.

In the normal display state and the first enlarged display state of the counter image CF, the overlap with the first fluctuation display area ME1 to the third fluctuation display area ME3 is avoided. On the other hand, the size and position of the second enlarged display state are defined according to the maximum display of the target image TF, and the counter image CF is displayed in the third variable display area ME3.

After executing the process of step S2104, or when a negative determination is made in step S2103, the process proceeds to step S2105. In step S2105, the subtraction display process is executed. Specifically, a subtraction display command is output to the display control device 710, and a sound effect for subtraction display is output from the speaker unit 29. The display control device 710 subtracts the value of the counter image CF by "1" based on the reception of the subtraction display command.

For example, in the example shown in FIG. 57 (a) → FIG. 57 (b), the counter image CF is changed from the normal display state in accordance with the start of the variation display of the symbol in the second variation display area ME2 and the third variation display area ME3. The counter value is subtracted from "51" to "50" while switching to the first enlarged display state.

Returning to the description of step S2102 of FIG. 55, if a negative determination is made in step S2102, that is, if it is not the variation display start timing, the process proceeds to step S2106. In step S2106, it is determined whether or not it is the timing to shift to the final display of the symbol in the display unit DR for the right operating port and the final display of the main symbol in the second variable display area ME2. Specifically, it is determined whether or not it is the timing at which the fluctuation end command relating to the right operating port display unit DR (right operating port 63a) is received from the main control device 162. If a negative determination is made in step S2106, the counter display control process is terminated as it is. If an affirmative determination is made in step S2106, the process proceeds to step S2107.

In step S2107, it is determined whether or not the current game is the final game (the game that reaches the reference number) in which the value of the remaining number counter is "0" in the second normal game state or the fourth normal game state. judge. If a negative determination is made in step S2107, the process proceeds to step S2108. In step S2108, it is determined whether or not the counter image CF is enlarged and displayed. If a negative determination is made in step S2108, the counter display control process is terminated as it is. If an affirmative determination is made in step S2108, the process proceeds to step S2109.

In step S2109, the counter image CF reduced display process is executed. Specifically, the counter reduced display command is output to the display control device 710, and the reduced display sound effect is output from the speaker unit 29. The display control device 710 returns the display state of the counter image CF to the normal display state based on the reception of the counter reduction display command.

For example, in the example shown in FIG. 57 (b) → FIG. 57 (c), the counter image CF is displayed from the first enlarged display state in accordance with the final display of the symbols in the second variable display area ME2 and the third variable display area ME3. It has switched to the normal display state.

Returning to the description of step S2107, when an affirmative determination is made in step S2107, that is, when it is time to shift to the final display in the final game round, the process proceeds to step S2110 to execute the counter image hiding process. Specifically, a counter non-display command is output to the display control device 710. The display control device 710 hides the counter image CF based on the reception of this counter non-display command.

Here, with reference to FIG. 58 (a), the switching of the display when shifting from the second normal gaming state to the third normal gaming state will be supplementarily described.

When the final game round described above is started in the second normal game state, the target image TF and the restraint image LF are enlarged and displayed from LV5 to LV6 as shown in FIG. 58 (a1) → FIG. 58 (a2). At the same time, the number of patterns constituting the restraint image LF is reduced from "4" to "3". Further, the counter image CF is switched from the normal display state to the second enlarged display state, and the value of the counter image CF is reduced from "1" to "0". As a result, it is notified that it is the final game round in the second normal game state. In the final game round, the display of the main symbol in the second variable display area ME is continued, while the sub symbol in the third variable display area ME3 is hidden.

In the example shown in FIG. 58 (a), the final game round corresponds to the special hit result. In this case, at the end timing of the variation display, the symbol combination corresponding to the special hit result is stopped and displayed in the second variation display area ME2, and the target image TF is maximally displayed in the center of the display screen 75a. Along with this, the restraint image LF and the counter image CF are hidden, and a message (characters of "rush") indicating that the transition to the third normal gaming state is confirmed is displayed at a position adjacent to the target image TF. It will be.

Returning to the description of step S2101 of FIG. 55, if an affirmative determination is made in step S2101, that is, if the game times related to the right operating port 63a this time correspond to the jackpot result, the process proceeds to step S2111. In step S2111, it is determined whether or not it is the variation display start timing as in step S2102. If an affirmative determination is made in step S2111, the processes of steps S2103 to S2105 are executed. On the other hand, if a negative determination is made in step S2111, the process proceeds to step S2112.

In step S2112, similarly to step S2106, it is determined whether or not it is the transition timing to the confirmation display. If an affirmative determination is made in step S2112, the process proceeds to step S2113 to execute the jackpot result correspondence display process. Specifically, a jackpot result corresponding display command is output to the display control device 710, and a sound effect for the jackpot result is output from the speaker unit 29. Based on the reception of the jackpot result corresponding display command, the display control device 710 displays that the transition to the third normal game state has failed. Specifically, the counter image CF is switched to an image in which the counter image CF is divided into a plurality of small pieces.

If a negative determination is made in step S2112, the process proceeds to step S2114. In step S2114, it is determined whether or not it is the end timing of the confirmation display. If it is not the end timing of the confirmation display, the counter display control process is terminated as it is. If an affirmative determination is made in step S2114, the process proceeds to step S2115. After executing the same counter image non-display control process as in step S2110 in step S2115, the counter display control process ends.

Here, with reference to the schematic diagram of FIG. 58 (b), the switching of the display when a jackpot result (specifically, a jackpot result other than the 16R probability variation jackpot result) is obtained in the second normal gaming state will be supplementarily described.

When the game round corresponding to the jackpot result is started in the second normal game state, as shown in FIG. 58 (b1), when the display mode on the display screen 75a is a special hit result or a missed result. The display mode is the same. For this reason, it is difficult to identify whether or not a jackpot result has been obtained from the display on the display screen 75a at the beginning of the game round.

At the transition timing to the final display, as shown in FIG. 58 (b2), the symbol combination corresponding to the jackpot result is stopped and displayed in the second variable display area ME2 and the third variable display area ME3. Then, as shown in FIG. 58 (b2) → FIG. 58 (b3), the target image TF, the restraint image LF, and the counter image CF are each switched to images broken into a plurality of small pieces, and the confirmed display time elapses for those images. It will be hidden by the time you do.

Here, in the gaming machine shown in the present embodiment, the game times related to the lower operating port 62a may be executed in the second normal gaming state, and the game times related to the lower operating port 62a are executed. Even in this case, the values of the game count counter and the remaining count counter are updated (subtracted). Hereinafter, the counter display control process corresponding to the lower operating port will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. 56.

(Counter display control processing for lower operating port)
In the counter display control process corresponding to the lower operating port, first, in step S2201, it is determined whether or not it is the start timing of the variable display. Specifically, it is determined whether or not a fluctuation start command related to the lower operating port display unit DL (lower operating port 62a) has been received from the main control device 162. If an affirmative determination is made in step S2201, the process proceeds to step S2202. In step S2202, the subtraction process of the remaining number counter is executed. In the following step S2203, the subtraction display process is executed.

Specifically, a subtraction display command is output to the display control device 710, and a sound effect for subtraction display is output from the speaker unit 29. The display control device 710 subtracts the value of the counter image CF by "1" based on the reception of the subtraction display command. In the game round related to the right operating port 63a, the value of the counter image CF is subtracted by "1" at the start timing of the fluctuation display of the symbol in the second fluctuation display area ME2 and the third fluctuation display area ME3. On the other hand, in the game round related to the lower operating port 62a, regardless of the start timing of the fluctuation display of the symbol in the second variable display area ME2 and the third variable display area ME3, during the game round related to the right operating port 63a, etc. Suddenly, the value of the counter image CF is subtracted by "1".

Returning to the description of step S2201, if a negative determination is made in step S2201, the process proceeds to step S2204. In step S2204, it is determined whether or not it is the transition timing to the final display of the pattern on the display unit DL for the lower operating port. Specifically, it is determined whether or not it is the timing at which the fluctuation end command relating to the lower operating port display unit DL (lower operating port 62a) is received from the main control device 162. If an affirmative determination is made in step S2204, the process proceeds to step S2205. In step S2205, it is determined whether or not it is the final game round. In the case of the final game round, the counter image hiding process is executed in step S2206, and then the display control process is terminated.

If a negative determination is made in step S2204, the process proceeds to step S2207. In step S2207, it is determined whether or not it is the end timing of the confirmation display. If a negative determination is made in step S2207, the present display control process is terminated as it is. If an affirmative determination is made in step S2207 or a negative determination is made in step S2205, the process proceeds to step S2208. In step S2208, it is determined whether or not the game times related to the lower operating port 62a this time correspond to the jackpot result. If a negative determination is made in step S2208, the present display control process is terminated as it is. If an affirmative determination is made in step S2208, the counter image hiding process is executed in step S2206, and then the display control process ends.

When the game ball is launched toward the right route in the second normal game state and the fourth normal game state, the game times proceed centering on the game times related to the right operation port 63a, but the lower operation port It cannot be denied that the game times related to 62a may intervene. When the game round related to the lower operating port 62a is executed, the value of the counter image CF is subtracted regardless of the change in the display state of the counter image CF, so that the subtraction is made inconspicuous.

In the second normal game state and the fourth normal game state, the symbol in the first variable display area ME1 is hidden, and the interlocking target of the third variable display area ME3 is the second variable display area ME2. Under such circumstances, if a jackpot result is obtained in the game round related to the lower operating port 62a, the pattern corresponding to the jackpot result is confirmed and displayed on the display unit DL for the lower operating port. In the second variable display area ME2, the symbol combination corresponding to the deviation result is stopped and displayed. In line with this, the symbol combination corresponding to the jackpot result is stopped and displayed in the third variable display area ME3, and the cooperation target of the third variable display area ME3 is switched from the right operating port 63a to the lower operating port 62a. In line with this, the counter image CF is hidden.

In the present embodiment, the first normal game state in which the game progresses mainly by the game times related to the lower operating port 62a to the second normal game state or the fourth normal game state in which the game progresses mainly by the game times related to the right operating port 63a. Immediately after shifting to the gaming state, there is a tendency that the remaining number counter is subtracted by the gaming times related to the lower operating port 62a. Hereinafter, with reference to the timing chart of FIG. 59, the display of the remaining number of times when the game times related to both operating ports 62a and 63a are executed in parallel will be supplementarily described.

For example, when the hold information related to the lower operating port 62a acquired in the first normal gaming state is carried over to the second normal gaming state through the first special gaming state, the transition to the second normal gaming state occurs. Along with this, the game rotation related to the lower operating port 62a is started. In the example shown in FIG. 59, the number of pending information related to the lower operating port 62a is 4 at the timing of ta1 (specifically, the timing when the first normal gaming state is changed to the second normal gaming state through the first special gaming state). In addition, the number of pending information related to the right operating port 63a is four. In such a case, the game times related to the lower operating port 62a and the game times related to the right operating port 63a are started at the same time with the transition to the second normal gaming state.

The value of the counter image CF displayed on the display screen 75a of the symbol display device 75 is "98" by subtracting each game number from the initial value "100". The variation display time of the pattern in the display unit DL for the lower operation port is based on the variation display time of the pattern in the display unit DR for the right operation port, that is, the variation display time of the symbol in the second variation display area ME2 and the third variation display area ME3. Is also shortened, and when the pattern is stopped and displayed on the lower operating port display DL, the variable display of the pattern on the right operating port display DR is still continuing.

At the timing of ta2 before the final display of the pattern is completed on the display unit DR for the right operating port, the variable display of the pattern on the display unit DL for the lower operating port is started. As a result, the value of the counter image CF is subtracted to change from “98” to “97”. The display unit DR for the right operating port shifts to the second special gaming state at the timing of ta3 when the final display time of the pattern corresponding to the special hit result has elapsed. At the timing of ta4 that returns from the second special gaming state to the second normal gaming state, since both the hold information related to the lower operating port 62a and the holding information related to the right operating port 63a exist, the timing of the ta4 is present. Then, similarly to the timing of ta1, the game times related to the lower operating port 62a and the game times related to the right operating port 63a are started at the same time.

The value of the counter image CF displayed on the display screen 75a of the symbol display device 75 is "95" by subtracting each game number from "97". The variation display time of the pattern in the display unit DL for the lower operation port is based on the variation display time of the pattern in the display unit DR for the right operation port, that is, the variation display time of the symbol in the second variation display area ME2 and the third variation display area ME3. Is also shortened, and when the pattern is stopped and displayed on the lower operating port display DL, the variable display of the pattern on the right operating port display DR is still continuing.

At the timing of ta5 before the final display of the pattern is completed on the display unit DR for the right operating port, the variable display of the pattern on the display unit DL for the lower operating port is started. As a result, the value of the counter image CF is subtracted to change from “95” to “94”. At the timing of ta6 when the confirmation display of the pattern in the lower operating port 62a is completed, the hold information related to the lower operating port 62a becomes “0”. After that, the value of the counter image CF is subtracted by "1" every time the game round related to the right operating port 63a is started.

According to the first embodiment described in detail above, the following excellent effects are obtained.

Since the second normal game state corresponds to the high probability mode, it can be expected that a big hit result will be obtained early, but in some cases, unfortunately, the game may proceed without a big hit result. If the game progresses without a big hit result and the support mode is switched to the low frequency support mode even though the expectation for the big hit result is increasing, the player's game There is concern that motivation will drop significantly. In this regard, in the configuration shown in the present embodiment, when the number of games reaches the reference number in the second normal game state corresponding to the high probability mode and the high frequency support mode without a winning result, the reference number of times is reached. Upon arrival, the game shifts to the third normal game state corresponding to the high probability mode and the low frequency support mode. The third normal game state is configured to be more advantageous to the player than the second normal game state, and the game can be further favorably advanced by upgrading to the third normal game state. By relieving the player with such a configuration, it is possible to suppress a decrease in the motivation for playing.

Specifically, in the third normal gaming state, as the opening frequency of the right operating port 63a decreases, the number of game balls that pass through the right operating port 63a increases, and the game balls that pass through the right operating port 63a , Most of them will enter the lower prize opening 341. That is, although the winning probability hardly changes in the entire winning unit 70, the breakdown of the winning destinations changes, and the number of winnings in the lower large winning opening 341 increases. The lower prize opening 341 is given preferential treatment so that the number of prize balls is larger than that of the right operating opening 63a, and as a result, the benefits (prize balls) obtained by the same investment are increased from the second normal game state. It becomes. Specifically, as described above, in the second normal game state, the number of balls held gradually decreases as the game progresses, while in the third normal game state, the number of balls held gradually increases as the game progresses. The third normal game state will be continued at least until the next big hit result, and it will be a chance to increase the number of balls held.

Further, in the third normal game state, the time required for the game is slightly shorter than that in the second normal game state, and even when the intervention in the second special game state is continuous. The occurrence of inconveniences such as slowing down the progress of the game is suppressed.

In the third normal game state, the opening of the lower prize winning opening 341 is triggered by the entry of the ball into the right operating opening 63a. Here, although the winning probability of the right operating port 63a is lower than that of the second normal gaming state, the lowering of the winning probability is suppressed so that the hold information related to the right operating port 63a can be sufficiently acquired. There is. That is, the inconvenience that the opening frequency of the lower large winning opening 341 decreases due to the decrease in the winning probability of the right operating opening 63a is suppressed.

If a jackpot result occurs during the third normal game state, most of them (excluding the 2R normal jackpot result and the 16R probability variation jackpot result) will shift to the second normal game state, and the above-mentioned relief function is excessive. Is avoided. However, even if the player is demoted from the third normal game state, if the transition destination becomes the second normal game state, the game can be re-shifted to the third normal game state. Therefore, by demotion from the third normal game state. It is possible to prevent the player's willingness to play from dropping at once.

During the third game state, the right route is given preferential treatment to the player as compared with the left route, so it is assumed that the launch destination of the game ball is mainly the right route. The game ball launched to the right route is prevented from entering the lower operating port 62a and enters the right operating port 63a. Here, the number of time reductions set when a big hit result is obtained in the game times related to the right operating port 63a is calculated from the number of time reductions set when a big hit result is obtained in the game times related to the lower operating port 62a. Is also biased so that it is generally reduced. For this reason, if a big hit result is obtained in the third normal game state, it is demoted to the second normal game state as a trigger, but the number of time reductions to be reset is given preferential treatment so as to be relatively small. There is. As a result, the hurdle for activating the relief function is lower in the second normal gaming state transitioned from the third normal gaming state than in the second normal gaming state shifted from the first normal gaming state. This is a device for alleviating the decrease in motivation for playing with the end of the third normal gaming state.

Further, in the present embodiment, when a 2R normal jackpot result is obtained in the third normal game state, the process shifts to the first normal game state and 50 times is set as the number of time reductions, and in the third normal game state. When the result is a 2R probability variation jackpot, the game shifts to the second normal game state, and the same 50 times is set as the number of time reductions. In each of these normal game states, the display effect on the display screen 75a of the symbol display device 75, the BGM output from the speaker unit 29, and the like are standardized, and it is possible to identify which normal game state is in the appearance. Is becoming difficult. Therefore, it is unclear whether the player is promoted to the third normal game state or demoted to the first normal game state until the set number of time reductions is exhausted. In this way, even if the same number of time reductions is set, the game state after digesting the number of time reductions is divided into the advantageous side and the disadvantageous side depending on the game state, thereby suppressing the monotony of the game and the degree of attention to the game. Can contribute to improvement.

As described above, in the configuration in which the gaming state can be changed to the advantageous side / disadvantage side by the time saving number of times digestion, the player's attention tends to be directed to the remaining number of times until the time saving number of times digestion. If the number of balls held is greatly reduced under the situation where the attention to the game is increasing in this way, it is assumed that the motivation for the game is likely to decrease due to the increasing attention to the game. To. Therefore, as shown in the present embodiment, the high-frequency support mode is supported for both the 4th normal game state that shifts with the 2R normal jackpot result as a trigger and the 2nd normal game state that shifts with the 2R probability variation jackpot result as a trigger. It is possible to suppress the occurrence of such inconvenience by suppressing the decrease in the number of balls held.

In addition, in a configuration in which the game state is changed by digesting a reduced number of times, it is feared that the delay in the progress of the game in the process reduces the impact and hinders the effect of improving the degree of attention to the game. In this regard, as shown in the present embodiment, the progress of the game up to the time-saving number of times digestion is facilitated by shortening the variable display time and the like, so that such a concern can be suitably dispelled.

Furthermore, in a configuration in which the game state is divided into an advantageous side and a disadvantageous side by the time saving number of times digestion, the degree of attention to the game can be expected to increase, but the time until the time saving number of times digestion is extended, which causes fatigue of the player. There is concern that it will increase. In this respect, facilitating the progress of the game by the above configuration is advantageous in reducing the fatigue of the player by suppressing the extension of the game times and shortening the process until the time is shortened. It is also preferable to set a certain number of time reductions for branching.

When the second normal game state and the fourth normal game state are compared, the former corresponds to the high probability mode, while the latter corresponds to the low probability mode. For this reason, even if it is difficult to identify which game state is in which the display effect is shared as described above, it is possible to contribute to the diversification of the game by providing a difference in the chances of a big hit result during the game state. it can.

As described above, after shifting from the first normal game state to the second normal game state through the first special game state, the number of games executed in the second normal game state reaches the upper limit (time reduction number). As a result, the player shifts to the third normal gaming state, which is more advantageous to the player. The above upper limit includes "100 times", "70 times", "50 times", "30 times", and "10 times", and the hurdle to shift to the third normal gaming state differs depending on which upper limit is set. Occurs. That is, a second normal gaming state in which it is easy to shift to the third normal gaming state and a second normal gaming state in which it is difficult to shift to the third normal gaming state will occur. By diversifying the second normal game state and providing a plurality of hurdles for transition to the third normal game state in this way, it is possible to suppress the monotony of the game in the normal game state and improve the degree of attention to the game. Can contribute.

In order to enhance the sharpness of the game while suppressing an excessive bias of the advantage, it is preferable to raise the set upper limit to some extent to suppress the upper limit arrival probability. However, on the other hand, if the upper limit becomes too large, the game to reach the upper limit will be delayed or the impression that it will be virtually impossible to reach will become stronger, and the diversification of the game will improve the interest of the game. It is feared that the effect of trying to achieve this will not be exhibited well. In this regard, as shown in the present embodiment, if the lottery mode in the second normal game state is defined to be the high probability mode, it is possible to suppress the frequent occurrence of the upper limit even if the upper limit is lowered. The occurrence of the above-mentioned various inconveniences can be suitably suppressed.

The transition (promotion) to the third normal gaming state is accompanied by a certain degree of tension, and if such tension continues for an excessively long time, it becomes a factor that increases the fatigue of the player. Therefore, in the second normal game state, an upper limit is set for the number of games executed based on the ball entering the right operating port 63a, and in the second normal game state, it is easy to enter the right operating port 63a. The game can be rapidly advanced by the configuration. As a result, it is possible to alleviate the fatigue caused by the improvement of the degree of attention to the game.

Further, in the second normal game state, the game can be advanced quickly by configuring the variation display time of the symbol to be shorter than in the first normal game state. As a result, it is possible to alleviate the fatigue caused by the improvement of the degree of attention to the game.

In particular, according to the combination with the high frequency support mode, the fluctuation display time is shortened in addition to the increase in the frequency of entering the right operating port 63a, so that the upper limit is expected to be reached. The game in the second normal game state can proceed smoothly. As a result, the effect of alleviating fatigue can be more preferably exerted.

Transition to the 1st special game state in the 4th normal game state For a player who has experienced digesting the number of time reductions without winning the lottery, it is realistic to reach the upper limit when the 2nd normal game state is reached. It can give the impression that it is a real thing. With such a configuration, it can be expected that the degree of attention to the game at the time of transition to the second normal game state will be improved.

If a big hit result is obtained during the second normal game state, the game shifts to the first special game state, and after the end of the first special game state, the game returns to the second normal game state and the fourth normal game state. There will be a divergence from the case of transition (demotion). As a result, the monotonousness of the game can be suitably suppressed. Further, even if a big hit result is obtained while the game is being advanced aiming at the upper limit in the second normal game state, there is a possibility that the game returns to the second normal game state again. When returning to the second normal gaming state, the transition to the third normal gaming state can be re-challenged by setting a new upper limit. Therefore, it is possible to suitably suppress the decrease in the motivation for playing due to the transition to the first special gaming state.

The transition conditions for transitioning from the second normal gaming state to the most advantageous third normal gaming state are alleviated when a jackpot result occurs in the second normal gaming state and the player returns to the second normal gaming state through the special gaming state. There are times. In this way, if the hurdle to the third normal game state is lowered when the second normal game state loops, the effect of suppressing the monotony of the game can be suitably exhibited by using a plurality of normal game states in combination. be able to.

As shown in the present embodiment, in the gaming machine in which the result of the big hit triggers the transition (demotion) from the second normal gaming state to the first normal gaming state, the second normal gaming state is set. The game is played with the expectation that it will not result in a big hit. Here, if a big hit result is obtained, the player may be demoted to the first normal game state, while the conditions for returning to the second normal game state and shifting to the third normal game state may be relaxed. With such a configuration, it is possible to prevent the player's willingness to play from rapidly decreasing when a big hit result is obtained in the second normal gaming state.

In addition, when the winning result is obtained in the second normal game state, not only the hurdle to the third normal game state is necessarily lowered, but also a case where the hurdle is raised is provided to give a feeling of tension to the game. Can be done.

In the configuration of stepping up in the order of the first normal game state → the second normal game state → the third normal game state, the jackpot result is obtained even though the state has shifted to the second normal game state, and the third normal game state is reached. When an event such as a distant transition occurs frequently, it tends to give the impression that the game in the second normal game state is delayed. This can be an obstacle in increasing the attention to the game. Here, as shown in the present embodiment, when a big hit result is obtained during the second normal game state, the rate of lowering the hurdle is higher than the rate of raising the hurdle, so that a plurality of normal game states It is possible to make the step-up of the game state lighter while using the above together.

When a game ball is launched on the left route in the first normal game state, a big hit lottery is executed based on the ball entering the lower operating port 62a. When this lottery results in a big hit and the player shifts to the second normal game state, it is easy to set a transition condition (time reduction number of times) that is relatively difficult to establish. On the other hand, after the transition to the second normal game state, the game ball is launched on the right route, and the main entry destination of the game ball becomes the right operating port 63a. When the jackpot lottery is executed based on the ball entering the right operating port 63a, the jackpot result is obtained, and the player returns to the second normal gaming state through the first special gaming state, the transition condition (which is relatively easy to establish) The number of time reductions) is easier to set. With such a configuration, the above-mentioned various technical ideas can be suitably embodied while avoiding the complexity of the configuration by utilizing the existing configuration in the game machine.

In the ball entry unit 70 shown in the present embodiment, the time required for the game ball flowing down the right route to pass over the shutter 331 (first specific region SE1) of the right side actuated ball entry unit 63 is frequently supported. It is longer than the sum of the variable display time and the final display time of the pattern on the through-gate display unit DS in the mode. Therefore, during the high-frequency support mode, most of the game balls that have reached the ball entry unit 70 (right-handed ball entry unit 63) enter the right-handed ball entry 63a. That is, the game ball launched to the right route during the high frequency support mode flows into the right operating opening 63a, and the entry into the lower winning opening 341 is suppressed. On the other hand, the required time is shorter than the sum of the variable display time and the fixed display time in the low frequency support mode. Therefore, even when the right-side actuating ball entry unit 63 continuously switches to the receiving state during the low-frequency support mode, a part of the game ball that has reached the shutter 331 passes through the right-side actuating ball entry unit 63 and lowers. Head to the big prize opening 341. In this way, while the high frequency support mode suppresses the entry of balls into the lower prize opening 341, the number of balls entering the lower major winning opening 341 increases during the low frequency support mode, so that the game progresses. It can make a clear difference.

Here, in order to reduce the number of game balls (spills) that pass through the right operating port 63a and head toward the lower prize opening 341 during the low frequency support mode in order to differentiate each support mode, the above-mentioned variable display time and confirmation display You can shorten the time. However, if those times are simply shortened, firing / stopping is performed according to the result displayed on the through-gate display unit DS (progressing the game so as to be advantageous to the player as much as possible). This becomes difficult, and the significance of providing the display unit DS for the through gate is diminished. In this respect, according to the configuration shown in the present embodiment, it is possible to suppress the fluctuation display time and the final display time in the through-gate display unit DS from becoming extremely short while suppressing the above-mentioned spill. As a result, it is possible to suitably improve the degree of attention to the game.

In a configuration in which the entry into the lower prize opening 341 is given preferential treatment over the entry into the right operating opening 63a, it is assumed that the player plays the game in anticipation of entering the lower entrance 341. Will be done. With such a configuration, it is not preferable that an excessive number of balls are entered into the lower prize opening 341 because it causes an imbalance in the game. In this respect, it is possible to avoid the movement of the game ball toward the lower prize winning opening 341 while shortening the time for the right-side operating ball entry unit 63 to be in the receiving state as much as possible, so that the occurrence of such inconvenience can be suitably suppressed. .. Then, shortening the time to be in the acceptance state is advantageous in promoting the expectation of the player so that the game ball flows down toward the lower prize opening 341, and the time to be in the acceptance state becomes longer. It is possible to preferably suppress the expectation of entering the ball into the lower prize opening 341.

By making the passage length of the intermediate passage portion 323 connecting the right-side actuating ball entry portion 63 and the lower variable winning device 65 shorter than the passage length related to the first specific region SE1, the lower variable winning device 65 is opened. It becomes easier to give the player the impression that if the game ball that has reached the right-side actuating entry section 63 can pass through the right-hand actuating entry section 63, it can immediately enter the first entry section, and the right-hand actuation It can contribute to improving the degree of attention to the behavior of the game ball that has reached the shutter 331 of the ball entry unit 63 and the right-side actuating ball entry unit 63.

Since most of the game balls that have flowed into the ball entry unit 70 can enter either the right operating port 63a or the lower winning opening 341, the combination of the right operating opening 63a and the lower winning opening 341 makes one large entry. You can make it look like the department is being built. It is advantageous to improve the satisfaction of the player by making it appear as if the large ball entry section secures the entry opportunity of the game ball. Here, by making the passage length of the intermediate passage portion 323 shorter than the passage length of the passage portions (specific areas SE1 and SE2) configured by each shutter, both ball entry portions (right operating port 63a and lower size) are used. The sense of unity of the winning opening 341) can be strengthened. Thereby, the above impression can be strengthened.

In this type of large-sized ball entry section, when the main entry destination is switched between the right operating port 63a / lower large winning opening 341 depending on the situation, the entry into the lower large winning opening 341 should not occur. Therefore, there is a high possibility that the game hall will suffer a disadvantage due to the occurrence of a ball entering the lower prize opening 341. In consideration of such circumstances, a connecting passage (intermediate passage portion 323) is provided between the lower prize winning opening 341 and the right operating opening 63a to delay the movement of the game ball toward the lower winning opening 341. There is technical significance in thinning out. If the intermediate passage portion 323 is lengthened to some extent, those functions can be appropriately exerted, but on the other hand, the sense of unity between the two entry portions (right operating port 63a and lower prize winning opening 341) becomes low, and 1 There is concern that the impression that it is a large ball entry section will be diminished. In this respect, as shown in the present embodiment, the shutters of both ball entry portions (right operating port 63a and lower prize winning opening 341) are inclined downward to the left, and the intermediate passage portion 323 intersects the inclination direction. By offsetting the positions of the ball entry portions (right operating port 63a and lower prize winning opening 341) up and down as a configuration extending to, both ball entry sections (right operating section) while gaining the passage length of the intermediate passage section 323. It is possible to reduce the decrease in the sense of unity between the mouth 63a and the lower prize winning mouth 341).

The game ball that has flowed into the discharge passage provided at the intermediate position of the intermediate passage portion 323 is discharged from the game area PE as it is, and the arrival at the lower prize opening 341 is avoided. In this way, a part of the game ball that has passed through the right-side actuating ball entry portion 63 is discharged from the game area PE without flowing into the lower prize winning opening 341, so that the game that has flowed into the intermediate passage portion 323. Compared with the configuration in which the ball faces the out port 68, the impression that the ball is the large-sized ball entry portion of 1 described above can be strengthened.

In a configuration in which the lower winning opening 341 is given preferential treatment to the player over the right operating opening 63a, it is expected that the game ball will pass through the right operating opening 63a and head toward the lower winning opening 341. Then, the firing operation is executed, and it is assumed that the player's attention is easily directed to the movement of the game ball from the right operating port 63a to the intermediate passage portion 323. Here, in a configuration in which a deceleration unit (protrusions 335a, 336a) is provided in the passage portion (first specific region SE1) formed by the shutter 331 to extend the passage time, the deceleration portion is on the intermediate passage portion 323 side. By arranging the game ball so as to be biased toward the ball, it is possible to easily follow the movement of the game ball at a place where the player's attention is likely to be directed. This can contribute to further improvement in attention.

In the present embodiment, after the transition from the first normal game state to the second normal game state through the first special game state, the number of games in the second normal game state reaches the upper limit, so that the second normal game It shifts to the third normal gaming state, which is more advantageous to the player than the state. By diversifying the games in this way, it is possible to suppress the monotony of the games and contribute to increasing the degree of attention to the games, but it is expected that the complexity of the games will easily cause confusion for the players. It is feared that this will hinder the effect of improving the degree of attention. In this regard, in the second normal gaming state, by displaying an image showing the target gaming state (target image TF) and a process to the target (counter image CF), the occurrence of the above inconvenience is suppressed and the game is played. It is possible to preferably exert the effect of improving the degree of attention to. In particular, by displaying the target image TF and the counter image CF together and suppressing the display of the target image TF independently, the current gaming state can be changed from the target image TF displayed in the second normal gaming state. 3 It is possible to reduce the chance of being misunderstood as being in a normal gaming state.

With respect to the counter image CF showing the number of remaining games (process), the counter value is updated according to the progress of the game times, so that it can be clearly shown that the transition to the third normal game state is approaching. On the other hand, the target image TF showing the third normal gaming state, which is the target, is also sequentially enlarged according to the progress of the game times, thereby indicating that the transition to the third normal gaming state is approaching. Can be suitably strengthened.

While the target image TF is enlarged as the game times progress, the basic size of the counter image CF is unified except for the final game times. Therefore, as the game times progress, the area ratio between the target image TF and the counter image CF changes, and the object of interest is displayed in a more emphasized manner. With such a configuration, even if a large amount of information is provided to the player at the same time, it can be suitably suppressed that it causes confusion for the player.

When the target image TF and the counter image CF are displayed on the display screen 75a, the occupied area on the display screen 75a increases as the amount of displayed information increases. Although it is effective to expand the information display area in order to improve the degree of attention to the information, the occupied area is further increased by expanding the display area. This is expected to be a factor that puts pressure on the area where other information is displayed on the display screen 75a. In this regard, as shown in the present embodiment, the target image TF showing the target is the counter image CF showing the process while appealing that the target image TF is approaching the target by increasing the size of the display area. By appealing the update of information by temporarily expanding the display area, it is possible to preferably suppress the occupied area of the display screen 75a from becoming excessively large in order to exert the notification function.

In the second normal game state, the counter value is updated as the game times progress. Here, if the target image TF is expanded when the counter value reaches a predetermined value, the two pieces of information can be related. With such a configuration, even when the player is gazing at the counter image CF, the player can be notified of the timing when the target image TF should be watched, and the size of the target image TF can be increased. You can reduce the chances of something changing being overlooked.

The target image TF is configured so that the display range after enlargement includes the display range before enlargement, and the amount of movement of the line of sight of the player who is gazing at the target image TF is reduced in the process of approaching the upper limit. be able to. This is advantageous in reducing the chance of missing a change in the target image TF. With a configuration that reduces the chances of oversight in this way, it is not necessary to excessively increase the amount of change in the size of the target image TF, and even when the upper limit is set for the size of the target image TF. The number of times the size of the target image TF is changed can be suitably increased.

A restraint image LF is attached to the target image TF shown in the present embodiment, and the number of patterns constituting the restraint image LF is changed according to the enlargement of the target image TF. With such a configuration, even when the difference in the display range before and after the enlargement of the target image TF is small, it is possible to reduce the chance that the enlarged display is overlooked. This is preferable in order to diversify the mode of changing the display range.

When changing the display range of the target image TF, it is preferable to secure a certain amount of change time in order to appeal the change. Therefore, by configuring the display range to be changed at the start of the game round as shown in the present embodiment, the variable display time of the pattern of the game round can be utilized as the change time of the display range of the target image TF. , A practically preferable configuration can be realized.

During the second normal game state, a big hit result or the like may occur and the challenge to the third normal game state may end. Here, if the change in the display range is avoided based on the jackpot result or the like even though the display range is supposed to be changed, it becomes a stepping stone to the above. The end of the challenge will be revealed early. In this respect, when the display range of the target image TF is changed at the start of the game round as described above, the occurrence of the above inconvenience can be suppressed by changing the display range regardless of the determination result.

In the configuration shown in this feature, the transition to the third normal game state is that the predetermined jackpot result is not obtained (for example, a missed result or a special hit result) until the final game round when the upper limit is reached in the second normal game state. It is a condition. Here, when the result of the big hit is an opportunity to increase the number of balls held, it is assumed that the lottery result other than the result of the big hit is emphasized and displayed, which causes a sense of discomfort to the player. That is, there is a concern that the effect of increasing the degree of attention to the game will not be exhibited well due to the diversification of the game. Therefore, in the final game round, the lottery result is not intentionally displayed in the relatively large third variable display area ME3, and the lottery result is displayed only in the relatively small first display area. The occurrence of inconvenience can be suppressed.

In the game rounds other than the final game round, the symbol combination corresponding to the lottery result is stopped and displayed in both the second variable display area ME2 and the third variable display area ME3. In this way, in order to use both the second variable display area ME2 and the third variable display area ME3 in the preliminary game times, the player is informed of the relationship between the two variable display areas until the final game time. It is technically significant that even if the symbol in the third variable display area ME3 is hidden, it can be suppressed from becoming a factor that confuses the player.

Further, if the symbol in the third variable display area ME3 is hidden in advance, for example, the place and time for displaying a still image, a moving image, or the like suggesting the transition to the third normal gaming state in the third variable display area ME3. Can be suitably secured. In particular, in the present embodiment, the symbols in the third variable display area ME3 are hidden at the start of the final game round, and the variable display of those symbols is avoided. In this way, by avoiding that the symbol in the third variable display area ME3 is suddenly hidden during the variable display, it is possible to reduce the discomfort when the symbol is hidden.

If the symbol of the third variable display area ME3 is hidden as shown in the present embodiment, for example, the symbol in the third variable display area ME3 may remain fluctuated or stopped at the previous game round. It is avoided that the displayed symbol is left as it is. This is preferable in order to prevent the player from being confused due to a discrepancy in the display of the second variable display area ME2 and the third variable display area ME3.

Incidentally, in the process of going from the second normal game state to the third normal game state, the symbol combinations that do not correspond to the jackpot result are repeatedly stopped and displayed. It is terrible for a player who is playing a game with the expectation that such a display will be excessively noticeable as a big hit result. In this respect, in the present embodiment, the area ratio with the third variable display area ME3 changes as the target image TF expands, so that the player's attention can be directed to the target image TF. This is preferable in suppressing the occurrence of the above inconvenience. Further, suggesting the transition to the third normal gaming state by using the target image TF instead of hiding the symbol in the third variable display area ME3 compensates for the lack of information due to the symbol being hidden. Also preferred above.

<Second Embodiment>
In the first embodiment described above, as shown in FIG. 31 (b2), the variable display time table referred to when a deviation result or a special hit result is obtained in the second normal gaming state is referred to as the second normal game. It was common to all game times in the game state. In this variable display time table, in order to facilitate the progress of the game in the second normal game state, the variable display time is set to be shorter than that in the first normal game state. Specifically, when the number of reserved information related to the right operating port 63a is "0", the variable display time is "13 sec", and when the number of reserved information related to the right operating port 63a is "1", it varies. When the display time is "8 sec" and the number of reserved information related to the right operating port 63a is "2", the variable display time is "4 sec" and when the number of reserved information related to the right operating port 63a is "3" or more. Is specified so that the variable display time is "1 sec".

In the present embodiment, the configuration related to the setting of the variable display time of the pattern in the display unit DR for the right operating port is different from that of the first embodiment. Specifically, as the variable display time table referred to in the second normal gaming state, the first variable display time referred to until the number of games executed in the second normal gaming state reaches the reference number of times. It has a table and a second variable display time table that is referred to when the reference number of times is reached, and when the first variable display time table and the second variable display time table are compared, the latter is more than the former. The difference is that the difference is provided so that the variable display time becomes longer.

Specifically, in the first variable display time table, when the number of reserved information related to the right operating port 63a is "0", the variable display time is "13 sec", and the number of reserved information related to the right operating port 63a is "1". In the case of "", the variable display time is "8 sec", and when the number of reserved information related to the right operating port 63a is "2", the variable display time is "4 sec" and the number of reserved information related to the right operating port 63a is When it is "3" or more, the variable display time is specified to be "1 sec". On the other hand, in the second variable display time table, when the number of reserved information related to the right operating port 63a is "0", the variable display time is "13 sec" and the number of reserved information related to the right operating port 63a is. When "1", the variable display time is "8 sec", when the number of reserved information related to the right operating port 63a is "2", the variable display time is "5 sec", and the holding information related to the right operating port 63a When the number is "3" or more, the variable display time is specified to be "5 sec".

Further, the configuration related to the setting of the fixed display time of the pattern in the display unit DR for the right operating port is also different from the first embodiment. Specifically, the first fixed display time set until the number of games executed in the second normal game state reaches the above-mentioned reference number, and the second fixed display time set when the reference number is reached. Is different. Specifically, the first definite display time is "1 sec" as in the first embodiment, whereas the second definite display time is a longer time (specifically, "2 sec"). ).

That is, in the present embodiment, the execution time of the fanning effect using the target image TF in the final game round and the notification time indicating the transition to the third normal game state can be made longer than in the first embodiment. It is possible. With a configuration that gives a chance to greatly increase the number of balls held by shifting from the second normal gaming state to the third normal gaming state, it is possible to gain time to notify the player that the transition to the third normal gaming state has occurred. This is preferable for improving the degree of attention to the game and the satisfaction of the player.

<Third embodiment>
In the present embodiment, as in the second embodiment, although the device is devised to increase the execution time of the notification indicating the transition to the third normal gaming state, the specific configuration thereof is the second embodiment. It is different from the form of. Hereinafter, the device will be described with reference to the timing chart of FIG. In the present embodiment as well, as in the first embodiment, the variable display time table referred to when the result is a deviation or a special hit result in the second normal gaming state is the second normal game. It is configured to be common to all game times in the game state.

At the timing of tb1 when the final game round is started in the second normal game state, the display level of the target image TF is LV6, and the number of counter image CFs is “0”. At the timing of tb2 in which the pattern at the right operating port 63a is confirmed and displayed in the final game round, the target image TF is displayed at the maximum in the center of the display screen 75a, and the restraint image LF and the counter image CF are hidden. As a result, the notification of the transition to the third normal gaming state is started.

In the example shown in FIG. 60, the final game round corresponds to the special hit result. Therefore, the second special game state is entered at the timing of tb3 when the confirmation display is completed. The transition notification on the display screen 75a will be continued even during the second special game state. During this shift notification, the symbol stopped and displayed in the second variable display area ME2 on the display screen 75a is maintained in the stopped state.

At the timing of tb4 when the second special gaming state ends and the transition to the third normal gaming state ends, the variable display of the pattern on the display unit DR for the right operating port is started. That is, the first game round in the third normal game state is started. At this timing, the variable display of the symbol in the second variable display area ME2 is started, but the target image TF remains displayed on the display screen 75a, and the symbol display in the third variable display area ME3 is avoided. ..

The first game round in the third normal game state also corresponds to the special hit result, and immediately after the transition to the third normal game state, the transition to the second special game state is performed (timing of tb6). The target image TF described above is maintained until the end of the second special gaming state, and is erased at the timing of tb7 when the third normal gaming state is restored. Then, on the display screen 75a, a character image or the like corresponding to the third normal gaming state is displayed instead of the target image TF. In the third normal game state, the number of prize balls and the like acquired in the third normal game state will be displayed. The display of the number of prize balls includes the number of prize balls acquired while the target image TF is displayed in the third normal game state.

Even if the final game round corresponds to the out-of-game result, the target image TF is displayed until the second game round in the third normal game state is started, that is, the transition to the third normal game state. Notification is continued.

In addition, when a jackpot result is obtained in the first game round in the third normal game state, an image corresponding to the jackpot result is replaced with the target image TF at the timing when the confirmation display of the first game round is started. And so on.

In this way, by continuing the transition notification started in the second normal game state so as to straddle at least the first game times in the third normal game state, the notification time can be set while suppressing the delay in the progress of the game. It can be suitably secured.

<Fourth Embodiment>
In the first embodiment, the value displayed in the remaining number of times display area CE (hereinafter referred to as the counter value) is updated by subtracting "1" each time the game round is started, and the counter value is updated. Is configured to shift to the third normal gaming state after becoming "0", that is, to notify the remaining number of games until the transition to the third normal gaming state. In the present embodiment, the configuration related to the update of the counter value displayed in the remaining number display area CE is different from that in the first embodiment. Hereinafter, with reference to FIGS. 61 and 62, a configuration related to notification of the number of remaining games in the present embodiment will be described.

In the present embodiment, a plurality of subtraction levels having different degrees of subtraction when subtracting the value of the remaining number display area CE are provided. Specifically, as shown in the schematic diagram of FIG. 61A, the subtraction level 1 (LV1) in which the counter value of the remaining number display area CE is subtracted by "1" per game, and the counter of the remaining number display area CE. Subtraction level 2 (LV2) that subtracts "2" per game, subtraction level 3 (LV3) that subtracts "3" from the counter value of the remaining number display area CE, counter of the remaining number display area CE Four subtraction levels 4 (LV4) for subtracting "4" from each game are provided, and in the MPU 652 of the notification / effect control device 143, the remaining number of times display area CE is referred to with reference to the set subtraction level. It is configured to subtract the counter value of.

When the subtraction level is LV1, the timing at which the variation display of the symbol is started in the second variation display area ME2 and the third variation display area ME3, that is, the right operating port 63a, is the same as in the first embodiment. The counter value is subtracted by "1" at the timing when the game round according to the above is started (see FIG. 61 (b)). On the other hand, when the subtraction level is LV2 to LV4, the timing at which the fluctuation display of the symbol is started in the second fluctuation display area ME2 or the third fluctuation display area ME3, that is, the game number related to the right operating port 63a. At the timing when is started, a plurality of counter values are subtracted according to the subtraction level. For example, when the subtraction level is LV2, at the timing when the fluctuation display of the symbol is started in the second fluctuation display area ME2 or the third fluctuation display area ME3, that is, at the timing when the game round related to the right operating port 63a is started. Then, the counter value is subtracted by "2" (see FIG. 61 (b)).

Here, in the present embodiment, the initial value of the counter value (hereinafter referred to as the initial display number of times) when the counter image CF is displayed with the transition to the second normal gaming state is set by the main control device 162. There are cases where it is determined by the notification / effect control device 143 so as to match the determined reference number of times, and there are cases where it is determined by the notification / effect control device 143 so as to be greater than the reference number of times. Then, in the notification / effect control device 143, at the time of transition to the second normal gaming state, the subtraction pattern of the counter value, that is, the switching pattern of the subtraction level is determined in accordance with the determination of the initial display number. Hereinafter, the relationship between the reference number of times, the initial display number of times, and the subtraction pattern will be described with reference to the schematic diagram of FIG. 62.

For example, when the reference number of times is "100", the initial display number of times is "100" times, and the subtraction pattern in this case is that the subtraction level of all the game times from the first time to the 100th time is LV1. That is, the counter value is subtracted by "1" in every game. This subtraction pattern is the same as that of the first embodiment.

When the reference number of times is "70" times, the initial display number of times is "100" times or "70" times. When the initial display number is "70", that is, when the reference number and the initial display number match, the subtraction level of all the game times from the first to the 70th is LV1. That is, the counter value is subtracted by "1" in every game. On the other hand, when the initial display number is "100", that is, when the initial display number exceeds the reference number, a plurality of subtraction patterns are provided, and which subtraction pattern is used is determined by lottery. To. For each of these subtraction patterns, the subtraction level is raised when the number of started game times reaches a preset number of times, and the subtraction speed is increased.

For example, as the subtraction pattern set when the reference number of times is "70" and the initial display number is "100", the subtraction level of the first to 50th times is LV1, and the subtraction level of the 51st to 65th times is LV2. , A subtraction pattern in which the 66th to 70th subtraction levels are LV4 and a subtraction pattern in which the 1st to 60th subtraction levels are LV1 and the 61st to 70th subtraction levels are LV2 are provided.

When the reference number of times is "50" times, the initial display number of times displayed is any of "100" times, "70" times, and "50" times. When the initial display number is "50", that is, when the reference number and the initial display number match, the subtraction level of all the first to 50th game times is LV1. That is, the counter value is subtracted by "1" in every game. On the other hand, when the initial display count is "70" and "100", that is, when the initial display count exceeds the reference count, a plurality of subtraction patterns are provided, and any subtraction pattern can be used. Whether to do it is decided by lottery. For each of these subtraction patterns, the subtraction level is raised when the number of started game times reaches a preset number of times, and the subtraction speed is increased.

For example, as the subtraction pattern set when the reference number of times is "50" and the initial display number is "70", the subtraction level of the 1st to 30th times is LV1 and the subtraction level of the 31st to 50th times is LV2. The subtraction pattern is provided, and the subtraction level of the 1st to 40th times is LV1 and the subtraction level of the 41st to 50th times is LV3.

As the subtraction pattern set when the reference number of times is "50" and the initial display number is "100", the subtraction level of the 1st to 10th times is LV1, and the subtraction level of the 11th to 40th times is LV2, 41. A subtraction pattern in which the subtraction level from the 1st to the 50th is LV3, a subtraction in which the subtraction level from the 1st to the 20th is LV1, the subtraction level from the 21st to the 40th is LV2, and the subtraction level from the 41st to the 50th is LV4. A pattern and a subtraction pattern in which the subtraction level of the 1st to 30th times is LV1, the subtraction level of the 31st to 40th times is LV2, and the subtraction level of the 41st to 50th times is LV3 are provided.

When the reference number of times is "30" times, the initial display number of times is "70" times, "50" times, or "30" times. In the subtraction pattern when the initial display number is "30", that is, when the reference number and the initial display number match, the subtraction level of all the game times from the first to the 30th is LV1. That is, the counter value is subtracted by "1" in every game. On the other hand, in the subtraction pattern when the initial display number is "50" times and "70" times, the subtraction level is raised when the number of started game times reaches a preset number of times. It is configured to increase the subtraction speed.

For example, as the subtraction pattern set when the reference number of times is "30" and the initial display number is "50", the subtraction level of the 1st to 10th times is LV1, and the subtraction level of the 11th to 30th times is LV2. The subtraction pattern is provided, and the subtraction level of the 1st to 20th times is LV1 and the subtraction level of the 21st to 30th times is LV3.

As the subtraction pattern set when the reference number of times is "30" and the initial display number is "70", the subtraction level of the 1st to 10th times is LV1 and the subtraction level of the 11th to 30th times is LV3. A subtraction pattern is provided.

When the reference number of times is "10" times, the initial display number of times is "10" times, and the subtraction pattern in this case is that the subtraction level of all the first to tenth game times is LV1. That is, the counter value is subtracted by "1" in every game. This subtraction pattern is the same as that of the first embodiment.

In this way, if the subtraction level is changed in the middle of the second normal game state and the subtraction speed is increased, the initial display number becomes a large value (for example, 100 times or 70 times). Even in such a case, it is possible to preferably suppress a decrease in the expectation for the transition to the third normal gaming state.

In addition, it is possible to give the player the impression that the progress speed of the game in the second normal game state is changing. This is preferable in order to suppress the monotonization of the game in the second normal game state.

According to the configuration described in detail above, after the transition from the first normal gaming state to the second normal gaming state through the first special gaming state, the number of games played in the second normal gaming state becomes the reference number (“upper limit”). When it reaches (corresponding to), it shifts to the third normal gaming state, which is more advantageous to the player than the second normal gaming state. In the second normal game state, the counter value is displayed in the remaining number of times display area CE of the display screen 75a as numerical information correlated with the remaining number of games. The player can predict the remaining amount until the transition to the third normal gaming state by looking at the counter value displayed on the display screen 75a. Here, LV1 to LV4 are provided for the subtraction level of the counter value (corresponding to the "update state"), and the subtraction speed of the counter value can be changed by switching these subtraction levels. With such a switching function, a rhythm change occurs in the progress of the game until the transition to the third normal game state, and the monotonization of the game can be suitably suppressed.

The initial value (initial display count) of the counter image CF is set to a value larger than the product of the reference count and the one-time update value at the minimum subtraction level (LV1), and the subtraction level is estimated more than the reference count. It is possible to preferably increase the degree of freedom in setting.

In the configuration in which the second normal game state ends when the reference number of times is reached, the opportunity to switch the subtraction level depends on the reference number of times. Therefore, as shown in the present embodiment, by predetermining the game times for switching the subtraction level according to the reference number of times, it is possible to properly update the count value.

As shown in the present embodiment, if the value to be subtracted at one time is increased by switching the subtraction level, the update speed of the counter value can be increased toward the third normal gaming state. Thereby, the player's attention to the transition to the third normal gaming state can be suitably improved. In the present embodiment, the number of updates (number of subtractions) is the same when compared with the same reference number of times, and by providing a difference in the update width in one update, the sharpness of updating the count value is strengthened. it can.

<Fifth Embodiment>
In the fourth embodiment, the rhythm of the game in the second normal game state is changed by configuring the counter value of the counter image CF to be subtracted by a plurality of times in one game. Here, the remaining number of times display area CE on which the counter image CF is displayed is larger than the second variable display area ME2 and smaller than the third variable display area ME3. In the present embodiment, by strengthening the cooperation between the symbol display and the update of the counter value in the third variable display area ME3, which has relatively high visibility, it is possible to suppress the oversight of the update of the counter value. It is one of the features. Hereinafter, the characteristic configuration in the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 63 to 64, focusing on the differences from the fourth embodiment. In this embodiment, LV1 to LV2 are set as the subtraction level, and other subtraction levels are omitted.

When the subtraction level is LV1, the counter value is subtracted by "1" for each game as shown in the timing chart of FIG. 63. In this case, at the timing of tc1 when the variable display of the symbol is started on the display unit DR for the right operating port, the variation display of the main symbol in the second variation display area ME and the variation of the sub symbol in the third variation display area ME3. The display is started, and the counter value of the counter image CF is subtracted by "1" accordingly. Then, at the timing of tc2 when the variable display of the symbol is stopped (confirmed display is started) on the display unit DR for the right operating port, the variable display and the third variable display of the main symbol in the second variable display area ME The variable display of the sub-symbol in the area ME3 ends.

On the other hand, when the subtraction level is LV2, as shown in the timing chart of FIG. 64, the mode of variable display of the symbol differs between the second variable display area ME2 and the third variable display area ME3. Specifically, at the timing of td1 when the variable display of the symbol is started on the display unit DR for the right operating port, the variable display of the main symbol in the second variable display area ME and the sub symbol in the third variable display area ME3. The fluctuation display of is started, and the counter value of the counter image CF is subtracted by "1" accordingly. In this respect, it is the same as when the subtraction level is LV1.

At the timing of td2 where the variation display of the symbol in the display unit DR for the right operating port and the variation display of the symbol in the second variation display area ME2 are continued, the symbol combination corresponding to the deviation result is displayed in the third variation display area ME3. Stop is displayed. That is, the symbol is temporarily stopped and displayed in the third variable display area ME3. Then, the variation display of the symbol in the third variation display area ME3 is restarted at the timing of td3 when a time having the same length as the fixed display time has elapsed from the timing of td2. The counter value of the counter image CF is subtracted by "1" in accordance with the resumption of the fluctuation display.

At the timing of td4 where the symbol is stopped and displayed (confirmed display) on the display unit DR for the right operating port, the symbol combination corresponding to the special hit result is stopped and displayed in the second variation display area ME2, and the third variation display area. In ME3, the symbol combination corresponding to the special hit result is stopped and displayed.

In the present embodiment, the subtraction timings when a plurality of counter values are subtracted in one game round are dispersed in one game round. That is, while the fourth embodiment is configured to subtract a plurality of counter values at the start timing of the game round, in the present embodiment, the start timing of the game round and the middle of the game round The counter value is subtracted by "1" at the timing. By temporarily stopping the variation display of the symbol in the third variation display area ME3 during the game rotation and restarting the variation display of the symbol in the third variation display area ME3 at the subtraction timing during the game rotation. You can reduce the chances of missing a subtraction. In this way, the subtraction rhythm can be changed by increasing the number of subtractions instead of increasing the number of subtractions at one time.

Further, if the update of the count value is linked to the symbol display (fluctuation → stop), the update is overlooked while coexisting with other information on the display screen 75a by reducing the display area of the counter image CF. You can reduce the chances of being affected. In particular, since the third variable display area ME3 arranged in the center of the display screen 75a is a place where the player can easily pay attention, the above effect can be obtained by linking with the image of the third variable display area ME3. It is more preferably exhibited.

<Sixth Embodiment>
In the first embodiment, the game ball passing through the downstream passage portion 324 is decelerated by the ridge portions 335a and 336a arranged in the second specific region SE2 of the downstream passage portion 324. 2 The game ball that has reached the specific area SE2 is configured to reduce the chance of passing through the lower variable winning device 65 and raise the winning probability to the lower large winning opening 341. The present embodiment is similar to the first embodiment in that the probability of winning the lower variable winning device 65 is increased, but the specific configuration for realizing the same is the same as that of the first embodiment. It's different. Hereinafter, the ball entry unit 70A in the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 65 to 66, focusing on the differences from the ball entry unit 70 shown in the first embodiment. FIG. 65 is a front view of the ball entry unit 70A in the sixth embodiment, and FIG. 66 is a schematic view illustrating the flow of winning a prize in the lower large winning opening 341A.

As shown in FIG. 65, the lower variable winning device 65A has a lower large winning opening 341A that opens above the game machine, and the housing 320A of the ball winning unit 70A crosses above the lower large winning opening 341A. In this way, the downstream passage portion 324A is formed. The lower variable winning device 65A has a flat plate-shaped shutter 345A whose plate surface faces upward and can be slidable in the front-rear direction (thickness direction of the game board 60), and a drive unit (solenoid) for the shutter 345A. Have. The drive unit for the shutter 345A is connected to the main control device 162 and operates based on the drive signal from the main control device 162. In the non-driving state (non-excited state) in which the drive signal is not output from the main control device 162, the shutter 345A is arranged at a closed position covering the lower prize opening 341A from above, and the drive signal is output to the drive unit. Is in the driving state (excited state) and moves (backward) to an open position that does not cover the lower prize opening 341A.

The lower variable winning device 65A is formed with a guide passage 342 that guides the game ball that has passed through the lower large winning opening 341A to the detection position by the detection sensor 391d. The bottom surface of the guide passage 342A faces the lower prize opening 341A from below, and is inclined downward toward the center of the game machine. The game ball that has passed through the lower prize opening 341A lands on the bottom surface of the guide passage 342A and is guided to the detection sensor 391d by moving toward the center side of the game machine along the bottom surface.

When the shutter 345A is arranged in the closed position, the shutter 345A complements the rolling surface of the game ball in the downstream passage portion 324A. On the other hand, the game ball that has reached the second specific region SE2 under the condition that the shutter 345A is arranged in the open position, that is, the downstream side passage portion 324A (specifically, the rolling surface) is cut off. Will not be able to move along the shutter 345A, and will flow into the lower prize opening 341A through the second specific region SE2.

In the shutter 345A arranged at the closed position, the portion of the downstream passage portion 324A that complements the rolling surface of the game ball is formed so that the front-rear width is slightly larger than the diameter dimension of the game ball. , The size is such that multiple game balls cannot pass through the same place in the passage direction at the same time.

Further, in the first embodiment, the second specific region SE2 is provided with the deceleration sections including the ridges 375a and 376a (see FIG. 8), but in the present embodiment, the ridges 375a and 376a are provided. Is omitted.

Here, in the present embodiment, the downstream passage portion 324A (upper surface of the shutter 345A) is inclined downward not to the center side (left side) of the game machine but to the side side (right side) of the game machine, and the first embodiment. The inclination direction is opposite to that of the downstream passage portion 324 (shutter 345) shown in the above embodiment. That is, the downstream passage portion 324 shown in the first embodiment is formed so as to be inclined in the same direction (left side) as the upstream passage portion 322, whereas the downstream passage portion 324 is shown in the present embodiment. The downstream passage portion 324A is formed so as to be on a side whose inclination direction is different from that of the upstream passage portion 322A.

Between the lower variable winning device 65A and the right-side actuating ball entry unit 63, the discharge passage unit 325A for discharging the game ball from the ball entry unit 70A instead of the intermediate passage unit 323 shown in the first embodiment. Is provided. The discharge passage portion 325A is connected to the downstream passage portion 324A, and the game ball that has passed through the upstream passage portion 322A → the downstream passage portion 324A is guided to the back side of the game board 60 through the discharge passage portion 325A.

An extension passage portion 326A is formed in the housing 320A by extending the downstream passage portion 324A to the side opposite to the discharge passage portion 325A side. Specifically, the extension passage portion 326A is formed by forming an inclined portion 326aA that is inclined downward toward the upper end portion of the shutter 345A, and the inclined portion 326aA and the shutter 345A form a series of rolling surfaces. It is formed. That is, the game ball can come and go between the inclined portion 326aA and the shutter 345A.

The extension passage portion 326A is open to the center side of the game machine, and if the game ball reaches the opening portion 327A through the extension passage portion 326A, the game ball is discharged from the ball entry unit 70A through the opening portion 327A. The Rukoto. In the present embodiment, a general winning opening 61 (not shown) is arranged between the opening portion 327A and the out opening 68, and the game ball discharged from the opening portion 327A is the general winning opening 61. It is structured so that you can win a prize.

Similar to the first embodiment, a plurality of ridges (see ridges 335a and 336a in FIG. 8) are provided in the first specific region SE1 of the upstream passage portion 322A in the present embodiment. The flow path meanders back and forth. By decelerating the game ball passing through the first specific region SE1 by the ridges, the variation in the moving speed can be suppressed. Then, after suppressing the variation in the moving speed of the game ball in the first specific region SE1, the game ball is accelerated toward the exit portion 322aA of the upstream passage portion 322A, so that the game ball passes through the outlet portion 322aA. It is possible to keep the moving speed of the above constant so that it becomes a predetermined speed.

In the first embodiment, the ridge portions 335a and 336a are arranged in the first specific region SE1 so as to be closer to the intermediate passage portion 323, that is, in the passage direction of the ball passage 321A. In contrast to the configuration in which the game ball decelerates at the position directly upstream of the intermediate passage portion 323 by being disproportionately arranged to the downstream side, those ridge portions are first specified in the present embodiment. The acceleration section of the game ball is expanded by arranging the ball passage 321A in the region SE1 so as to be biased toward the upstream side in the passage direction.

The upstream side passage portion 322A is inclined downward toward the downstream side passage portion 324 side, and the outlet portion 322aA is configured to face the center side (left side) of the game machine. The game ball accelerated by the upstream passage portion 322A jumps out from the exit portion 322aA toward the extension of the upstream passage portion 322A in the passage direction, and descends onto the shutter 345A. The game ball that has landed on the shutter 345A moves (reverses) the downstream passage portion 324A to the side (left side) away from the discharge passage portion 325A while weakening its momentum due to the collision with the shutter 345A. The momentum given to the game ball by the upstream passage portion 322A is defined so that the game ball can move from the shutter 345A to the inclined portion 326aA and does not reach the opening portion 327A.

The inclination angle of the downstream passage portion 324A (5 ° in the present embodiment) and the inclination angle of the extension passage portion 326A (5 ° in the present embodiment) are the same. Further, each inclination angle of the downstream side passage portion 324A and the extension passage portion 326A is smaller than the inclination angle of the upstream side passage portion 322A (10 ° in the present embodiment). This is a device for gaining a moving distance when the game ball that has moved from the upstream side passage portion 322A to the downstream side passage portion 324A reverses.

The game ball that has moved from the upstream passage portion 322A to the downstream passage portion 324A gradually gains momentum as it moves on the shutter 345A in the direction opposite to the inclination direction (right) of the downstream passage portion 324A (left). Immediately after moving from the shutter 345A to the inclined portion 326aA, that is, before reaching the opening portion 327A, the vehicle completely stalls. After that, the shutter 345A starts moving in the same direction as the tilt direction due to its own weight. That is, the moving direction is reversed, and the shutter 345A is moved to the opposite side from the initial landing, that is, to the discharge passage portion 325A side.

The period of stay (approximately 0.6 sec) in which the game ball stays in the inclined portion 326aA at the time of the above reversal is shorter than the opening period (0.8 sec) when the lower prize opening 341A is opened as a special hit result. It has become. As a result, it is suppressed that the lower prize opening 341A is closed → opened → closed while the game ball is staying at the inclined portion 326aA. In the present embodiment, although the period during which the lower prize opening 341A is opened as a special hit result is shortened, a certain amount of prizes may be generated in the lower prize opening 341A.

In the present embodiment, as a configuration in which the game ball moves in the second specific area SE2 so as to be folded back, the game ball is continuously launched to the right route by gaining the period required for passing through the second specific area SE2. If this is the case, it is suppressed that the special game state (opening / closing execution mode) is not terminated without winning the lower prize opening 341A even though the result is a special hit.

Specifically, the period required for the game ball to move from the landing position of the game ball to the turning position on the shutter 345A and return to the landing position is longer than the firing cycle (0.6 sec) of the game ball. As a result, while at least one game ball is positioned on the shutter 345A, a plurality of game balls may be positioned on the shutter 345A depending on the timing, thereby suppressing the monotonous movement of the game ball.

Hereinafter, with reference to FIG. 66, the flow of winning when the lower grand prize opening 341A is opened as a special winning result will be illustrated.

As shown in FIG. 66 (a) → FIG. 66 (b) → FIG. 66 (c) → FIG. 66 (d), the preceding game ball B1 moves to the left on the shutter 345A and moves at the inclined portion 326aA. When the direction is reversed, the subsequent game ball B2 reaches the shutter 345A at the timing before the game ball B1 returns to the shutter 345A.

A special winning result is obtained based on the winning of the right operating opening 63a, and when the lower winning opening 341A is opened, the preceding game ball B1 and the succeeding gaming ball B2 flow into the lower winning opening 341A. Further, the game ball B3 following the game ball B2 jumps out from the exit portion 322aA of the upstream side passage portion 322A and directly flows into the lower prize winning opening 341A. In the present embodiment, the ridge portion of the second specific area SE2 is omitted, and the inflow of the game ball B3 into the lower large winning opening 341A is facilitated.

Here, the movement of the game ball will be supplementarily described with reference to FIGS. 66 (a) to 66 (c) again. When the preceding game ball B1 reverses at the inclined portion 326aA and returns to the shutter 345A, the succeeding game ball B2 reaches the shutter 345A. That is, both the temporarily preceding game ball B1 and the succeeding game ball B2 coexist on the shutter 345A.

The preceding game ball B1 is moving in the downward direction (right side), while the subsequent game ball B2 is moving in the upward direction (left side), and both game balls B1 and B2 collide on the shutter 345A. Will be done. Due to this collision, the preceding game ball B1 is pushed back to the inclined portion 326aA side, and the succeeding game ball B2 loses momentum and starts moving to the discharge passage portion 325A side. As a result, the preceding game ball B1 and the succeeding game ball B2 are exchanged. That is, the succeeding game ball B2 overtakes the preceding game ball B1. At the time of this overtaking, the preceding game ball B1 is assisted by the succeeding game ball B2, and the period of stay in the second specific area SE2 is extended. As a result, the succeeding game ball B3 reaches the landing position before the preceding game ball B1 passes through the second specific region SE2 and moves to the discharge passage portion 325A, and at least one game ball is lowered. The downstream passage portion 324A can be made to stand by so that the winning opening 341A can be won.

When the succeeding game ball B3 lands on the shutter 345A, if the preceding game ball B1 is located between the landing position and the discharge passage portion 325A, the game ball located in the second specific area SE2 The game ball B1 is replaced with the game ball B3. On the other hand, when the preceding game ball B1 is located between the landing position and the inclined portion 326aA, the preceding game ball B1 collides with the succeeding game ball B3, and the succeeding game ball B3 precedes. The stay period of the preceding game ball B1 is re-extended while overtaking the game ball B1.

As shown in the present embodiment, according to the configuration in which the game ball is inverted and passes through the shutter 345A twice in total, the movement distance of the game ball in the shutter 345A is the movement distance PLU in the outward route and the movement distance in the return route. It is the sum of the moving distance PLD, and the moving distance of the game ball can be increased without increasing the width (width dimension L1) of the shutter 345A (see FIG. 67 (b)). That is, in the comparative example shown in FIG. 67A, specifically, the configuration in which the game ball does not reverse, it is possible to realize miniaturization and weight reduction of the shutter while increasing the moving distance of the game ball.

By reducing the size and weight of the shutter 345 in this way, it is possible to improve the responsiveness when opening and closing the shutter 345A. That is, the shutter 345A can be quickly opened and closed when the drive unit (solenoid) is switched between excitation and non-excitation, and the game ball that should originally win due to the delay in the movement of the shutter 345A does not win or wins. It is possible to prevent a game ball that should not have won a prize.

In particular, by using the continuous inclined portion 326aA in combination with the shutter 345A, the shutter 345A is further reduced in size and weight. Since the staying period of the game ball is shorter than the opening period of the lower prize opening 341A for the inclined portion 326aA, it is avoided that the presence of the inclined portion 326aA becomes a factor that hinders the winning of the lower prize opening 341A. Has been done. That is, while promoting further miniaturization and weight reduction of the shutter 345A, it is suppressed that the chance of winning a prize is reduced due to the promotion.

The plate-shaped shutter 345A forms a rolling surface of the game ball in the downstream passage portion 324A, and when the shutter 345A switches from the closed position to the open position, the game ball located on the shutter 345A wins a lower prize. It falls (enters) into the mouth 341A. With such a configuration, for example, when the transition to the second special gaming state is repeated in the third normal gaming state, the gaming ball passes through the ball entry portion during the period when the shutter 345A is maintained in the closed position. It is possible to preferably suppress the occurrence of spilling balls. This is preferable in order to improve the degree of attention to the game.

Here, the above-mentioned effect of suppressing the spilling ball can be preferably exerted by increasing the width of the shutter and increasing the moving distance of the game ball on the shutter. However, there is concern that an increase in the size of the shutter may slow down the movement of the shutter and reduce the responsiveness of the opening / closing operation. Such slow movement of the shutter hinders the effect of suppressing the spilling ball described above, and is not preferable in improving the degree of attention to the game. In this regard, according to the configuration shown in the present embodiment, the game ball supplied to the downstream passage portion 324A via the upstream passage portion 322A moves so as to reciprocate on the shutter 345A. By moving on the shutter 345A on both the outward and return routes, the period of being located on the shutter 345A can be earned. Further, since a part of the outward path and the return path is formed by the inclined portion 326aA arranged side by side with the shutter 345A, it is possible to prevent the shutter from becoming large in order to gain a movement path (stay period). Therefore, it is possible to suppress a decrease in the responsiveness of the opening / closing operation and preferably improve the degree of attention to the game.

The length and inclination angle of the inclined portion 326aA are reversed at the inclined portion 326aA, and the moving speed of the game ball moving toward the lower prize opening 341A is the lower prize when the shutter 345A is arranged in the open position. It is stipulated that the speed does not pass through the lower prize winning opening 341A without flowing into the opening 341A. That is, if the shutter 345A moves to the open position when the game ball moves to the inclined portion 326aA, the game ball returning from the inclined portion 326aA flows into the lower prize opening 341A. As a result, the above-mentioned effect of suppressing the spilling sphere can be suitably exerted.

In the inclined portion 326aA, the required period when the game ball that has moved from the shutter 345A to the inclined portion 326aA returns to the shutter 345A is shorter than the period from when the shutter 345A is placed in the open position to when it returns to the closed position. Is formed in. According to such a configuration, it is possible to prevent the opening period of the shutter 345A from ending while the game ball is located on the inclined portion 326aA. As a result, the effect of suppressing the enlargement of the shutter 345A and the effect of suppressing the spilling sphere can be suitably exhibited.

If many game balls move from the inclined portion 326aA to the shutter 345A side at once, there is a possibility that the number of balls entering the lower prize opening 341A becomes excessive. It is feared that this will be a factor that impairs the soundness of the game. In this regard, in the inclined portion 326aA shown in the present embodiment, the number of game balls (2) that can simultaneously exist on the inclined portion 326aA is the number of game balls that can be launched during the opening period of the shutter 345A (3). ) Is formed to be less than. By limiting the number of game balls that can simultaneously exist on the inclined portion 326aA to be smaller than the number of game balls that can be launched during the opening period, the above concerns can be preferably dispelled.

As described above, according to the configuration in which the game ball located on the shutter 345A falls to the lower prize opening 341A by arranging the shutter 345A in the open position, for example, a plurality of game balls are simultaneously entered. be able to. This is preferable in order to strengthen the impact on the movement of the game ball at the time of entering the ball and to improve the degree of attention to the game. Here, in the present embodiment, the length (horizontal width) of the shutter 345A in the passage direction of the downstream passage portion 324A is a length at which a plurality of game balls can simultaneously exist on the shutter 345A. The length (horizontal width) of the inclined portion 326aA in the passage direction is shorter than the length of the shutter 345A in the passage direction. In this way, the length (horizontal width) of the inclined portion 326aA is made shorter than the length (horizontal width) of the shutter 345A so that the movement of the game ball is mainly on the shutter. It is possible to preferably exert the effect of improving the degree of attention by simultaneously entering the ball while suppressing it.

The inclination angle of the inclined portion 326aA is the same as the inclination angle of the upper surface (plate surface) of the shutter 345A. With such a configuration, it becomes easy for the player to predict the movement when the game ball reverses from the movement of the game ball moving on the shutter 345A toward the inclined portion 326aA and returns to the shutter 345A. As a result, it is possible to encourage the player to pay attention to whether or not the ball enters the lower prize opening 341A in relation to the timing when the shutter 345A is arranged in the open position. Then, by attracting attention in this way and supporting the entry of the ball into the lower prize opening 341A, the player's willingness to play (satisfaction) can be suitably improved.

The game ball flowing out from the outlet portion 322aA of the upstream side passage portion 322A is configured to face the lower prize winning opening 341A, and the shutter 345A is the exit portion of the upstream side passage portion 322A when it is arranged in the closed position. It functions as a ball receiving unit that receives a game ball from 322aA to the lower prize opening 341A. In such a configuration, when the shutter 345A is arranged in the open position, the game ball flowing out from the exit portion 322aA passes through the lower prize opening 341A as it is. As a result, it is possible to preferably suppress that the above-mentioned reversing function (reciprocating function) of the game ball causes a delay in entering the ball.

The bottom surface of the guide passage 342A of the lower variable winning device 65A is formed so as to be inclined downward to the same side (center side of the game machine) as the side facing the exit portion 322aA of the upstream passage portion 322A. Therefore, when the shutter 345A is arranged in the open position, the flow of passing through the lower prize winning opening 341A → detection by the detection sensor 391d can be facilitated. It is preferable to suppress the delay in detection in this way in order to suppress the occurrence of so-called over-winning and enhance the soundness of the game.

<Modification example 1>
A configuration may be provided for forcibly reversing the moving direction of the game ball that has moved from the shutter 345A to the inclined portion 326aA. Specifically, as shown in the schematic view of FIG. 68, a wall portion 328B (return portion or stopper portion) on the inclined portion 326aA where the gaming ball that has reached a predetermined position hits is provided, and the gaming ball that has reached the predetermined position. It is also possible to configure the structure so as to prevent further movement toward the side away from the discharge passage portion 325A (second specific region SE2). In such a configuration, a pad for shock absorption (low resilience) is provided at the collision point of the game ball on the wall portion 328B to prevent the game ball from bouncing vigorously on the wall portion 328B. preferable.

<Modification 2>
In the sixth embodiment, the extension passage portion 326A is provided with the opening portion 327A, and the period of stay of the game ball in the extension passage portion 326A exceeds the previously assumed period (0.6 sec), that is, When the game ball moves so as to get over the inclined portion 326aA, the game ball is discharged from the open portion 327A to prevent the stay period from becoming excessively long. The specific configuration for setting a substantial upper limit is optional. For example, as shown in the first modification, the wall portion 328B that restricts the movement of the game ball to the side opposite to the discharge passage portion 325A side is provided, and the substantial stay period in the inclined portion 326aA becomes excessively long. It is also possible to have a configuration that suppresses this. Further, it is also possible to dispose a movable body such as a piston that pushes the game ball located on the inclined portion 326aA back to the downstream side passage portion 324A side in the extension passage portion 326A by operating periodically.

<Modification example 3>
In the sixth embodiment, the width of the inclined portion 326aA is set to a size that allows a plurality of game balls to be simultaneously positioned on the inclined portion 326aA, but the number of game balls that can be located on the inclined portion 326aA is reduced to one. It is also possible to limit. In such a configuration, the width of the inclined portion 326aA may be formed to be smaller than twice the diameter dimension of the game ball, or the wall portion 328B may be formed as shown in the above modification 1. It may be configured to limit the number of game balls that can be used and wait.

<Modification example 4>
In the sixth embodiment, the game ball flowing out from the outlet portion 322aA of the upstream passage portion 322A is configured to land on the shutter 345A, but the present invention is not limited to this. It is sufficient if at least the game ball can be inverted and passed over the shutter 345A twice, and an inclined portion connected to the shutter 345A is separately provided between the shutter 345A and the discharge passage portion 325A, and the inclined portion is provided. It is also possible to configure the game ball to land on the ground.

<Modification 5>
In the sixth embodiment, the staying period of the game ball in the inclined portion 326aA is configured to be shorter than the opening period when the lower prize winning opening 341A is opened as a special hit result. It is not denied that the period of stay of the game ball in 326aA is configured to be longer than the above-mentioned opening period.

<Modification 6>
In the sixth embodiment, the inclination of the inclined portion 326aA and the inclination of the shutter 345A are aligned, but the present invention is not limited to this. The inclination of the inclined portion 326aC may be smaller than the inclination of the shutter 345C (see FIG. 69A). Further, the inclination of the inclined portion 326aC may be larger than the inclination of the shutter 345C.

<Modification 7>
In the sixth embodiment, the game ball is inverted at the inclined portion 326aA, but the inclined portion 326aA can be omitted and the game ball can be inverted on the shutter 345A.

<Modification 8>
In the sixth embodiment, the movement route when the game ball moves in the downstream passage portion 324A is common to the outward route and the return route, but this is changed and the outward route and the return route are provided separately so that the movement route can be changed. It is also possible to have a configuration that does not overlap.

For example, as shown in the group FIG. 69 (b), the downstream passage portion 324D is divided into the front passage portion 324FD for the outward route and the back passage portion 324BD for the return route by the partition portion 329D, and both passage portions 324FD, It is preferable to communicate the 324BD with the return passage portion 326D and the discharge passage portion 325D. In this case, the game ball is guided from the exit portion 322aD of the upstream side passage portion 322D to the front passage portion 324FD, and moved to the wall surface portion of the return passage portion 326D and from the front side passage portion 324FD to the return passage portion 326D. It is preferable to provide a guide portion 328D for guiding the game ball to the back passage portion 324BD. With such a configuration, it is possible to suitably increase the chances of winning a prize in the lower prize opening 341D while reducing the width of the shutter 345D.

<7th Embodiment>
As shown in the first embodiment, in the special gaming state (open / close execution mode) in which the upper variable winning device 64 is opened / closed, the opening of the upper variable winning device 64 sandwiches a predetermined interval period (2 sec). Is repeated at. In such a configuration, the game ball that has reached the upper variable winning device 64 during this interval period goes to the winning unit 70 without flowing into the upper large winning opening 311. That is, some spilling spheres can occur. Further, the upper variable winning device 64 is located on the side of the large symbol display device 75 arranged in the center of the game board 60 (see FIG. 4), and the symbol display device is designed to increase the size of the display screen 75a. In order to coexist with 75, the restriction on the width becomes stronger. One of the features of the present embodiment is that the device is devised to suppress the generation of spilling spheres during the interval period while coexisting with the symbol display device 75. Hereinafter, the upper variable winning device 64E and the passage structure related thereto in the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 70 to 71, focusing on the differences from the first embodiment. FIG. 70 (a) is a schematic view showing the upper variable winning device 64E and its peripheral structure, FIG. 70 (b) is a partially enlarged view of FIG. 70 (a), and FIG. 71 shows the flow of winning to the upper prize opening 311E. It is a schematic diagram which shows.

On the right route of the game area PE, a guide passage 500E for guiding the game ball passing through the through gate 66 and its surroundings to the ball entry unit 70 is provided on the side portion of the symbol display device 75. As shown in FIG. 70, the guide passage 500E has a passage width and the like defined so that a plurality of game balls cannot pass through the same location at the same time. The guide passage 500E is formed so as to have a horizontally long upstream passage portion 501E formed so as to be inclined downward toward the center side of the game machine and a horizontally long upstream passage portion 501E which is located below the upstream passage portion 501E and is inclined downward toward the game machine. It has a horizontally long downstream passage portion 503E and a vertically long intermediate passage portion 502E connecting the upstream side passage portion 501E and the downstream side passage portion 503E, and the flow direction of the game ball passing through the guide passage 500E is , It is configured to change when moving from the upstream side passage portion 501E to the intermediate passage portion 502E and when moving from the intermediate passage portion 502E to the downstream side passage portion 503E. By making the guide passage 500E folded back in this way, it is possible to prevent the moving speed of the game ball passing through the guide passage 500E from becoming excessively high.

An upper variable winning device 64E is arranged side by side with the intermediate passage portion 502E at a position on the game machine center side (design display device 75 side) with respect to the folded portion of the guide passage 500E, that is, the intermediate passage portion 502E. It is installed. The upper variable winning device 64E includes an upper large winning opening 311E that opens sideways (to the right), a plate-shaped shutter 315E that can slide and move in the front-rear direction (thickness direction of the game board 60), and the shutter 315E. It has a drive unit (solenoid) of the above, and a ball passage 312E that guides the game ball that has flowed into the upper prize winning opening 311E to the first branch passage and the second branch passage. The ball passage 312 is branched into a first passage portion 312aE and a second passage portion 312bE, and the first passage portion 312aE and the second passage portion 312bE are located upstream of the first branch passage and the second branch passage. Although they are merging, the first branch passage, the second branch passage, and the merging portion are not shown.

The drive unit for the shutter 315E is connected to the main control device 162 and operates based on the drive signal from the main control device 162. In the non-driving state (non-excited state) in which the drive signal is not output from the main control device 162, the shutter 315E is arranged at a closed position covering the upper prize opening 311E. When the drive signal is output and the drive unit is in the drive state (excitation state), the drive unit moves (backward) to an open position that does not cover the upper prize winning opening 311E. By arranging the shutter 315E in the open position, the upper prize opening 311E (ball passage 312E) and the guide passage 500E communicate with each other, and the inflow of the game ball from the guide passage 500E to the upper prize entrance 311E is allowed. .. Hereinafter, the relationship between the shutter 315E and the guide passage 500E will be supplementarily described.

The passage region of the game ball in the intermediate passage portion 502E is partitioned by a pair of left and right wall portions facing each other with a gap larger than the diameter of the game ball. In the present embodiment, the outer wall portion (left wall portion) of the folded portion among those wall portions is constructed by the shutter 315E (specifically, the plate surface of the shutter 315E) arranged at the closed position. That is, while the inner wall portion of the folded portion (right side wall portion 511E) is a fixed type, the outer wall portion of the folded portion is a movable type.

The shutter 315E and the upper prize opening 311E are located on the extension of the upstream passage portion 501E to the downstream side, and face the outlet portion 501aE of the upstream side passage portion 501E with a gap. When the shutter 315E is arranged in the open position, the game ball protruding from the exit portion 501aE of the upstream side passage portion 501E crosses the upper part of the third specific region SE3 described later and directly enters the upper prize opening 311E. Inflow.

The upper variable winning device 64E is formed with a partition portion 520E that divides the ball passage 312E into the first passage portion 312aE and the second passage portion 312bE, and the partition portion 520E causes the upper prize opening 311E to the first passage portion 312aE. It is divided into an entrance portion and an entrance portion to the second passage portion 312bE. The entrance portion of the first passage portion 312aE and the entrance portion of the second passage portion 312bE are arranged vertically (in the passage direction of the intermediate passage portion 502E) so that the former is on the upper side and the latter is on the lower side.

The partition portion 520E extends vertically, and an inclined portion 521E which is inclined downward toward the center side of the game machine is formed at the upper end portion of the groove. Under the condition that the shutter 315E is arranged in the open position, the game ball protruding from the outlet portion 501aE of the upstream side passage portion 501E lands on the inclined portion 521E, whereby the detection position of the game ball in the first passage portion 312aE ( It will be guided by the detection sensor 317aE).

The shutters 315E and the right side wall portion 511E that partition the intermediate passage portion 502E are provided with ridge portions 315aE and 511aE that project to the third specific region SE3 sandwiched between the shutters 315E and the right side wall portion 511E. ing. The ridges 315aE and 511aE extend back and forth so as to be orthogonal to the passage direction of the intermediate passage portion 502E. In the following description, the ridge portion 315aE arranged on the shutter 315E is also referred to as "left ridge portion 315aE", and the ridge portion 511aE arranged on the right wall portion 511E is also referred to as "right ridge portion 511aE".

The gap dimension D1 between the shutter 315E and the right ridge portion 511aE is set to be larger than the diameter dimension D of the game ball, and the gap dimension D2 between the right wall portion 511E and the left ridge portion 315aE is also set to be larger than the diameter dimension D of the game ball. It is set to be larger than the diameter dimension D. Regarding the left ridge portion 315aE, a plurality of (four in the present embodiment) are arranged in the passage direction of the intermediate passage portion 502E with a gap larger than the diameter dimension D of the game ball, and the right ridge portion 511aE Also, a plurality of (three in the present embodiment) are arranged in the passage direction (guidance direction) of the intermediate passage portion 502E with a gap larger than the diameter dimension D of the game ball. By alternately arranging the left side ridge portion 315aE and the right side ridge portion 511aE in the passage direction, the flow path of the game ball is devised so as to meander left and right with respect to the passage direction of the intermediate passage portion 502E. There is.

Here, when the protrusion amount of the left ridge portion 315aE, the protrusion amount of the right ridge portion 511aE, and the diameter dimension D of the game ball are added, it is configured to be larger than the passage width of the intermediate passage portion 502E. (D3 <D). As a result, the game ball is prevented from running through the third specific region SE3 so as to avoid a collision with the protrusions 315aE and 511aE.

The game ball passing through the intermediate passage portion 502E collides with the ridge portions 315aE and 511aE. Due to such a collision, the moving speed of the game ball in the third specific region SE3 decreases (decelerates). That is, the third specific region SE3 of the intermediate passage portion 502E functions as a deceleration section for forcibly decelerating the game ball. By decelerating the game ball passing through the intermediate passage portion 502E in this way, the game ball passes through the third specific region SE3 as compared with the case where the ridge portions 315aE and 511aE are not provided. The required period has been extended.

Although the intermediate passage portion 502E shown in the present embodiment extends in the vertical direction, it is slightly tilted to the right so as to have a downward slope. As a result, the game ball passing through the intermediate passage portion 502E can easily move along the shutter 315E. When the shutter 315E moves from the closed position to the open position under the condition that the game ball is covered by the shutter 315E, the game ball covered by the shutter 315E falls diagonally downward to the left. Further, the game ball passing through the intermediate passage portion 502E is repeatedly guided to the shutter 315E side by the right protrusion portion 511aE, and the game ball located on the right wall portion 511E side is repeatedly guided to the right side protrusion. The strip 511aE guides the user away from the right wall 511E. Therefore, as the shutter 315E moves from the closed position to the open position, the game balls always fall diagonally downward to the left.

At the entrance portion of the second passage portion 312bE, an inclined portion 522E that is inclined downward toward the center of the game ball is formed. The inclined portion 522E extends to a position below the third specific region SE3, specifically, a position directly below the right wall portion 511E, and the shutter 315E moves from the closed position to the open position to move the third specific region. The game ball that has fallen from SE3 is guided by the inclined portion 522E to the detection point (detection sensor 317bE) of the game ball in the second passage portion 312bE.

The detection sensor 317aE arranged in the first passage portion 312aE and the detection sensor 317bE arranged in the second passage portion 312bE are arranged so as to be vertically shifted so that the former is on the upper side and the latter is on the lower side. The length of the flow path from the upper prize opening 311E to the detection sensor 317aE in the first passage portion 312aE is shorter than the length of the flow path from the upper prize opening 311E to the detection sensor 317bE in the second passage portion 312bE. There is. This shortens the required period from when the game ball flowing into the first passage portion 312aE from the upstream side passage portion 501E passes through the upper grand prize opening 311E to when it passes through the detection sensor 317aE, and shortens the required period until the upper grand winning opening 311E is passed. This is a device for promptly returning the shutter 315E to the closed position when the number of winnings reaches the upper limit.

The inclined portion 521E formed at the entrance portion of the first passage portion 312a is located on the left side of the pair of ridge portions 315aE and 511aE located at the uppermost stream of the ridge portions 315aE and 511aE. , Contact with the game ball falling from the position where it abuts on the ridges 315aE and 511aE located at the uppermost stream is avoided. This is a device for suppressing the movement of the game ball, which should be directed to the second passage portion 312bE, to the downstream passage portion 503E due to the disorder of the behavior of the game ball.

Here, with reference to the schematic diagram of FIG. 71, the flow of winning a prize in the upper prize opening 311E will be illustrated.

When the number of prizes in the upper prize opening 311E reaches the upper limit in the special game state, the shutter 315E returns from the open position to the closed position, and no further prizes can be made in the upper prize opening 311E. Become. When the shutter 315E is arranged in the closed position, the shutter 315E is restricted from moving to the open position until a predetermined interval period elapses. As shown in FIG. 71 (a) → FIG. 71 (b), the game ball that has flowed into the guide passage 500E during the interval period heads for the intermediate passage portion 502E via the upstream passage portion 501E.

The game ball B1 that has reached the intermediate passage portion 502E hits the shutter 315E arranged at the closed position to weaken its momentum, and then flows down the third specific region SE3. As described above, the third specific region SE3 is a deceleration section, and while the preceding game ball B1 is passing through the third specific region SE3, the subsequent game ball B2 is also in the third specific region. It will reach SE3 (see FIG. 71 (c)).

When the shutter 315E moves from the closed position to the open position while the game balls B1 and B2 are located in the third specific region SE3, the game balls B1 and B2 that have lost their support fall downward. The inclined portions 522E are located at the drop destinations of the game balls B1 and B2, and the inclined portions B1 and B2 are guided by the inclined portions 522E to the detection sensor 317bE of the second passage portion 312bE.

As shown in FIG. 71 (c) → FIG. 71 (d), the game ball B3 following the game ball B2 jumps out of the exit portion 501aE of the upstream side passage portion 501E and flows into the first passage portion 312aE. .. The game ball B3 is guided to the detection sensor 317aE of the first passage portion 312aE by the inclined portion 521E provided at the entrance portion of the first passage portion 312aE. The game ball B3 moves so as to jump over the third specific region SE3, and contact with the ridge portions 315aE and 511aE is avoided. As a result, after passing through the upper prize opening 311E, the prize is promptly detected by the detection sensor 317aE. After that, the game ball that has passed through the upstream passage portion 501E flows into the first passage portion 312aE and is opened until the number of winnings to the upper prize opening 311E reaches the upper limit or the above-mentioned opening period elapses. It will be maintained in position.

According to the configuration described in detail above, as the shutter 315E moves from the closed position to the open position, the game ball located in the third specific region SE3 flows into the upper prize opening 311E. As a result, the generation of spilled spheres can be suppressed. This is preferable in promoting the continuation of the firing operation of the game ball and facilitating the progress of the game. In the above configuration, the effect of suppressing the occurrence of spill depends on the vertical width of the shutter 315E and the third specific region SE3. Even if the vertical widths of the shutter 345E and the third specific region SE3 are increased to enhance the effect of suppressing the spilling sphere, they can coexist with the symbol display device 75. Disposing the upper variable winning device 64E at a position close to the symbol display device 75 in this way is advantageous in improving the degree of attention to the upper variable winning device 64E.

In the intermediate passage portion 502E, the right wall portion 511E facing the shutter 315E across the third specific region SE3 has a right ridge portion 315aE that guides the game ball passing through the third specific region SE3 toward the shutter 315E. Is provided. By configuring the game ball passing through the third specific region SE3 to be guided to the shutter 315E side, the inclination of the shutter 315E with respect to the horizontal plane can be brought close to 90 °. Therefore, the width of the shutter 315E (upper variable winning device 64E) is made as small as possible so that the symbol display device 75 can be arranged in a narrow flow path on the side, and the effect of suppressing a spill ball is suitably exhibited. Can be made to.

The portion of the intermediate passage portion 502E that is an extension of the upstream passage portion 501E is a non-arranged region of the ridge portions 315aE and 511aE. In this way, by not arranging the ridges 315aE and 511aE on the extension of the upstream passage portion 501E, the smooth flow of the game ball from the upstream side passage portion 501E to the upper prize opening 311E can be achieved. It is possible to suppress the hindrance by the ridges 315aE and 511aE.

The second passage portion 312bE, which is a passage for a game ball that has flowed into the upper prize opening 311E via the third specific area SE3 of the intermediate passage portion 502E, and the upper prize opening without passing through the third specific area SE3. By partitioning the first passage portion 312aE, which is a passage for the game ball that has flowed into the 311E, by the partition portion 520E, the game ball that has flowed into the upper prize opening 311E vigorously from the upstream side passage portion 501E precedes. It is possible to prevent the inconvenience that the preceding game ball is ejected from the upper prize opening 311E due to a collision with the game ball or the like. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the player from suffering an unexpected disadvantage due to the reduction of the time lag described above.

By providing detection sensors in the first passage portion 312aE and the second passage portion 312bE to detect the game balls individually, the game balls passing through the passage portions 312aE and 312bE are upstream of the detection position. It is possible to avoid interfering with each other on the side. This is preferable in order to suppress a large time lag between passing through the upper prize opening 311E → detection.

In the configuration in which a plurality of detection sensors are used in combination as described above, the flow path length from the upper prize opening 311E to the detection sensor 317aE (detection position) of the first passage portion 312aE is set, and the passage length from the upper prize opening 311E to the second passage portion By making the length of the flow path to the detection sensor 317bE (detection position) of 312bE shorter, the responsiveness of the game ball detection in a situation where the game balls continuously flow into the first passage portion 312aE is suitably improved. Can be done.

<Modification example 1>
In the seventh embodiment, the upper variable winning device 64E is opened and closed when the special gaming state corresponding to the high frequency winning mode is reached, but when the special gaming state corresponding to the low frequency winning mode is reached. It is also possible to open and close the upper variable winning device 64E.

<Modification 2>
In the seventh embodiment, the plate-shaped shutter 315E is arranged so as to be slightly tilted to the right so as to have a downward inclination. For example, as shown in the schematic view of FIG. 72, the plate-shaped shutter 315F is arranged. You can arrange it so that it is vertical.

<Modification example 3>
In the seventh embodiment, the ball passage 312E extending from the upper large winning opening 311E of the upper variable winning device 64E is branched into the first passage portion 312aE and the second passage portion 312bE, but the first passage portion thereof. It is also possible to integrate 312aE and the second passage portion 312bE into one passage (see, for example, the ball passage 312F in FIG. 72).

<Modification example 4>
In the seventh embodiment, the upper variable winning device 64E is arranged outside the folded portion of the guide passage 500E, but it is also possible to arrange the upper variable winning device inside the folded portion of the guide passage 500E. is there. That is, it is also possible to dispose an opening / closing type shutter instead of the right side wall portion 511E which is the inner side.

<Modification 5>
In the seventh embodiment, the number of game balls in which the length of the third specific region SE3 of the intermediate passage portion 502E can be located in the third specific region SE3 is one of the round end conditions, which is the upper limit of winning. It is configured to be 2 or more less than, but is not limited to this. It may be configured to be one less than the upper limit of winning, or may be configured so that the number of game balls that can be located in the third specific region SE3 and the upper limit of winning are the same. It should be noted that there is no denying that the game balls that exceed the maximum number of winnings can be positioned.

<Other embodiments>
The content is not limited to the description of each of the above-described embodiments, and may be implemented as follows, for example. By the way, each of the following configurations may be individually applied to each of the above-described embodiments, or a part or all of them may be combined and applied to each of the above-described embodiments. Further, it is also possible to arbitrarily combine all or a part of the various configurations shown in each of the above embodiments. In this case, it is preferable that the technical significance (effect to be exerted) of each configuration to be combined is guaranteed. Each of the following configurations may be applied individually to a new configuration consisting of a combination of embodiments, or may be partially or wholly applied in combination.

(1) In each of the above embodiments, in the second normal game state corresponding to the high probability mode and the high frequency support mode, the number of balls held decreases (slightly decreases) as the game progresses. It is also possible to change this so that the number of balls held increases as the game progresses even in the second normal game state. However, in order to provide a difference in advantage between the second normal game state and the third normal game state so that the latter is more advantageous, for example, the rate of increase of the ball held in the second normal game state is the third. It is preferable that the configuration is such that the speed of increase of the ball held in the normal game state is suppressed to be lower than the speed of increase.

(2) In each of the above embodiments, when the time reduction is completed without a big hit result even though the mode is shifted to the high probability mode, the third normal is more advantageous to the player including the meaning of the relief. It is configured to shift to the game state. In view of such a relief function, it suffices that the third normal game state is configured to be at least more advantageous to the player than the first normal game state, and the ball is held as compared with, for example, the second normal game state. It is also possible to have a configuration in which the rate of decrease of is slow. In addition, as shown in the above-described modification (1), when the configuration in which the number of balls held is increased even in the second normal game state is used in combination, the speed of increase of the balls held in the third normal game state is the second normal game. It may be configured to be lower than the state.

(3) In each of the above embodiments, for example, when the 16R probability variation jackpot result B is obtained, the high probability mode and the low frequency support mode are supported without going through the second normal gaming state corresponding to the high probability mode and the high frequency support mode. The configuration is such that the player shifts to the third normal game state, but the present invention is not limited to this. Regardless of which jackpot result is obtained, it is possible to configure the configuration in which it is necessary to go through the second normal gaming state in order to shift to the third normal gaming state.

(4) In each of the above embodiments, the number of time reductions that function as a hurdle for shifting to the third normal game state, that is, the number of games in which the support mode is maintained in the high frequency support mode, is different depending on the type of jackpot result. However, it is also possible to keep the number of time reductions constant regardless of the type of jackpot result. For example, in any case of the 2R probability variation jackpot result, the 6R probability variation jackpot result, and the 16R probability variation jackpot result, it is preferable to unify the number of games maintained in the high frequency support mode to be N times. When making such a change, it is preferable to unify the number of games maintained in the high frequency support mode when shifting to the fourth normal game state after the 2R normal jackpot result or the 8R normal jackpot result.

(5) In each of the above embodiments, if a big hit result is obtained during the normal gaming state corresponding to the high probability mode, the normal gaming state corresponding to the low probability mode can be shifted. That is, the configuration is such that the third normal game state can be terminated with the jackpot result as a trigger. In addition to or instead of this, when the number of games executed after the transition to the high-probability mode reaches a predetermined number (for example, M times), the mode may be shifted to the low-probability mode. In this case, by making the number of games in which the high-probability mode is maintained larger than the number of games in which the high-frequency support mode is maintained (the number of time reductions), the third normal game state with a limited number of times after the second normal game state is reached. It is possible to realize a configuration that shifts to.

(6) In each of the above embodiments, the range of the number of time reductions set when the probability variation jackpot result is obtained based on the winning of the lower operating port 62a and the probability variation jackpot result based on the winning of the right operating port 63a. In the case of such a situation, the range of the number of time reductions set is set to be "0" to "100", and the distribution of the number of time reductions is discriminated so that the latter is less than the former. The superiority of the right operating port 63a over the lower operating port 62a was secured. When the probability variation jackpot result is obtained in the second special gaming state and the player shifts to the second special gaming state again, the hurdle for transition to the third normal gaming state is expected to be lower than before the probability variation jackpot result, that is, the third In order to raise the expectation that the number of games required to shift to the normal game state will decrease, the maximum value of the number of time reductions set when the probability variation jackpot result is obtained based on the winning of the right operating port 63a is operated below. It may be configured to be less than the maximum value of the number of time reductions set when the probability variation jackpot result is obtained based on the winning of the mouth 62a. If the probability variation jackpot result is obtained based on the winning of the right operating port 63a, the number of time reductions may be "0", that is, the transition to the third normal gaming state may be confirmed.

Further, in each of the above embodiments, the number of time reductions is not shortened in some cases when the probability variation jackpot result is obtained in the second normal game state, but the probability variation jackpot result is obtained in the second normal game state. It is also possible to shorten the number of time reductions in all cases. For example, the first time reduction number (for example, 50 times) set when the probability variation jackpot result is obtained based on the entry into the lower operating port 62a is the probability variation jackpot result based on the entry into the right actuation port 63a. It may be specified to be larger than the second time reduction number (for example, 30 times) set in the case of. In addition, in order to make it appear as if the number of time reductions remaining at the time when the probability variation jackpot result is obtained in the second normal game state is shortened when returning to the second normal game state, it is based on the entry into the right operating port 63a. It is also possible to set the number of time reductions set when the probabilistic jackpot result is obtained to "0" times.

(7) In each of the above embodiments, the third normal gaming state is configured so that the variation display time of the pattern in the display unit DR for the right operating port is shorter than that in the second normal gaming state. 3 The game progress is facilitated in the normal game state, but the game is not limited to this. The third normal game state is configured so that the variation display time of the pattern on the display unit DR for the right operating port is longer than that of the second normal game state, or the second normal game state and the third normal game state It is also possible to configure the display unit DR for the right operating port so that the variable display time of the pattern is the same length.

(8) The number of time reductions set when the 2R normal jackpot result is obtained in the second normal game state and the number of time reductions set when the 2R probability variation jackpot result is obtained are both "50" times. In this case, the game state is displayed on the display screen 75a of the symbol display device 75 and the speaker unit 29 in both the case of returning to the second normal game state after the special game state and the case of shifting (demotion) to the fourth normal game state. The effect suggesting the above may be the same, and the player may be configured to make it difficult or impossible to distinguish between the second normal game state and the fourth normal game state. If the gaming state is made unclear in this way, when the number of time reductions becomes "0", the game shifts (promotes) to the third normal gaming state, which is more advantageous than the second normal gaming state, or the second There will be a branch of whether to shift (demotion) to the first normal game state, which is more disadvantageous than the normal game state. As a result, it is possible to preferably increase the tension when the time saving number of times set at the time of transition to the gaming state is exhausted.

(9) In each of the above embodiments, the result of the lottery based on the winning of the through gate 66 is displayed on the through gate display unit DS of the main display unit 81, but the present invention is limited to this. is not. It is also possible to display the result of the lottery based on the winning of the through gate 66 on another display unit such as the display screen 75a of the symbol display device 75.

(10) In each of the above embodiments, the upper variable winning device 64 and the through gate 66 are arranged on the right route upstream of the right-handed ball entry portion 63, but the present invention is not limited to this. It is also possible to dispose the upper variable winning device 64 and the through gate 66 on the right route downstream of the right-handed ball entry portion 63.

(11) In each of the above embodiments, the final display time of the pattern on the display unit DL for the lower operating port is set to be shorter than the final display time of the pattern on the display unit DR for the right operating port. It is not limited. For example, the final display time of the pattern on the display unit DR for the right operating port may be shorter than the final display time of the pattern on the display unit DL for the lower operating port, or the display unit DR for the right operating port and the lower The fixed display time of the pattern on the display unit DL for the operation port may be aligned.

Further, in the above embodiment, the fixed display time of the pattern in the lower operating port display unit DL and the right operating port display unit DR is not changed in any of the normal gaming states. The fixed display time of the lower operating port display unit DL and the right operating port display unit DR may be changed according to the type. For example, the confirmation display time may be shortened in the order of the first normal game state → the second normal game state → the third normal game state.

(12) In each of the above embodiments, the lower variable winning device 65 is opened in the second special gaming state, and the right side operation is entered on the flow path (right route) toward the lower variable winning device 65. The ball portion 63 is arranged, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, it is also possible to arrange a configuration corresponding to the lower variable winning device 65 on the flow path toward the right-side actuating ball entry portion 63.

(13) In each of the above embodiments, the ridges 335a and 336a are provided as deceleration means for decelerating the game ball rolling on the shutter 331 of the right-side actuating ball entry unit 63, but the ridges 335a and 336a pass over the shutter 331. The specific configuration for earning the time required for the above is arbitrary. For example, the upper limit of the shutter 331 may be provided with irregularities so that the flow path meanders up and down.

Further, the ridges 335a and 336a were arranged biased to the downstream part (intermediate passage 323 side) in the upstream passage 322, but the ridges 335a and 336a were arranged in the upstream part and the middle flow part in the upstream passage 322. It is also possible to place it in.

(14) In each of the above embodiments, the right-side actuating ball entry unit 63 and the lower variable winning device 65 are arranged so as to be vertically offset, and the ball passage in the ball entry unit 70 is cranked up and down. It is also possible to arrange the right-side actuating ball entry unit 63 and the lower variable winning device 65 side by side in a row.

(15) In each of the above embodiments, the intermediate passage portion 323 as the "communication passage portion" is branched at an intermediate position, and a part of the game ball passing through the intermediate passage portion 323 is a lower variable winning device 65. Although it is configured to be discharged from the game area PE without being guided by, it is not necessary to form the above-mentioned branch in the intermediate passage portion 323.

Further, the game balls flowing out from the middle position of the ball passage through the intermediate passage portion 323 are discharged from the game area PE without passing through the out port 68, but these game balls are guided to the out port 68. It may be configured.

(16) The right-side actuating ball entry portion 63 shown in the above embodiment has a configuration in which the shutter 331 slides in the front-rear direction to switch between the open state and the closed state, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, the shutter may be switched between the open state and the closed state by sliding in the left-right direction or the up-down direction. It should be noted that the shutter 331 does not necessarily have to be a slide type, and a rotary type can be used.

Similarly, the shutter 345 of the lower variable winning device 65 slides in the front-rear direction to switch between the open state and the closed state, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, the shutter may be switched between the open state and the closed state by sliding in the left-right direction or the up-down direction. It should be noted that the shutter 345 does not necessarily have to be a slide type, and a rotary type can be used.

Further, the upper variable winning device 64 shown in each of the above embodiments has a configuration in which the shutter 315 is rotated in parallel with the front surface of the game board 60 to switch between the open state and the closed state, but the present invention is limited to this. It's not a thing. For example, the shutter may be switched between the open state and the closed state by rotating in the direction intersecting the front surface of the game board. It should be noted that the shutter 315 does not necessarily have to be a rotary type, and a slide type can also be used.

(17) In each of the above embodiments, the interval time required for the game ball to pass over the shutter 331 of the right-side actuating ball entry unit 63 is the interval time during which the shutter 331 is maintained in the closed state in the high frequency support mode. It is longer than the interval time during which the shutter 331 is maintained in the closed state in the low frequency support mode, but the predetermined time may be arbitrarily changed.

(18) In each of the above embodiments, the transition to the high probability mode is determined by entering the advantageous ball entry unit 314 provided in the upper variable winning device 64, but the advantageous ball entry unit 314 is used. It is also possible to omit it and configure it so that the transition to the high probability mode is confirmed when the probability variation jackpot result is obtained.

(19) In each of the above embodiments, the lottery based on the entry into the lower operating port 62a does not result in a special winning result, but this has been changed to the lottery based on the entry into the lower operating opening 62a. However, it may be configured as a special hit result.

(20) In the first embodiment, the display screen 75a of the symbol display device 75 is configured to display the number of remaining time reductions, that is, the number of remaining games until the transition to the third normal game state. The remaining number of times displayed on the display screen 75a does not necessarily have to match the remaining time reduction number, and may indicate the remaining time reduction number.

In this case, for example, it is difficult to identify from the display which of "100 times", "70 times", "50 times", "30 open", and "10 times" is set as the number of time reductions. Therefore, the interest of the game can be improved. When such a display is performed, for example, when the executed game times are "10 times", "30 times", "50 times", and "70 times", the game shifts to the third normal game state. By executing the display effect to the effect that there is a possibility, it is possible to suppress the monotonization of the game during the second normal game state.

In the second normal game state where the number of time reductions is "50 times", for example, if "100 times" is displayed as a display corresponding to the number of time reductions, the actual number of time reductions is "10 times", "30 times", " The possibility of "50 times", "70 times", or "100 times" remains. In this case, for the corresponding display, for example, after the number of executed game times reaches a specific number, the number of multiple subtractions during one game time is increased, and "0 times" is displayed as the display at the time of time saving. It is also possible.

(21) In each of the above embodiments, a difference is provided in the variation display time when the number of reservations is "3" or more between the second normal game state and the fourth normal game state, but the variation display time is not limited to this. Absent. Even when the number of holds is "3" or more, it is possible to share the variable display time.

(22) If a big hit result is obtained in the second normal game state and the newly set number of time reductions is smaller than the remaining number of time reductions, the player is notified to that effect. It is preferable to have a configuration that clearly indicates that the third normal game state is approaching.

(23) In each of the above embodiments, the first normal game state to the third normal game state are differentiated by the combination of the support mode and the lottery mode, but the present invention is not limited to this. For each normal game state, the specific configuration is arbitrary as long as a difference that is advantageous to the player is secured in the order of the first normal game state <the second normal game state <the third normal game state. .. For example, as a lottery mode, a medium probability mode is provided in which the probability of winning is higher than that of the low probability mode and the probability of winning is lower than that of the high probability mode, and the first normal game state is the low probability mode and the second normal game. Differentiation may be achieved so that the state corresponds to the medium probability mode and the third normal game state corresponds to the high probability mode. Even in this case, the configuration is such that when the standard number of game times has passed without a big hit result even though the mode has been changed to the medium probability mode, the state is changed to the third normal game state corresponding to the high probability mode. Therefore, the decrease in the player's motivation to play can be suitably suppressed. In the case of such a configuration, it is arbitrary whether each normal game state corresponds to the high frequency support mode or the low frequency support mode as long as the above-mentioned advantageous / disadvantage relationship can be secured. ..

(24) In each of the above embodiments, the final display time of the pattern on the display unit DL for the lower operating port is shorter than the final display time of the pattern on the display unit DR for the right operating port, but the present invention is not limited to this. Absent. It is also possible to make the final display time of the pattern on the display unit DL for the lower operating port longer than the final display time of the pattern on the display unit DR for the right operating port. It is also possible to set the final display time of the pattern on the display unit DL for the lower operating port to be the same length as the final display time of the pattern on the display unit DR for the right operating port.

(25) In each of the above embodiments, it is defined that the final display time of the pattern on the display unit DL for the lower operating port is the same in the first normal game state to the fourth normal game state, but the present invention is limited to this. It's not something. For example, a difference may be provided such that the fixed display time in the first normal game state <the fixed display time in the second normal game state and the fourth normal game state <the fixed display time in the third normal game state.

Further, it is not always necessary to unify the final display time of the pattern in the display unit DR for the right operating port between the first normal game state and the fourth normal game state. For example, the final display time in the first normal game state <the first A difference may be provided so that the fixed display time in the 2 normal game state and the 4th normal game state <the fixed display time in the 3rd normal game state.

The above difference may be provided for both the definite display time related to the lower operating port display unit DL and the definite display time related to the right operating port display unit DR, or the above difference may be provided only for one of them.

(26) In each of the above embodiments, the lower operating port 62a is taken into consideration during the second normal gaming state in consideration of the variation display time and the final display time of the pattern in the lower operating port display unit DL and the right operating port display unit DR. The minimum number of time reductions in the second normal gaming state is specified so that all the pending information related to the above is digested, but the present invention is not limited to this. If all the game times (not including the additional portion) related to the lower operating port 62a can be digested during one game rotation related to the right operating port 63a, the minimum number of times saved is the number of holdings related to the lower operating port 62a. It is also possible to make the number one more than the upper limit of.

(27) In each of the above embodiments, the number of time reductions is subtracted regardless of which of the game times related to the lower operating port 62a and the game times related to the right operating port 63a is executed in the second normal gaming state. However, the configuration is not limited to this. It is also possible to have a configuration in which the number of time reductions is subtracted only when the game times related to the right operating port 63a are executed.

(28) Regarding FIG. 31 in each of the above embodiments, the variable display time in the case of a special hit result or a loss result (specifically, a complete loss result not compatible with reach display) is shown. For example, the second normal gaming state. It is also possible to unify the variable display time when a big hit result is obtained in the fourth normal game state.

(29) In each of the above embodiments, the game times related to the display unit DR for the right operating port are the special hit results, and the game times related to the display unit DL for the lower operating port are the result of being off. When the variable display of the pattern on the display unit is performed in parallel, the variable display of the pattern on the lower operating port display unit DL is forced at the timing when the final display of the design on the right operating port display unit DR is executed. Is terminated. In such a configuration, it is not always necessary to make the fluctuation display time of the lower operating port display unit DL in the second normal gaming state shorter than the fluctuation display time of the right operating port display unit DR. Even if it is configured so that all the reserved information related to the display unit DL for the lower operating port is digested by the time the time saving number set in the second normal gaming state is reached and the transition to the third normal gaming state is reached. For example, the fluctuation display time of the display unit DL for the lower operating port may be longer than the fluctuation display time of the display unit DR for the right operating port, or may be the same length as the fluctuation display time of the display unit DR for the right operating port. May be good.

(30) In each of the above embodiments, when the detection sensor 391d attached to the right-side actuating ball entry unit 63 is in the effective time, the information from the detection sensor 391d is read by the main control device 162 and during the effective time. If this is not the case, the information is not read by the main control device 162, but the present invention is not limited to this. The sensor is read regardless of whether it is in the valid time, and if it is in the valid time, a privilege is given based on the detection of the ball entering, but if it is not in the valid time. Even if the ball is detected, the privilege may not be given.

(31) In each of the above embodiments, in the second normal gaming state corresponding to the high frequency support mode, the sum of the variation display time and the final display time of the pattern on the through gate display unit DS is the effective time of the detection sensor 391. Although the configuration matches the overtime, it is possible to set the sum of the variation display time and the final display time of the pattern on the through gate display unit DS to be longer than the overtime of the detection sensor 391. Is.

(32) In each of the above embodiments, the upper variable winning device 64 opened in the first special gaming state reduces the number of balls entering the right operating port 63a in the first special gaming state. In order to enhance such a function, the through gate 66 may also be arranged on the downstream side of the upper variable winning device 64.

(33) In each of the above embodiments, in the case of transitioning from the second normal gaming state to the third normal gaming state, the hold information relating to the lower operating port 62a stored at the beginning of the transition to the second normal gaming state is stored. All are configured to be digested, but are not limited to this. If the holding information related to the lower operating port 62a can be reduced by the time the transition to the third special gaming state is made, the specific configuration thereof is arbitrary.

(34) In each of the above embodiments, the game times related to the lower operating port 62a and the game times related to the right operating port 63a are simultaneously advanced, but it is not always necessary to simultaneously advance the game times. For example, the game times executed in the order of acquisition of the hold information may be switched between the game times related to the lower operating port 62a and the game times related to the right operating port 63a. Further, the game times related to the lower operating port 62a / the games related to the right operating port 63a are executed so that the game times related to the right operating port 63a are executed with priority over the game times related to the lower operating port 62a. It may be configured to switch by times.

(35) In each of the above embodiments, the display screen 75a of the symbol display device 75 is provided with the second variable display area ME2 and the third variable display area ME3 as the symbol display area corresponding to the display unit DR for the right operating port. However, a display device provided with a display area corresponding to the second variable display area ME2 and a display device provided with a display area corresponding to the third variable display area ME3 may be individually provided.

Further, in each of the above embodiments, the fluctuation display area to be linked with the third fluctuation display area ME3 is set to the first fluctuation display area ME1 (display unit DL for the lower operating port) / second fluctuation display area ME2 depending on the situation. The configuration is such that the switch is switched to (display unit DR for the right operating port), but the present invention is not limited to this. Even if a variable display area linked to the first variable display area ME1 (display unit DL for the lower operating port) and a variable display area linked to the second variable display area ME2 (display unit DR for the right operating port) are provided. Good.

(36) In each of the above embodiments, the value of the counter image CF is counted down and displayed as the game progresses, but this is changed and the value of the counter image CF is counted up and displayed as the game progresses. It is also possible to. In such a configuration, for example, when the value of the counter image CF is changed to the third normal gaming state, when the counter image CF is started to be displayed and when the counter image CF is shifted to the second normal gaming state. , It is preferable to teach in the middle of the second normal game state.

(37) In each of the above embodiments, the counter image CF value is set to "0" in the second normal gaming state to teach that the second normal gaming state ends. It is also possible to teach that the second normal game state ends by setting the value of the counter image CF to a predetermined value other than "0". For example, the reference number of times set by the main control device 162 is "100" times, the initial display number of times in the counter image CF is "100" times, and the value of the counter image CF is subtracted by "1" for each game. In this case, the reference number of times set by the main control device 162 is "70", the initial display number of times in the counter image CF is "100" times, and the value of the counter image CF is "1" for each game. In the former case, the value of the counter image CF when the second normal game state ends is "0", and in the latter case, the counter image CF counter when the second normal game state ends. It is also possible to configure the value to be "30". In such a configuration, even if the initial display number of times is "100" times, the game may shift to the third normal game state before reaching "0" times ("30" times). When the process is long, the decrease in motivation to play due to the process can be suitably suppressed.

(38) In each of the above embodiments, the value of the counter image CF is updated (subtracted) at the timing when the game round is started, but the value is not limited to this and is determined by the game round. It is also possible to update (subtract) the value of the counter image CF at the timing of shifting to the display.

(39) In each of the above embodiments, the display screen 75a of the symbol display device 75 is configured to notify the remaining number of games until the transition to the third normal game state, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, the speaker unit 29 may be configured to output a sound indicating the number of remaining games (for example, "remaining 30 times"), or may be configured depending on the number of light emitting bodies being emitted by the lamp unit composed of a plurality of light emitting bodies. It may be configured to display the number of remaining games.

(40) In each of the above embodiments, when shifting from the first special gaming state to the second special gaming state, the display of the target image TF and the counter image CF is started during the first special gaming state (during the ending). However, the configuration is not limited to this. It is also possible to start displaying the target image TF and the counter image CF during the second normal gaming state (for example, the transition timing or the timing immediately after the transition).

(41) In each of the above embodiments, after the transition to the second normal gaming state, the target image TF and the restraint image LF are continuously displayed at least until the transition to the other normal gaming state is confirmed. However, this does not deny the configuration in which the target image TF and the restraint image LF are hidden during the second normal game state. For example, when performing a display effect in which the second normal game state may end in a part of the second normal game state, the target image TF and the restraint image LF are hidden during the display effect. It may be configured.

(42) In each of the above embodiments, when shifting from the second normal gaming state to the third normal gaming state, the display of the target image TF corresponding to the third normal gaming state is continued, and the second normal gaming state is continued. The target image TF is shared in the state and the third normal game state, but the present invention is not limited to this. An image showing the third normal gaming state may be separately provided during the third normal gaming state.

(43) In each of the above embodiments, the target image TF (corresponding to "second information") and the counter image CF (corresponding to "first information") are displayed on the display screen 75a. It is also possible to display the information on separate display devices.

(44) In each of the above embodiments, when the main control device 162 performs a lottery based on the hold information, at the same time as the lottery (specifically, immediately after the lottery), the operation port display units DL, DR in the main display unit D The variable display of the pattern in the above and the variable display of the symbol in the variable display areas ME1 to ME3 on the display screen 75a are started, but the present invention is not limited to this. Prior to the lottery, it is also possible to start the variable display of the design on the operation port display units DL and DR and the variable display of the design in the variable display areas ME1 to ME3 on the display screen 75a.

(45) In each of the above embodiments, the second normal game state and the fourth normal game state are configured so that it is difficult to identify which game state is which from the display contents on the display screen 75a. It is also possible to configure the second normal gaming state and the fourth normal gaming state so that they can be easily identified. For example, in the second normal game state, a target image showing the third normal game state is displayed as the target image on the display screen 75a, and in the fourth normal game state, the target image showing the first normal game state is displayed as the target image on the display screen 75a. It is also possible to have a configuration for displaying.

In addition, the target image showing the first normal game state is displayed in the second normal game state, and the target image is displayed in the middle of the second normal game state or in the final game times of the second normal game state in the third normal game. It may be configured to switch to a target image showing a state.

(46) When the hold information related to the lower operating port 62a is stored and the holding information related to the right operating port 63a is not stored in the second normal game state, the game times related to the lower operating port 62a The variation display of the symbol in the third variation display area ME3 may be started at the start. That is, when only the hold information related to the lower operating port 62a exists, it is possible to set the cooperation target of the third variable display area ME3 as the lower operating port 62a. In such a configuration, while the variable display of the symbol is being performed in the third variable display area ME3, the symbol is displayed on the lower operating port display unit DL without starting the game rotation related to the right operating port 63a. When is stopped and displayed, the symbol combination corresponding to the lottery result of the game times related to the lower operating port 62a is stopped and displayed in the third variable display area ME3, and the symbol variation is displayed in the third variable display area ME3. If the game round related to the right operating port 63a starts during the process, the cooperation target is switched to the right operating port 63a side while maintaining the variable display of the symbol (without stopping display), and the right It is also possible to have a configuration in which the symbol being displayed in a variable manner is stopped and displayed in the third variable display area ME3 when the symbol is stopped and displayed on the display unit DR for the operation port.

(47) In each of the above embodiments, the size of the target image TF is changed as the game progresses, but the specific configuration for changing the display mode of the target image TF as the game progresses is described. It is optional. For example, it is possible to change the color, brightness, and shape of the target image TF in place of or in addition to the configuration for changing the size. Even in the case of such a configuration, it is preferable to change the display mode so as to easily attract the attention of the player by approaching the third normal gaming state.

(48) In each of the above embodiments, the count value of the counter image CF is updated during the second normal gaming state to indicate the process (process, path) until the transition to the third normal gaming state. However, it is not limited to this. For example, the process up to the third normal game state, that is, the start to the goal may be displayed by the status bar, and the current location (current position in the status bar) may be displayed by an arrow or the like that can be moved along the status bar (. Map display function).

(49) In each of the above embodiments, the display of the target image TF and the display of the counter image CF in the information display area IE are performed in parallel, but either the target image TF or the counter image CF is displayed. It is also possible to hide the other under the circumstances where it is.

(50) In each of the above embodiments, the size of the target image TF and the size of the counter image CF are changed at the same timing, but it is also possible to shift these timings.

(51) The display of the target image TF displayed in the second normal game state is continued in the second normal game state → the third normal game state, and the target image TF is continuously displayed in the third normal game state. It may be configured to be used. In such a configuration, the display position of the target image TF may be common to the second normal game state and the third normal game state, and the attached restraint image LF may be hidden in the third normal game state. preferable.

(52) In the fourth and fifth embodiments, the counter image CF is displayed on the display screen 75a in the second normal gaming state corresponding to the high probability mode and the high frequency support mode, and the counter value of the counter image CF is displayed. Was subtracted and displayed as the game times were consumed, suggesting the remaining game times in the second normal game state. The subtraction speed of the counter value may be increased in the middle of the second normal game state, and by changing the rhythm of the game, it is possible to contribute to the suppression of the monotony of the game. In order to change the rhythm of the game by changing the subtraction speed in this way, it is possible to replace or in addition to the above configuration so that the subtraction speed of the counter value becomes slower in the middle of the second normal game state. .. For example, the subtraction level after the number of executed game times reaches a predetermined number of times may be set to be lower than the subtraction level until the predetermined number of times is reached.

(53) In the fourth and fifth embodiments, the display mode of the counter image CF is the same regardless of the set subtraction level, but the display mode of the counter image CF is changed according to the switching of the subtraction level. It may be changed. For example, in the case of subtraction level 1, the color of the counter image CF is white, in the case of subtraction level 2, the color of the counter image CF is blue, in the case of subtraction level 3, the color of the counter image CF is green, and the subtraction level 4 In the case of, the color of the counter image CF may be changed so that the color of the counter image CF becomes red. The specific configuration for realizing the change in the display mode of the counter image CF is arbitrary. For example, the brightness of the counter image CF may be changed, or the counter image CF may be accompanied by an effect display. The color of the effect may be changed above.

(54) It is also possible to switch the display mode (for example, color and brightness) of the counter image CF shown in the fourth and fifth embodiments according to the subtraction level. For example, the color of the counter image CF may be switched so that the subtraction level is white when the subtraction level is LV1, blue when the subtraction level is LV2, green when the subtraction level is LV4, and red when the subtraction level is LV5. In a configuration in which the subtraction speed is changed by switching the subtraction level of the count value, the change is easily overlooked because the display area of the count value becomes smaller. Therefore, if the display mode of the count value is switched according to the subtraction level as shown in this modification, it is possible to reduce the chance that the subtraction level is overlooked without increasing the display area unobtrusively. it can.

(55) Other types of pachinko machines different from the above embodiments, for example, pachinko machines in which the electric accessory opens a predetermined number of times when a game ball enters a specific area of the special device, or a game in a specific area of the special device. The present invention can also be applied to pachinko machines that generate a right when a ball enters and become a big hit, pachinko machines equipped with other accessories, arrange ball machines, and game machines such as sparrow balls.

In addition, a non-bullet type gaming machine, for example, a plurality of reels having a plurality of types of symbols attached in the circumferential direction is provided, the reels are started to rotate by inserting medals and operating the start lever, and the stop switch is operated. After the reels have stopped after a predetermined time has passed, if a specific symbol or a combination of specific symbols is established on the effective line that can be seen from the display window, a privilege such as a medal payout is given to the player. The present invention can also be applied to slot machines.

Further, a pachinko machine and a slot machine equipped with a take-in device, in which a predetermined number of game balls stored in the storage unit are taken in by the take-in device and then the start lever is operated to start the rotation of the reel. The present invention can also be applied to a gaming machine in which and is fused.

<About the invention group extracted from each of the above embodiments>
Hereinafter, the characteristic configurations extracted from the above-described embodiments will be described while showing the effects and the like as necessary. In the following, for the sake of easy understanding, the corresponding configurations in each of the above embodiments are appropriately shown in parentheses or the like, but the present invention is not limited to the specific configurations shown in the parentheses or the like.

<Feature A group>
The following feature A group is described in that "a game machine such as a pachinko machine has a game board in which a game area is formed and a game ball launching means for launching a game ball into the game area based on a launch operation by a player. Some of them are provided. When a game ball launched from a game ball launching means enters a ball entry portion provided in the game area, a privilege such as paying out a predetermined number of game balls is given to the player. Regarding the background technology of "(for example, see Patent Document 1)", there is an invention that "in the above-mentioned type of gaming machine, there is still room for improvement in its configuration in order to increase the degree of attention to the game." It was made with the problem to be solved.

Features A1. Special information acquisition means (a function of executing information acquisition processing in MPU 602 of the main control device 162) for acquiring special information (holding information) when a predetermined acquisition condition (entry into the operation port 62a) is satisfied, and
An acquisition information storage means (RAM 604 holding ball storage area 632) capable of storing a plurality of special information acquired by the special information acquisition means, and
The lottery process is executed by the determination means (MPU 602 of the main control device 162) that sequentially determines whether or not the special information stored in the acquired information storage means corresponds to the predetermined determination information (for example, winning information). Function) and
A pattern display means (for example, a main display unit 81) having a display unit (for example, a display unit DR for an operating port) and capable of variably displaying a design on the display unit,
A stop result corresponding to the result of the determination by starting the variable display of the pattern in the pattern display means prior to the determination by the determination means or based on the determination made by the determination means. Is displayed and the variable display of the pattern is terminated as one game time, so that the pattern of each game time is variablely displayed according to the special information stored in the acquired information storage means. A game time control means for controlling the pattern display means (for example, a function of executing the game time control process by the MPU 602 of the main control device 162) and
The determination result by the determination means becomes the determination result corresponding to the predetermined determination information, and the game state is changed from the normal game state to the player based on the fact that the pattern corresponding to the determination result is stopped and displayed by the game turn control means. It is provided with a special game state transition means (a function of executing a game state transition process in the MPU 602 of the main control device 162) to shift to a special game state (for example, open / close execution mode) which is advantageous to the player.
As the normal game state, a first normal game state (a first normal game state corresponding to a low probability mode and a low frequency support mode) and a second normal game state (high) that is more advantageous to the player than the first normal game state. The second normal game state corresponding to the probability mode and the high frequency support mode) and the third normal game state (the third normal game state corresponding to the high probability mode and the low frequency support mode) which is more advantageous to the player than the second normal game state. (Game state) is provided,
A second normal game state transition means (MPU 602 of the main control device 162 executes a process for shifting to the second normal game state) for shifting the game state to the second normal game state upon the end of the special game state. Function to do) and
When shifting to the second normal gaming state by the second normal gaming state transition means, the upper limit setting means (to the MPU 602 of the main control device 162) for setting the upper limit (time reduction number) of the number of games in the second normal game state. Function to set the number of time reductions) and
When the first upper limit is set as the upper limit by the upper limit setting means, the gaming state is changed from the second normal gaming state based on the number of games played in the second normal gaming state reaching the first upper limit. When the second upper limit is set as the upper limit by the upper limit setting means after shifting to the third normal gaming state, the number of games in the second normal gaming state is the second upper limit. The third normal game state transition means (shift to the third normal game state by the MPU 602 of the main control device 162) for shifting the game state from the second normal game state to the third normal game state based on the achievement of A game machine characterized in that it has a function to execute processing for.

According to the feature A1, after the transition from the first normal game state to the second normal game state through the special game state, the number of games executed in the second normal game state reaches the upper limit, and the player further It shifts to the third normal game state which is advantageous to. The first upper limit and the second upper limit are included as the upper limit, and there is a difference in the hurdle to shift to the third normal gaming state between the case where the first upper limit is set and the case where the second upper limit is set. That is, a second normal gaming state in which the transition to the third normal gaming state is easy and a second normal gaming state in which the transition to the third normal gaming state is difficult occurs. By diversifying the second normal game state and providing a plurality of hurdles for transition to the third normal game state in this way, it is possible to suppress the monotony of the game in the normal game state and improve the degree of attention to the game. Can contribute.

In addition, the configuration shown in this feature is defined as "a game board in which a game area is formed, and a special information acquisition means for acquiring special information when a ball enters the starting ball entry portion provided in the game area." , The acquisition information storage means capable of storing a plurality of special information acquired by the special information acquisition means, and determination of whether or not the special information stored in the acquisition information storage means corresponds to the predetermined determination information. Judgment means to be sequentially performed, a pattern display means having a display unit and capable of variably displaying a pattern on the display unit, and the determination before the determination is performed by the determination means or by the determination means. The variable display of the pattern is started by the pattern display means based on the fact that the pattern is displayed, the stop result corresponding to the result of the determination is displayed, and the variable display of the pattern is terminated as one of the game times. The game time control means that controls the pattern display means so that the picture of each game time is variably displayed according to the special information stored in the acquired information storage means, and the determination result by the determination means are predetermined determinations. The determination result corresponds to the information, and the gaming state is shifted to the special gaming state which is more advantageous to the player than the normal gaming state based on the stop display of the pattern corresponding to the determination result by the game turn control means. The game state transitioning means is provided, and as the normal game state, the first normal game state, the second normal game state which is more advantageous to the player than the first normal game state, and the second normal game state are further provided. A third normal game state, which is advantageous to the player, is provided, and means for switching the game state to the first normal game state, the second normal game state, and the third normal game state according to the game situation. It is also possible to say, "A game machine characterized by having."

Feature A2. A game board (game board 60) in which a game area (game area PE) is formed, and
Information in the special information acquisition means (MPU 602 of the main control device 162) for acquiring special information (holding information) when a ball enters the starting ball entry unit (for example, the right operating port 63a) provided in the game area. Function to execute acquisition process) and
An acquisition information storage means (RAM 604 holding ball storage area 632) capable of storing a plurality of special information acquired by the special information acquisition means, and
The lottery process is executed by the determination means (MPU 602 of the main control device 162) that sequentially determines whether or not the special information stored in the acquired information storage means corresponds to the predetermined determination information (for example, winning information). Function) and
A pattern display means (for example, a main display unit 81) having a display unit (for example, a display unit DR for an operating port) and capable of variably displaying a design on the display unit,
A stop result corresponding to the result of the determination by starting the variable display of the pattern in the pattern display means prior to the determination by the determination means or based on the determination made by the determination means. Is displayed and the variable display of the pattern is terminated as one game time, so that the pattern of each game time is variablely displayed according to the special information stored in the acquired information storage means. A game time control means for controlling the pattern display means (for example, a function of executing the game time control process by the MPU 602 of the main control device 162) and
The determination result by the determination means becomes the determination result corresponding to the predetermined determination information, and the game state is changed from the normal game state to the player based on the fact that the pattern corresponding to the determination result is stopped and displayed by the game turn control means. It is provided with a special game state transition means (a function of executing a game state transition process in the MPU 602 of the main control device 162) to shift to a special game state (for example, open / close execution mode) which is advantageous to the player.
As the normal game state, a first normal game state (a first normal game state corresponding to a low probability mode and a low frequency support mode) and a second normal game state (high) that is more advantageous to the player than the first normal game state. The second normal game state corresponding to the probability mode and the high frequency support mode) and the third normal game state (the third normal game state corresponding to the high probability mode and the low frequency support mode) which is more advantageous to the player than the second normal game state. (Game state) is provided,
A second normal game state transition means (MPU 602 of the main control device 162 executes a process for shifting to the second normal game state) for shifting the game state to the second normal game state upon the end of the special game state. Function to do) and
When shifting to the second normal gaming state by the second normal gaming state transition means, the upper limit setting means (to the MPU 602 of the main control device 162) for setting the upper limit (time reduction number) of the number of games in the second normal game state. Function to set the number of time reductions) and
When the first upper limit is set as the upper limit by the upper limit setting means, the gaming state is changed from the second normal gaming state based on the number of games played in the second normal gaming state reaching the first upper limit. When the second upper limit is set as the upper limit by the upper limit setting means after shifting to the third normal gaming state, the number of games in the second normal gaming state is the second upper limit. The third normal game state transition means (shift to the third normal game state by the MPU 602 of the main control device 162) for shifting the game state from the second normal game state to the third normal game state based on the achievement of A game machine characterized in that it has a function to execute processing for.

According to the feature A2, after shifting from the first normal game state to the second normal game state through the special game state, the number of games executed in the second normal game state reaches the upper limit, and the player further It shifts to the third normal game state which is advantageous to. The first upper limit and the second upper limit are included as the upper limit, and there is a difference in the hurdle to shift to the third normal gaming state between the case where the first upper limit is set and the case where the second upper limit is set. That is, a second normal gaming state in which the transition to the third normal gaming state is easy and a second normal gaming state in which the transition to the third normal gaming state is difficult occurs. By diversifying the second normal game state and providing a plurality of hurdles for transition to the third normal game state in this way, it is possible to suppress the monotony of the game in the normal game state and improve the degree of attention to the game. Can contribute.

Feature A3. A variable ball entry unit (upper variable winning device 64) that can switch between an open state in which a game ball flowing down the game area can enter and a closed state in which entry is not possible.
It is provided with an opening / closing control means (a function of executing an opening / closing process by the MPU 602 of the main control device 162) for switching the variable entry portion between the closed state and the open state when the special gaming state is set.
When the opening / closing control means shifts to the second normal gaming state corresponding to the second upper limit through the special gaming state, the opening / closing mode of the variable ball entry portion in the special gaming state is set as a predetermined mode, and the special mode is set. It is characterized by having a means for setting the opening / closing mode of the variable ball entry portion in the special gaming state as the predetermined mode when shifting to the second normal gaming state corresponding to the first upper limit through the gaming state. The gaming machine according to the feature A2.

As shown in the feature A1 and the like, according to the configuration in which the transition hurdle to the third normal game state is provided, the monotonization of the game can be suitably suppressed. However, if the hurdle can be identified from the opening / closing mode (behavior) of the variable ball entry portion in the special gaming state before the transition to the second normal gaming state, the degree of attention to the game in the second normal gaming state Is feared to decline. In this respect, as shown in this feature, regardless of which of the first upper limit and the second upper limit is set, by making the opening / closing mode of the variable ball entry portion the same, the opening / closing mode of the variable ball entry section It is possible to preferably suppress the occurrence of inconvenience such that the upper limit is specified in advance.

Feature A4. The second normal game state is a game state (normal game corresponding to a high probability mode) in which when the determination is made by the determination means, a determination result corresponding to the predetermined determination information is more likely to be obtained than the first normal game state. State) The gaming machine according to feature A2 or feature A3.

In order to enhance the sharpness of the game while suppressing an excessive bias of the advantage, it is preferable to raise the set upper limit to some extent to suppress the upper limit arrival probability. However, on the other hand, if the upper limit becomes too large, the game to reach the upper limit will be delayed or the impression that it will be virtually impossible to reach will become stronger, and the diversification of the game will improve the interest of the game. It is feared that the effect of trying to achieve this will not be exhibited well. In this regard, as shown in this feature, if the game state (high probability mode) is set so that the result corresponding to the predetermined judgment information is likely to occur, it is possible to suppress the frequent occurrence of the upper limit even if the upper limit is lowered. Therefore, the occurrence of the above-mentioned various inconveniences can be suitably suppressed.

Feature A5. The second normal gaming state is described in any one of the feature A2 to the feature A4, which is a gaming state in which the ball enters the starting ball entry portion more easily than the first normal game state. Game machine.

The transition (promotion) to the third normal gaming state is accompanied by a certain degree of tension, and if such tension continues for an excessively long time, it becomes a factor that increases the fatigue of the player. Therefore, in the second normal game state, an upper limit is set for the number of games executed based on the entry into the starting ball entry section, and in the second normal game state, it is easy to enter the starting ball entry section. The game can be rapidly advanced by the configuration. As a result, it is possible to alleviate the fatigue caused by the improvement of the degree of attention to the game.

Feature A6. The feature A2 is characterized in that the second normal gaming state is a gaming state configured so that the variable display period (variable display time) of the pattern for each game is shorter than that of the first normal game state. The gaming machine according to any one of the features A5.

The transition (promotion) to the third normal gaming state is accompanied by a certain degree of tension, and if such tension continues for an excessively long time, it becomes a factor that increases the fatigue of the player. Therefore, in the second normal game state, the upper limit is set for the number of games executed based on the ball entering the starting ball, and in the second normal game state, the pattern is more variable than in the first normal game state. By configuring the display period to be shortened, the game can be advanced quickly. As a result, it is possible to alleviate the fatigue caused by the improvement of the degree of attention to the game.

In particular, in combination with the feature A5, the variable display period is shortened in accordance with the increase in the frequency of entering the starting ball, so that the upper limit is expected to be reached. The game in the game state can proceed smoothly. As a result, the effect of alleviating fatigue can be more preferably exerted.

Feature A7. As the normal game state, a fourth normal game state (low probability mode) that is more advantageous to the player than the first normal game state and more disadvantageous to the player than the second normal game state and the third normal game state. And the 4th normal game state corresponding to the high frequency support mode) is provided.
The fourth normal game state transition means (a function of shifting to the fourth normal game state by the MPU 602 of the main control device 162 as a trigger of the normal jackpot result) that shifts to the fourth normal game state through the special game state.
When the number of games played in the fourth normal game state reaches a predetermined number of times (for example, 50 times), the frequency shifts to the first normal game state by the first normal game state transition means (MPU 602 of the main control device 162). It is equipped with a function to shift to the first normal game state after the end of the support mode).
The above-described upper limit setting means according to any one of features A2 to A6, wherein at least one of the first upper limit and the second upper limit is configured to be less than the specified number of times. Game machine.

Transition to the special gaming state in the 4th normal gaming state For a player who has experienced reaching the specified number of times without winning the lottery, it is realistic to reach the upper limit when the 2nd normal gaming state is reached. It can give the impression that there is. With such a configuration, it can be expected that the degree of attention to the game at the time of transition to the second normal game state will be improved.

Feature A8. As the normal game state, a fourth normal game state (low probability mode) that is more advantageous to the player than the first normal game state and more disadvantageous to the player than the second normal game state and the third normal game state. And the 4th normal game state corresponding to the high frequency support mode) is provided.
The predetermined determination information includes the first determination information (information corresponding to the probability variation jackpot result) and the second determination information (information corresponding to the normal jackpot result).
Means for shifting the gaming state to the second normal gaming state via the special gaming state when the determination result by the determination means becomes the determination result corresponding to the first determination information in the second normal gaming state. When,
Means for shifting the gaming state to the fourth normal gaming state via the special gaming state when the determination result by the determination means becomes the determination result corresponding to the second determination information in the second normal gaming state. The gaming machine according to feature A7, which is characterized by having and.

According to the configuration shown in this feature, if a winning result is obtained during the second normal gaming state, the game shifts to the special gaming state. After the end of the special gaming state, there will be a branch between the case of returning to the second normal gaming state and the case of shifting to the fourth normal gaming state (demotion). As a result, the monotonousness of the game can be suitably suppressed.

Feature A9. The upper limit setting means is a case where the determination result by the determination means becomes the determination result corresponding to the first determination information before reaching the upper limit set by the upper limit setting means, and the upper limit setting means is passed through the special gaming state. The gaming machine according to feature A8, which comprises means for resetting the upper limit in the second normal gaming state when the second normal gaming state is reached.

According to the feature A9, even if the judgment result corresponding to the predetermined judgment information is obtained while the game is proceeding aiming at the upper limit in the second normal game state, the second normal game state is returned again. There is a possibility of returning. When returning to the second normal gaming state, the transition to the third normal gaming state can be re-challenged by setting a new upper limit. Therefore, it is possible to suitably suppress the decrease in the motivation for playing due to the transition to the special gaming state.

Feature A10. The gaming machine according to any one of features A2 to A9, wherein the difference between the first upper limit and the second upper limit is smaller than the first upper limit.

According to the configuration shown in this feature, even if the game times corresponding to the first upper limit are reached and the game does not shift to the third normal game state, the game times corresponding to the second upper limit are reached. By lowering the hurdle to reach the second upper limit, it is possible to suppress a decrease in the expectation for reaching the second upper limit. As a result, even when a plurality of hurdles are used, it is possible to preferably suppress a decrease in the willingness to play when the first hurdle is unexploded.

Feature A11. When the second upper limit is set as the upper limit by the upper limit setting means, the means for providing a predetermined notification in the game times corresponding to the first upper limit and the game times corresponding to the second upper limit is provided. The gaming machine according to any one of the feature A2 to the feature A9, which is characterized by being present.

As shown in the feature A2 and the like, when a plurality of hurdles for shifting to the third normal gaming state are provided, for example, even if the first upper limit is not reached, the first upper limit is the third. By suggesting that there is a possibility of shifting to the normal game state, it is possible to improve the degree of attention to the game.

Feature A12. Special information acquisition means (a function of executing information acquisition processing in MPU 602 of the main control device 162) for acquiring special information (holding information) when a predetermined acquisition condition (entry into the operation port 62a) is satisfied, and
An acquisition information storage means (RAM 604 holding ball storage area 632) capable of storing a plurality of special information acquired by the special information acquisition means, and
The lottery process is executed by the determination means (MPU 602 of the main control device 162) that sequentially determines whether or not the special information stored in the acquired information storage means corresponds to the predetermined determination information (for example, winning information). Function) and
A pattern display means (for example, a main display unit 81) having a display unit (for example, a display unit DR for an operating port) and capable of variably displaying a design on the display unit,
A stop result corresponding to the result of the determination by starting the variable display of the pattern in the pattern display means prior to the determination by the determination means or based on the determination made by the determination means. Is displayed and the variable display of the pattern is terminated as one game time, so that the pattern of each game time is variablely displayed according to the special information stored in the acquired information storage means. A game time control means for controlling the pattern display means (for example, a function of executing the game time control process by the MPU 602 of the main control device 162) and
The determination result by the determination means becomes the determination result corresponding to the predetermined determination information, and the game state is changed from the normal game state to the player based on the fact that the pattern corresponding to the determination result is stopped and displayed by the game turn control means. It is provided with a special game state transition means (a function of executing a game state transition process in the MPU 602 of the main control device 162) to shift to a special game state (for example, open / close execution mode) which is advantageous to the player.
As the normal game state, a first normal game state (a first normal game state corresponding to a low frequency support mode and a low probability mode) and a second normal game state (high) that is more advantageous to the player than the first normal game state. The second normal game state corresponding to the frequency support mode and the high probability mode) and the third normal game state (the third normal game state corresponding to the low frequency support mode and the high probability mode) which is more advantageous to the player than the second normal game state. (Game state) and
A second normal game state transition means (MPU 602 of the main control device 162 executes a process for shifting to the second normal game state) for shifting the game state to the second normal game state upon the end of the special game state. Function to do) and
When shifting to the second normal gaming state by the second normal gaming state transition means, the upper limit setting means (to the MPU 602 of the main control device 162) for setting the upper limit (time reduction number) of the number of games in the second normal game state. Function to set the number of time reductions) and
A third normal game state transition means (main control device 162) that shifts the game state from the second normal game state to the third normal game state based on the number of games played in the second normal game state reaching the upper limit. MPU 602 has a function to execute the process for transitioning to the third normal game state).
A gaming machine characterized in that a plurality of the upper limits are provided, and the upper limit setting means is configured to set any one of the plurality of upper limits as an upper limit of the number of games in the second normal gaming state.

According to the feature A12, after shifting from the first normal game state to the second normal game state through the special game state, the number of games executed in the second normal game state reaches the upper limit, and the player further It shifts to the third normal game state which is advantageous to. A plurality of the above upper limits are provided, and the hurdle for transition to the third normal gaming state differs depending on which of these upper limits is set. That is, a second normal gaming state in which the transition to the third normal gaming state is easy and a second normal gaming state in which the transition to the third normal gaming state is difficult occurs. By diversifying the second normal game state and providing a plurality of hurdles for transition to the third normal game state in this way, it is possible to suppress the monotony of the game in the normal game state and improve the degree of attention to the game. Can contribute.

It is also possible to apply the technical ideas shown in the features A3 to A11 to the feature A12.

<Feature B group>
The following feature B group is described in that "a game machine such as a pachinko machine has a game board in which a game area is formed and a game ball launching means for launching a game ball into the game area based on a launch operation by the player. Some of them are provided. When a game ball launched from a game ball launching means enters a ball entry portion provided in the game area, a privilege such as paying out a predetermined number of game balls is given to the player. Regarding the background technology of "(for example, see Patent Document 1)", there is an invention that "in the above-mentioned type of gaming machine, there is still room for improvement in its configuration in order to increase the degree of attention to the game." It was made with the problem to be solved.

Feature B1. A game board (game board 60) in which a game area (game area PE) is formed, and
Information in the special information acquisition means (MPU 602 of the main control device 162) for acquiring special information (holding information) when a ball enters the starting ball entry unit (for example, the right operating port 63a) provided in the game area. Function to execute acquisition process) and
An acquisition information storage means (RAM 604 holding ball storage area 632) capable of storing a plurality of special information acquired by the special information acquisition means, and
The lottery process is executed by the determination means (MPU 602 of the main control device 162) that sequentially determines whether or not the special information stored in the acquired information storage means corresponds to the predetermined determination information (for example, winning information). Function) and
A pattern display means (for example, a main display unit 81) having a display unit (for example, a display unit DR for an operating port) and capable of variably displaying a design on the display unit,
A stop result corresponding to the result of the determination by starting the variable display of the pattern in the pattern display means prior to the determination by the determination means or based on the determination made by the determination means. Is displayed and the variable display of the pattern is terminated as one game time, so that the pattern of each game time is variablely displayed according to the special information stored in the acquired information storage means. A game time control means for controlling the pattern display means (for example, a function of executing the game time control process by the MPU 602 of the main control device 162) and
The determination result by the determination means becomes the determination result corresponding to the predetermined determination information, and the game state is changed from the normal game state to the player based on the fact that the pattern corresponding to the determination result is stopped and displayed by the game turn control means. It is provided with a special game state transition means (a function of executing a game state transition process in the MPU 602 of the main control device 162) to shift to a special game state (for example, open / close execution mode) which is advantageous to the player.
As the normal game state, a first normal game state (a first normal game state corresponding to a low probability mode and a low frequency support mode) and a second normal game state (high) that is more advantageous to the player than the first normal game state. The second normal game state corresponding to the probability mode and the high frequency support mode) and the third normal game state (the third normal game state corresponding to the high probability mode and the low frequency support mode) which is more advantageous to the player than the second normal game state. (Game state) is provided,
When shifting from the first normal gaming state to the second normal gaming state, the transition condition setting means for setting the transition condition to the third normal gaming state (MPU 602 of the main control device 162 sets the number of time reductions). Function)
When the transition condition setting means becomes the determination result corresponding to the predetermined determination information in the second normal gaming state and becomes the second normal gaming state through the special gaming state, the transition condition setting means Relaxing means for relaxing the transition condition to the third normal gaming state (set when the number of time reductions set when the jackpot result related to the right operating port 63a is obtained is the jackpot result related to the lower operating port 62a. A game machine characterized by having a configuration that is given preferential treatment over the number of times saved.

As shown in this feature, the monotonousness of the game can be suppressed by setting the configuration in which the advantage is increased by shifting from the first normal game state to the second normal game state to the third normal game state. Here, the transition condition for shifting from the second normal game state to the most advantageous third normal game state is a judgment result (hereinafter referred to as a winning result) corresponding to predetermined judgment information in the second normal game state. It may be alleviated when returning to the second normal gaming state after the special gaming state. In this way, if the hurdle to the third normal game state is lowered when the second normal game state loops, the effect of suppressing the monotony of the game can be suitably exhibited by using a plurality of normal game states in combination. be able to.

In addition, the configuration shown in this feature is defined as "a game board in which a game area is formed, and a special information acquisition means for acquiring special information when a ball enters the starting ball entry portion provided in the game area." , The acquisition information storage means capable of storing a plurality of special information acquired by the special information acquisition means, and determination of whether or not the special information stored in the acquisition information storage means corresponds to the predetermined determination information. Judgment means to be sequentially performed, a pattern display means having a display unit and capable of variably displaying a pattern on the display unit, and the determination before the determination is performed by the determination means or by the determination means. The variable display of the pattern is started by the pattern display means based on the fact that the pattern is displayed, the stop result corresponding to the result of the determination is displayed, and the variable display of the pattern is terminated as one of the game times. The game time control means that controls the pattern display means so that the picture of each game time is variably displayed according to the special information stored in the acquired information storage means, and the determination result by the determination means are predetermined determinations. The determination result corresponds to the information, and the gaming state is shifted to the special gaming state which is more advantageous to the player than the normal gaming state based on the stop display of the pattern corresponding to the determination result by the game turn control means. The game state transitioning means is provided, and as the normal game state, the first normal game state, the second normal game state which is more advantageous to the player than the first normal game state, and the second normal game state are further provided. A third normal game state, which is advantageous to the player, is provided, and means for switching the game state to the first normal game state, the second normal game state, and the third normal game state according to the game situation. It is also possible to say, "A game machine characterized by having."

Feature B2. The transition condition setting means sets an upper limit of the number of games executed in the second normal gaming state as the transition condition from the second normal gaming state to the third normal gaming state.
The mitigation means is said to be the second normal game state via the special game state from the second normal game state, rather than the upper limit set when shifting from the first normal game state to the second normal game state. The gaming machine according to feature B1, wherein the upper limit set when the game is in a gaming state is a means for lowering the upper limit.

As shown in this feature, in a configuration in which the game shifts to the third normal game state when the number of games executed in the second normal game state reaches the upper limit, whether or not this upper limit can be reached is advantageous for the game. It will be important to proceed. Here, in the configuration shown in this feature, the above upper limit may be lowered when the winning result is obtained in the second normal gaming state and the game returns from the special gaming state to the second normal gaming state, and such an event occurs. As a result, the expectation for the transition to the third normal game state can be increased.

Feature B3. The predetermined determination information includes the first determination information (information corresponding to the probability variation jackpot result) and the second determination information (information corresponding to the normal jackpot result).
When the determination result by the determination means becomes the determination result corresponding to the first determination information during the second normal gaming state, the means for shifting to the second normal gaming state via the special gaming state.
When the determination result by the determination means becomes the determination result corresponding to the second determination information during the second normal gaming state, the means for shifting to the first normal gaming state via the special gaming state is provided. The gaming machine according to the feature B1 or the feature B2, which is characterized by being

As shown in this feature, in a gaming machine in which the winning result triggers the transition (demotion) from the second normal gaming state to the first normal gaming state, the winning result is in the second normal gaming state. The game is played with the expectation that it will not be. Here, if the winning result is obtained, the player may be demoted to the first normal game state, while the conditions for returning to the second normal game state and shifting to the third normal game state may be relaxed. With such a configuration, it is possible to prevent the player's willingness to play from rapidly decreasing when the winning result is obtained in the second normal game state.

Feature B4. The transition condition setting means is described when the determination result by the determination means becomes a determination result corresponding to the predetermined determination information in the second normal gaming state and the second normal gaming state is reached after the special gaming state. The gaming machine according to any one of feature B1 to feature B3, which comprises means for setting a transition condition that is more difficult to satisfy than the transition condition set by the transition condition setting means.

As shown in this feature, when the winning result is obtained in the second normal game state, the hurdle to the third normal game state is not necessarily lowered, but the hurdle to be raised is provided to make the game tense. A feeling can be given.

Feature B5. When the determination result by the determination means becomes the determination result corresponding to the predetermined determination information in the second normal gaming state and becomes the second normal gaming state through the special gaming state, the transition condition is determined by the relaxation means. B4 is characterized in that the probability that is relaxed is higher than the probability that a transition condition that is difficult to satisfy is set, which is higher than the transition condition preset by the transition condition setting means. The game machine described in.

As shown in feature B1, in the configuration of stepping up in the order of the first normal game state → the second normal game state → the third normal game state, the winning result is obtained despite the transition to the second normal game state. As a result, when the transition to the third normal game state occurs frequently, it is easy to give the impression that the game in the second normal game state is delayed. This can be an obstacle in increasing the attention to the game. Here, as shown in this feature, when a winning result is obtained during the second normal game state, the rate of lowering the hurdle is higher than the rate of raising the hurdle, so that a plurality of normal game states are used together. At the same time, the step-up of the gaming state can be made light.

Feature B6. As the starting ball entry portion, a first starting ball entry portion (lower operating port 62a) arranged in the first flow path (left route) in the game area and a second flow path different from the first flow path. It has a second starting ball entry portion (right operating port 63a) arranged on (right route), and has.
As the transition condition, the first transition condition (for example, the number of time reductions "50" times) and the second transition condition (for example, the number of time reductions "30", "10", "0" times that are easier to satisfy than the first transition condition ) And are provided,
When the relaxation means obtains a determination result corresponding to the predetermined determination information in the special information corresponding to the entry into the second start entry portion, the relaxation means enters the first start entry portion. It is configured so that the ratio of setting the second transition condition as the transition condition is higher than the case where the determination result corresponding to the predetermined determination information is obtained in the special information corresponding to the sphere.
In the first normal gaming state, there are more chances of determination by the determination means when the game ball is launched into the first flow path than in the second flow path, and in the second normal game state, from the first flow path. The game machine according to any one of the feature B1 to the feature B5, wherein the game ball is fired into the second flow path so that the determination opportunity by the determination means is increased.

According to feature B6, when a game ball is launched in the first flow path in the first normal game state, a lottery for shifting to the special game state is executed based on the ball entering the first start ball entry section. Will be done. When the result of the lottery is a winning result and the player shifts to the second normal gaming state, it is easy to set the first transition condition, which is relatively difficult to establish. On the other hand, after the transition to the second normal game state, the game ball is launched into the second flow path, and the main entry destination of the game ball becomes the second start entry portion. When the lottery for transition to the special gaming state is executed based on the entry into the second starting ball entry section, the winning result is obtained, and the player returns to the second normal gaming state through the special gaming state, the transition condition is relative. It is easy to set the second transition condition, which is easy to establish. With such a configuration, the technical idea shown in the feature B1 can be suitably embodied while avoiding the complexity of the configuration by utilizing the existing configuration in the game machine.

Feature B7. A plurality of the second transition conditions are provided.
When the mitigation means obtains a determination result corresponding to the predetermined determination information in the special information corresponding to the entry into the second start entry portion, the relaxation means includes a plurality of the second transition conditions as the transition condition. The gaming machine according to feature B6, wherein the probability that the transition condition that is most easily established is set is higher than the probability that the other transition conditions are set.

According to the configuration shown in this feature, the transition condition set when the second normal game state is looped is easier to be established than the transition condition set when the player first shifts to the second normal game state. Opportunities increase. As a result, the relaxation function shown in feature B1 can be suitably exerted.

Feature B8. The gaming machine according to any one of feature B1 to feature B7, which comprises a correspondence information display means for displaying transition condition correspondence information corresponding to the transition condition set by the transition condition setting means.

In a configuration in which the transition condition can be relaxed as shown in the feature B1 or the like, by displaying the transition condition correspondence information corresponding to the transition condition, it is possible to contribute to the improvement of the degree of attention to the game.

In addition, each technical idea shown in feature B1 to feature B8 may be applied to the said feature A group.

<Characteristic C group>
The following feature C group is described in that "a game machine such as a pachinko machine has a game board in which a game area is formed and a game ball launching means for launching a game ball into the game area based on a launch operation by a player. Some of them are provided. When a game ball launched from a game ball launching means enters a ball entry portion provided in the game area, a privilege such as paying out a predetermined number of game balls is given to the player. Regarding the background technology of "(for example, see Patent Document 1)", there is an invention that "in the above-mentioned type of gaming machine, there is still room for improvement in its configuration in order to increase the degree of attention to the game." It was made with the problem to be solved.

Feature C1. A game board (game board 60) in which a game area (game area PE) is formed, and
Information in the special information acquisition means (MPU 602 of the main control device 162) for acquiring special information (holding information) when a ball enters the starting ball entry unit (for example, the right operating port 63a) provided in the game area. Function to execute acquisition process) and
An acquisition information storage means (RAM 604 holding ball storage area 632) capable of storing a plurality of special information acquired by the special information acquisition means, and
The lottery process is executed by the determination means (MPU 602 of the main control device 162) that sequentially determines whether or not the special information stored in the acquired information storage means corresponds to the predetermined determination information (for example, winning information). Function) and
A pattern display means (for example, a main display unit 81) having a display unit (for example, a display unit DR for an operating port) and capable of variably displaying a design on the display unit,
A stop result corresponding to the result of the determination by starting the variable display of the pattern in the pattern display means prior to the determination by the determination means or based on the determination made by the determination means. Is displayed and the variable display of the pattern is terminated as one game time, so that the pattern of each game time is variablely displayed according to the special information stored in the acquired information storage means. A game time control means for controlling the pattern display means (for example, a function of executing the game time control process by the MPU 602 of the main control device 162) and
The determination result by the determination means becomes the determination result corresponding to the predetermined determination information, and the game state is changed from the normal game state to the player based on the fact that the pattern corresponding to the determination result is stopped and displayed by the game turn control means. Special game state transition means (function of executing processing for game state transition in MPU 602 of the main control device 162) to shift to a special game state (for example, open / close execution mode) which is advantageous to
Switching means (electric accessory 71) for switching between a receiving state (open state) in which a game ball can enter the starting ball and a non-accepting state (closed state) in which it is more difficult for the game ball to enter the receiving state. When,
It is provided with a switching control means (a function of executing an electric service support process in the MPU 602 of the main control device 162) for controlling the switching means.
As the switching control mode of the switching means by the switching control means, a first switching mode (low frequency support mode) and a second switching mode (high frequency support) in which the non-accepting state is shorter than the first switching mode. Mode) and
As the determination mode in which the determination is performed by the determination means, the high probability mode in which the probability of the determination result corresponding to the predetermined determination information is relatively high and the probability of the determination result corresponding to the predetermined determination information are relative. Has a low probability mode and
As the normal game state, the first normal game state corresponding to the first switching mode and the low probability mode, the second normal game state corresponding to the second switching mode and the high probability mode, and the first switching state. A mode and a third normal gaming state corresponding to the high probability mode are provided.
The second normal game state is configured to be more advantageous to the player than the first normal game state and more disadvantageous to the player than the third normal game state.
When the determination result by the determination means becomes the determination result corresponding to the predetermined determination information in the first normal gaming state, the first normal gaming state is changed to the second normal gaming state through the special gaming state. The first transfer means to be transferred (a function of executing the process of shifting to the second normal gaming state by the MPU 602 of the main control device 162) and
When shifting from the first normal gaming state to the second normal gaming state, a reference number setting means for setting a reference number (time reduction number) (a function of setting the time reduction number with the MPU 602 of the main control device 162) and
When the number of games executed in the second normal game state reaches the reference number, the second transition means (MPU 602 of the main control device 162) shifts from the second normal game state to the third normal game state. A gaming machine characterized in that it is equipped with a function of executing a process of shifting to a third normal gaming state.

According to the feature C1, when the number of games reaches the reference number without winning the result in the second normal game state corresponding to the high probability mode and the high frequency support mode, the high probability mode is triggered by the arrival of the reference number. Moreover, it shifts to the third normal gaming state corresponding to the low frequency support mode. The third normal game state is configured to be more advantageous to the player than the second normal game state. In other words, if the benefit is not obtained despite the high probability mode (gaming state on the advantageous side), it is possible to advance the game even more advantageously by upgrading to the third normal gaming state. Become. By relieving the player with such a configuration, it is possible to suppress a decrease in the motivation for playing.

The third normal gaming state shown in this feature corresponds to the first switching mode and the high probability mode, and is differentiated from the second normal gaming state by the difference in the combination of the switching control mode and the determination mode. There is. With such a configuration, it is possible to diversify the game while suppressing the configuration related to the game from becoming excessively complicated, and it is possible to preferably improve the degree of attention to the game.

Feature C2. A special ball entry section (lower variable winning device 65) capable of entering a game ball flowing down the game area is provided, and the special entry section is configured to be more advantageous to the player than the start ball entry section. Has been
The starting ball entry portion is arranged on a predetermined flow path (right route) leading to the special ball entry portion in the game area, and when the starting ball entry portion is in the receiving state, the predetermined The flow to the special ball entry portion via the flow path of the above is restricted.
In the third normal gaming state, the chance that the game ball launched into the predetermined flow path enters the starting entry section is reduced as compared with the second normal gaming state, while entering the special entry section. The gaming machine according to feature C1, which is configured to increase the chances of playing a ball.

According to the feature C2, in the second normal game state, the entry into the special entry section, which is set to have a higher advantage than the start entry section, is regulated by the start entry section, and the state shifts to the third normal game state. By doing so, the regulation will be relaxed. In this way, it is possible to secure the superiority of the third normal gaming state over the second normal gaming state by increasing the chances of entering the special ball entry section.

Feature C3. As the predetermined determination information, first information (information corresponding to the jackpot result) and second information (information corresponding to the special hit result) are provided.
The second transition means starts from the second normal gaming state when the number of games executed in the second normal gaming state without obtaining a determination result corresponding to the first information reaches the reference number. It is configured to shift to the third normal gaming state.
A special ball-entry unit (lower variable winning device 65) that can switch between an accepting state in which a game ball flowing down the game area can enter and a non-accepting state in which it is more difficult to enter than the accepted state.
When the determination result by the determination means becomes the determination result corresponding to the second information, the opening / closing process is executed by the entry control means (MPU 602 of the main control device 162) for switching the special entry section to the acceptance state. Function to do) and
A first predetermined number of game balls are paid out based on the entry into the starting ball entry portion, and a second predetermined number of game balls larger than the first predetermined number are paid out based on the entry into the special entry section. Equipped with a payout means (payout device 222)
The starting ball entry portion is arranged on a predetermined flow path (right route) leading to the special ball entry portion in the game area, and when the starting ball entry portion is in the receiving state, the predetermined The flow to the special ball entry portion via the flow path of the above is restricted.
In the third normal game state, the proportion of game balls that enter the special entry portion of the game balls launched toward the predetermined flow path is increased as compared with the second normal game state. The gaming machine according to feature C1, which is characterized in that it is used.

According to the feature C3, in the second normal game state, the entry into the special entry section, which is set to have a higher advantage than the start entry section, is regulated by the start entry section, and the state shifts to the third normal game state. By doing so, the regulation will be relaxed. In this way, it is possible to secure the superiority of the third normal gaming state over the second normal gaming state by increasing the chances of entering the special ball entry section.

Feature C4. In the special gaming state in which the determination result by the determination means becomes the determination result corresponding to the second information and the transition is made, the means for maintaining the switching control mode to the switching control mode before the transition to the special gaming state is provided. The gaming machine according to feature C3, characterized in that.

According to the configuration shown in this feature, there are cases where the judgment result corresponding to the second information is obtained during the second normal game state and the case where the judgment result corresponds to the second information during the third normal game state. , The difference in ball entry frequency can be increased. This is preferable in emphasizing the superiority of the special ball entry portion as shown in the feature C2 and the like.

Feature C5. The reference number setting means is the first setting means.
When the determination result by the determination means becomes the determination result corresponding to the first information before reaching the reference number of times, and the second normal gaming state is reached through the special gaming state, the reference number of times (time reduction number) is set. Equipped with a second setting means to be newly set (a function of resetting the number of time reductions when the MPU 602 of the main control device 162 shifts from the second normal gaming state to the second normal gaming state through the first special gaming state). The gaming machine according to the feature C3 or the feature C4, which is characterized by being

According to the feature C5, when the winning result is obtained before the rescue function is activated and the player returns to the second normal game state through the special game state, the reference number of times is reset. Thereby, for example, it is possible to prevent the relief function shown in feature C1 from becoming excessive.

Feature C6. The reference number setting means is the first setting means.
When the determination result by the determination means becomes the determination result corresponding to the first information in the third normal gaming state, the third transition means (mainly) for shifting to the second normal gaming state via the special gaming state. The function of executing the process of shifting to the second normal gaming state by the MPU 602 of the control device 162) and
When shifting to the second normal gaming state by the third transition means, the third setting means (MPU 602 of the main control device 162 newly sets the reference number of times from the third normal gaming state to the second normal gaming state). The gaming machine according to any one of feature C3 to feature C5, which is characterized by having a function of resetting the number of time reductions when shifting to.

If a winning result is obtained during the relief, the player shifts to the second normal game state and leaves a way to return to the third normal game state, so that the player's motivation to play is rapidly increased with the end of the third normal game state. It is possible to suppress the decrease to.

Feature C7. The gaming machine according to feature C6, wherein the third setting means has a means for setting a reference number of times to be less than the reference number of times set by the first setting means.

In the case of the third normal game state → the second normal game state, the demotion of the game state becomes a factor that lowers the player's motivation to play by giving preferential treatment so that the reference number of times is relatively small. Can be suppressed.

Feature C8. A game board (game board 60) in which a game area (game area PE) is formed, and
Information in the special information acquisition means (MPU 602 of the main control device 162) for acquiring special information (holding information) when a ball enters the starting ball entry unit (for example, the right operating port 63a) provided in the game area. Function to execute acquisition process) and
An acquisition information storage means (RAM 604 holding ball storage area 632) capable of storing a plurality of special information acquired by the special information acquisition means, and
The lottery process is executed by the determination means (MPU 602 of the main control device 162) that sequentially determines whether or not the special information stored in the acquired information storage means corresponds to the predetermined determination information (for example, winning information). Function) and
A pattern display means (for example, a main display unit 81) having a display unit (for example, a display unit DR for an operating port) and capable of variably displaying a design on the display unit,
A stop result corresponding to the result of the determination by starting the variable display of the pattern in the pattern display means prior to the determination by the determination means or based on the determination made by the determination means. Is displayed and the variable display of the pattern is terminated as one game time, so that the pattern of each game time is variablely displayed according to the special information stored in the acquired information storage means. A game time control means for controlling the pattern display means (for example, a function of executing the game time control process by the MPU 602 of the main control device 162) and
The determination result by the determination means becomes the determination result corresponding to the predetermined determination information, and the game state is changed from the normal game state to the player based on the fact that the pattern corresponding to the determination result is stopped and displayed by the game turn control means. Special game state transition means (function of executing processing for game state transition in MPU 602 of the main control device 162) to shift to a special game state (for example, open / close execution mode) which is advantageous to
Switching means (electric accessory 71) for switching between a receiving state (open state) in which a game ball can enter the starting ball and a non-accepting state (closed state) in which it is more difficult for the game ball to enter the receiving state. When,
It is provided with a switching control means (a function of executing an electric service support process in the MPU 602 of the main control device 162) for controlling the switching means.
As the switching control mode of the switching means by the switching control means, the first switching mode (low frequency support mode) and the second switching mode (high frequency support mode) in which the non-accepting state is shorter than the first switching mode. ) Is provided,
As the determination mode in which the determination is performed by the determination means, the high probability mode in which the probability of the determination result corresponding to the predetermined determination information is relatively high and the probability of the determination result corresponding to the predetermined determination information are relative. Has a low probability mode and
When the determination result by the determination means becomes the determination result corresponding to the predetermined determination information in the first normal gaming state corresponding to the first switching mode and the low probability mode, the second switching mode and the high A first transition means for transitioning to the second normal gaming state corresponding to the probability mode (a function of executing a process of shifting from the first normal gaming state to the second normal gaming state in the MPU 602 of the main control device 162) and
When shifting from the first normal gaming state to the second normal gaming state by the first transition means, the reference number of times (time reduction number) is set by the reference number setting means (MPU 602 of the main control device 162). Function to set) and
When the number of games executed in the second normal game state without obtaining a determination result corresponding to the predetermined determination information reaches the reference number, the switching control mode is changed from the second switching mode to the second. By maintaining the determination mode in the high probability constant mode while switching to the 1 switching mode, the second normal gaming state is shifted to the first switching mode and the third normal gaming state corresponding to the high probability mode. 2 It is provided with a transition means (a function of executing a process of shifting from the second normal gaming state to the third normal gaming state by the MPU 602 of the main control device 162).
A gaming machine characterized in that the second normal gaming state is configured to be more advantageous to the player than the first normal gaming state and more disadvantageous to the player than the third normal gaming state.

According to the feature C8, when the number of games reaches the reference number in the second normal game state corresponding to the high probability mode and the high frequency support mode without a winning result, the high probability mode is triggered by reaching the reference number. Moreover, it shifts to the third normal gaming state corresponding to the low frequency support mode. The third normal game state is configured to be more advantageous to the player than the second normal game state. In other words, if the benefit is not obtained despite the high probability mode (gaming state on the advantageous side), it is possible to advance the game even more advantageously by upgrading to the third normal gaming state. Become. By relieving the player with such a configuration, it is possible to suppress a decrease in the motivation for playing.

The third normal gaming state shown in this feature corresponds to the first switching mode and the high probability mode, and is differentiated from the second normal gaming state by the difference in the combination of the switching control mode and the determination mode. There is. With such a configuration, it is possible to diversify the game while suppressing the configuration related to the game from becoming excessively complicated, and it is possible to preferably improve the degree of attention to the game.

The technical ideas shown in the features C1 to C8 may be applied to the features A to B.

<Feature D group>
The following feature D group is described in that "a game machine such as a pachinko machine has a game board in which a game area is formed and a game ball launching means for launching a game ball into the game area based on a launch operation by the player. Some of them are provided. When a game ball launched from a game ball launching means enters a ball entry portion provided in the game area, a privilege such as paying out a predetermined number of game balls is given to the player. Regarding the background technology of "(for example, see Patent Document 1)", there is an invention that "in the above-mentioned type of gaming machine, there is still room for improvement in its configuration in order to increase the degree of attention to the game." It was made with the problem to be solved.

Feature D1. A game board (game board 60) in which a game area (game area PE) is formed, and
Information in the special information acquisition means (MPU 602 of the main control device 162) for acquiring special information (holding information) when a ball enters the starting ball entry unit (for example, the right operating port 63a) provided in the game area. Function to execute acquisition process) and
An acquisition information storage means (RAM 604 holding ball storage area 632) capable of storing a plurality of special information acquired by the special information acquisition means, and
The lottery process is executed by the determination means (MPU 602 of the main control device 162) that sequentially determines whether or not the special information stored in the acquired information storage means corresponds to the predetermined determination information (for example, winning information). Function) and
A pattern display means (for example, a main display unit 81) having a display unit (for example, a display unit DR for an operating port) and capable of variably displaying a design on the display unit,
A stop result corresponding to the result of the determination by starting the variable display of the pattern in the pattern display means prior to the determination by the determination means or based on the determination made by the determination means. Is displayed and the variable display of the pattern is terminated as one game time, so that the pattern of each game time is variablely displayed according to the special information stored in the acquired information storage means. A game time control means for controlling the pattern display means (for example, a function of executing the game time control process by the MPU 602 of the main control device 162) and
The determination result by the determination means becomes the determination result corresponding to the predetermined determination information, and the game state is changed from the normal game state to the player based on the fact that the pattern corresponding to the determination result is stopped and displayed by the game turn control means. It is provided with a special game state transition means (a function of executing a game state transition process in the MPU 602 of the main control device 162) to shift to a special game state (for example, open / close execution mode) which is advantageous to the player.
The starting ball entry unit can be switched between a receiving state in which a game ball flowing down the game area can enter and a non-accepting state in which it is more difficult to enter the ball than the receiving state.
It is provided with a switching control means (a function of executing an electric service support process in the MPU 602 of the main control device 162) for controlling the switching means.
As the switching control mode by the switching control means, there are a first switching mode (low frequency support mode) and a second switching mode (high frequency support mode) in which the non-accepting state is shorter than the first switching mode. It is provided,
As the normal game state, a first-class normal game state corresponding to the first switching mode and a second-class normal game state corresponding to the second switching mode are provided.
When shifting to the type 2 normal game state, the reference number of times (time reduction number) is set as the number of games in which the type 2 normal game state is continued, and the time reduction is performed by the MPU 602 of the main control device 162. Function to set the number of times) and
The first transition means (MPU 602 of the main control device 162 to shift to the third normal gaming state) capable of shifting from the second type normal gaming state to a gaming state that is more advantageous to the player than the second type normal gaming state. Function to execute the migration process) and
The second transition means (MPU 602 of the main control device 162 can shift to the first normal gaming state) capable of transitioning from the second type normal gaming state to a gaming state that is more disadvantageous to the player than the second type normal gaming state. With a function to execute the migration process of
When the number of games executed in the second type normal gaming state reaches the reference number, the gaming state is shifted by either the first transition means or the second transition means. A featured game machine.

In the second type normal game state, the ball can easily enter the starting ball entry portion, and the game proceeds smoothly. When the number of games executed in this type 2 normal game state reaches the reference number, the game shifts to a game state that is more favorable to the player or a game state that is disadvantageous to the player than the second type normal game state. It will be. By diversifying the game in this way, it is possible to suppress the monotony of the game and contribute to increasing the degree of attention to the game.

Feature D2. A game board (game board 60) in which a game area (game area PE) is formed, and
Information in the special information acquisition means (MPU 602 of the main control device 162) for acquiring special information (holding information) when a ball enters the starting ball entry unit (for example, the right operating port 63a) provided in the game area. Function to execute acquisition process) and
An acquisition information storage means (RAM 604 holding ball storage area 632) capable of storing a plurality of special information acquired by the special information acquisition means, and
The lottery process is executed by the determination means (MPU 602 of the main control device 162) that sequentially determines whether or not the special information stored in the acquired information storage means corresponds to the predetermined determination information (for example, winning information). Function) and
A pattern display means (for example, a main display unit 81) having a display unit (for example, a display unit DR for an operating port) and capable of variably displaying a design on the display unit,
A stop result corresponding to the result of the determination by starting the variable display of the pattern in the pattern display means prior to the determination by the determination means or based on the determination made by the determination means. Is displayed and the variable display of the pattern is terminated as one game time, so that the pattern of each game time is variablely displayed according to the special information stored in the acquired information storage means. A game time control means for controlling the pattern display means (for example, a function of executing the game time control process by the MPU 602 of the main control device 162) and
The determination result by the determination means becomes the determination result corresponding to the predetermined determination information, and the game state is changed from the normal game state to the player based on the fact that the pattern corresponding to the determination result is stopped and displayed by the game turn control means. It is provided with a special game state transition means (a function of executing a game state transition process in the MPU 602 of the main control device 162) to shift to a special game state (for example, open / close execution mode) which is advantageous to the player.
As the normal game state, a first normal game state (a normal game state corresponding to a low probability mode and a low frequency support mode) and a second normal game state (high probability mode) which is more advantageous to the player than the first normal game state. A normal game state corresponding to the high-frequency support mode), a third normal game state (a normal game state corresponding to the high-probability mode and a low-frequency support mode) that is more advantageous to the player than the second normal game state, and the first. 1 A fourth normal game state (a fourth normal game state corresponding to a low probability mode and a high frequency support mode) is provided, which is more advantageous to the player than the normal game state.
When shifting to the second normal gaming state, the first setting means (MPU 602 of the main control device 162 sets the reference number of times (time reduction number) as the number of games in which the second normal gaming state is continued is the second normal. Function to set the number of time reductions according to the transition to the game state),
When the number of games executed in the second normal game state reaches the reference number, the first transition means (MPU 602 of the main control device 162 shifts to the third normal game state). Function to execute the migration process) and
When shifting to the fourth normal gaming state, the second setting means (MPU 602 of the main control device 162 sets the reference number as the number of games in which the fourth normal gaming state is continued to the fourth normal gaming state. Function to set the number of time reductions according to the transition of
When the number of games executed in the fourth normal game state reaches the reference number, the second transition means (MPU 602 of the main control device 162 shifts to the first normal game state). A game machine characterized in that it has a function to execute the migration process of.

When the number of games executed in the second normal game state reaches the reference number, the game shifts (promotes) to the third normal game state, which is more advantageous to the player than the second normal game state. On the other hand, when the number of games executed in the fourth normal game state reaches the reference number, the game shifts (demotions) to the first normal game state. In the second normal game state, the game is played while expecting to reach the reference number of times, and in the fourth normal game state, the game is played while expecting to avoid reaching the reference number of times. In this way, even if the same reference number of times is set, the game state after reaching the reference number of times is divided into the advantageous side and the disadvantageous side depending on the game state, so that the monotonization of the game is suppressed and the degree of attention to the game Can contribute to improvement.

In addition, the configuration shown in this feature is defined as "a game board in which a game area is formed, and a special information acquisition means for acquiring special information when a ball enters the starting ball entry portion provided in the game area." , The acquisition information storage means capable of storing a plurality of special information acquired by the special information acquisition means, and determination of whether or not the special information stored in the acquisition information storage means corresponds to the predetermined determination information. Judgment means to be sequentially performed, a pattern display means having a display unit and capable of variably displaying a pattern on the display unit, and the determination before the determination is performed by the determination means or by the determination means. The variable display of the pattern is started by the pattern display means based on the fact that the pattern is displayed, the stop result corresponding to the result of the determination is displayed, and the variable display of the pattern is terminated as one of the game times. The game time control means that controls the pattern display means so that the picture of each game time is variably displayed according to the special information stored in the acquired information storage means, and the determination result by the determination means are predetermined determinations. The determination result corresponds to the information, and the gaming state is shifted to the special gaming state which is more advantageous to the player than the normal gaming state based on the stop display of the pattern corresponding to the determination result by the game turn control means. The game state transitioning means is provided, and as the normal game state, the first normal game state, the second normal game state which is more advantageous to the player than the first normal game state, and the second normal game state are further provided. A third normal game state, which is advantageous to the player, is provided, and means for switching the game state to the first normal game state, the second normal game state, and the third normal game state according to the game situation. It is also possible to say, "A game machine characterized by having."

Feature D3. The starting ball entry unit can be switched between a receiving state in which a game ball flowing down the game area can enter and a non-accepting state in which it is more difficult to enter the ball than the receiving state.
It is provided with a switching control means (a function of executing an electric service support process in the MPU 602 of the main control device 162) for switching the start-in ball portion between the accepted state and the non-accepted state.
As the switching control mode by the switching control means, there are a first switching mode (low frequency support mode) and a second switching mode (high frequency support mode) in which the non-accepting state is shorter than the first switching mode. It is provided,
The first normal game state and the third normal game state are game states in which the switching control mode becomes the first switching mode.
The second normal game state and the fourth normal game state are game states in which the switching control mode becomes the second switching mode.
The first setting means has a configuration in which the reference number of times is set as a game number in which the second switching mode is continued in the second normal game state.
The gaming machine according to feature D2, wherein the second setting means has a configuration in which the reference number of times is set as a gaming number in which the second switching mode is continued in the fourth normal gaming state. ..

As shown in feature D2, in a configuration in which the gaming state can be changed to the advantageous side / disadvantage side by reaching the reference number of times, the player's attention tends to be directed to the remaining number of times until the reference number of times is reached. If the number of balls held is greatly reduced under the situation where the attention to the game is increasing in this way, it is assumed that the motivation for the game is likely to decrease due to the increasing attention to the game. To. Therefore, as shown in this feature, in the second normal game state and the fourth normal game state, the switching control mode is set to the second switching mode, and the occurrence of such inconvenience can be suppressed by suppressing the decrease in the number of balls held.

Further, in a configuration in which the game state changes when the reference number of times is reached, it is feared that the delay in the game progress in the process reduces the impact and hinders the effect of improving the degree of attention to the game. In this respect, as shown in this feature, the progress of the game until the reference number of times is reached is facilitated, and such concerns can be preferably dispelled.

Feature D4. The game rotation control means is configured such that the variable display period of the pattern in the second normal game state and the fourth normal game state is shorter than the variable display period of the pattern in the first normal game state. The gaming machine according to feature D3, characterized in that it is present.

As shown in the feature D3, if the game can be performed while suppressing the decrease of the number of balls held in the second normal game state and the fourth normal game state, it becomes easy for the player to pay the main attention to the presence or absence of reaching the reference number of times. In such a situation, if the variable display period of the pattern is shortened, it is preferable that the player is excessively tired in the process of reaching the reference number of times due to the extended game times and continued tension. Can be suppressed. This is a preferable configuration in order to set a certain number of reference times to exert the attention-improving effect shown in the feature D2 and the like.

Feature D5. The determination means has a probability of obtaining a determination result corresponding to the predetermined determination information when the determination is made in the second normal gaming state, and the predetermined determination when the determination is made in the fourth normal gaming state. The gaming machine according to any one of the feature D2 to the feature D4, characterized in that the probability of a determination result corresponding to the determination information of the above is different.

According to the feature D5, the same reference number of times is used in the case of shifting to the third normal gaming state via the second normal gaming state and the case of shifting to the first normal gaming state via the fourth normal gaming state. Even if is set, there will be a difference in the probability of reaching the reference number of times. As a result, the effect of suppressing the monotony of the game can be more preferably exhibited.

Feature D6. The determination means has a probability that a determination result corresponding to the predetermined determination information will be obtained when the determination is made in the second normal gaming state, and the determination means when the determination is made in the fourth normal gaming state. The gaming machine according to any one of the feature D2 to the feature D5, which is configured to have a probability higher than the probability of a determination result corresponding to the determination information of.

According to the feature D6, the same reference number of times is used in the case of shifting to the third normal gaming state via the second normal gaming state and the case of shifting to the first normal gaming state via the fourth normal gaming state. Even if is set, there will be a difference in the probability of reaching the reference number of times. As a result, the effect of suppressing the monotony of the game can be more preferably exhibited.

In particular, when shifting from the second normal game state to the third normal game state which is the advantageous side, the possibility of reaching the reference number of times is relatively low, and the first normal game which is the disadvantage side from the fourth normal game state is relatively low. When shifting to the state, the possibility of reaching the reference number of times is relatively high. With such a configuration, even if it is assumed that the same reference number of times is reached, the hurdle for transition to the third normal gaming state can be relatively high, and the transition to the third normal gaming state can be made. Expectations can be aroused favorably.

Feature D7. In the case of the second normal gaming state and the fourth normal gaming state, it is configured so that the player cannot easily identify which of the second normal game state and the fourth normal game state is. The gaming machine according to any one of the feature D2 to the feature D6, which is characterized by being

According to the feature D7, by making it unclear (difficult to specify) which of the second and fourth normal game states is, the game states that shift after reaching the reference number of times are the first normal game state and the third normal game state. A game that guesses which of the game states it is is added. By making it unclear whether to shift to the advantageous side or the disadvantageous side until the reference number of times is reached, that is, whether to promote or demote, it is possible to contribute to further improvement of the degree of attention when the reference number of times is reached.

Feature D8. When the second normal game state is set, means for executing a predetermined effect corresponding to the second normal game state over a plurality of game times executed in the second normal game state, and
The gaming machine according to any one of features D2 to D7, which comprises means for executing the predetermined effect when the fourth normal gaming state is set.

As shown in feature D8, the same display effect (predetermined effect) is executed in the second normal game state and the fourth normal game state, and which normal game state is unspecified (difficult to specify). As a result, a game for estimating whether the gaming state to be shifted after reaching the reference number of times is the first normal gaming state or the third normal gaming state is added. By making it unclear whether to shift to the advantageous side or the disadvantageous side until the reference number of times is reached, that is, whether to promote or demote, it is possible to contribute to further improvement of the degree of attention when the reference number of times is reached.

Feature D9. The predetermined determination information includes the first determination information (information corresponding to the probability variation jackpot result) and the second determination information (information corresponding to the normal jackpot result).
When the determination result by the determination means becomes the determination result corresponding to the first determination information in the first normal gaming state, the first normal gaming state is changed to the second normal gaming state through the special gaming state. Means to migrate and
When the determination result by the determination means becomes the determination result corresponding to the second determination information in the first normal gaming state, the first normal gaming state is changed to the fourth normal gaming state through the special gaming state. The gaming machine according to feature D7 or feature D8, which comprises means for transition.

When the determination result corresponding to the predetermined determination information is obtained in the first normal gaming state, the state shifts to the second normal gaming state or the fourth normal gaming state. By sharing the transition pattern from the first normal game state to the second normal game state and the fourth normal game state in this way, any game before the transition to the second normal game state and the fourth normal game state It can be difficult to tell if it is in a state. As a result, the effect of improving the degree of attention shown in the feature D7 or the like can be suitably exhibited.

Feature D10. A variable ball entry unit that can switch between a receiving state in which a game ball flowing down the game area can enter and a non-accepting state in which it is more difficult to enter than the receiving state.
A ball entry control means for switching the variable entry section to the acceptance state when the special gaming state is provided.
The ball entry control means shifts to the special gaming state when the determination result corresponding to the first determination information is obtained, and the special game to which the special game state shifts when the determination result corresponds to the second determination information. The gaming machine according to feature D9, wherein the state is configured so that the switching mode of the variable ball entry portion is common.

As shown in the feature D10, by making the behavior of the variable ball entry portion common between the case of shifting to the second normal gaming state and the case of shifting to the fourth normal gaming state, the behavior of the variable ball entry section is changed to the second. It is possible to avoid revealing whether to shift to the normal gaming state or the fourth normal gaming state. As a result, the effect shown in feature D9 can be suitably exhibited.

Feature D11. A suggestion means for suggesting the remaining number of times until the reference number of times is reached is provided.
As a suggestion mode by the suggestion means, a first suggestion mode in which the remaining number of times is specified and a second suggestion mode in which the remaining number of times is not specified are provided.
The gaming machine according to any one of the feature D7 to the feature D10, wherein the suggestion means is switchable between the first suggestion mode and the second suggestion mode.

As shown in Feature D7, etc., in the configuration where the number of times is divided into the advantageous side and the disadvantage side by reaching the reference number of times, by switching the remaining number of times until the reference number of times is reached to explicit / unclear, the game can be started in the process of reaching the reference number of times. It is possible to preferably improve the degree of attention of.

The technical ideas shown in the features D1 to D11 may be applied to the features A to C.

<Feature E group>
The following feature E group is described in that "a game machine such as a pachinko machine has a game board in which a game area is formed and a game ball launching means for launching a game ball into the game area based on a launch operation by a player. Some of them are provided. When a game ball launched from a game ball launching means enters a ball entry portion provided in the game area, a privilege such as paying out a predetermined number of game balls is given to the player. Regarding the background technology of "(for example, see Patent Document 1)", there is an invention that "in the above-mentioned type of gaming machine, there is still room for improvement in its configuration in order to increase the degree of attention to the game." It was made with the problem to be solved.

Feature E1. A game board (game board 60) in which a game area (game area PE) is formed, and
A first ball entry section (lower variable winning portion) provided in the game area and capable of switching between an acceptance state in which a game ball flowing down the game area can enter and a non-acceptance state in which it is more difficult to enter than the acceptance state. Device 65) and
A receiving state and a receiving state in which a game ball that is arranged on a predetermined flow path (right route) toward the first ball entry portion in the game area and flows down along the predetermined flow path can enter the ball. A second ball entry section (right side actuating entry section 63) that can be switched to a non-accepting state, which is more difficult to enter.
A predetermined information acquisition means (to the MPU 602 of the main control device 162) that acquires predetermined information (value of the open random number counter C4) when the game ball passes through a predetermined passing portion (through gate 66) arranged in the game area. (Function to acquire the value of the open random number counter C4)
Information storage means (storage area 633 for electric service in RAM 604 of the main control device 162) for storing predetermined information acquired by the predetermined information acquisition means, and
A function of executing a support lottery by the MPU 602 of the main control device 162, which draws a lottery as to whether or not to switch the second ball entry unit to the receiving state based on the predetermined information stored in the information storage means. )When,
A variable display means (main display unit 81) having a display unit (display unit DS for through gate) and capable of variably displaying a pattern on the display unit, and
A display control means that starts variable display of a pattern on the display unit prior to the lottery by the lottery means or based on the lottery performed by the lottery means, and confirms and displays the pattern corresponding to the lottery result by the lottery means. (A function to execute a pattern display process on the MPU 602 of the main control device 162)
A function of switching control means (MPU 602 of the main control device 162 to execute a large winning opening opening / closing process) for switching the second ball entry unit to the acceptance state when a pattern corresponding to the winning result is confirmed and displayed on the display unit. ) And
As the switching control mode by the switching control means, a first switching mode (low frequency support mode) and a second switching mode (high frequency support mode) in which ball entry is more likely to occur than the first switching mode are provided. Ori
The display control means has a variable display period and a definite display period of the pattern in the second switching mode rather than a first specific period which is the sum of the variable display period and the definite display period of the pattern in the first switching mode. It is configured so that the second specific period, which is the sum of, is shorter.
The entry into the first entry section is configured to be more advantageous to the player than the entry into the second entry section.
The second ball entry portion has an opening (operating port 63a) through which a plurality of game balls can pass simultaneously and a shutter (shutter 331) for opening and closing the opening, and the shutter is arranged at a closed position. It is configured to be in the non-accepted state and to be in the accepted state when the shutter is arranged in the open position.
When the second ball entry portion is in the non-accepting state, a part of the rolling surface of the game ball in the predetermined flow path is formed by the shutter.
The required period required for the game ball flowing down the predetermined flow path to pass over the shutter is configured to be longer than the second specific period and shorter than the first specific period. A featured game machine.

According to the feature E1, the time required for the game ball flowing down the predetermined flow path to pass on the shutter is the sum of the variable display period and the final display period of the pattern in the second switching mode (second specific period). Is longer than. Therefore, during the second switching mode, most of the game balls that have reached the second ball entry section will enter the second ball entry section. That is, the game ball launched into the predetermined flow path during the second switching mode flows into the second ball entry section, and the ball entry into the first ball entry section is suppressed. On the other hand, the required period is shorter than the sum of the variable display period and the final display period of the pattern in the first switching mode (first specific period). Therefore, during the first switching mode, even if the second ball entry unit continuously switches to the receiving state, a part of the game ball that has reached the shutter passes through the second ball entry unit and the first ball entry unit. Head to the club. In this way, while the relatively advantageous entry into the first ball entry section occurs during the first switching mode, the entry into the first ball entry section is suppressed during the second switching mode. Therefore, a clear difference can be made in the progress of the game.

Here, in order to reduce the number of game balls (spills) that pass through the second entry section and head toward the first entry section during the second switching mode in order to differentiate each switching mode, a specific period can be shortened. Good. However, if the specific period is simply shortened, it becomes difficult to fire / stop according to the result displayed on the display unit (progress the game in the player's favor), and the display becomes difficult. The significance of having a department is diminished. In this respect, according to the configuration shown in this feature, it is possible to suppress the variable display period and the definite display period of the pattern from becoming extremely short while suppressing the above-mentioned spill. As a result, it is possible to suitably improve the degree of attention to the game.

Feature E2. The switching control means has a configuration in which the second ball entry unit is switched to the acceptance state based on the lottery result by the lottery means regardless of whether or not the first ball entry unit is in the acceptance state. The gaming machine according to feature E1, characterized in that it is present.

As shown in feature E2, in a configuration in which the first ball entry unit may or may not be in the accepting state depending on the lottery result, the player's attention tends to be directed to the display of the lottery result. It is technically significant to apply the technical idea shown in feature E1 to such a configuration to prevent the specific period from becoming extremely short.

Feature E3. A first predetermined number (for example, 10) of game balls are paid out based on the entry into the first entry section, and the number is less than the first predetermined number based on the entry into the second entry section. 2 Provided with a payout means (payout device 222) for paying out a predetermined number (for example, one) of game balls.
Due to the difference in the number of game balls paid out by the payout means, the entry into the first entry section is more advantageous to the player than the entry into the second entry section. The gaming machine according to feature E1 or feature E2.

As shown in feature E3, in a configuration in which entry into the first entry section is given preferential treatment over entry into the second entry section, the player expects entry into the first entry section. It is assumed that the game will be performed. With such a configuration, excessive entry into the first entry portion is not preferable because it causes an imbalance in the game. In this respect, according to the combination with the feature E1, it is possible to avoid the movement of the game ball toward the first ball entry part while shortening the period in which the second ball entry part is in the receiving state as much as possible. The occurrence of inconvenience can be suitably suppressed. Then, shortening the period of acceptance is advantageous in promoting the expectation of the player so that the game ball flows down toward the first entry section, and the period of acceptance becomes longer. It is possible to preferably suppress that the expectation of entering the ball into the first entry portion is reduced.

Feature E4. The passage length of the connecting passage portion connecting the first ball entry portion and the second ball entry portion in the predetermined flow path is a passage portion formed by the shutter of the second ball entry portion in the predetermined flow path. The gaming machine according to any one of the features E1 to E3, which is shorter than the passage length of the above.

As shown in feature E4, by making the passage length of the connecting passage portion shorter than the passage length related to the second entry portion, the second entry portion is opened under the condition that the first entry portion is open. It becomes easier to give the player the impression that the game ball that has reached the first ball can enter the first ball entry section as long as it passes through the second ball entry section, and the shutter of the second ball entry section or the first ball entry section. It can contribute to improving the degree of attention to the behavior of the game ball that has reached the entry portion.

Feature E5. The first ball entry portion has an opening (large winning opening) through which a plurality of game balls can pass simultaneously and a shutter (shutter) for opening and closing the opening, and the shutter is arranged at a closed position. It is configured to be in the non-accepted state and to be in the accepted state when the shutter is arranged in the open position.
When the first ball entry portion is in the non-accepting state, a part of the rolling surface of the game ball in the predetermined flow path is formed by the shutter of the first ball entry portion.
The passage length of the connecting passage portion connecting the first ball entry portion and the second ball entry portion in the predetermined flow path is a passage portion formed by the shutter of the first ball entry portion in the predetermined flow path. 1 of the feature E1 to the feature E4, which is shorter than any of the passage length of the passage portion and the passage length of the passage portion formed by the shutter of the second ball entry portion in the predetermined flow path. The game machine described in one.

Since most of the game balls flowing down the predetermined flow path can enter either the first entry portion or the second entry portion, one large size can be obtained by combining the first entry portion and the second entry portion. You can make it look like the ball entry section is built. It is advantageous to improve the satisfaction of the player by making it appear as if the large ball entry section secures the entry opportunity of the game ball. Here, by making the passage length of the connecting passage portion shorter than the passage length of the passage portion formed by each shutter, it is possible to enhance the sense of unity between the two ball entry portions. Thereby, the above impression can be strengthened.

Further, by making the passage length of the connecting passage portion shorter than the passage length related to the second entry portion, the game ball that has reached the second entry portion in a situation where the first entry portion is open. However, it becomes easier to give the player the impression that the ball can enter the first ball entry section as soon as the second ball entry section can pass through, and the shutter of the second ball entry section or the game ball that reaches the first ball entry section. It can contribute to the improvement of attention to the behavior of.

Feature E6. The first ball entry portion has an opening (large winning opening) through which a plurality of game balls can pass simultaneously and a shutter (shutter) for opening and closing the opening, and the shutter is arranged at a closed position. It is configured to be in the non-accepted state and to be in the accepted state when the shutter is arranged in the open position.
When the first ball entry portion is in the non-accepting state, a part of the rolling surface of the game ball in the predetermined flow path is formed by the shutter of the first ball entry portion.
The feature E4 or feature E5 is characterized in that the shutter of the first ball entry portion and the shutter of the second ball entry portion extend in a predetermined direction, and the connecting passage portion extends in a direction intersecting the predetermined direction. The game machine described.

As described above, if most of the game balls flowing down the predetermined flow path can enter either the first entry portion or the second entry portion, the first entry portion and the second entry portion are provided. By combining the parts, one large ball entry part can be constructed. It is advantageous to improve the satisfaction of the player by making it appear as if the large ball entry section secures the entry opportunity of the game ball.

In this type of large ball entry section, when the main entry destination is switched between the first entry section and the second entry section depending on the situation, the entry into the first entry section should not occur. There is a high possibility that the game hall will suffer a disadvantage due to the occurrence of a ball entering the first ball entry section. When such circumstances are taken into consideration, a connecting passage is provided between the first ball entry section and the second ball entry section to delay or thin the movement of the game ball toward the first ball entry section. Has technical significance. If the connecting passage is lengthened to some extent, those functions can be exerted favorably, but on the other hand, there is a concern that the sense of unity between the two ball-entry parts will be reduced and the impression that the ball-entry part is one large-sized ball-entry part will be weakened. To. In this regard, as shown in this feature, the positions of the ball entry portions are shifted (for example, offset vertically) so that the shutters of both ball entry portions extend in a predetermined direction and the connecting passage portion extends in a direction intersecting the predetermined direction. By adopting the configuration, it is possible to reduce the decrease in the sense of unity between the two ball-entry portions while increasing the passage length of the connecting passage.

Feature E7. An outlet (out port 68) through which a game ball is discharged from the game area is formed in the most downstream portion of the game area.
A branch passage portion is formed at an intermediate position of the connecting passage portion, and the game ball that has flowed into the branch passage portion is discharged from the game area without reaching the discharge port. The gaming machine according to feature E6, characterized in that.

The game ball that has flowed into the branch passage portion provided at the intermediate position of the connecting passage portion is discharged from the game area as it is, and the arrival at the first entry portion is avoided. In this way, a part of the game ball that has passed through the second entry section is discharged from the game area without flowing into the first entry section, so that the game ball that has flowed into the branch passage portion is described above. Compared with the configuration toward the discharge port, the impression that it is the large ball entry portion of 1 described above can be strengthened.

Feature E8. A deceleration portion (protruding portions 335a, 336a) for decelerating the game ball is provided in a portion of the predetermined flow path in which the passage portion is formed by the shutter of the second ball entry portion.
The gaming machine according to any one of features E4 to E7, wherein the deceleration section is arranged at a position closer to the connecting passage section.

In a configuration in which the first ball entry section is given preferential treatment to the player over the second ball entry section, the game ball passes through the second ball entry section and heads for the first ball entry section. It is assumed that the launch operation will be executed in anticipation of the above, and the player's attention will be more likely to be directed to the movement of the game ball from the second entry section to the connecting passage section. Here, in the configuration in which the deceleration portion is provided in the passage portion formed by the shutter to extend the passage required period, the deceleration portion is arranged so as to be biased toward the connecting passage portion, thereby attracting the attention of the player. It is possible to easily follow the movement of the game ball in a place where it is easy to face. This can contribute to further improvement in attention.

Feature E9. The first ball entry section is configured to switch to the acceptance state based on the ball entry into the second ball entry section.
During the period when the second ball entry portion is in the receiving state in the first switching mode, the game ball passes through a portion of the predetermined flow path where the passage portion is formed by the shutter of the second ball entry portion. Described in any one of the features E1 to E8, characterized in that the first ball entry portion is configured to be shorter than the required period required for the movement and shorter than the period in which the first ball entry portion is in the receiving state. Aisle machine.

As shown in this feature, the period during which the second entry portion is in the receiving state in the first switching mode is the period in which the passage portion is formed by the shutter of the second entry portion in the predetermined flow path. Even if it is shorter than the time required for the ball to pass through, the game ball located on the shutter will enter the first ball entry section when the first ball entry section is switched to the receiving state. .. Therefore, it is possible to secure the entry into the second entry section while increasing the number of game balls moving to the first entry section by shortening the period of the acceptance state.

Further, since the period during which the second ball entry section is in the receiving state in the first switching mode is set to be shorter than the period during which the first ball entry section is in the acceptance state, the first ball entry section is entered. It becomes easier to grasp from the behavior of these two ball entry sections that the situation is likely to cause ball entry, and it is possible to make it easier for the player to pay attention to the ball entry into the first ball entry section.

Feature E10. A game board (game board 60) in which a game area (game area PE) is formed, and
Information in the first acquisition means (MPU 602 of the main control device 162) for acquiring special information (holding information) when a ball enters the starting ball entry unit (for example, the right operating port 63a) provided in the game area. Function to execute acquisition process) and
A first storage means (holding ball storage area 632 of RAM 604) capable of storing a plurality of special information acquired by the first acquisition means, and
The lottery process is performed by the first determination means (MPU 602 of the main control device 162) that sequentially determines whether or not the special information stored in the first storage means corresponds to the predetermined determination information (for example, winning information). Function to execute) and
The first display unit that can variably display the pattern (for example, the display unit DR for the operating port),
The variable display of the pattern is started in the first display unit prior to the determination by the first determination means or based on the determination by the first determination means, and the result of the determination. The stop result corresponding to the above is displayed and the variable display of the pattern is terminated as one game, and the variable display of the pattern of each game is performed according to the special information stored in the acquired information storage means. A first display control means (for example, a function of executing a game rotation control process in the MPU 602 of the main control device 162) that controls the display of the first display unit so as to be performed.
A special ball-entry unit (lower variable winning device) provided in the game area and capable of switching between a receiving state in which a game ball flowing down the game area can enter and a non-accepting state in which it is more difficult to enter than the accepted state. 65) and
Based on the fact that the determination result by the first determination means becomes the determination result corresponding to the predetermined determination information and the pattern corresponding to the determination result is stopped and displayed by the first display control means, the special ball entry portion is described. It is equipped with a first switching control means (a function of executing opening / closing processing of the lower variable winning device 65 by the MPU 602 of the main control device 162) for switching to the acceptance state.
The starting ball entry portion is arranged on a predetermined flow path (right route) toward the special ball entry section, and from the acceptance state in which the game ball flowing down the predetermined flow path can enter and the acceptance state. It is possible to switch to the non-acceptance state where it is difficult to enter the ball.
A second acquisition means (in the MPU 602 of the main control device 162) that acquires predetermined information (value of the open random number counter C4) when the game ball passes through a predetermined passing portion (through gate 66) provided in the game area. Function to acquire the value of the open random number counter C4) and
A second storage means (storage area 633 for electric service in the RAM 604 of the main control device 162) for storing predetermined information acquired by the second acquisition means, and
A support lottery is executed by the second determination means (MPU 602 of the main control device 162) that determines whether or not to switch the starting ball entry portion to the acceptance state based on the predetermined information stored in the second storage means. Function to do) and
The second display unit (display unit DS for through gate) that can variably display the pattern, and
The variable display of the pattern in the second display unit is started prior to the determination by the second determination means or based on the determination by the second determination means, and corresponds to the determination result by the second determination means. A second display control means (a function of executing a pattern display process by the MPU 602 of the main control device 162) for confirming the displayed pattern, and
When the pattern corresponding to the winning result is confirmed and displayed on the second display unit, the second switching control means (MPU 602 of the main control device 162 performs the large winning opening opening / closing process) for switching the starting ball entry unit to the acceptance state. With (function to execute)
As the switching control mode by the second switching control means, the first switching mode (low frequency support mode) and the second switching mode in which the start-in ball portion is in the non-accepting state for a shorter period than the first switching mode. (High frequency support mode) is provided,
The second display control means has the second switching mode rather than the first specific period, which is the sum of the variable display period and the definite display period of the pattern in the second display unit when the first switching mode is set. In the case of, the second specific period, which is the sum of the variable display period and the final display period of the pattern in the second display unit, is configured to be shorter.
A first predetermined number (for example, one) of game balls is paid out based on the entry into the starting ball entry section, and a second predetermined number is larger than the first predetermined number based on the entry into the special entry section. A payout means (payout device 222) for paying out a number (for example, 10) of game balls is provided.
The starting ball entry portion has an opening (right operating port 63a) through which a plurality of game balls can pass simultaneously and a shutter (shutter 331) for opening and closing the opening, and the shutter is arranged at a closed position. It is configured to be in the non-accepted state and to be in the accepted state when the shutter is arranged in the open position.
When the starting ball entry portion is in the non-accepting state, a part of the rolling surface of the game ball in the predetermined flow path is formed by the shutter.
The required period required for the game ball flowing down the predetermined flow path to pass over the shutter is configured to be longer than the second specific period and shorter than the first specific period. A featured game machine.

According to the feature E10, the time required for the game ball flowing down the predetermined flow path to pass on the shutter is the sum of the variable display period and the final display period of the pattern in the second switching mode (second specific period). Is longer than. Therefore, during the second switching mode, most of the game balls that have reached the second ball entry section will enter the second ball entry section. That is, the game ball launched into the predetermined flow path during the second switching mode flows into the second ball entry section, and the ball entry into the first ball entry section is suppressed. On the other hand, the required period is shorter than the sum of the variable display period and the final display period of the pattern in the first switching mode (first specific period). Therefore, during the first switching mode, even if the second ball entry unit continuously switches to the receiving state, a part of the game ball that has reached the shutter passes through the second ball entry unit and the first ball entry unit. Head to the club. In this way, while the relatively advantageous entry into the first ball entry section occurs during the first switching mode, the entry into the first ball entry section is suppressed during the second switching mode. Therefore, a clear difference can be made in the progress of the game.

Here, in order to reduce the number of game balls (spills) that pass through the second entry section and head toward the first entry section during the second switching mode in order to differentiate each switching mode, a specific period can be shortened. Good. However, if the specific period is simply shortened, it becomes difficult to launch / stop according to the result displayed on the display unit (advance the game advantageously), and the significance of providing the display unit diminishes. I will end up. In this respect, according to the configuration shown in this feature, it is possible to suppress the variable display period and the definite display period of the pattern from becoming extremely short while suppressing the above-mentioned spill. As a result, it is possible to suitably improve the degree of attention to the game.

It is also possible to apply the technical ideas shown in the above features E2 to E9 to this feature.

Further, the technical ideas shown in the features E1 to E10 may be applied to the above-mentioned features A to D.

<Characteristic F group>
The following feature F group is described in that "a game machine such as a pachinko machine has a game board in which a game area is formed and a game ball launching means for launching a game ball into the game area based on a launch operation by a player. Some of them are provided. When a game ball launched from a game ball launching means enters a ball entry portion provided in the game area, a privilege such as paying out a predetermined number of game balls is given to the player. Regarding the background technology of "(for example, see Patent Document 1)", there is an invention that "in the above-mentioned type of gaming machine, there is still room for improvement in its configuration in order to increase the degree of attention to the game." It was made with the problem to be solved.

Features F1. A game board (game board 60) in which a game area (game area PE) is formed, and
Information in the special information acquisition means (MPU 602 of the main control device 162) for acquiring special information (holding information) when a ball enters the starting ball entry unit (for example, the right operating port 63a) provided in the game area. Function to execute acquisition process) and
An acquisition information storage means (RAM 604 holding ball storage area 632) capable of storing special information acquired by the special information acquisition means, and
The lottery process is executed by the determination means (MPU 602 of the main control device 162) that sequentially determines whether or not the special information stored in the acquired information storage means corresponds to the predetermined determination information (for example, winning information). Function) and
A pattern display means (for example, a main display unit 81) having a display unit (for example, a display unit DR for an operating port) and capable of variably displaying a design on the display unit,
The variable display of the pattern is started in the display unit prior to the determination by the determination means or based on the determination by the determination means, and the stop result corresponding to the result of the determination is obtained. The pattern is displayed and the variable display of the pattern is terminated as one game time, and the pattern is variablely displayed in each game time according to the special information stored in the acquired information storage means. A game time control means for controlling the display means (for example, a function of executing the game time control process by the MPU 602 of the main control device 162) and
The determination result by the determination means becomes the determination result corresponding to the predetermined determination information, and the game state is changed from the normal game state to the player based on the fact that the pattern corresponding to the determination result is stopped and displayed by the game turn control means. It is provided with a special game state transition means (a function of executing a game state transition process in the MPU 602 of the main control device 162) to shift to a special game state (for example, open / close execution mode) which is advantageous to the player.
As the normal game state, a first normal game state (a first normal game state corresponding to a low probability mode and a low frequency support mode) and a second normal game state (high) that is more advantageous to the player than the first normal game state. The second normal game state corresponding to the probability mode and the high frequency support mode) and the third normal game state (the third normal game state corresponding to the high probability mode and the low frequency support mode) which is more advantageous to the player than the second normal game state. (Game state) is provided,
The game turn control means has a variable display period setting means for setting a variable display period of the pattern (a function of setting a variable display time of a pattern on the display unit for the operation port by the MPU 602 of the main control device 162).
The variable display period setting means varies in the period shortening means (MPU 602 of the main control device 162) for shortening the variable display period of the pattern in the third normal game state to be shorter than the variable display period of the pattern in the second normal game state. A gaming machine characterized in having a function of switching the display time table).

According to the feature F1, the advantage of the player is increased by switching the gaming state in the order of the first normal gaming state → the second normal gaming state → the third normal gaming state. Here, when the transition from the second normal game state to the third normal game state is performed, the variable display period of the pattern is shortened, and the progress speed of the game is increased. As a result, the exhilaration of the game when the game is promoted from the first normal game state to the third normal game state through the second normal game state can be suitably improved, and it is possible to contribute to the improvement of the degree of attention to the game.

The first normal game state, the second normal game state, and the third normal game state are in the second normal game state rather than the first normal game state, for example, when compared by increasing or decreasing the number of balls held as the game progresses. It is preferable to provide a difference so that the player is more advantageous to the player, and the third normal game state is more advantageous to the player than the second normal game state.

Feature F2. A game board (game board 60) in which a game area (game area PE) is formed, and
Information in the special information acquisition means (MPU 602 of the main control device 162) for acquiring special information (holding information) when a ball enters the starting ball entry unit (for example, the right operating port 63a) provided in the game area. Function to execute acquisition process) and
An acquisition information storage means (RAM 604 holding ball storage area 632) capable of storing special information acquired by the special information acquisition means, and
The lottery process is executed by the determination means (MPU 602 of the main control device 162) that sequentially determines whether or not the special information stored in the acquired information storage means corresponds to the predetermined determination information (for example, winning information). Function) and
A pattern display means (for example, a main display unit 81) having a display unit (for example, a display unit DR for an operating port) and capable of variably displaying a design on the display unit,
The variable display of the pattern is started in the display unit prior to the determination by the determination means or based on the determination by the determination means, and the stop result corresponding to the result of the determination is obtained. The pattern is displayed and the variable display of the pattern is terminated as one game time, and the pattern is variablely displayed in each game time according to the special information stored in the acquired information storage means. A game time control means for controlling the display means (for example, a function of executing the game time control process by the MPU 602 of the main control device 162) and
The determination result by the determination means becomes the determination result corresponding to the predetermined determination information, and the game state is changed from the normal game state to the player based on the fact that the pattern corresponding to the determination result is stopped and displayed by the game turn control means. It is provided with a special game state transition means (a function of executing a game state transition process in the MPU 602 of the main control device 162) to shift to a special game state (for example, open / close execution mode) which is advantageous to the player.
As the normal game state, a first normal game state (a first normal game state corresponding to a low probability mode and a low frequency support mode) and a second normal game state (high) that is more advantageous to the player than the first normal game state. The second normal game state corresponding to the probability mode and the high frequency support mode) and the third normal game state (the third normal game state corresponding to the high probability mode and the low frequency support mode) which is more advantageous to the player than the second normal game state. (Game state) is provided,
When the determination result by the determination means becomes the determination result corresponding to the predetermined determination information in the first normal gaming state, the first normal gaming state is changed to the second normal gaming state through the special gaming state. The first transfer means to be transferred (a function of executing the process of shifting to the second normal gaming state by the MPU 602 of the main control device 162) and
It is provided with a second transition means (a function of shifting to the third normal game state by the MPU 602 of the main control device 162) for directly shifting from the second normal game state to the third normal game state.
The game turn control means has a variable display period setting means for setting a variable display period of the pattern (a function of setting a variable display time of a pattern on the display unit for the operation port by the MPU 602 of the main control device 162).
The variable display period setting means varies in the period shortening means (MPU 602 of the main control device 162) for shortening the variable display period of the pattern in the third normal game state to be shorter than the variable display period of the pattern in the second normal game state. A gaming machine characterized in having a function of switching the display time table).

According to the feature F2, the advantage of the player is increased by switching the gaming state in the order of the first normal gaming state → the second normal gaming state → the third normal gaming state. Here, when the transition from the second normal game state to the third normal game state is performed, the variable display period of the pattern is shortened, and the progress speed of the game is increased. As a result, the exhilaration of the game when the game is promoted from the first normal game state to the third normal game state through the second normal game state can be suitably improved, and it is possible to contribute to the improvement of the degree of attention to the game.

In particular, although the transition from the first normal gaming state to the second normal gaming state is configured via the special gaming state, the transition from the second normal gaming state to the third normal gaming state is directly transitioned. Therefore, when the progress speed of the game is accelerated at the time of transition from the second normal game state to the third normal game state, the difference can be highlighted. With such a configuration, the change can be easily understood without making the difference between the variable display periods excessively large between the second normal game state and the third normal game state. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the variable display period of the pattern from becoming extremely short by the configuration in which the progress speed of the game is changed, and to secure the opportunity to visually confirm the variable display of the pattern.

The first normal game state, the second normal game state, and the third normal game state are in the second normal game state rather than the first normal game state, for example, when compared by increasing or decreasing the number of balls held as the game progresses. It is preferable to provide a difference so that the player is more advantageous to the player, and the third normal game state is more advantageous to the player than the second normal game state.

Feature F3. When shifting from the first normal gaming state to the second normal gaming state by the first transition means, the reference number of times (time reduction number) is set by the reference number setting means (MPU 602 of the main control device 162). Has a function to set)
The second transition means is configured to shift from the second normal game state to the third normal game state when the number of games executed in the second normal game state reaches the reference number. The gaming machine according to the feature F2, which is characterized by being

As shown in feature F3, if the configuration is such that the state shifts from the second normal gaming state to the third normal gaming state with the passage of the reference number of times, it can be made to appear that the game suddenly accelerates with the passage of the reference number of times. .. With such a configuration, the effect shown in the feature F2 can be suitably exhibited.

Feature F4. A switching means for switching the starting ball into a receiving state (open state) in which the game ball can enter the starting ball and a non-accepting state (closed state) in which the game ball is more difficult to enter than the receiving state. (Electric accessory 71) and
It is provided with a switching control means (a function of executing an electric service support process in the MPU 602 of the main control device 162) for controlling the switching means.
The acquired information storage means can store a plurality of the special information.
The variable display period setting means is configured to set the variable display period so that the variable display period of the pattern on the display unit becomes shorter as the number of special information stored in the acquired information storage means increases. And
The period shortening means has at least a variable display period of the pattern set when the number of special information stored in the acquired information storage means has reached the upper limit in the third normal gaming state. 2 The variable display period is shortened by making it shorter than the variable display period of the pattern set when the number of special information stored in the acquired information storage means reaches the upper limit in the normal game state. The gaming machine according to any one of the feature F1 to the feature F3, which is configured as described above.

As shown in the feature F4, if the starting ball entering portion is configured to be switchable between the accepted state and the non-accepted state, the frequency of entering the game ball can be increased depending on the situation. By combining such a configuration with a configuration in which the variable display period becomes shorter as the number of stored special information increases, it is possible to suitably increase the progress speed of the game. Here, the configuration includes a variable display period when the number of memories reaches the upper limit as a target for shortening the period accompanying the transition from the second normal gaming state, which is advantageous to the player, to the third normal gaming state, which is more advantageous. For example, it is possible to increase the progress speed of the game in a situation where the ball enters the starting ball entry portion frequently. Therefore, it is possible to preferably exert the effect of increasing the progress speed of the game with the transition from the second normal game state to the third normal game state.

Feature F5. The game times control means has a stop display period setting means (a function of setting a fixed display time of a pattern on the operation port display unit in the MPU 602 of the main control device 162) for setting the stop notation period of the pattern.
The stop display period setting means is configured so that the stop display period in the second normal game state and the stop display period in the third normal game state are the same period.
In the period shortening means, the variable display period of the pattern in the second normal gaming state is longer than the stop display period, and the variable display period of the pattern in the third normal game state is shorter than the stop display period. The gaming machine according to any one of the features F1 to F4, which is characterized in that the variable notation period is shortened in this way.

If the stop display period (fixed display period) of the pattern is common in the second normal game state and the third normal game state, and the variable display period of the pattern is different from the stop display period, the pattern can be used. The player of interest will be able to compare the lengths of the variable display periods based on the same criteria (common stop notation period). As a result, it is possible to inform the player in an easy-to-understand manner that the progress speed of the game is increasing.

Feature F6. The period shortening means shortens the variable display period of the pattern in the second normal game state so as to be shorter than the variable display period of the picture in the first normal game state, and the variable display period of the picture in the third normal game state. The gaming machine according to any one of the feature F1 to the feature F5, which is configured to shorten the display period so as to be shorter than the variable display period of the pattern in the second normal gaming state. ..

As shown in the feature F6, the uplifting feeling of the player can be suitably improved by configuring the game so that the progress speed of the game increases as the game state is stepped up to be advantageous to the player. ..

Feature F7. As the starting ball entry section, the first starting ball entry section (lower actuating ball entry section 62) arranged in the first flow entry path (left route) in the game area is different from the first flow entry path. It has a second starting ball entry section (right side actuating ball entry section 63) arranged in two flow-down paths (right route).
In the first flow path and the second flow path, the game ball flowing down the first flow path cannot enter the second starting ball entry portion, and the game ball flowing down the second flow path is the first. 1 It is formed so that it is not possible to enter the starting ball entry part.
In the first normal gaming state, by launching the game ball to the first flow path, the game can be advanced advantageously to the player as compared with the case of launching the game ball to the second flow path. In the second normal game state and the third normal game state, by firing the game ball to the second flow path, the game is played as compared with the case where the game ball is fired to the first flow path. It is structured so that it is possible to proceed in the favor of the person.
The variable display period setting means is based on the first setting means for setting the variable display period of the pattern based on the entry into the first start ball entry section and the entry into the second start ball entry section. It has a second setting means for setting the variable display period of the pattern.
The first setting means has the same variable notation period of the pattern in the second normal game state and the third normal game state.
The second setting means constitutes the period shortening means so that the variable notation period of the symbol in the third normal gaming state is shorter than the variable display period of the symbol in the second normal gaming state and the second normal gaming state. The gaming machine according to any one of the features F1 to F6, which is characterized in that the variable display period is shortened.

As shown in the feature F7, by shortening the variable display period for the second start ball entry portion, which is the main entry destination in the third normal game state, the effect of shortening the period can be suitably exhibited. Then, for the first starting ball entry portion, which is not the main entry destination, the variable display period is the same in the second normal game state and the third normal game state, so that the progress speed of the game is changed, which is refreshing. It is possible to prevent the improvement of the speed from becoming a factor that excessively complicates the control process related to the variable display of the pattern.

Feature F8. A variable ball-entry unit (for example, a lower side) provided in the game area and capable of switching between an accepting state in which a game ball flowing down the game area can enter and a non-accepting state in which it is more difficult to enter than the accepted state. Variable winning device 65) and
A payout means (payout device 222) for paying out a predetermined number of game balls based on the ball entering the variable ball entry unit is provided.
By shifting to the special gaming state by the special gaming state transition means, the variable ball entry portion is switched to the receiving state.
As the special gaming state, a first special gaming state and a second special gaming state in which the variable input portion is in the receiving state for a shorter period than the first special gaming state are provided.
The third normal game state is characterized in that the probability of entering the variable ball entry portion when the state shifts to the second special game state is higher than that of the second normal game state. The gaming machine according to any one of the feature F1 to the feature F7.

According to the configuration shown in this feature, the number of balls held can be expected to increase by repeating the transition to the second special gaming state in the third normal gaming state. Here, the pace of transition to the second special game state depends on the digestion speed of the game times. As shown in the feature F1 etc., in the third normal game state, by increasing this digestion speed, the increase speed of the holding ball is changed (fastened) without excessively complicating various structures provided in the game area or the like. be able to.

Feature F9. The predetermined determination information includes the first determination information (information corresponding to the jackpot result) and the second determination information (information corresponding to the special hit result).
The special gaming state transition means is a means (main control) for shifting the gaming state to the first special gaming state as the special gaming state when the determination result by the determination means is the determination result corresponding to the first determination information. The function of executing the transition process to the first special gaming state by the MPU 602 of the device 162) and the gaming state when the determination result by the determination means is the determination result corresponding to the second determination information, the game state is the special gaming state. (A function to execute the transition process to the second special gaming state by the MPU 602 of the main control device 162).
At least in the third normal gaming state, the determination result by the determination means is more likely to be the determination result corresponding to the second determination information than the determination result corresponding to the first determination information.
The second special gaming state is set so that the period during which the special gaming state is maintained is shorter than that of the first special gaming state.
In the period shortening means, the variable display period of the pattern when the determination result corresponding to the second determination information is obtained in the third normal gaming state becomes the second determination information in the second normal gaming state. Described in any one of the feature F1 to the feature F8, which is configured to set the variable display period so as to be shorter than the variable display period of the pattern when the corresponding determination result is obtained. Game machine.

If the transition to the second special gaming state occurs frequently in the third normal gaming state, the game progress may be delayed by securing the execution period of the second special gaming state. This can be a factor that hinders the increase in the progress speed of the game in the three normal game states. Therefore, in the case where the determination result corresponding to the second determination information is obtained in the second normal gaming state, the variable display period of the pattern is shortened so that the transition to the second special gaming state is repeated. Even if there is, it is possible to increase the progress speed of the game and improve the exhilaration of the game.

Feature F10. A switching means for switching the starting ball into a receiving state (open state) in which the game ball can enter the starting ball and a non-accepting state (closed state) in which the game ball is more difficult to enter than the receiving state. (Electric accessory 71) and
It is provided with a switching control means (a function of executing an electric service support process in the MPU 602 of the main control device 162) for controlling the switching means.
The variable display period setting means is configured to set the variable display period so that the variable display period of the pattern becomes shorter as the number of special information stored in the acquired information storage means increases.
The period shortening means determines that the number of special information stored in the acquired information storage means has reached the upper limit in the third normal gaming state and the determination result by the determination means corresponds to the second determination information. The variable display period of the pattern set when the result is obtained is such that the number of special information stored in the acquired information storage means in the second normal gaming state has reached the upper limit and is determined by the determination means. Described in feature F9, wherein the variable display period is set so as to be shorter than the variable display period of the pattern set when the determination result is the determination result corresponding to the second determination information. Game machine.

As shown in this feature, the starting ball can be switched between the accepted state and the non-accepted state, and the progress speed of the game can be increased by securing the number of special information (for example, changing the vicinity of the upper limit). .. However, for example, when the game shifts to the second special game state for each game, it is assumed that the progress of the game is delayed as a result of securing the execution period of the second special game state. This is expected to be an obstacle in improving the exhilaration of the game. Therefore, as shown in this feature, if the variable display period is shortened when the number of stored special information reaches the upper limit, the effect shown in the feature F1 or the like can be suitably exhibited. it can.

Features F11. A game board (game board 60) in which a game area (game area PE) is formed, and
Information in the special information acquisition means (MPU 602 of the main control device 162) for acquiring special information (holding information) when a ball enters the starting ball entry unit (for example, the right operating port 63a) provided in the game area. Function to execute acquisition process) and
An acquisition information storage means (RAM 604 holding ball storage area 632) capable of storing a plurality of special information acquired by the special information acquisition means, and
The lottery process is executed by the determination means (MPU 602 of the main control device 162) that sequentially determines whether or not the special information stored in the acquired information storage means corresponds to the predetermined determination information (for example, winning information). Function) and
A pattern display means (for example, a main display unit 81) having a display unit (for example, a display unit DR for an operating port) and capable of variably displaying a design on the display unit,
A stop result corresponding to the result of the determination by starting the variable display of the pattern in the pattern display means prior to the determination by the determination means or based on the determination made by the determination means. Is displayed and the variable display of the pattern is terminated as one game time, so that the pattern of each game time is variablely displayed according to the special information stored in the acquired information storage means. A game time control means for controlling the pattern display means (for example, a function of executing the game time control process by the MPU 602 of the main control device 162) and
The determination result by the determination means becomes the determination result corresponding to the predetermined determination information, and the game state is changed from the normal game state to the player based on the fact that the pattern corresponding to the determination result is stopped and displayed by the game turn control means. Special game state transition means (function of executing processing for game state transition in MPU 602 of the main control device 162) to shift to a special game state (for example, open / close execution mode) which is advantageous to
A switching means for switching the starting ball into a receiving state (open state) in which the game ball can enter the starting ball and a non-accepting state (closed state) in which the game ball is more difficult to enter than the receiving state. (Electric accessory 71) and
It is provided with a switching control means (a function of executing an electric service support process in the MPU 602 of the main control device 162) for controlling the switching means.
As the switching control mode of the switching means by the switching control means, a first switching mode (low frequency support mode) and a second switching mode (high frequency support) in which the non-accepting state is shorter than the first switching mode. Mode) and
As the determination mode in which the determination is performed by the determination means, the high probability mode in which the probability of the determination result corresponding to the predetermined determination information is relatively high and the probability of the determination result corresponding to the predetermined determination information are relative. Has a low probability mode and
As the normal game state, the first normal game state corresponding to the first switching mode and the low probability mode, the second normal game state corresponding to the second switching mode and the high probability mode, and the first switching state. A mode and a third normal gaming state corresponding to the high probability mode are provided.
The game turn control means has a variable display period setting means for setting a variable display period of the pattern (a function of setting a variable display time of a pattern on the display unit for the operation port by the MPU 602 of the main control device 162).
The variable display period setting means varies in the period shortening means (MPU 602 of the main control device 162) for shortening the variable display period of the pattern in the third normal game state to be shorter than the variable display period of the pattern in the second normal game state. A gaming machine characterized in having a function of switching the display time table).

According to the feature F11, the frequency of entering the starting ball is reduced by shifting from the second normal gaming state corresponding to the second switching mode to the third normal gaming state corresponding to the first switching mode. However, since the variable display period of the pattern is shortened in the third normal game state as compared with the second normal game state, it is possible to suppress the slow progress of the game due to the decrease in the ball entry frequency. This is preferable in order to improve the degree of attention to the game.

Feature F12. A game board (game board 60) in which a game area (game area PE) is formed, and
Information in the special information acquisition means (MPU 602 of the main control device 162) for acquiring special information (holding information) when a ball enters the starting ball entry unit (for example, the right operating port 63a) provided in the game area. Function to execute acquisition process) and
An acquisition information storage means (RAM 604 holding ball storage area 632) capable of storing a plurality of special information acquired by the special information acquisition means, and
The lottery process is executed by the determination means (MPU 602 of the main control device 162) that sequentially determines whether or not the special information stored in the acquired information storage means corresponds to the predetermined determination information (for example, winning information). Function) and
A pattern display means (for example, a main display unit 81) having a display unit (for example, a display unit DR for an operating port) and capable of variably displaying a design on the display unit,
The variable display of the pattern is started in the display unit prior to the determination by the determination means or based on the determination by the determination means, and the stop result corresponding to the result of the determination is obtained. The pattern is displayed and the variable display of the pattern is terminated as one game time, and the pattern is variablely displayed in each game time according to the special information stored in the acquired information storage means. A game time control means for controlling the display means (for example, a function of executing the game time control process by the MPU 602 of the main control device 162) and
The determination result by the determination means becomes the determination result corresponding to the predetermined determination information, and the game state is changed from the normal game state to the player based on the fact that the pattern corresponding to the determination result is stopped and displayed by the game turn control means. Special game state transition means (function of executing processing for game state transition in MPU 602 of the main control device 162) to shift to a special game state (for example, open / close execution mode) which is advantageous to
A switching means for switching the starting ball into a receiving state (open state) in which the game ball can enter the starting ball and a non-accepting state (closed state) in which the game ball is more difficult to enter than the receiving state. (Electric accessory 71) and
It is provided with a switching control means (a function of executing an electric service support process in the MPU 602 of the main control device 162) for controlling the switching means.
As the switching control mode of the switching means by the switching control means, a first switching mode (low frequency support mode) and a second switching mode (high frequency support) in which the non-accepting state is shorter than the first switching mode. Mode) and
As the determination mode in which the determination is performed by the determination means, the high probability mode in which the probability of the determination result corresponding to the predetermined determination information is relatively high and the probability of the determination result corresponding to the predetermined determination information are relative. Has a low probability mode and
As the normal game state, the first normal game state corresponding to the first switching mode and the low probability mode, the second normal game state corresponding to the second switching mode and the high probability mode, and the first switching state. A mode and a third normal gaming state corresponding to the high probability mode are provided.
When the determination result by the determination means becomes the determination result corresponding to the predetermined determination information in the first normal gaming state, the first normal gaming state is changed to the second normal gaming state through the special gaming state. The first transfer means to be transferred (a function of executing the process of shifting to the second normal gaming state by the MPU 602 of the main control device 162) and
When shifting from the first normal gaming state to the second normal gaming state, a reference number setting means for setting a reference number (time reduction number) (a function of setting the time reduction number with the MPU 602 of the main control device 162) and
When the number of games executed in the second normal game state reaches the reference number, the second transition means (MPU 602 of the main control device 162) shifts from the second normal game state to the third normal game state. (A function to execute the process of shifting to the third normal game state)
The game turn control means has a variable display period setting means for setting a variable display period of the pattern (a function of setting a variable display time of a pattern on the display unit for the operation port by the MPU 602 of the main control device 162).
The variable display period setting means varies in the period shortening means (MPU 602 of the main control device 162) for shortening the variable display period of the pattern in the third normal game state to be shorter than the variable display period of the pattern in the second normal game state. A gaming machine characterized in having a function of switching the display time table).

According to the feature F12, the frequency of entering the starting ball is reduced by shifting from the second normal gaming state corresponding to the second switching mode to the third normal gaming state corresponding to the first switching mode. However, since the variable display period of the pattern is shortened in the third normal game state as compared with the second normal game state, it is possible to suppress the slow progress of the game due to the decrease in the ball entry frequency. This is preferable in order to improve the degree of attention to the game.

In particular, although the transition from the first normal gaming state to the second normal gaming state is configured via the special gaming state, the transition from the second normal gaming state to the third normal gaming state is directly transitioned. Therefore, when the progress speed of the game is accelerated at the time of transition from the second normal game state to the third normal game state, the difference can be highlighted. With such a configuration, the change can be easily understood without making the difference between the variable display periods excessively large between the second normal game state and the third normal game state. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the variable display period of the pattern from becoming extremely short by the configuration in which the progress speed of the game is changed, and to secure the opportunity to visually confirm the variable display of the pattern.

Feature F13. A payout means (payout device 222) for paying out a predetermined number of game balls based on the entry into the starting ball entry portion is provided.
When the number of special information stored has reached a preset upper limit and a new ball is entered into the starting ball entry portion, the acquired information storage means is used for the ball entry. It is structured so that it does not store special information based on it.
In the second normal game state and the third normal game state, the difference in the storage rate at which special information is stored by the acquired information storage means is smaller than the difference in the ball entry rate to the starting ball entry portion. The gaming machine according to feature F11 or feature F12, which is configured as described above.

According to the feature F13, in the second normal game state and the third normal game state, the second normal game state is given preferential treatment in that the number of game balls to be paid out based on the entry into the starting ball entry portion is large. To. However, the number of special information acquired based on the entry into the starting ball entry section can be the same in the second normal gaming state and the third normal gaming state. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the differentiation between the two normal game states from not functioning well due to the shortening of the variable display period described above due to the inferiority of the third normal game state with respect to the transition of the number of special information with the progress of the game.

Incidentally, in combination with the feature F8, the "payout means" shown in the present feature and the "payout means" shown in the feature F8 can be the same. In this case, the number of game balls to be paid out based on the entry into the starting ball entry section is the "first predetermined number", and the number of game balls to be paid out based on the entry into the variable entry section is the "second predetermined number". It should be "number".

In addition, the configuration shown in this feature is described as "The acquired information storage means newly enters the starting ball entry section in a situation where the number of stored special information reaches a preset upper limit. When it occurs, the special information based on the ball entry is not stored, and in the second normal game state and the third normal game state, the start ball entry portion is in the second normal game state. The gaming machine according to feature F11 or feature F12, wherein the number of special information stored in the acquired information storage means is configured to be the same while the frequency of entering the ball is increased. " It is also possible to.

It is also possible to apply each of the technical ideas shown in the features F11 to F13 to the features F1 to F10.

Further, the technical ideas shown in the features F1 to F13 may be applied to the above-mentioned features A to E.

<Characteristic G group>
The following feature G group is described in that "a game machine such as a pachinko machine has a game board in which a game area is formed and a game ball launching means for launching a game ball into the game area based on a launch operation by a player. Some of them are provided. When a game ball launched from a game ball launching means enters a ball entry portion provided in the game area, a privilege such as paying out a predetermined number of game balls is given to the player. Regarding the background technology of "(for example, see Patent Document 1)", there is an invention that "in the above-mentioned type of gaming machine, there is still room for improvement in its configuration in order to increase the degree of attention to the game." It was made with the problem to be solved.

Features G1. A game board (game board 60) in which a game area (game area PE) is formed, and
The first special to acquire the first special information (for example, the holding information relating to the lower operating port 62a) when the ball enters the first starting ball entering portion (for example, the lower operating port 62a) provided in the game area. Information acquisition means (function to execute information acquisition processing in MPU 602 of the main control device 162) and
A first acquisition information storage means (holding area Ra for the lower working port of RAM 604) capable of storing a plurality of the first special information acquired by the first special information acquisition means, and
The lottery process is executed by the first lottery means (MPU 602 of the main control device 162) that sequentially performs the first lottery process (lottery such as a big hit) based on the first special information stored in the first acquired information storage means. Function) and
Second special information for acquiring second special information (holding information relating to the right operating port 63a) when a ball enters the second starting ball entering portion (for example, the right operating port 63a) provided in the game area. Acquisition means (function to execute information acquisition processing in MPU 602 of the main control device 162) and
A second acquisition information storage means (holding area Rb for the right operating port of the RAM 604) capable of storing the second special information acquired by the second special information acquisition means, and
A function of executing a lottery process in the MPU 602 of the main control device 162, which performs a second lottery process (lottery such as a big hit) based on the second special information stored in the second acquired information storage means. )When,
It has a first display unit (for example, a lower operating port display unit DL) and a second display unit (for example, a right operating port display unit DR), and each of the first display unit and the second display unit displays a pattern. Variable displayable pattern display means (for example, main display unit 81) and
The variable display of the pattern is started in the first display unit prior to the first lottery process being performed by the first lottery means or based on the first lottery process being performed by the first lottery means. The first special stored in the first acquisition information storage means is set to display the stop result corresponding to the result of the first lottery process and end the variable display of the pattern as one game time. With the first game time control means (for example, a function of executing the game time control process by the MPU 602 of the main control device 162) that controls the pattern display means so that the picture of each game time is variably displayed according to the information. ,
The variable display of the pattern is started in the second display unit prior to the second lottery process being performed by the second lottery means or based on the second lottery process being performed by the second lottery means. The second special stored in the second acquisition information storage means is set to display the stop result corresponding to the result of the second lottery process and end the variable display of the pattern as one game time. With the second game time control means (for example, a function of executing the game time control process by the MPU 602 of the main control device 162) that controls the pattern display means so that the picture of each game time is variably displayed according to the information. ,
The lottery result by the first lottery means becomes a predetermined winning result, and the pattern corresponding to the predetermined winning result is stopped and displayed by the first game time control means, or the lottery result by the second lottery means is predetermined. Based on the winning result and the stop display of the pattern corresponding to the predetermined winning result by the second game time control means, the game state is changed to a special game state (for example, open / close execution mode) which is more advantageous to the player than the normal game state. ) Is provided with a special game state transition means (a function of executing a game state transition process in the MPU 602 of the main control device 162).
It is configured so that the game times by the first game time control means and the game times by the second game time control means can proceed at the same time.
The normal game states include a first normal game state (a normal game state corresponding to a low probability mode and a low frequency support mode) and a second normal game state (a normal game state corresponding to a high probability mode and a high frequency support mode). A third normal game state (normal game state corresponding to high probability mode and low frequency support mode) is provided.
In the third normal gaming state, the required period of the game times by the first game time control means and the required period of the game times by the first game time control means are different.
When the lottery result by the first lottery means becomes a predetermined winning result in the first normal game state, or when the lottery result by the second lottery means becomes a predetermined winning result, the first normal game A first transition means for shifting from the state to the second normal gaming state via the special gaming state (a function of executing a process of shifting to the second normal gaming state by the MPU 602 of the main control device 162).
When shifting from the first normal gaming state to the second normal gaming state, a reference number setting means for setting a reference number (time reduction number) (a function of setting the time reduction number with the MPU 602 of the main control device 162) and
When the number of games executed in the second normal game state reaches the reference number, the second transition means (MPU 602 of the main control device 162) shifts from the second normal game state to the third normal game state. (A function to execute the process of shifting to the third normal game state)
The reference number of times corresponds to the first special information when the first special information is stored in the first acquired information storage means when the first transition means shifts to the second normal gaming state. A gaming machine characterized in that the number of games to be played is specified to be executed before the transition to the third normal game state.

According to the feature G1, when the winning result is obtained in the first normal game state and the state shifts to the second normal game state, the reference number of times is set as the number of game times that can be executed in the second normal game state. .. Then, when the number of game times executed in the second normal game state reaches the reference number, the game shifts to the third normal game state. At this time, all the special information related to the first ball entry portion is digested during the second normal game state, and the carry-over to the third normal game state is avoided. That is, in the third normal game state, the game times proceed based on the special information related to the second ball entry portion. The required period (the sum of the variable display period and the fixed display period of the pattern) is different between the game times corresponding to the first ball entry part and the game times corresponding to the second ball entry part, and the progress rhythm of the game is different. Can be. Therefore, by completely digesting the special information related to the first ball entry portion before the transition to the third normal game state, it is possible to advance the game in the third normal game state with good rhythm.

In addition, the configuration shown in this feature is described as "a game board (game board 60) in which a game area (game area PE) is formed, and a first starting ball entry portion (for example, lower operating port 62a) provided in the game area). First special information acquisition means (a function of executing information acquisition processing in MPU 602 of the main control device 162) for acquiring first special information (for example, hold information related to the lower operating port 62a) when a ball enters the ball. And the first acquisition information storage means (holding area Ra for the lower working port of RAM 604) capable of storing a plurality of the first special information acquired by the first special information acquisition means, and the first acquisition information storage means. A first lottery means (a function of executing the lottery process by the MPU 602 of the main control device 162) for sequentially performing the first lottery process (lottery such as a big hit) based on the first special information is provided in the game area. A second special information acquisition means (main control) that acquires second special information (holding information relating to the right operating port 63a) when a ball enters the second starting ball entry unit (for example, the right operating port 63a). A function of executing information acquisition processing in the MPU 602 of the device 162) and a second acquisition information storage means (holding for the right operating port of RAM 604) capable of storing a plurality of second special information acquired by the second special information acquisition means. Area Rb) and the second lottery means (MPU 602 of the main control device 162) that sequentially performs the second lottery process (lottery such as a big hit) based on the second special information stored in the second acquisition information storage means. It has a first display unit (for example, a lower operating port display unit DL) and a second display unit (for example, a right operating port display unit DR), and has the first display unit and the first display unit. A picture display means (for example, a main display unit 81) capable of variably displaying a picture on each of the two display units, and prior to the first lottery process being performed by the first lottery means or by the first lottery means. Based on the first lottery process, the variable display of the pattern is started in the first display unit, the stop result corresponding to the result of the first lottery process is displayed, and the variable display of the pattern is completed. The first is to control the pattern display means so that the pattern of each game is variably displayed according to the first special information stored in the first acquired information storage means. 1 Game times control means (for example, a function of executing a game times control process in MPU 602 of the main control device 162) and the second lottery means prior to the second lottery process being performed by the second lottery means or the second lottery means. Based on the fact that the second lottery process was performed by Subsequently, the variable display of the pattern is started in the second display unit, the stop result corresponding to the result of the second lottery process is displayed, and the variable display of the pattern is terminated as one of the game times. A second game time control means (for example, main control device 162) that controls the picture display means so that the picture of each game time is variably displayed according to the second special information stored in the second acquired information storage means. The function of executing the game time control process in the MPU 602) and the lottery result by the first lottery means become a predetermined winning result, and the pattern corresponding to the predetermined winning result is stopped and displayed by the first game time control means. The game state is changed to the normal gaming state based on the fact that the lottery result by the second lottery means becomes a predetermined winning result and the pattern corresponding to the predetermined winning result is stopped and displayed by the second game time control means. It is provided with a special game state transition means (a function of executing a process for transition to the game state by the MPU 602 of the main control device 162) for shifting to a special game state (for example, open / close execution mode) that is more advantageous to the player. The game states include a first normal game state (a normal game state corresponding to a low probability mode and a low frequency support mode), a second normal game state (a normal game state corresponding to a high probability mode and a high frequency support mode), and a third. When a normal game state (a normal game state corresponding to a high probability mode and a low frequency support mode) is provided, and the lottery result by the first lottery means becomes a predetermined winning result in the first normal game state. Alternatively, when the lottery result by the second lottery means becomes a predetermined winning result, the first transition means (main control device) for shifting from the first normal gaming state to the second normal gaming state via the special gaming state. A function of executing a process of shifting to the second normal gaming state with the MPU 602 of 162) and a reference for setting a reference number of times (time reduction number of times) when shifting from the first normal gaming state to the second normal gaming state. When the number of times setting means (a function of setting the time reduction number of times by the MPU 602 of the main control device 162) and the number of games executed in the second normal game state become the reference number of times, the second normal game state. It is provided with a second transition means (a function of executing a process of shifting to the third normal gaming state by the MPU 602 of the main control device 162) for shifting to the third normal gaming state, and the reference number of times is the first transition. When the first special information is stored in the first acquired information storage means when the second normal gaming state is entered by the means, this is the case. A gaming machine characterized in that the gaming times corresponding to the first special information are defined to have been executed before the transition to the third normal gaming state. It is also possible to say.

Feature G2. A game board (game board 60) in which a game area (game area PE) is formed, and
The first special to acquire the first special information (for example, the holding information relating to the lower operating port 62a) when the ball enters the first starting ball entering portion (for example, the lower operating port 62a) provided in the game area. Information acquisition means (function to execute information acquisition processing in MPU 602 of the main control device 162) and
A first acquisition information storage means (holding area Ra for the lower working port of RAM 604) capable of storing a plurality of the first special information acquired by the first special information acquisition means, and
The lottery process is executed by the first lottery means (MPU 602 of the main control device 162) that sequentially performs the first lottery process (lottery such as a big hit) based on the first special information stored in the first acquired information storage means. Function) and
Second special information for acquiring second special information (holding information relating to the right operating port 63a) when a ball enters the second starting ball entering portion (for example, the right operating port 63a) provided in the game area. Acquisition means (function to execute information acquisition processing in MPU 602 of the main control device 162) and
A second acquisition information storage means (holding area Rb for the right operating port of the RAM 604) capable of storing the second special information acquired by the second special information acquisition means, and
A function of executing a lottery process in the MPU 602 of the main control device 162, which performs a second lottery process (lottery such as a big hit) based on the second special information stored in the second acquired information storage means. )When,
It has a first display unit (for example, a lower operating port display unit DL) and a second display unit (for example, a right operating port display unit DR), and each of the first display unit and the second display unit displays a pattern. Variable displayable pattern display means (for example, main display unit 81) and
The variable display of the pattern is started in the first display unit prior to the first lottery process being performed by the first lottery means or based on the first lottery process being performed by the first lottery means. The first special stored in the first acquisition information storage means is set to display the stop result corresponding to the result of the first lottery process and end the variable display of the pattern as one game time. With the first game time control means (for example, a function of executing the game time control process by the MPU 602 of the main control device 162) that controls the pattern display means so that the picture of each game time is variably displayed according to the information. ,
The variable display of the pattern is started in the second display unit prior to the second lottery process being performed by the second lottery means or based on the second lottery process being performed by the second lottery means. The second special stored in the second acquisition information storage means is set to display the stop result corresponding to the result of the second lottery process and end the variable display of the pattern as one game time. With the second game time control means (for example, a function of executing the game time control process by the MPU 602 of the main control device 162) that controls the pattern display means so that the picture of each game time is variably displayed according to the information. ,
The lottery result by the first lottery means becomes a predetermined winning result, and the pattern corresponding to the predetermined winning result is stopped and displayed by the first game time control means, or the lottery result by the second lottery means is predetermined. Based on the winning result and the stop display of the pattern corresponding to the predetermined winning result by the second game time control means, the game state is changed to a special game state (for example, open / close execution mode) which is more advantageous to the player than the normal game state. ) Is provided with a special game state transition means (a function of executing a game state transition process in the MPU 602 of the main control device 162).
It is configured so that the game times by the first game time control means and the game times by the second game time control means can proceed at the same time.
As the normal game state, a first normal game state (a normal game state corresponding to a low probability mode and a low frequency support mode) and a second normal game state (high probability mode) which is more advantageous to the player than the first normal game state. A normal game state corresponding to the high-frequency support mode) and a third normal game state (a normal game state corresponding to the high-probability mode and the low-frequency support mode) that are more advantageous to the player than the second normal game state are provided. And
When the lottery result by the first lottery means becomes a predetermined winning result in the first normal game state, or when the lottery result by the second lottery means becomes a predetermined winning result, the first normal game A first transition means for shifting from the state to the second normal gaming state via the special gaming state (a function of executing a process of shifting to the second normal gaming state by the MPU 602 of the main control device 162).
When shifting from the first normal gaming state to the second normal gaming state, a reference number setting means for setting a reference number (time reduction number) (a function of setting the time reduction number with the MPU 602 of the main control device 162) and
When the number of games executed in the second normal game state reaches the reference number, the second transition means (MPU 602 of the main control device 162) shifts from the second normal game state to the third normal game state. (A function to execute the process of shifting to the third normal game state)
The reference number of times corresponds to the first special information when the first special information is stored in the first acquired information storage means when the first transition means shifts to the second normal gaming state. A gaming machine characterized in that the number of games to be played is specified to be executed before the transition to the third normal game state.

According to the feature G2, when a predetermined winning result is obtained in the first normal game state and the state shifts to the second normal game state, the reference number of times is set as the number of game times that can be executed in the second normal game state. Will be done. Then, when the number of game times executed in the second normal game state reaches the reference number, the game shifts to the third normal game state. Here, the reference number of times is stipulated so that all the special information related to the first ball entry portion can be digested during the second normal game state. For this reason, if the second normal game state → the third normal game state is changed without a predetermined winning result, all the special information related to the first ball entry portion is digested during the second normal game state. Therefore, the carry-over to the third normal game state is avoided. That is, in the third normal game state, the game times proceed based on the special information related to the second ball entry portion. In this way, by suppressing the intervention of the game times related to the first ball entry portion, it is possible to advance the game in the third normal game state with good rhythm.

Feature G3. The game according to feature G2, wherein at least in the third normal gaming state, the lottery by the second lottery means is configured to be more advantageous to the player than the lottery by the first lottery means. Machine.

In the configuration in which the second ball entry section is given preferential treatment as shown in the feature G3, the third normal game is performed by digesting the special information related to the first ball entry section before shifting to the third normal game state. It is possible to suppress a decrease in the player's superiority in the state.

Feature G4. In the second transition means, the sum of the number of times the game times are executed by the first game time control means and the number of times the game times are executed by the second game time control means in the second normal gaming state reaches the reference number. Based on this, it is configured to shift from the second normal game state to the third normal game state.
The reference number of times is larger than the upper limit number of the first special information that can be stored in the first acquired information storage means.
When the number of first special information stored in the first acquired information storage means reaches the upper limit at the time of transition to the second normal gaming state, the execution is performed based on the first special information. For each game time, the total period of the variable display period and the final display period of the pattern in the first display unit is the shortest required period required for the game times executed in the second normal game state to reach the reference number of times. The gaming machine according to feature G2 or feature G3, which is configured to be shorter than the feature G2.

According to the feature G4, whether or not the reference number of times has been reached is determined by the sum of the game times related to the first special information and the game times related to the second special information. The reference number of times is set to be larger than the upper limit of storage of the first special information, and the total (total period) of the variable display period and the final display period of the pattern of the first display unit in the second normal game state is the first. 2 By making the number of games executed in the normal game state shorter than the shortest required time required to reach the reference number of times, it is possible to preferably avoid carrying over the first special information to the third normal game state. it can. As a result, the effect shown in feature G2 can be suitably exhibited.

Feature G5. In the second transition means, the sum of the number of times the game times are executed by the first game time control means and the number of times the game times are executed by the second game time control means in the second normal gaming state reaches the reference number. Based on this, it is configured to shift from the second normal game state to the third normal game state.
As for the reference number of times, the maximum number of first special information that can be stored in the first acquired information storage means and the number of first special information stored in the first acquired information storage means reach the upper limit. If so, it is set to be greater than the sum of the maximum number of game times that can be executed by the second game time control means until each game time corresponding to the first special information is executed. The gaming machine according to feature G2 or feature G3, which is characterized by being present.

According to the feature G5, whether or not the reference number of times has been reached is determined by the sum of the game times related to the first special information and the game times related to the second special information. By making the reference number of times greater than the sum of the upper limit of the number of stored first special information and the number of games corresponding to the second special information that can be executed until all the first special information is exhausted, the third normal game state It is possible to preferably avoid carrying over the first special information to. As a result, the effect shown in feature G2 can be suitably exhibited.

Feature G6. In the second transition means, the sum of the number of times the game times are executed by the first game time control means and the number of times the game times are executed by the second game time control means in the second normal gaming state reaches the reference number. Based on this, it is configured to shift from the second normal game state to the third normal game state.
In the second normal game state, when the number of the first special information stored in the first acquired information storage means reaches the upper limit at the time of transition to the second normal game state, the first special information is used. For each of the game times, the variable display and the final display of the pattern on the second display unit are performed a predetermined number of times by the second game time control means during the total period of the variable display period and the final display period of the pattern on the first display unit. It is a configuration that can be executed,
The gaming machine according to feature G2 or feature G3, wherein the reference number of times is larger than the sum of the upper limit number and the predetermined number of times.

According to the feature G6, whether or not the reference number of times has been reached is determined by the sum of the game times related to the first special information and the game times related to the second special information. By making the reference number of times greater than the sum of the upper limit of the number of stored first special information and the number of games corresponding to the second special information that can be executed until all the first special information is exhausted, the third normal game state It is possible to preferably avoid carrying over the first special information to. As a result, the effect shown in feature G2 can be suitably exhibited.

Feature G7. A special ball entry section (for example, upper variable winning) that can be switched between an accepted state (open state) in which a game ball flowing down the game area can enter and a non-accepted state (closed state) in which it is more difficult to enter than the accepted state. Device 64) and
It is provided with a special ball entry unit switching means (a function of executing opening / closing control by the MPU 602 of the main control device 162) for switching the special ball entry unit to the reception state in the special game state.
In the game area, as a flow path through which the game ball flows down, a first flow path (left route) in which the first start ball entry portion is arranged, the second start ball entry section, and the special entry section are provided. Is provided with a second flow path (right route), and in the first normal gaming state, the game ball is launched to the first flow path rather than the game ball is launched to the second flow path. In the second normal gaming state and the special gaming state, it is more advantageous for the player to launch the game ball to the second flow path than to launch the game ball to the first flow path. It is configured to be advantageous and
In the first flow path and the second flow path, the game ball flowing down the first flow path cannot enter the second starting ball entry portion, and the game ball flowing down the second flow path is the first. 1 It is formed so that it is not possible to enter the starting ball entry part.
The special ball entry section is arranged on the upstream side of the second start ball entry section in the second flow path, and when the ball is in the receiving state, the game ball to the second start ball entry section It has a structure that prevents it from flowing down.
It is characterized by being provided with information display means (a function of displaying the remaining number of times on the display screen 75a of the symbol display device 75) that displays information corresponding to the number of game times executed in the second normal game state. The gaming machine according to any one of the feature G2 to the feature G6.

According to the feature G7, the launch destination of the game ball is changed from the first flow path to the second flow path with the transition to the special game state. At this time, the special ball entry section is in the receiving state, so that the game ball is prevented from flowing down to the second starting ball entry section. As a result, the number of second special information stored at the start of the second normal game state can be reduced. Therefore, at the start of the second normal game state, it is possible to prevent both the game times related to the first special information and the game times related to the second special game state from repeating the start / end. This is a configuration that displays information corresponding to the number of game times executed in the second normal game state (for example, the number of executions and the remaining number of times until the reference number is reached), and the display update speed is the second normal game. It is preferable to prevent the condition from becoming excessively early at the beginning of the state.

Feature G8. As the special gaming state, a first special gaming state (for example, an opening / closing execution mode corresponding to 16R) and a second special gaming state (for example, a second special gaming state in which the special entry portion is less likely to switch to the receiving state than the first special gaming state). For example, 6R compatible open / close execution mode) is provided.
The gaming machine according to feature G7, characterized in that the first lottery process by the first lottery means has a configuration in which a lottery result corresponding to the second special gaming state is more likely to occur than the first special gaming state. ..

As shown in the feature G8, when the transition from the first normal game state to the special game state to the special game state, the launch destination of the game ball is changed from the first flow path to the second flow path. In this special gaming state, for example, the second special gaming state with a small number of open times (the number of rounds) is easily selected, so that the number of second special information stored before the transition to the second normal gaming state is as small as possible. can do.

Feature G9. When a plurality of variable display periods of the pattern by the second game time control means are provided and the number of the second special information stored in the second acquired information storage means is smaller than a predetermined number, the variable display period is provided. A predetermined variable display period is set as the display period.
The sum of the predetermined variable display period and the definite display period of the pattern by the second game time control means is obtained by the first game time control means in the first acquired information storage means with the transition to the second normal game state. The gaming machine according to feature G7 or feature G8, which is set to be longer than the total period of the variable display period and the fixed display period when the maximum number of game times are executed.

According to the feature G9, when the number of the second special information stored at the time of transition from the first normal gaming state to the second normal gaming state is less than a predetermined number, a predetermined variable display is performed as a variable display period. The period is set. Then, during this predetermined variable display period, all the game times related to the first special information are executed. With such a configuration, it is possible to preferably suppress that both the game times related to the first special information and the game times related to the second special game state repeat start / end at the start of the second normal game state. .. This is preferable in order to exert the effects shown in the feature G7 and the like.

Feature G10. The second start ball entry unit can be switched between a receiving state in which a game ball flowing down the game area can enter and a non-accepting state in which it is more difficult to enter than the receiving state.
It is provided with a switching means for the second starting ball entering portion (a function of executing opening / closing processing of the electric accessory 71 by the MPU 602 of the main control device 162) for switching the second starting ball entering portion between the accepted state and the non-accepted state. ,
As the switching control mode of the second starting ball entering portion by the switching means for the second starting ball entering portion, the first switching mode (low frequency support mode) and the second starting ball entering portion rather than the first switching mode. Is provided with a second switching mode (high frequency support mode) in which the non-acceptance state is short.
In the second normal game state, the second switching mode is set as the switching control mode.
In the second normal game state, the second game time control means can change the pattern in the second display unit by reducing the number of second special information stored in the second acquired information storage means. It is configured to shorten the display period,
In the second normal game state, the first game time control means has a variable display period of a pattern in the first display unit regardless of the number of first special information stored in the first acquired information storage means. The gaming machine according to any one of the feature G7 to the feature G9, which is configured to be constant and have a shorter period than the first normal gaming state.

According to the configuration shown in this feature, in the second normal game state, the switching control mode of the second starting ball entering portion becomes the second switching mode, so that the number of balls entering the second starting ball entering portion increases. As a result, in each game round related to the second start ball entry portion, the same or similar variable display period is set as the variable display period of the pattern, and the game round progresses at a good tempo with a constant rhythm. Become.

Here, if the first special information remains at the time of transition to the second normal gaming state, the game times related to the first special information have the same variable display period, so that the first special information is related. The game times will also be digested at a good tempo. As a result, the effects shown in the feature 7 and the like can be more preferably exhibited.

Feature G11. In the second normal gaming state, the variable display period of the pattern set by the first game time control means is configured to be shorter than the variable display period of the pattern set by the second game time control means. The gaming machine according to any one of the feature G2 to the feature G10.

According to the configuration shown in this feature, even if the first special information is stored at the time of transition to the second normal gaming state, the game times related to the first special information are quickly digested. Become. As a result, the reference number of times set as the transition condition to the third normal gaming state can be reduced as much as possible, which can contribute to the improvement of the degree of freedom in setting the reference number of times.

Feature G12. In the second normal gaming state, the final display period of the pattern set by the first game time control means is configured to be shorter than the final display period of the pattern set by the second game time control means. The gaming machine according to any one of the feature G2 to the feature G11.

According to the configuration shown in this feature, even if the first special information is stored at the time of transition to the second normal gaming state, the game times related to the first special information are quickly digested. Become. As a result, the reference number of times set as the transition condition to the third normal gaming state can be reduced as much as possible, which can contribute to the improvement of the degree of freedom in setting the reference number of times.

It is also possible to apply each of the technical ideas shown in the features G2 to G12 to the above features G1.

Further, the technical ideas shown in the features G1 to G12 may be applied to the above-mentioned features A to F groups.

<Characteristic H group>
The following feature H group is described in that "a game machine such as a pachinko machine has a game board in which a game area is formed and a game ball launching means for launching a game ball into the game area based on a launch operation by a player. Some of them are provided. When a game ball launched from a game ball launching means enters a ball entry portion provided in the game area, a privilege such as paying out a predetermined number of game balls is given to the player. Regarding the background technology of "(for example, see Patent Document 1)", there is an invention that "in the above-mentioned type of gaming machine, there is still room for improvement in its configuration in order to increase the degree of attention to the game." It was made with the problem to be solved.

Features H1. A game board (game board 60) in which a game area (game area PE) is formed, and
It is possible to switch between a first state (open state) in which a game ball provided in the game area and flowing down the game area can enter and a second state (closed state) in which it is more difficult to enter than the first state. Starting ball entry part (right side operation entry part 63) and
A ball entry detection means (detection sensor 391d) capable of detecting a game ball that has entered the starting ball entry portion, and
Effective period setting means (MPU 602 of the main control device 162 sets the effective period of the ball entering the starting ball when the starting ball enters the first state from the second state. Function to set) and
In the privilege granting means (for example, the function of acquiring the hold information by the MPU 602 of the main control device 162 and the payout device 222) that grants the privilege to the player when the game ball is detected by the ball entry detecting means during the valid period. (Function to pay out prize balls) and
A passing portion (through gate 66) provided in the game area and through which a game ball flowing down the game area can pass,
Predetermined information acquisition means (function of acquiring electric service hold by MPU 602 of the main control device 162) for acquiring predetermined information (electric service hold) based on the passage of the game ball through the passing portion.
A predetermined information storage means (a storage area for electric service in the RAM 604 of the main control device 162) for storing the predetermined information acquired by the predetermined information acquisition means is provided.
A lottery means (a function of executing a support lottery in the MPU 602 of the main control device 162) for performing a winning / failing lottery based on the predetermined information stored in the predetermined information storage means, and
A pattern display means (main display unit 81) having a display unit (display unit DS for through gate) and capable of variably displaying a pattern on the display unit, and
The pattern is variably displayed on the display unit prior to the lottery being performed by the lottery means or based on the lottery being performed by the lottery means, and the result of the lottery is dealt with after the variable display. Display control means (for example, a function of executing display control of the through gate display unit DS by the MPU 602 of the main control device 162) for confirming and displaying the displayed pattern
When the winning result is obtained by the lottery by the lottery means, the starting ball entry portion is switched from the second state to the first state, and under the condition of the first state, a predetermined condition (for example, opening time). (Progress) and a switching control means (a function of executing opening / closing control of the electric accessory 71 by the MPU 602 of the main control device 162) for switching the starting ball entry portion from the first state to the second state when the above-mentioned progress is established. With
The valid period setting means sets the valid period so that the valid period continues for a predetermined period (for example, 0.7 sec) even after the starting ball entering portion is switched from the first state to the second state. It is configured to
When the start-in ball portion switches from the first state to the second state, the display control means stores the predetermined information in the predetermined information storage means before the valid period elapses. It has a variable display starting means (a function of starting the variable display of the pattern on the through gate display unit DS by the MPU 602 of the main control device 162) to start the variable display of the pattern on the display unit. A featured game machine.

According to the feature H1, when the starting ball entry portion is switched from the first state to the second state, the valid period is continued for a predetermined period even after the switching to the second state. As a result, for example, a game ball that has flowed into the starting ball entry portion at the same time as switching to the second state can also be subject to privilege grant. This is preferable in order to avoid a factor that lowers the player's willingness to play, such as not being able to obtain the benefits that should be originally obtained. Here, in the configuration shown in this feature, if the predetermined information is stored before the starting ball entry portion is switched to the second state, the variable display of the pattern on the display portion is started without waiting for the elapse of the valid period. Will be done. In this way, if the variable display of the pattern is started during the valid period and the valid period and the variable display period are overlapped at least in part, the starting ball entry portion is changed from the first state to the second state to the first state. It is possible to prevent the variable display period of the pattern from becoming extremely short in order to switch to the state and promptly proceed with the game. This is preferable in order to improve the degree of attention to the game.

In addition, in the case where the predetermined information is stored in the predetermined information storage means when the start-in ball portion is switched from the first state to the second state, the display control means shown in the present feature. Regarding the "variable display starting means for starting the variable display of the pattern on the display unit before the expiration of the valid period", the "display control means is such that the starting ball-entry unit is in the first state to the second state. When the predetermined information is stored in the predetermined information storage means when the information is switched to, the variable display starting means for starting the variable display of the pattern on the display unit before the predetermined period elapses. It is also possible.

Feature H2. A game board (game board 60) in which a game area (game area PE) is formed, and
A start that is provided in the game area and can be switched between a first state (open state) in which a game ball flowing down the game area can enter and a second state (closed state) in which it is more difficult to enter than the acceptance state. Ball entry part (right side operation ball entry part 63) and
A ball entry detection means (detection sensor 391d) capable of detecting a game ball that has entered the starting ball entry portion, and
Effective period setting means (MPU 602 of the main control device 162 sets the effective period of the ball entering the starting ball when the starting ball enters the first state from the second state. Function to set) and
Special information acquisition means (a function of acquiring hold information by the MPU 602 of the main control device 162) for acquiring special information when a ball is detected by the ball entry detection means during the valid period, and
A first lottery means for performing a winning / failing lottery based on the special information acquired by the special information acquisition means (a function of executing a big hit and a special win lottery with the MPU 602 of the main control device 162) and
When the winning result is obtained by the lottery by the first lottery means, the special game state transition means (MPU 602 of the main control device 162 to shift to the open / close execution mode) shifts to the special game state which is more advantageous to the player than usual. Function to execute migration process) and
A passing portion (through gate 66) provided in the game area and through which a game ball flowing down the game area can pass,
Predetermined information acquisition means (function of acquiring electric service hold by MPU 602 of the main control device 162) for acquiring predetermined information (electric service hold) based on the passage of the game ball through the passing portion.
A predetermined information storage means (a storage area for electric service 633 in the RAM 604 of the main control device 162) for storing the predetermined information acquired by the predetermined information acquisition means, and
A second lottery means (a function of executing a support lottery in the MPU 602 of the main control device 162) for performing a winning / failing lottery based on the predetermined information stored in the predetermined information storage means, and
A pattern display means (main display unit 81) having a display unit (display unit DS for through gate) and capable of variably displaying a pattern on the display unit, and
Prior to the lottery being performed by the second lottery means, or based on the lottery being performed by the second lottery means, the pattern display means is started to display a variable pattern, and the result of the lottery is determined. Display control means for confirming and displaying the corresponding pattern (for example, a function of executing display control of the through gate display unit DS by the MPU 602 of the main control device 162) and
When the winning result is obtained by the lottery by the second lottery means, the starting ball entry portion is switched from the second state to the first state, and the predetermined condition is satisfied under the situation of the first state. It is provided with a switching control means (a function of executing opening / closing control of the electric accessory 71 by the MPU 602 of the main control device 162) for switching the starting ball entry portion from the first state to the second state.
The valid period setting means is configured to set the valid period so that the valid period continues for a predetermined period even after the starting ball entry portion is switched from the first state to the second state. ,
When the predetermined information is stored when the starting ball entry unit switches from the first state to the second state, the display control means is displayed on the display unit before the valid period elapses. A gaming machine characterized by having a variable display starting means for starting the variable display of the pattern (a function of starting the variable display of the pattern on the through gate display unit DS by the MPU 602 of the main control device 162).

According to the feature H2, when the starting ball entry portion is switched from the first state to the second state, the valid period is continued for a predetermined period even after the switching to the second state. As a result, for example, a game ball that has flowed into the starting ball entry portion at the same time as switching to the second state can also be subject to privilege grant. This is preferable in order to avoid a factor that lowers the player's willingness to play, such as not being able to obtain the benefits that should be originally obtained. Here, in the configuration shown in this feature, if the predetermined information is stored before the starting ball entry portion is switched to the second state, the variable display of the pattern on the display portion is started without waiting for the elapse of the valid period. Will be done. In this way, if the variable display of the pattern is started during the valid period and the valid period and the variable display period are overlapped at least in part, the starting ball entry portion is changed from the first state to the second state to the first state. It is possible to prevent the variable display period of the pattern from becoming extremely short in order to switch to the state and promptly proceed with the game. This is preferable in order to improve the degree of attention to the game.

In addition, in the case where the predetermined information is stored in the predetermined information storage means when the start-in ball portion is switched from the first state to the second state, the display control means shown in the present feature. Regarding the "variable display starting means for starting the variable display of the pattern on the display unit before the expiration of the valid period", the "display control means is such that the starting ball-entry unit is in the first state to the second state. When the predetermined information is stored in the predetermined information storage means at the time of switching to, the variable display starting means for starting the variable display of the pattern on the display unit before the predetermined period elapses. It is also possible.

Feature H3. It has a ball passage that guides a game ball that has passed through the entrance portion (right operating port 63a) of the starting ball entry portion to a detection region (detection region DE) by the ball entry detection means.
The predetermined period according to the feature H1 or the feature H2, which is a period determined based on the period required for the game ball to move from the entrance portion to the detection area (detection area DE). Game machine.

As shown in feature H3, by setting the above-mentioned predetermined period based on the required period when the game ball moves from the entrance portion of the starting ball entry portion to the detection area, a predetermined period is used to secure the profit of the player. It is possible to prevent the (validity period) from becoming excessively long. This is also a preferable configuration for suppressing fraudulent acts related to the starting ball entry portion while ensuring profits shown in the feature H1 and the like.

Feature H4. The variable display starting means is a case where the predetermined information is not stored in the predetermined information storage means before the starting ball entering portion is switched from the first state to the second state, and during the predetermined period. The gaming machine according to any one of features H1 to H3, characterized in that variable display of the pattern is started during the predetermined period when the predetermined information is newly acquired.

In the configuration in which the predetermined information is acquired based on the passage of the game ball through the passing portion, the predetermined information is not always acquired and stored before the starting ball portion is switched from the first state to the second state. , It may occur that the predetermined information is acquired after switching to the second state. Therefore, when the predetermined information is newly acquired during the predetermined period, the variable display of the pattern is started during the predetermined period. Therefore, for example, the variable display of the pattern is started after the lapse of the predetermined period. It can contribute to the smooth progress of the game.

Feature H5. When the predetermined information is stored in the predetermined information storage means before the starting ball entering portion is switched from the first state to the second state, the variable display starting means is before the elapse of the valid period. 1. Described in any one of the features H1 to H4, wherein the variable display of the pattern is started at the timing when the starting ball entry portion switches from the second state to the first state. Game machine.

As shown in feature H5, if predetermined information is stored before the starting ball entering portion is switched to the first state, the variable display of the pattern is started at the timing when the starting ball entering portion is switched to the first state. Will be done. If the predetermined period is used well in this way, the effect of promptly switching to the next second state while securing the variable display period of the pattern can be more preferably exhibited.

Feature H6. The display control means provides variable display period setting means for setting a variable display period of a pattern on the display unit (a function of setting a variable display time of a pattern on the through gate display unit DS with the MPU 602 of the main control device 162). Have and
As the switching control mode of the starting ball portion by the switching control means, a first switching mode (low frequency support mode) and a second switching mode (high) in which the period of the second state is shorter than that of the first switching mode. Frequency support mode) is provided,
The feature H5 is characterized in that the variable display period set by the variable display period setting means is configured to be shorter than the predetermined period when the second switching mode is set. Game machine.

As shown in feature H6, in the second switching mode in which the frequency of entering the starting ball is high, the variable display period is made shorter than the predetermined period and the final display of the pattern is started during the predetermined period. , The following effects can be expected. That is, in the configuration in which the start ball entry section is switched to the first state after the variable display of the pattern → the confirmation display on the display unit, the confirmation display can be started before the end of the predetermined period (valid period), and the start is started. It is possible to shorten the period until the ball entry portion is switched to the first state again.

In addition, the configuration shown in this feature is described as "the display control means starts the variable display unit of the pattern in the display unit before the elapse of the predetermined period, and the variable display period elapses during the predetermined period. If this is the case, the gaming machine according to the feature H5, which is configured to start the final display of the pattern on the display unit during the predetermined period. ”

Feature H7. The display control means provides a definite display period setting means for setting a definite display period of a pattern on the display unit (a function of setting a definite display time of a pattern on the through gate display unit DS with the MPU 602 of the main control device 162). Have and
In the variable display starting means, when the predetermined information is stored in the predetermined information storage means before the starting ball entering portion is switched from the first state to the second state, the starting ball entering portion is used. The display unit starts the variable display of the pattern at the timing when the second state is switched to the first state.
The gaming machine according to feature H6, wherein in the second switching mode, the sum of the variable display period and the final display period is defined to match the predetermined period.

According to the feature H7, since the confirmation display can be terminated at the timing when the valid period has elapsed, when the lottery related to the predetermined information is won, the starting ball entry section is promptly changed as the valid period elapses. It is possible to switch to one state. As a result, the effects shown in the feature H1 and the like can be suitably exhibited.

Feature H8. The display control means provides variable display period setting means for setting a variable display period of a pattern on the display unit (a function of setting a variable display time of a pattern on the through gate display unit DS with the MPU 602 of the main control device 162). Have and
As the switching control mode of the starting ball portion by the switching control means, a first switching mode (low frequency support mode) and a second switching mode (high) in which the period of the second state is shorter than that of the first switching mode. Frequency support mode) is provided,
When the first switching mode is set, the feature H1 to the feature H7 are configured such that the variable display period set by the variable display period setting means is equal to or longer than the predetermined period. The gaming machine described in any one of.

In the first switching mode, the frequency of entering the starting ball is lower than that in the second switching mode. In such a state, by setting the variable display period to a predetermined period or longer, the interval period when the starting ball entering portion continuously switches to the first state can be lengthened. This is preferable in order to differentiate the first switching mode from the second switching mode.

Feature H9. A predetermined information storage means (a storage area for electric service in the RAM 604 of the main control device 162) for storing the predetermined information acquired by the predetermined information acquisition means is provided.
The display control means includes a variable display period setting means for setting a variable display period of a pattern on the display unit (a function of setting a variable display time of a pattern on the through gate display unit DS with the MPU 602 of the main control device 162). It also has a definite display period setting means (a function of setting the definite display time of the pattern on the through gate display unit DS by the MPU 602 of the main control device 162) for setting the definite display period of the pattern on the display unit.
Have,
When the predetermined information is stored in the predetermined information storage means before the starting ball entering portion is switched from the first state to the second state, the variable display starting means is before the elapse of the valid period. At the timing of, the variable display of the pattern is started at the timing when the starting ball entry portion is switched from the second state to the first state.
The starting ball entry portion has an inlet portion (right operating port 63a) opened upward and a shutter (shutter 331) covering the entrance portion, and the shutter is arranged at a closed position to enter the starting ball. When the portion is in the second state, the shutter forms the bottom surface of the ball passage that crosses above the entrance portion, and the shutter is displaced from the closed position to the open position to be in the first state. As a result, the game ball on the shutter is configured to fall to the entrance portion.
As the switching control mode of the starting ball portion by the switching control means, a first switching mode (low frequency support mode) and a second switching mode (high) in which the period of the first state is shorter than that of the first switching mode. Frequency support mode) is provided,
In the first switching mode, the variable display period and the fixed display period are set so that the sum of the variable display period and the fixed display period is longer than the predetermined period.
In the second switching mode, the variable display period and the fixed display period are set so that the sum of the variable display period and the fixed display period has the same length as the predetermined period.
The period required for the game ball to pass over the shutter is shorter than the sum of the variable display period and the definite display period in the first switching mode, and the variable display period and the variable display period in the second switching mode. The gaming machine according to any one of the feature H1 to the feature H8, which is configured to be longer than the sum of the fixed display period.

In the configuration shown in the feature H9, when the shutter moves from the closed position to the open position, the game ball launched to the starting ball entering portion enters the starting ball entering portion. In the configuration in which the shutter forms the bottom portion (rolling surface) of the ball passage, the game ball located on the shutter falls to the starting ball entry portion (entrance portion) when the shutter moves to the open position. Here, the period for maintaining the shutter in the closed position is longer or shorter than the time required for the game ball to pass on the shutter, so that a difference in ball entry frequency is provided, and the first switching mode and the second switching mode are provided. Can be differentiated from. Here, in order to be able to visually confirm the pattern, it is necessary to secure a variable display period and a fixed display period to some extent, but the restriction on the period becomes stronger by securing these periods for each of the above modes. It can be a big constraint in making a difference. In this regard, if the technical idea shown in feature H1 is applied to the configuration shown in this feature, the progress speed of the game is changed in order to diversify the game, and the visibility of the pattern is lowered due to this. Can be suppressed.

In addition, each technical idea shown in feature H1 to feature H9 may be applied to the said feature A group to G group.

<Characteristic J group>
The following feature J group is described as "a game machine such as a pachinko machine has a game board in which a game area is formed and a game ball launching means for launching a game ball into the game area based on a launch operation by a player. Some of them are provided. When a game ball launched from a game ball launching means enters a ball entry portion provided in the game area, a privilege such as paying out a predetermined number of game balls is given to the player. Regarding the background technology of "(for example, see Patent Document 1)", there is an invention that "in the above-mentioned type of gaming machine, there is still room for improvement in its configuration in order to increase the degree of attention to the game." It was made with the problem to be solved.

Features J1. A game board (game board 60) in which a game area (game area PE) is formed, and
Information in the special information acquisition means (MPU 602 of the main control device 162) for acquiring special information (holding information) when a ball enters the starting ball entry unit (for example, the right operating port 63a) provided in the game area. Function to execute acquisition process) and
An acquisition information storage means (RAM 604 holding ball storage area 632) capable of storing special information acquired by the special information acquisition means, and
The lottery process is executed by the determination means (MPU 602 of the main control device 162) that sequentially determines whether or not the special information stored in the acquired information storage means corresponds to the predetermined determination information (for example, winning information). Function) and
The game rotation operation (variation display of the pattern on the operating port display units DL and DR) is started prior to the determination being made by the determination means or based on the determination made by the determination means. , The notification result corresponding to the result of the determination and the end of the game rotation operation are regarded as one game time, and the game of each game time is performed according to the special information stored in the acquired information storage means. A game turn control means (for example, a function of executing the game turn control process by the MPU 602 of the main control device 162) that controls the result notification means (display units DL, DR for the operation port) so that the turn operation is performed.
The determination result by the determination means becomes the determination result corresponding to the predetermined determination information, and the gaming state is more advantageous to the player than the normal gaming state based on the completion of the game rotation operation by the game rotation control means. It is equipped with a special game state transition means (a function of executing a game state transition process in the MPU 602 of the main control device 162) for shifting to a special game state (for example, open / close execution mode).
As the normal game state, a first normal game state (a first normal game state corresponding to a low probability mode and a low frequency support mode) and a second normal game state (high) that is more advantageous to the player than the first normal game state. The second normal game state corresponding to the probability mode and the high frequency support mode) and the third normal game state (the third normal game state corresponding to the high probability mode and the low frequency support mode) which is more advantageous to the player than the second normal game state. (Game state) is provided,
A second normal game state transition means (MPU 602 of the main control device 162 executes a process for shifting to the second normal game state) for shifting the game state to the second normal game state upon the end of the special game state. Function to do) and
When shifting to the second normal gaming state by the second normal gaming state transition means, the upper limit setting means (to the MPU 602 of the main control device 162) for setting the upper limit (time reduction number) of the number of games in the second normal game state. Function to set the number of time reductions) and
A third normal game state transition means (main control device 162) that shifts the game state from the second normal game state to the third normal game state based on the number of games played in the second normal game state reaching the upper limit. (Function to execute the process for transitioning to the third normal game state) in MPU602 of
An information notification means (a function of displaying the counter image CF on the display screen 75a) for notifying information (counter image CF) indicating the number of remaining games until the transition to the third normal game state in the second normal game state. A game machine characterized by being equipped with.

According to the feature J1, after shifting from the first normal gaming state to the second normal gaming state through the special gaming state, the number of games played in the second normal gaming state reaches the upper limit, which is higher than that of the second normal gaming state. Further, it shifts to the third normal gaming state which is advantageous to the player. In the second normal game state, the transition to the third normal game state is expected by notifying the information indicating the number of remaining game times until the transition to the third normal game state and showing the way to the third normal game state. It is possible to draw more attention to the game to the player.

Feature J2. A game board (game board 60) in which a game area (game area PE) is formed, and
Information in the special information acquisition means (MPU 602 of the main control device 162) for acquiring special information (holding information) when a ball enters the starting ball entry unit (for example, the right operating port 63a) provided in the game area. Function to execute acquisition process) and
An acquisition information storage means (RAM 604 holding ball storage area 632) capable of storing special information acquired by the special information acquisition means, and
The lottery process is executed by the determination means (MPU 602 of the main control device 162) that sequentially determines whether or not the special information stored in the acquired information storage means corresponds to the predetermined determination information (for example, winning information). Function) and
The game rotation operation (variation display of the pattern on the operating port display units DL and DR) is started prior to the determination being made by the determination means or based on the determination made by the determination means. , The notification result corresponding to the result of the determination and the end of the game rotation operation are regarded as one game time, and the game of each game time is performed according to the special information stored in the acquired information storage means. A game turn control means (for example, a function of executing the game turn control process by the MPU 602 of the main control device 162) that controls the result notification means (display units DL, DR for the operation port) so that the turn operation is performed.
The determination result by the determination means becomes the determination result corresponding to the predetermined determination information, and the gaming state is more advantageous to the player than the normal gaming state based on the completion of the game rotation operation by the game rotation control means. It is equipped with a special game state transition means (a function of executing a game state transition process in the MPU 602 of the main control device 162) for shifting to a special game state (for example, open / close execution mode).
As the normal game state, a first normal game state (a first normal game state corresponding to a low probability mode and a low frequency support mode) and a second normal game state (high) that is more advantageous to the player than the first normal game state. The second normal game state corresponding to the probability mode and the high frequency support mode) and the third normal game state (the third normal game state corresponding to the high probability mode and the low frequency support mode) which is more advantageous to the player than the second normal game state. (Game state) is provided,
A second normal game state transition means (MPU 602 of the main control device 162 executes a process for shifting to the second normal game state) for shifting the game state to the second normal game state upon the end of the special game state. Function to do) and
When shifting to the second normal gaming state by the second normal gaming state transition means, the upper limit setting means (to the MPU 602 of the main control device 162) for setting the upper limit (time reduction number) of the number of games in the second normal game state. Function to set the number of time reductions) and
A third normal game state transition means (main control device 162) that shifts the game state from the second normal game state to the third normal game state based on the number of games played in the second normal game state reaching the upper limit. (Function to execute the process for transitioning to the third normal game state) in MPU602 of
In the second normal game state, the first information (target image TF) indicating the third normal game state, which is the transition destination when the number of games in the second normal game state reaches the upper limit, is notified. 1 Notification means (function to display the target image TF on the display screen 75a) and
In the second normal game state, the second notification means (display screen 75a) for notifying the second information (counter image CF) indicating the number of remaining games until the transition from the second normal game state to the third normal game state is performed. A game machine characterized by having a function of displaying a counter image CF).

According to the feature J2, after shifting from the first normal gaming state to the second normal gaming state through the special gaming state, the number of games played in the second normal gaming state reaches the upper limit, which is higher than that of the second normal gaming state. Further, it shifts to the third normal gaming state which is advantageous to the player. By diversifying the games in this way, it is possible to suppress the monotony of the games and contribute to increasing the degree of attention to the games, but it is expected that the complexity of the games will easily cause confusion for the players. It is feared that this will hinder the effect of improving the degree of attention. In this regard, in the configuration shown in this feature, in the second normal game state, information indicating the number of remaining game times until the transition to the third normal game state and information indicating the transition destination at the time of digestion of the remaining game times are displayed. By displaying the target and the process to the target, the occurrence of the above-mentioned inconvenience can be suppressed, and the effect of improving the degree of attention to the game can be suitably exhibited.

Features J3. A game board (game board 60) in which a game area (game area PE) is formed, and
Information in the special information acquisition means (MPU 602 of the main control device 162) for acquiring special information (holding information) when a ball enters the starting ball entry unit (for example, the right operating port 63a) provided in the game area. Function to execute acquisition process) and
An acquisition information storage means (RAM 604 holding ball storage area 632) capable of storing special information acquired by the special information acquisition means, and
The lottery process is executed by the determination means (MPU 602 of the main control device 162) that sequentially determines whether or not the special information stored in the acquired information storage means corresponds to the predetermined determination information (for example, winning information). Function) and
The game rotation operation (variation display of the pattern on the operating port display units DL and DR) is started prior to the determination being made by the determination means or based on the determination made by the determination means. , The notification result corresponding to the result of the determination and the end of the game rotation operation are regarded as one game time, and the game of each game time is performed according to the special information stored in the acquired information storage means. A game turn control means (for example, a function of executing the game turn control process by the MPU 602 of the main control device 162) that controls the result notification means (display units DL, DR for the operation port) so that the turn operation is performed.
The determination result by the determination means becomes the determination result corresponding to the predetermined determination information, and the gaming state is more advantageous to the player than the normal gaming state based on the completion of the game rotation operation by the game rotation control means. It is equipped with a special game state transition means (a function of executing a game state transition process in the MPU 602 of the main control device 162) for shifting to a special game state (for example, open / close execution mode).
As the normal game state, a first normal game state (a first normal game state corresponding to a low probability mode and a low frequency support mode) and a second normal game state (high) that is more advantageous to the player than the first normal game state. The second normal game state corresponding to the probability mode and the high frequency support mode) and the third normal game state (the third normal game state corresponding to the high probability mode and the low frequency support mode) which is more advantageous to the player than the second normal game state. (Game state) is provided,
A second normal game state transition means (MPU 602 of the main control device 162 executes a process for shifting to the second normal game state) for shifting the game state to the second normal game state upon the end of the special game state. Function to do) and
When shifting to the second normal gaming state by the second normal gaming state transition means, the upper limit setting means (to the MPU 602 of the main control device 162) for setting the upper limit (time reduction number) of the number of games in the second normal game state. Function to set the number of time reductions) and
A third normal game state transition means (main control device 162) that shifts the game state from the second normal game state to the third normal game state based on the number of games played in the second normal game state reaching the upper limit. (Function to execute the process for transitioning to the third normal game state) in MPU602 of
In the second normal game state, the first information (target image TF) indicating the third normal game state, which is the transition destination when the number of games in the second normal game state reaches the upper limit, is notified. 1 Notification means (function to display the target image TF on the display screen 75a) and
In the second normal game state, the second notification means (display screen 75a) for notifying the second information (counter image CF) indicating the process required to shift from the second normal game state to the third normal game state. (Function to display counter image CF) and
A game machine characterized by being equipped with.

According to the feature J3, after shifting from the first normal gaming state to the second normal gaming state through the special gaming state, the number of games played in the second normal gaming state reaches the upper limit, which is higher than that of the second normal gaming state. Further, it shifts to the third normal gaming state which is advantageous to the player. By diversifying the games in this way, it is possible to suppress the monotony of the games and contribute to increasing the degree of attention to the games, but it is expected that the complexity of the games will easily cause confusion for the players. It is feared that this will hinder the effect of improving the degree of attention. In this regard, in the configuration shown in this feature, the occurrence of the above-mentioned inconvenience is suppressed and the degree of attention to the game is improved by displaying the target gaming state and the process to the target in the second normal gaming state. The effect can be suitably exhibited.

Features J4. The game according to feature J2 or feature J3, wherein the second notification means is configured to notify the second information in parallel with the notification of the first information by the first notification means. Machine.

As shown in this feature, the second normal is configured by notifying the second information indicating the process in parallel with the notification of the first information indicating the target, and suppressing the display of the first information alone. It is possible to reduce the chance that the current gaming state is misunderstood as the third normal gaming state from the first information displayed in the gaming state.

Feature J5. A display means (design display device 75) having a display screen (display screen 75a) is provided.
The first notification means and the second notification means are configured to notify the first information and the second information by displaying the first information and the second information on the display screen.
The first notification means has means for changing the display mode (for example, size, color, brightness, etc.) of the first information as the game times in the second normal gaming state approach the upper limit.
The second notifying means is characterized in that it has means for changing the display content (for example, the number of displayed numbers) of the second information as the number of games played in the second normal gaming state approaches the upper limit. The gaming machine according to any one of the feature J2 to the feature J4.

Regarding the second information indicating the number of remaining game times (process), the display content is updated according to the progress of the game times, so that it can be clearly indicated that the transition to the third normal game state is approaching. On the other hand, the display mode of the first information indicating the third normal game state, which is the target, is changed according to the progress of the game times, so that the transition to the third normal game state is approaching. The functions shown can be suitably enhanced.

Features J6. A display means (design display device 75) having a display screen (display screen 75a) is provided.
The first notification means and the second notification means are configured to notify the first information and the second information by displaying the first information and the second information on the display screen.
Changing means (notification / effect control device 143 and) for changing the area ratio between the display area of the first information (transition destination display area TE) and the display area of the second information (remaining number of times display area CE) on the display screen. The gaming machine according to any one of feature J2 to feature J5, which is provided with a function of changing the area ratio in the display control device 710).

In the configuration for displaying the first information and the second information, by changing the area ratio of the display area of each information, it is possible to change the object to be noted with the digestion of the game times. As a result, even if the amount of information provided is large, it can be suitably suppressed that it causes confusion for the player.

Feature J7. The gaming machine according to feature J6, wherein the changing means changes the display area of the first information when the second information becomes predetermined second information set in advance.

The second information will be updated as the digestion of the game times in the second normal game state progresses. Here, if the display area of the first information is changed when the second information becomes the predetermined second information, the two pieces of information can be related. With such a configuration, even when paying attention to the first information, it is possible to easily grasp that the update of the second information has progressed to some extent. For example, when the second information is a counter whose value is updated as the game progresses, the display area of the first information may be changed when the value of the counter reaches a predetermined number.

Features J8. The display area of the second information can be changed to the first area and the second area larger than the first area.
The changing means is characterized in that the display area of the first information is changed when the display area of the second information is changed from one of the first area and the second area to the other. The gaming machine described in J7.

If the display area of the second information is changed in conjunction with the switching of the display area of the second information (first area / second area), the first information and the second information are related to each other to the player. It becomes easier to promote the understanding that it is.

Features J9. The display area of the second information can be changed to a first area and a second area larger than the first area.
The display area of the first information can be changed to a third area and a fourth area larger than the third area.
After changing the display area of the second information from the first area to the second area, the changing means changes the display area of the first information from the third area to the first area again. The gaming machine according to any one of feature J6 to feature J8, characterized in that the configuration is such that the change to the third area is not performed after the change to the fourth area.

When the first information and the second information are displayed on the display screen, the occupied area on the display screen increases as the amount of displayed information increases. Although it is effective to expand the information display area in order to improve the degree of attention to the information, the occupied area is further increased by expanding the display area. This is expected to be a factor that puts pressure on the area where other information is displayed on the display screen. In this regard, as shown in this feature, the first information indicating the target appeals that the target is approaching by increasing the size of the display area, while the second information indicating the process is temporary. By appealing the update of information by expanding the display area, it is possible to preferably suppress that the occupied area on the display screen becomes excessively large in order to exert the notification function.

Features J10. The changing means has a means for changing the display area of the first information and a means for changing the display area for the second information, and the display area for the first information is changed and the display area for the second information is changed. The gaming machine according to feature J6, which is configured to be able to execute the change of the above at different timings.

In a configuration in which the first information and the second information are displayed together, it is feared that the need to visually check the two pieces of information at the same time will increase the burden on the player. Therefore, as shown in this feature, if the timing of changing the display area can be changed, it is possible to guide the line of sight to information of interest, which can contribute to suppressing the occurrence of the above-mentioned inconvenience.

Features J11. The second notification means is configured to start the notification of the second information when shifting to the second normal gaming state and end the notification when shifting to the third normal gaming state.
The first notification means is configured to start the notification of the first information when shifting to the second normal gaming state and to continue the notification even after the transition to the third normal gaming state. The gaming machine according to any one of the feature J2 to the feature J10.

According to the feature J11, the first information and the second information are notified in the second normal state, and the notification of the first information is completed by shifting to the third normal gaming state, whereas the notification of the second information is It will be continued. In this way, by continuing the notification of the second information even in the third normal gaming state, it is possible to clearly convey what the second information indicates to the player.

It is also possible to apply the technical ideas shown in the features J3 to J11 to the above features J1. In this case, the "information notification means" shown in the feature J1 may be the same as the "second notification means" shown in the feature J3 and the like.

Features J12. A game board (game board 60) in which a game area (game area PE) is formed, and
Information in the special information acquisition means (MPU 602 of the main control device 162) for acquiring special information (holding information) when a ball enters the starting ball entry unit (for example, the right operating port 63a) provided in the game area. Function to execute acquisition process) and
An acquisition information storage means (RAM 604 holding ball storage area 632) capable of storing special information acquired by the special information acquisition means, and
The lottery process is executed by the determination means (MPU 602 of the main control device 162) that sequentially determines whether or not the special information stored in the acquired information storage means corresponds to the predetermined determination information (for example, winning information). Function) and
The game rotation operation (variation display of the pattern on the operating port display units DL and DR) is started prior to the determination being made by the determination means or based on the determination made by the determination means. , The notification result corresponding to the result of the determination and the end of the game rotation operation are regarded as one game time, and the game of each game time is performed according to the special information stored in the acquired information storage means. A game turn control means (for example, a function of executing the game turn control process by the MPU 602 of the main control device 162) that controls the result notification means (display units DL, DR for the operation port) so that the turn operation is performed.
The determination result by the determination means becomes the determination result corresponding to the predetermined determination information, and the gaming state is more advantageous to the player than the normal gaming state based on the completion of the game rotation operation by the game rotation control means. It is equipped with a special game state transition means (a function of executing a game state transition process in the MPU 602 of the main control device 162) for shifting to a special game state (for example, open / close execution mode).
As the normal game state, a first normal game state (a first normal game state corresponding to a low probability mode and a low frequency support mode) and a second normal game state (high) that is more advantageous to the player than the first normal game state. The second normal game state corresponding to the probability mode and the high frequency support mode) and the third normal game state (the third normal game state corresponding to the high probability mode and the low frequency support mode) which is more advantageous to the player than the second normal game state. (Game state) is provided,
A second normal game state transition means (MPU 602 of the main control device 162 executes a process for shifting to the second normal game state) for shifting the game state to the second normal game state upon the end of the special game state. Function to do) and
When shifting to the second normal gaming state by the second normal gaming state transition means, the upper limit setting means (to the MPU 602 of the main control device 162) for setting the upper limit (time reduction number) of the number of games in the second normal game state. Function to set the number of time reductions) and
A third normal game state transition means (main control device 162) that shifts the game state from the second normal game state to the third normal game state based on the number of games played in the second normal game state reaching the upper limit. (Function to execute the process for transitioning to the third normal game state) in MPU602 of
In the second normal game state, the first information (target image TF) indicating the third normal game state, which is the transition destination when the number of games in the second normal game state reaches the upper limit, and the first information. The target image TF and the counter image CF are displayed on the notification means (display screen 75a) for notifying the second information (counter image CF) indicating the number of remaining games until the transition from the 2 normal game state to the 3 normal game state. A game machine characterized by having a function).

According to the feature J12, after shifting from the first normal gaming state to the second normal gaming state through the special gaming state, the number of games played in the second normal gaming state reaches the upper limit, which is higher than that of the second normal gaming state. Further, it shifts to the third normal gaming state which is advantageous to the player. By diversifying the games in this way, it is possible to suppress the monotony of the games and contribute to increasing the degree of attention to the games, but it is expected that the complexity of the games will easily cause confusion for the players. It is feared that this will hinder the effect of improving the degree of attention. In this regard, in the configuration shown in this feature, in the second normal game state, information indicating the number of remaining game times until the transition to the third normal game state and information indicating the transition destination at the time of digestion of the remaining game times are displayed. By displaying the target and the process to the target, the occurrence of the above-mentioned inconvenience can be suppressed, and the effect of improving the degree of attention to the game can be suitably exhibited.

Feature J13. A game board (game board 60) in which a game area (game area PE) is formed, and
Information in the special information acquisition means (MPU 602 of the main control device 162) for acquiring special information (holding information) when a ball enters the starting ball entry unit (for example, the right operating port 63a) provided in the game area. Function to execute acquisition process) and
An acquisition information storage means (RAM 604 holding ball storage area 632) capable of storing special information acquired by the special information acquisition means, and
The lottery process is executed by the determination means (MPU 602 of the main control device 162) that sequentially determines whether or not the special information stored in the acquired information storage means corresponds to the predetermined determination information (for example, winning information). Function) and
The game rotation operation (variation display of the pattern on the operating port display units DL and DR) is started prior to the determination being made by the determination means or based on the determination made by the determination means. , The notification result corresponding to the result of the determination and the end of the game rotation operation are regarded as one game time, and the game of each game time is performed according to the special information stored in the acquired information storage means. A game turn control means (for example, a function of executing the game turn control process by the MPU 602 of the main control device 162) that controls the result notification means (display units DL, DR for the operation port) so that the turn operation is performed.
The determination result by the determination means becomes the determination result corresponding to the predetermined determination information, and the gaming state is more advantageous to the player than the normal gaming state based on the completion of the game rotation operation by the game rotation control means. It is equipped with a special game state transition means (a function of executing a game state transition process in the MPU 602 of the main control device 162) for shifting to a special game state (for example, open / close execution mode).
As the normal game state, a first normal game state (a first normal game state corresponding to a low probability mode and a low frequency support mode) and a second normal game state (high) that is more advantageous to the player than the first normal game state. The second normal game state corresponding to the probability mode and the high frequency support mode) and the third normal game state (the third normal game state corresponding to the high probability mode and the low frequency support mode) which is more advantageous to the player than the second normal game state. (Game state) is provided,
A second normal game state transition means (MPU 602 of the main control device 162 executes a process for shifting to the second normal game state) for shifting the game state to the second normal game state upon the end of the special game state. Function to do) and
When shifting to the second normal gaming state by the second normal gaming state transition means, the upper limit setting means (to the MPU 602 of the main control device 162) for setting the upper limit (time reduction number) of the number of games in the second normal game state. Function to set the number of time reductions) and
A third normal game state transition means (main control device 162) that shifts the game state from the second normal game state to the third normal game state based on the number of games played in the second normal game state reaching the upper limit. (Function to execute the process for transitioning to the third normal game state) in MPU602 of
In the second normal game state, the first information (target image TF) indicating the third normal game state, which is the transition destination when the number of games in the second normal game state reaches the upper limit, and the first information. The target image TF and the counter image CF are displayed on the notification means (display screen 75a) for notifying the second information (counter image CF) indicating the process required to shift from the 2 normal game state to the 3 normal game state. A game machine characterized by having a function).

According to the feature J13, after shifting from the first normal gaming state to the second normal gaming state through the special gaming state, the number of games played in the second normal gaming state reaches the upper limit, which is higher than that of the second normal gaming state. Further, it shifts to the third normal gaming state which is advantageous to the player. By diversifying the games in this way, it is possible to suppress the monotony of the games and contribute to increasing the degree of attention to the games, but it is expected that the complexity of the games will easily cause confusion for the players. It is feared that this will hinder the effect of improving the degree of attention. In this regard, in the configuration shown in this feature, the occurrence of the above-mentioned inconvenience is suppressed and the degree of attention to the game is improved by displaying the target gaming state and the process to the target in the second normal gaming state. The effect can be suitably exhibited.

It is also possible to apply the technical ideas shown in the features J4 to J11 to the features J12 and J13. In this case, the "first notification means" and the "second notification means" shown in the features J4 to J11 may be the same as the "notification means" shown in the present feature.

Further, each technical idea shown in the features J1 to J13 may be applied to the above-mentioned features A to H.

<Characteristic K group>
The following feature K group is described as "a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine has a gaming board in which a gaming area is formed and a gaming ball launching means for launching a gaming ball into the gaming area based on a firing operation by a player. Some of them are provided. When a game ball launched from a game ball launching means enters a ball entry portion provided in the game area, a privilege such as paying out a predetermined number of game balls is given to the player. Regarding the background technology of "(for example, see Patent Document 1)", there is an invention that "in the above-mentioned type of gaming machine, there is still room for improvement in its configuration in order to increase the degree of attention to the game." It was made with the problem to be solved.

Features K1. A game board (game board 60) in which a game area (game area PE) is formed, and
Information in the special information acquisition means (MPU 602 of the main control device 162) for acquiring special information (holding information) when a ball enters the starting ball entry unit (for example, the right operating port 63a) provided in the game area. Function to execute acquisition process) and
An acquisition information storage means (RAM 604 holding ball storage area 632) capable of storing special information acquired by the special information acquisition means, and
The lottery process is executed by the determination means (MPU 602 of the main control device 162) that sequentially determines whether or not the special information stored in the acquired information storage means corresponds to the predetermined determination information (for example, winning information). Function) and
The game rotation operation (variation display of the pattern on the operating port display units DL and DR) is started prior to the determination being made by the determination means or based on the determination made by the determination means. , The notification result corresponding to the result of the determination and the end of the game rotation operation are regarded as one game time, and the game of each game time is performed according to the special information stored in the acquired information storage means. A game turn control means (for example, a function of executing a game turn control process by the MPU 602 of the main control device 162) that controls the notification means (display units DL, DR for the operation port) so that the turn operation is performed.
The determination result by the determination means becomes the determination result corresponding to the predetermined determination information, and the gaming state is more advantageous to the player than the normal gaming state based on the completion of the game rotation operation by the game rotation control means. It is equipped with a special game state transition means (a function of executing a game state transition process in the MPU 602 of the main control device 162) for shifting to a special game state (for example, open / close execution mode).
As the normal game state, a first normal game state (a first normal game state corresponding to a low probability mode and a low frequency support mode) and a second normal game state (high) that is more advantageous to the player than the first normal game state. The second normal game state corresponding to the probability mode and the high frequency support mode) and the third normal game state (the third normal game state corresponding to the high probability mode and the low frequency support mode) which is more advantageous to the player than the second normal game state. (Game state) is provided,
A second normal game state transition means (MPU 602 of the main control device 162 executes a process for shifting to the second normal game state) for shifting the game state to the second normal game state upon the end of the special game state. Function to do) and
When shifting to the second normal gaming state by the second normal gaming state transition means, the upper limit setting means (to the MPU 602 of the main control device 162) for setting the upper limit (time reduction number) of the number of games in the second normal game state. Function to set the number of time reductions) and
A third normal game state transition means (main control device 162) that shifts the game state from the second normal game state to the third normal game state based on the number of games played in the second normal game state reaching the upper limit. (Function to execute the process for transitioning to the third normal game state) in MPU602 of
A display means (design display device 75) having a display screen (display screen 75a) and
In the case of the second normal game state, the suggestion image (target image TF and restraint image LF) suggesting the transition to the third normal game state is displayed on the display screen. It is provided with display control means (notification / effect control device 143 and display control device 710) that controls the display of the display means.
The display control means is a display range changing means (target image TF by the notification / effect control device 143) that changes the display range of the suggested image on the display screen as the number of games played in the second normal gaming state approaches the upper limit. A gaming machine characterized in that it has a function of changing the display range of the restraint image LF).

According to the feature K1, after shifting from the first normal gaming state to the second normal gaming state through the special gaming state, the number of games played in the second normal gaming state reaches the upper limit, which is higher than that of the second normal gaming state. Further, it shifts to the third normal gaming state which is advantageous to the player. In the second normal game state, a suggestion image suggesting a transition to the third normal game state is displayed, and the display range of this suggestion image is changed as the number of games in the second normal game state approaches the upper limit. With such a configuration, it is possible to suggest to the player who expects the transition to the third normal gaming state that the player is approaching the third normal gaming state, and to promote the improvement of the degree of attention to the game. it can.

In addition, the configuration shown in this feature is defined as "a game board (game board 60) in which a game area (game area PE) is formed" and a starting ball entry portion (for example, a right operating port 63a) provided in the game area. Special information acquisition means (a function of executing information acquisition processing in MPU 602 of the main control device 162) for acquiring special information (holding information) when a ball enters, and special information acquired by the special information acquisition means. It is determined whether or not the acquired information storage means (RAM 604 holding ball storage area 632) capable of storing the information and the special information stored in the acquired information storage means correspond to predetermined determination information (for example, winning information). A pattern having a determination means (a function of executing a lottery process by the MPU 602 of the main control device 162) and a display unit (for example, a display unit DR for an operating port), and a design capable of variably displaying a pattern on the display unit. The display means (for example, the main display unit 81) and the pattern display means start variable display of the pattern prior to the determination being made by the determination means or based on the determination being made by the determination means. The stop result corresponding to the result of the determination is displayed, and the variable display of the pattern is terminated as one game time, and each game time is determined according to the special information stored in the acquired information storage means. The game time control means (for example, the function of executing the game time control process by the MPU 602 of the main control device 162) that controls the pattern display means so that the pattern of the above pattern is variably displayed, and the determination result by the determination means are predetermined. Based on the determination result corresponding to the determination information of the above and the stop display of the pattern corresponding to the determination result by the game turn control means, the gaming state is changed to a special gaming state (for example, more advantageous to the player than the normal gaming state). It is equipped with a special game state transition means (a function of executing a game state transition process in the MPU 602 of the main control device 162) to shift to the open / close execution mode), and as the normal game state, the first normal game state (low probability). A first normal game state corresponding to a mode and a low frequency support mode) and a second normal game state (a second normal game state corresponding to a high probability mode and a high frequency support mode) which is more advantageous to the player than the first normal game state. ) And a third normal game state (a third normal game state corresponding to a high probability mode and a low frequency support mode) that is more advantageous to the player than the second normal game state, and the special game state is provided. The second normal game state transition means (MPU of the main control device 162) that shifts the game state to the second normal game state with the end of (Function of executing the process for shifting to the second normal gaming state in 602) and the game in the second normal gaming state when shifting to the second normal gaming state by the second normal gaming state shifting means). Based on the upper limit setting means for setting the upper limit of the number of times (the number of time reductions) (the function of setting the number of time reductions in the MPU 602 of the main control device 162) and the number of games in the second normal gaming state reaching the upper limit. A function of executing a process for shifting to the third normal game state by the third normal game state transition means (MPU 602 of the main control device 162) for shifting the game state from the second normal game state to the third normal game state. ) And a display screen (display screen 75a), and a suggestion image (target image TF and) suggesting a transition to the third normal gaming state on the display screen when the second normal gaming state is reached. The suggestion image display means (symbol display device 75) for displaying the restraint image LF) and the size of the display range of the suggestion image on the display screen as the number of game times in the second normal game state approaches the upper limit. A gaming machine characterized in that it is provided with a display range changing means (a function of changing the display range of the target image TF and the restraint image LF by the notification / effect control device 143). It is also possible to say.

Feature K2. A game board (game board 60) in which a game area (game area PE) is formed, and
Information in the special information acquisition means (MPU 602 of the main control device 162) for acquiring special information (holding information) when a ball enters the starting ball entry unit (for example, the right operating port 63a) provided in the game area. Function to execute acquisition process) and
An acquisition information storage means (RAM 604 holding ball storage area 632) capable of storing special information acquired by the special information acquisition means, and
The lottery process is executed by the determination means (MPU 602 of the main control device 162) that sequentially determines whether or not the special information stored in the acquired information storage means corresponds to the predetermined determination information (for example, winning information). Function) and
The game rotation operation (variation display of the pattern on the operating port display units DL and DR) is started prior to the determination being made by the determination means or based on the determination made by the determination means. , The notification result corresponding to the result of the determination and the end of the game rotation operation are regarded as one game time, and the game of each game time is performed according to the special information stored in the acquired information storage means. A game turn control means (for example, a function of executing the game turn control process by the MPU 602 of the main control device 162) that controls the notification means (to the display units DL and DR for the operation port) so that the turn operation is performed.
The determination result by the determination means becomes the determination result corresponding to the predetermined determination information, and the gaming state is made more advantageous to the player than the normal gaming state based on the completion of the game rotation operation by the game rotation control means. It is equipped with a special game state transition means (a function of executing a game state transition process in the MPU 602 of the main control device 162) to shift to a game state (for example, open / close execution mode).
As the normal game state, a first normal game state (a first normal game state corresponding to a low probability mode and a low frequency support mode) and a second normal game state (high) that is more advantageous to the player than the first normal game state. The second normal game state corresponding to the probability mode and the high frequency support mode) and the third normal game state (the third normal game state corresponding to the high probability mode and the low frequency support mode) which is more advantageous to the player than the second normal game state. (Game state) is provided,
A second normal game state transition means (MPU 602 of the main control device 162 executes a process for shifting to the second normal game state) for shifting the game state to the second normal game state upon the end of the special game state. Function to do) and
When shifting to the second normal gaming state by the second normal gaming state transition means, the upper limit setting means (to the MPU 602 of the main control device 162) for setting the upper limit (time reduction number) of the number of games in the second normal game state. Function to set the number of time reductions) and
A third normal game state transition means (main control device 162) that shifts the game state from the second normal game state to the third normal game state based on the number of games played in the second normal game state reaching the upper limit. (Function to execute the process for transitioning to the third normal game state) in MPU602 of
A display means (design display device 75) having a display screen (display screen 75a) and
It is provided with display control means (notification / effect control device 143 and display control device 710) that controls the display of the display means.
The display control means
A means for displaying a pattern corresponding to the determination result by the determination means on the display screen, and
A means for displaying a suggestion image (target image TF and restraint image LF) suggesting a transition to the third normal game state on the display screen when the second normal game state is set.
As the number of games played in the second normal gaming state approaches the upper limit, the display range of the suggested image (transition destination display area TE) and the display range of the pattern (second variable display area ME2 and third variable display) on the display screen. It has a display range changing means (a function of changing the display range of the target image TF and the constrained image LF by the notification / effect control device 143) to change the display range so that the area ratio with the area ME3) changes. A game machine characterized by being.

According to the feature K2, after shifting from the first normal gaming state to the second normal gaming state through the special gaming state, the number of games played in the second normal gaming state reaches the upper limit, which is higher than that of the second normal gaming state. Further, it shifts to the third normal gaming state which is advantageous to the player. In the second normal game state, a suggestion image suggesting a transition to the third normal game state is displayed, and the display range of this suggestion image is changed as the number of games in the second normal game state approaches the upper limit. With such a configuration, it is possible to suggest to the player who expects the transition to the third normal gaming state that the player is approaching the third normal gaming state, and to promote the improvement of the degree of attention to the game. it can.

On the display screen, not only the suggestion image but also the pattern corresponding to the determination result is displayed. In the configuration in which the suggestion image and the pattern are displayed on the display screen in this way, the suggestion function can be strengthened by the cooperation of both by changing the area ratio of the suggestion image and the pattern.

Feature K3. The display range changing means sets the display range of the suggested image to a predetermined display range (for example, the maximum display range) when the number of games in the second normal game state reaches the upper limit and shifts to the third normal game state. The first changing means for expanding the image so as to be, and the second method for gradually expanding the display range of the suggested image within a range not exceeding the predetermined display range as the number of games played in the second normal gaming state approaches the upper limit. The gaming machine according to feature K1 or feature K2, characterized in that it has a changing means.

As shown in feature K3, if the suggestion image is gradually enlarged to approach the maximum display, the suggestion image becomes more noticeable as the number of games approaches the upper limit, and the attention-improving effect shown in feature K1 and the like can be obtained. It can be suitably exerted.

If the configuration shown in this feature is applied to a gaming machine of a type that displays a pattern or the like corresponding to the judgment result on the display screen, the player's attention is directed to the suggested image, and the pattern does not correspond to the predetermined judgment information. Even if the display is repeated, it is possible to suppress that it becomes a factor that lowers the player's motivation to play the game with the expectation that the determination result corresponding to the predetermined determination information will be obtained.

Features K4. The gaming machine according to feature K3, wherein the second changing means enlarges the suggested image so that the display range of the suggested image before the change is included in the display range of the suggested image after the change. ..

If the display range after the change includes the display range before the change as shown in the feature K4, the amount of movement of the player's line of sight that is gazing at the suggestion image in the process is reduced as it approaches the upper limit. Can be done. This is advantageous in reducing the chance of missing changes in the suggestive image. With a configuration that reduces the chances of oversight in this way, it is not necessary to make the amount of change in the size of the suggested image excessively large, and even if the upper limit is set for the size of the suggested image, the suggestion is made. The number of times the image size is changed can be suitably increased.

Feature K5. The display screen is configured to display a pattern corresponding to the determination result by the determination means.
The display range changing means is configured to gradually expand the display range of the suggested image as the number of games played in the second normal gaming state approaches the upper limit.
The display control means is characterized by having means for hiding the pattern when the display range of the suggested image is expanded to a range including at least a part of the display range of the pattern. The gaming machine according to any one of K1 to feature K4.

According to the configuration shown in this feature, in a configuration in which a pattern corresponding to the judgment result is displayed on the display screen, the suggestion image appears as if it has eroded the display range of the pattern, thereby entering the third normal gaming state. It can be preferably suggested that the transition is near. As described above, one of the requirements for the transition to the third normal gaming state is that the determination result does not correspond to the predetermined determination information. However, for players who are expecting to have predetermined judgment information, it is feared that emphasizing that the judgment result does not correspond to the predetermined judgment information will be a factor to reduce the motivation to play. To. Therefore, it is emphasized that when the game in the second normal game state progresses to some extent, the display range of the pattern is eroded by the suggestion image and the pattern is hidden, resulting in a determination result that does not correspond to the predetermined determination information. It can be avoided and the occurrence of the above inconvenience can be suitably suppressed.

Feature K6. The display control means has a means for setting a game turn for changing the display range of the suggested image based on the upper limit set by the upper limit setting means. The gaming machine described in any one.

In a configuration in which the second normal gaming state ends when the upper limit is reached, the opportunity to expand the display range depends on the upper limit. Therefore, by setting in advance the game times for changing the display range according to the upper limit as shown in this feature, it is possible to properly change the display range (enlarged display).

Feature K7. The suggested image includes a character portion (target image TF) indicating the third normal gaming state and a plurality of decorative portions (restraint image LF) displayed so as to overlap the character portion.
Described in any one of the feature K1 to the feature K6, wherein the display control means has a number changing means for changing the number of the decorative portions in accordance with a change in the display range of the suggested image. Game machine.

As shown in this feature, the number of decorative parts attached to the character image is changed according to the change of the display range, so that even if the difference before and after the change of the display range is small, it can be changed. Can reduce the chances of being overlooked. This is preferable in order to diversify the mode of changing the display range.

Feature K8. The display range changing means is configured to gradually expand the display range of the suggested image as the number of games played in the second normal gaming state approaches the upper limit.
The decorative portion is an image configured to be recognized by the player as hindering the enlargement of the character portion.
The gaming machine according to feature K7, wherein the number changing means is configured to reduce the number of the decorative portions in accordance with the expansion of the display range of the suggested image.

As shown in this feature, by reducing the number of decorative parts that are configured to be recognized as hindering the expansion as the display range expands, it is preferable to promote the understanding that the upper limit is approaching. Can be done.

Feature K9. The display range changing means is any one of the feature K1 to the feature K8, which is configured to change the display range with the start of the game turning operation by the game turning control means. The game machine described in.

When changing the display range as shown in the feature K1 or the like, it is preferable to secure a certain change period in order to appeal the change. Therefore, as shown in this feature, by changing the display range at the start of the game rotation operation, the operation period of the game rotation operation can be used as the change period of the display range, which is a practically preferable configuration. Can be realized.

Feature K10. The gaming machine according to feature K9, wherein the display range changing means makes the change regardless of the determination result by the determination means in the game times for changing the display range of the suggested image.

In the gaming machine of the type shown in the feature K1 or the like, the challenge to the third normal gaming state may end due to a big hit result or the like during the second normal gaming state. Here, if the change in the display range is avoided based on the jackpot result or the like even though the display range is supposed to be changed, it becomes a stepping stone to the above. The end of the challenge will be revealed early. Therefore, in the configuration in which the display range is changed at the start of the game rotation operation as shown in the feature K9, the occurrence of the above inconvenience can be suitably suppressed by changing the display range regardless of the determination result.

The technical ideas shown in the features K1 to K10 may be applied to the features A to J.

<Characteristic L group>
The following feature L group is described in that "a game machine such as a pachinko machine has a game board in which a game area is formed and a game ball launching means for launching a game ball into the game area based on a launch operation by a player. Some of them are provided. When a game ball launched from a game ball launching means enters a ball entry portion provided in the game area, a privilege such as paying out a predetermined number of game balls is given to the player. Regarding the background technology of "(for example, see Patent Document 1)", there is an invention that "in the above-mentioned type of gaming machine, there is still room for improvement in its configuration in order to increase the degree of attention to the game." It was made with the problem to be solved.

Feature L1. A game board (game board 60) in which a game area (game area PE) is formed, and
Information in the special information acquisition means (MPU 602 of the main control device 162) for acquiring special information (holding information) when a ball enters the starting ball entry unit (for example, the right operating port 63a) provided in the game area. Function to execute acquisition process) and
An acquisition information storage means (RAM 604 holding ball storage area 632) capable of storing special information acquired by the special information acquisition means, and
The lottery process is executed by the determination means (MPU 602 of the main control device 162) that sequentially determines whether or not the special information stored in the acquired information storage means corresponds to the predetermined determination information (for example, winning information). Function) and
The game rotation operation (variation display of the pattern on the operating port display units DL and DR) is started prior to the determination being made by the determination means or based on the determination made by the determination means. , The notification result corresponding to the result of the determination and the end of the game rotation operation are regarded as one game time, and the game of each game time is performed according to the special information stored in the acquired information storage means. A game turn control means (for example, a function of executing a game turn control process by the MPU 602 of the main control device 162) that controls the notification means (display units DL, DR for the operation port) so that the turn operation is performed.
The determination result by the determination means becomes the determination result corresponding to the predetermined determination information, and the gaming state is more advantageous to the player than the normal gaming state based on the completion of the game rotation operation by the game rotation control means. It is equipped with a special game state transition means (a function of executing a game state transition process in the MPU 602 of the main control device 162) for shifting to a special game state (for example, open / close execution mode).
As the normal game state, a first normal game state (a first normal game state corresponding to a low probability mode and a low frequency support mode) and a second normal game state (high) that is more advantageous to the player than the first normal game state. The second normal game state corresponding to the probability mode and the high frequency support mode) and the third normal game state (the third normal game state corresponding to the high probability mode and the low frequency support mode) which is more advantageous to the player than the second normal game state. (Game state) is provided,
As the predetermined determination information, it has the first information (information corresponding to the jackpot result) and the second information (information corresponding to the special hit result).
When the determination result by the determination means becomes the determination result corresponding to the first information and shifts to the special gaming state, the gaming state is shifted to the second normal gaming state with the end of the special gaming state. The second normal game state transition means (a function of executing the process for shifting to the second normal game state by the MPU 602 of the main control device 162) and
When shifting to the second normal gaming state by the second normal gaming state transition means, the upper limit setting means (to the MPU 602 of the main control device 162) for setting the upper limit (time reduction number) of the number of games in the second normal game state. Function to set the number of time reductions) and
In the second normal game state, the game state is determined based on the fact that the number of games in the second normal game state reaches the upper limit without the judgment result by the determination means becoming the judgment result corresponding to the first information. A third normal game state transition means for shifting from the second normal game state to the third normal game state (a function of executing a process for shifting to the third normal game state in the MPU 602 of the main control device 162) and
A picture display having a display screen (for example, a display screen 75a) and capable of variably displaying a picture (for example, a picture) in a predetermined display area (for example, the second variable display area ME2 or the third variable display area ME3) on the display screen. Means (for example, symbol display device 75) and
The pattern display means started variable display of the pattern prior to the determination by the determination means or based on the determination by the determination means, and corresponded to the determination result by the determination means. It is equipped with a display control means (for example, a notification / effect control device 143 or a display control device 710) for stopping and displaying a pattern.
As the predetermined display area, a first display area (second variable display area ME2) and a second display area (third variable display area ME3) larger than the first display area are provided.
The display control means corresponds to the determination result of the determination means in both the first display area and the second display area in the game times other than the final game times corresponding to the upper limit in the second normal game state. While the pattern is stopped and displayed, in the final game round in the second normal gaming state, the pattern corresponding to the result of the determination is stopped in the first display area of the first display area and the second display area. A gaming machine characterized in that it is configured to be displayed.

In the configuration shown in the feature L1, the judgment result (for example, the jackpot result) corresponding to the predetermined judgment information is not obtained in the final game round when the upper limit is reached in the second normal game state (for example, a deviation result or a special hit result). That) is the condition for transition to the third normal gaming state. Here, if it is premised that the game state is favorable to the player on the condition that the judgment result corresponds to the predetermined judgment information as shown in this feature, the predetermined judgment information It is assumed that the fact that the judgment results other than the judgment results corresponding to the above are emphasized and displayed is a factor that gives the player a sense of discomfort. That is, there is a concern that the effect of increasing the degree of attention to the game will not be exhibited well due to the diversification of the game. Therefore, as shown in this feature, in the final game round, the determination result is not intentionally displayed in the relatively large second display area, and the determination result is displayed only in the relatively small first display area. Therefore, the occurrence of such inconvenience can be suppressed. As a result, the effect of improving the degree of attention to the game due to the diversification of the game can be suitably exhibited.

Feature L2. A game board (game board 60) in which a game area (game area PE) is formed, and
Information in the special information acquisition means (MPU 602 of the main control device 162) for acquiring special information (holding information) when a ball enters the starting ball entry unit (for example, the right operating port 63a) provided in the game area. Function to execute acquisition process) and
An acquisition information storage means (RAM 604 holding ball storage area 632) capable of storing special information acquired by the special information acquisition means, and
The lottery process is executed by the determination means (MPU 602 of the main control device 162) that sequentially determines whether or not the special information stored in the acquired information storage means corresponds to the predetermined determination information (for example, winning information). Function) and
The game rotation operation (variation display of the pattern on the operating port display units DL and DR) is started prior to the determination being made by the determination means or based on the determination made by the determination means. , The notification result corresponding to the result of the determination and the end of the game rotation operation are regarded as one game time, and the game of each game time is performed according to the special information stored in the acquired information storage means. A game turn control means (for example, a function of executing a game turn control process by the MPU 602 of the main control device 162) that controls the notification means (display units DL, DR for the operation port) so that the turn operation is performed.
The determination result by the determination means becomes the determination result corresponding to the predetermined determination information, and the gaming state is more advantageous to the player than the normal gaming state based on the completion of the game rotation operation by the game rotation control means. It is equipped with a special game state transition means (a function of executing a game state transition process in the MPU 602 of the main control device 162) for shifting to a special game state (for example, open / close execution mode).
As the normal game state, a first normal game state (a first normal game state corresponding to a low probability mode and a low frequency support mode) and a second normal game state (high) that is more advantageous to the player than the first normal game state. The second normal game state corresponding to the probability mode and the high frequency support mode) and the third normal game state (the third normal game state corresponding to the high probability mode and the low frequency support mode) which is more advantageous to the player than the second normal game state. (Game state) is provided,
As the predetermined determination information, the first information (information corresponding to the jackpot result) and the second information (information corresponding to the special hit result) are included.
When the determination result by the determination means becomes the determination result corresponding to the first information and shifts to the special gaming state, the gaming state is shifted to the second normal gaming state with the end of the special gaming state. The second normal game state transition means (a function of executing the process for shifting to the second normal game state by the MPU 602 of the main control device 162) and
When shifting to the second normal gaming state by the second normal gaming state transition means, the upper limit setting means (to the MPU 602 of the main control device 162) for setting the upper limit (time reduction number) of the number of games in the second normal game state. Function to set the number of time reductions) and
In the second normal gaming state, the gaming state is determined based on the fact that the number of games played in the second normal gaming state reaches the upper limit without the determination result by the determination means becoming the determination result corresponding to the first information. A third normal game state transition means for shifting from the second normal game state to the third normal game state (a function of executing a process for shifting to the third normal game state in the MPU 602 of the main control device 162) and
A design display means (for example, a design display device 75) having a display screen (for example, a display screen 75a) and capable of variably displaying a design in a predetermined display area on the display screen.
The pattern display means starts variable display of the pattern prior to the determination by the determination means or based on the determination by the determination means, and the pattern corresponding to the result of the determination is displayed. It is provided with a display control means (for example, a notification / effect control device 143 or a display control device 710) for displaying a stop.
As the predetermined display area, a first display area (second variable display area ME2) and a second display area (third variable display area ME3) larger than the first display area are provided.
When the display control means obtains a determination result (for example, a jackpot result) corresponding to the first information in the final game times corresponding to the upper limit in the second normal gaming state, the first display area and the display control means. The pattern corresponding to the determination result is stopped and displayed in both of the second display areas, and the determination result corresponding to the second information (for example, the special hit result) or the determination not corresponding to the predetermined determination information in the final game round. When a result (for example, an out-of-order result) is obtained, the pattern corresponding to the determination result is stopped and displayed in the first display area of the first display area and the second display area. A featured game machine.

In the configuration shown in the feature L2, the judgment result (for example, the jackpot result) corresponding to the first information is not obtained in the final game round when the upper limit is reached in the second normal game state (for example, the result is a missed result or a special hit result). ) Is the condition for transition to the third normal game state. Here, if it is premised that the game state is favorable to the player on the condition that the determination result corresponding to the first information is obtained as shown in this feature, the first information is supported. It is emphasized that the judgment result other than the judgment result, that is, the judgment result corresponding to the second information (for example, the special hit result) or the judgment result not corresponding to the predetermined judgment information (for example, the deviation result) is displayed. Is expected to be a factor that gives the player a sense of discomfort. That is, there is a concern that the effect of increasing the degree of attention to the game will not be exhibited well due to the diversification of the game. Therefore, as shown in this feature, when the determination result corresponding to the first information is obtained in the final game round, the pattern corresponding to the determination result is stopped and displayed in both the first display area and the second display area. On the other hand, when the judgment result corresponding to the second information or the judgment result not corresponding to the predetermined judgment information is obtained, the pattern corresponding to the judgment result is not intentionally displayed in the relatively large second display area, and is relative. By configuring the display in a small first display area, it is possible to suppress the occurrence of such inconvenience. As a result, the effect of improving the degree of attention to the game due to the diversification of the game can be suitably exhibited.

Feature L3. The display control means determines in both the first display area and the second display area regardless of the determination result by the determination means in the game times other than the predetermined game times in the second normal gaming state. The gaming machine according to feature L2, which is configured to stop and display a pattern corresponding to.

According to the feature L3, in the game times other than the final game time, the pattern corresponding to the determination result is stopped and displayed in both the first display area and the second display area. In order to use both the first display area and the second display area in this way, the relationship between the two display areas is communicated to the player until the final game round, and the pattern in the second display area is hidden. Even if it becomes, there is a technical significance that it can be suppressed from becoming a factor that confuses the player.

Feature L4. In the final game round in the second normal gaming state, the display control means stops and displays a pattern corresponding to the result of the determination means in the first display area of the first display area and the second display area. The gaming machine according to any one of the feature L1 to the feature L3, characterized in that the pattern in the second display area is hidden when the pattern is to be displayed.

As shown in feature L4, if the pattern in the second display area is hidden in advance, for example, a place where a still image, a moving image, or the like suggesting a transition to the third normal gaming state is displayed in the second display area and Time can be secured favorably. Further, if the pattern in the second display area is hidden as shown in this feature, for example, the pattern in the second display area remains fluctuating, or the pattern stopped and displayed in the previous game round remains as it is. It is avoided to become. This is preferable in order to prevent the player from being confused due to a discrepancy in the display of the first display area and the second display area.

In addition, the configuration shown in this feature is, for example, "the display control means is a determination result corresponding to the second information or a determination result not corresponding to the predetermined determination information in the final game times in the second normal gaming state." If this happens, the feature L2 or the feature L2 is characterized in that the pattern displayed in the second display area is hidden before the pattern in the predetermined game times is stopped and displayed in the first display area. The gaming machine described in the feature L3. "

Feature L5. The display control means stops and displays a pattern corresponding to the result of the determination in the first display area of the first display area and the second display area in the final game round in the second normal game state. In this case, any one of the feature L1 to the feature L3, which is characterized in that the pattern in the second display area is not variably displayed and is hidden based on the start of the game round operation in the final game round. The game machine described in.

According to the feature L5, the pattern stopped and displayed in the previous game round is hidden at the start of the predetermined game round. In this way, by avoiding the sudden disappearance of the design in the second display area during the variable display, it is possible to reduce the discomfort when the design is hidden.

Feature L6. When the display control means hides the pattern in the second display area, the display control means shifts to the third normal gaming state in an area (maximum display range) including at least a part of the second display area. The gaming machine according to any one of the feature L3 to the feature L5, which has a suggestion means for suggesting.

As shown in the feature L6, if the transition to the third normal gaming state is suggested instead of hiding the pattern in the second display area, the oversight of the suggestion can be suitably suppressed.

Feature L7. When the display control means shifts to the second normal gaming state, the second normal is set in a predetermined area (information display area IE) outside the first display area and the second display area on the display screen. Display an image showing the third normal game state, which is the transition destination from the game state,
The suggestion means has the feature L6 characterized in that when the pattern in the second display area is hidden, the image is enlarged and displayed in an area including at least a part of the second display area as the suggestion. The game machine described.

As shown in the feature L7, according to the configuration in which the image displayed in the predetermined area is enlarged and displayed in the area including at least a part of the second display area, the image can be grasped in advance. Even if the display period in the second display area is shortened, it is possible to prevent the image from becoming difficult to grasp. In this way, relaxing the restrictions on the period is advantageous in facilitating the progress of the game.

Feature L8. The second display area is provided in the center of the display screen, and the first display area is provided in a corner of the display screen, according to any one of the features L1 to L7. Game machine.

As shown in this feature, by arranging the second display area in the center of the display screen and arranging the first display area in the corner of the display screen, the pattern corresponding to the game result can be seen in the final game. It can be suitably suppressed.

In addition, each technical idea shown in feature L1 to feature L8 may be applied to the said feature A group to K group.

<Characteristic M group>
The following feature M group is described in that "a game machine such as a pachinko machine has a game board in which a game area is formed and a game ball launching means for launching a game ball into the game area based on a launch operation by a player. Some of them are provided. By entering the game ball launched from the game ball launching means into the ball entry portion provided in the game area, a privilege such as paying out a predetermined number of game balls is given to the player. Regarding the background technology of "(for example, see Patent Document 1)", there is an invention that "in the above-mentioned type of gaming machine, there is still room for improvement in its configuration in order to increase the degree of attention to the game." It was made with the problem to be solved.

Features M1. A game board (game board 60) in which a game area (game area PE) is formed, and
Information in the special information acquisition means (MPU 602 of the main control device 162) for acquiring special information (holding information) when a ball enters the starting ball entry unit (for example, the right operating port 63a) provided in the game area. Function to execute acquisition process) and
An acquisition information storage means (RAM 604 holding ball storage area 632) capable of storing special information acquired by the special information acquisition means, and
The lottery process is executed by the determination means (MPU 602 of the main control device 162) that sequentially determines whether or not the special information stored in the acquired information storage means corresponds to the predetermined determination information (for example, winning information). Function) and
The game rotation operation (variation display of the pattern on the operating port display units DL and DR) is started prior to the determination being made by the determination means or based on the determination made by the determination means. , The notification result corresponding to the result of the determination and the end of the game rotation operation are regarded as one game time, and the game of each game time is performed according to the special information stored in the acquired information storage means. A game turn control means (for example, a function of executing a game turn control process by the MPU 602 of the main control device 162) that controls the notification means (display units DL, DR for the operation port) so that the turn operation is performed.
The determination result by the determination means becomes the determination result corresponding to the predetermined determination information, and the gaming state is changed from the normal gaming state to the game based on the fact that the pattern corresponding to the determination result is stopped and displayed by the game turn control means. It is equipped with a special game state transition means (a function of executing a game state transition process in the MPU 602 of the main control device 162) to shift to a special game state (for example, open / close execution mode) that is advantageous to the user.
As the normal game state, a first normal game state (a first normal game state corresponding to a low probability mode and a low frequency support mode) and a second normal game state (high) that is more advantageous to the player than the first normal game state. The second normal game state corresponding to the probability mode and the high frequency support mode) and the third normal game state (the third normal game state corresponding to the high probability mode and the low frequency support mode) which is more advantageous to the player than the second normal game state. (Game state) is provided,
A second normal game state transition means (MPU 602 of the main control device 162 executes a process for shifting to the second normal game state) for shifting the game state to the second normal game state upon the end of the special game state. Function to do) and
When shifting to the second normal gaming state by the second normal gaming state transition means, the upper limit setting means (to the MPU 602 of the main control device 162) for setting the upper limit (time reduction number) of the number of games in the second normal game state. Function to set the number of time reductions) and
A third normal game state transition means (main control device 162) that shifts the game state from the second normal game state to the third normal game state based on the number of games played in the second normal game state reaching the upper limit. (Function to execute the process for transitioning to the third normal game state) in MPU602 of
An information display means (design display device 75) that displays numerical information (counter value in the counter image CF) in the second normal gaming state.
It is provided with display control means (notification / effect control device 143 and display control device 710) that controls the display of the information display means.
The display control means
When the numerical information is sequentially updated so as to approach a predetermined numerical information (for example, "0") as the game progresses until the number of games in the second normal game state reaches the upper limit, and the upper limit is reached. Information updating means (a function of executing a countdown display on the notification / effect control device 143 and the display control device 710) that converts the numerical information into the predetermined numerical information.
Switching means for switching the information update means to a first update state (for example, subtraction level 1) and a second update state (for example, subtraction level 2) in which the update width of the numerical information for each game is larger than that of the first update state. A gaming machine characterized by having (a function of switching the subtraction level by the notification / effect control device 143).

According to the feature M1, after shifting from the first normal gaming state to the second normal gaming state through the special gaming state, the number of games played in the second normal gaming state reaches the upper limit, which is higher than that of the second normal gaming state. Further, it shifts to the third normal gaming state which is advantageous to the player. In the second normal game state, the numerical information displayed on the display screen is sequentially updated so as to approach the predetermined numerical information, and when the number of games in the second normal game state becomes the upper limit, the numerical information is the predetermined numerical value. It becomes information. By looking at the numerical information displayed on the display screen, the player can predict the remaining amount until the transition to the third normal gaming state. Here, the update state of the numerical information is provided with the first update state / the second update state, and the update speed of the numerical information and the like can be changed by switching between these update states. With such a switching function, the monotonization of the game can be suitably suppressed by causing a change in the rhythm in the progress of the game until the transition to the third normal game state.

Feature M2. A game board (game board 60) in which a game area (game area PE) is formed, and
Information in the special information acquisition means (MPU 602 of the main control device 162) for acquiring special information (holding information) when a ball enters the starting ball entry unit (for example, the right operating port 63a) provided in the game area. Function to execute acquisition process) and
An acquisition information storage means (RAM 604 holding ball storage area 632) capable of storing special information acquired by the special information acquisition means, and
The lottery process is executed by the determination means (MPU 602 of the main control device 162) that sequentially determines whether or not the special information stored in the acquired information storage means corresponds to the predetermined determination information (for example, winning information). Function) and
The game rotation operation (variation display of the pattern on the operating port display units DL and DR) is started prior to the determination being made by the determination means or based on the determination made by the determination means. , The notification result corresponding to the result of the determination and the end of the game rotation operation are regarded as one game time, and the game of each game time is performed according to the special information stored in the acquired information storage means. A game turn control means (for example, a function of executing a game turn control process by the MPU 602 of the main control device 162) that controls the notification means (display units DL, DR for the operation port) so that the turn operation is performed.
The determination result by the determination means becomes the determination result corresponding to the predetermined determination information, and the gaming state is changed from the normal gaming state to the game based on the fact that the pattern corresponding to the determination result is stopped and displayed by the game turn control means. It is equipped with a special game state transition means (a function of executing a game state transition process in the MPU 602 of the main control device 162) to shift to a special game state (for example, open / close execution mode) that is advantageous to the user.
As the normal game state, a first normal game state (a first normal game state corresponding to a low probability mode and a low frequency support mode) and a second normal game state (high) that is more advantageous to the player than the first normal game state. The second normal game state corresponding to the probability mode and the high frequency support mode) and the third normal game state (the third normal game state corresponding to the high probability mode and the low frequency support mode) which is more advantageous to the player than the second normal game state. (Game state) is provided,
A second normal game state transition means (MPU 602 of the main control device 162 executes a process for shifting to the second normal game state) for shifting the game state to the second normal game state upon the end of the special game state. Function to do) and
When shifting to the second normal gaming state by the second normal gaming state transition means, the upper limit setting means (to the MPU 602 of the main control device 162) for setting the upper limit (time reduction number) of the number of games in the second normal game state. Function to set the number of time reductions) and
A third normal game state transition means (main control device 162) that shifts the game state from the second normal game state to the third normal game state based on the number of games played in the second normal game state reaching the upper limit. (Function to execute the process for transitioning to the third normal game state) in MPU602 of
An information display means (design display device 75) that displays numerical information (counter value in the counter image CF) in the second normal gaming state.
It is provided with display control means (notification / effect control device 143 and display control device 710) that controls the display of the information display means.
The display control means
As the numerical information, numerical information correlative with the remaining number of games until the transition to the 3 normal game state in the 2nd normal game state is displayed, and until the number of games in the 2nd normal game state reaches the upper limit. Information updating means (a function of executing a countdown display on the notification / effect control device 143 and the display control device 710) that updates the numerical information as the game progresses, and
Switching means for switching the information update means to a first update state (for example, subtraction level 1) and a second update state (for example, subtraction level 2) in which the update width of the numerical information is larger for each game than the first update state. A gaming machine characterized by having (a function of switching the subtraction level by the notification / effect control device 143).

According to the feature M2, after shifting from the first normal gaming state to the second normal gaming state through the special gaming state, the number of games played in the second normal gaming state reaches the upper limit, which is higher than that of the second normal gaming state. Further, it shifts to the third normal gaming state which is advantageous to the player. In the second normal game state, the remaining numerical information correlative with the game times is displayed on the display screen. The player can predict the remaining amount up to the third normal gaming state by looking at the numerical information displayed on the display screen. Here, the update state of the numerical information is provided with the first update state / the second update state, and the update speed of the numerical information and the like can be changed by switching between these update states. With such a switching function, the monotonization of the game can be suitably suppressed by causing a change in the rhythm in the progress of the game up to the third normal game state.

Feature M3. The display control means displays numerical information corresponding to a numerical value larger than the product of the upper limit and the update width in one game in the first update state as the numerical information when shifting to the second normal game state. It is configured to
The gaming machine according to feature M1 or feature M2, wherein the information updating means is configured to perform the updating so that the numerical value indicated by the numerical information is reduced.

When the value indicated by the numerical information is subtracted each time the game times are digested as shown in this feature, the numerical information displayed at the time of transition to the second normal game state should be estimated more than the above upper limit. Therefore, the degree of freedom in setting the first update state and the second update state can be suitably increased.

Features M4. The display control means has a means for setting a game turn for switching the update state by the switching means based on the upper limit set by the upper limit setting means. The gaming machine described in any one.

In a configuration in which the second normal gaming state ends when the upper limit is reached, the opportunity to switch the update state depends on the upper limit. Therefore, as shown in this feature, by predetermining the game times for switching the update state according to the upper limit, it is possible to properly update the numerical information toward the predetermined numerical information. ..

Feature M5. The switching means is any one of the feature M1 to the feature M4, which comprises a means for switching the update state from the first update state to the second update state during the second normal gaming state. The game machine described in.

If the update state is switched from the first update state to the second update state as shown in this feature, the update speed of the numerical information can be increased toward the third normal game state. Thereby, the player's attention to the transition to the third normal gaming state can be suitably improved.

Feature M6. In the first update state and the second update state, the number of updates in one game is the same, and in the second update state, the numerical information is updated by updating once more than in the first update state. The gaming machine according to any one of the feature M1 to the feature M5, which is configured to have a large width.

According to the configuration shown in this feature, by setting the number of updates to be the same and providing a difference in the update width in one update, it is possible to enhance the sharpness of updating the numerical information.

Feature M7. In the first update state and the second update state, the width of the numerical information changed by one update is the same, and in the second update state, one game is played compared to the first update state. The gaming machine according to any one of the feature M1 to the feature M5, which is configured so that the update is executed many times during the rotation.

According to the configuration shown in this feature, the subtraction rhythm can be changed by increasing the number of updates instead of increasing the number of changes at one time.

Feature M8. It is equipped with a picture display means (a function of executing display control processing by the notification / effect control device 143 and the display control device 710) that performs variable display of the picture and finally stops and displays the picture corresponding to the judgment result by the judgment means.
The pattern display means is a means for determining the number of times that a pattern corresponding to a determination result by the determination means is temporarily stopped and displayed before being finally stopped and displayed according to the number of times the numerical information is updated during one game. The gaming machine according to feature M7, which is characterized by having.

If the update of the numerical information is linked to the display of the pattern as shown in the feature M8, the display range of the numerical information is reduced so that the update can be overlooked while coexisting with other information on the display screen. Can be reduced.

Feature M9. The display control means switches the display mode (for example, color and brightness) of the numerical information between a first display mode corresponding to the first update state and a second display mode corresponding to the second update state. The gaming machine according to any one of the feature M1 to the feature M8, which is characterized by having means.

In the configuration in which the update speed is changed by switching the update state of the numerical information as shown in the feature M1 or the like, the change is easily overlooked because the display range of the numerical information becomes smaller. Therefore, if the display mode of the numerical information is switched according to the update state as shown in this feature, it is possible to reduce the chance that the update speed is overlooked without increasing the display range unobtrusively. ..

In addition, each technical idea shown in feature M1 to feature M9 may be applied to the said feature A group to L group.

<Characteristic N group>
The following feature N group is described in that "a game machine such as a pachinko machine has a game board in which a game area is formed and a game ball launching means for launching a game ball into the game area based on a launch operation by a player. Some of them are provided. When a game ball launched from a game ball launching means enters a ball entry portion provided in the game area, a privilege such as paying out a predetermined number of game balls is given to the player. The game is diversified by making the ball entry section variable and switching between a guidance state in which the game ball is guided to the ball entry section and a non-guidance state in which the guidance is not performed according to the game situation ( For example, regarding the background technology of "Patent Document 1)", "In the above-mentioned type of gaming machine, there is still room for improvement in the configuration related to the ball entry portion in order to increase the degree of attention to the game." It was made with the problem that the invention is trying to solve.

Feature N1. A game board (game board 60) in which a game area (game area PE) is formed on the front surface, and a ball entry portion (lower variable winning device 65A) on which a game ball flowing down the game area can enter the game board. ) Is provided in the game machine
The ball entry part
A horizontally long entrance (lower prize opening 341A) formed so as to open above the game machine,
A non-accepting state (closed state) in which the ball is displaceably held in the thickness direction of the game board and the ball entry port is covered from above the game machine to prevent entry into the ball entry port, and the ball entry port. It has a plate-shaped shutter (shutter 345A) that recedes from the ball and switches to a receiving state (open state) that allows the ball to enter the ball entrance.
In the game area, a first ball passage (downstream side passage portion 324A) and a second ball passage (upstream side passage portion 322A) for guiding the game ball to the first ball passage are provided.
When the shutter is in the non-accepting state, the plate surface of the shutter forms a part of the rolling surface of the game ball in the first ball passage, and the plate surface descends in a predetermined direction (right side). It is arranged so that it is inclined,
It is provided with an inclined portion (inclined portion 326aA) arranged side by side with the shutter and formed so as to be inclined downward toward the upper end portion of the plate surface of the shutter, and the plate surface of the shutter and the plate surface of the shutter. A series of rolling surfaces are formed by the inclined portion, and a series of rolling surfaces is formed.
The outlet portion (exit portion 322aA) of the second ball passage faces the side (left side) opposite to the side where the plate surface of the shutter is inclined downward.
The game ball guided from the second ball passage to the first ball passage moves to the inclined portion by moving on the plate surface of the shutter in the direction opposite to the predetermined direction, and then the game ball of the game ball. A gaming machine characterized in that the moving direction is configured to be reversed at the inclined portion.

According to the feature N1, the rolling surface of the game ball is formed by the plate-shaped shutter, and when the shutter is switched from the non-accepted state to the accepted state, the game ball located on the shutter moves to the entrance. Fall (enter). With such a configuration, it is possible to preferably prevent the game ball from passing through the ball entry portion (the occurrence of a spill ball), for example, during an interval period in which the shutter is maintained in a non-accepting state. This is preferable in order to improve the degree of attention to the game.

Here, the above-mentioned effect of suppressing the spilling ball can be preferably exerted by increasing the width of the shutter and increasing the moving distance of the game ball on the shutter. However, it is feared that an increase in the size of the shutter may slow down the movement of the shutter and reduce the responsiveness of switching between the accepted state and the non-accepted state. Such slow movement of the shutter hinders the effect of suppressing the spilling ball described above, and is not preferable in improving the degree of attention to the game. In this regard, according to the configuration shown in this feature, the game ball supplied to the first ball passage via the second ball passage moves so as to reciprocate on the shutter. By moving on the shutter on both the outbound and inbound routes, the period of being on the shutter can be earned. Further, since a part of the outward route and the return route is formed by the inclined portion arranged side by side with the shutter, it is possible to suppress the shutter from becoming large in order to gain a movement route (stay period). Therefore, it is possible to suppress a decrease in the responsiveness of switching between the accepted state and the non-accepted state, and to preferably improve the degree of attention to the game.

Feature N2. The length and the inclination angle of the inclined portion are reversed at the inclined portion, and the moving speed of the game ball moving toward the entrance is such that the entrance is when the shutter is in the receiving state. The gaming machine according to feature N1, wherein the speed is specified so as not to pass through the entrance of the ball without flowing into the ball.

If the shutter is switched to the receiving state when the game ball moves to the inclined portion, the game ball returning from the inclined portion will flow into the entrance. As a result, the effect of suppressing the spilling sphere shown in the feature N1 can be suitably exerted.

Feature N3. The drive unit that drives the shutter and
Switching means (main control device 162 and variable ball entry device) for switching the shutter between the non-accepted state and the accepted state by controlling the drive unit when the state shifts to a special gaming state that is more favorable to the player than usual. With a drive unit 404)
In the inclined portion, the required period when the game ball that has moved from the shutter to the inclined portion returns to the shutter is from the time when the shutter is switched to the accepted state by the switching means until the game ball is switched to the non-accepted state. The gaming machine according to the feature N1 or the feature N2, which is formed so as to be shorter than the shortest period of the above.

According to the feature N3, it is possible to prevent the acceptance period by the shutter from ending while the game ball is located on the inclined portion. As a result, the effect of suppressing the enlargement of the shutter and the effect of suppressing the spilling sphere can be suitably exerted.

Feature N4. The inclined portion is formed so that the number of game balls (2) that can simultaneously exist on the inclined portion is smaller than the number of game balls (3) that can be launched in the shortest period. The gaming machine according to the feature N3.

If many game balls move from the inclined portion to the shutter side at once, there is a possibility that the number of balls entering the entry portion becomes excessive. It is feared that this will be a factor that impairs the soundness of the game. Therefore, as shown in this feature, it is preferable to limit the number of game balls that can exist simultaneously on the inclined portion to be smaller than the number of game balls that can be launched in the shortest period. With such a configuration, the above concerns can be preferably dispelled.

Feature N5. The length of the shutter in the passage direction of the first ball passage is such that a plurality of game balls can exist on the shutter at the same time.
The gaming machine according to any one of features N1 to N4, wherein the length of the inclined portion in the passage direction is shorter than the length of the shutter in the passage direction.

As shown in the feature N1, according to the configuration in which the game ball located on the shutter is dropped to the ball entry port when the shutter is switched to the receiving state, for example, a plurality of game balls can be entered at the same time. .. This is preferable in order to strengthen the impact on the movement of the game ball at the time of entering the ball and to improve the degree of attention to the game. Therefore, as shown in this feature, the length (width) of the inclined portion is made shorter than the length (width) of the shutter so that the movement of the game ball is mainly on the shutter. It is possible to preferably exert the effect of improving the degree of attention by simultaneous entry of balls while suppressing the occurrence of

Feature N6. The gaming machine according to any one of the features N1 to N5, wherein the tilt angle of the tilted portion is the same as the tilt angle of the upper surface portion of the shutter.

According to the feature N6, it becomes easy for the player to predict the movement when the game ball reverses and returns to the shutter from the movement of the game ball moving on the shutter toward the inclined portion side. As a result, it is possible to encourage the player to pay attention to whether or not the ball enters the ball entrance in relation to the timing at which the shutter switches to the receiving state. Then, by supporting the entry of the ball into the entrance after attracting attention in this way, the player's willingness to play (satisfaction) can be suitably improved.

Feature N7. The gaming machine according to any one of the features N1 to N5, wherein the tilt of the tilted portion is larger than the tilt of the upper surface portion of the shutter.

According to the configuration shown in this feature, the game ball that has reached the inclined portion can be quickly reversed to the shutter side, and further, it is possible to contribute to the miniaturization of the entire ball entering means including the inclined portion and the shutter.

Feature N8. The game ball that has flowed out from the exit portion of the second ball passage has a configuration toward the entrance.
The shutter features N1 to N7, which function as a ball receiving portion for receiving a game ball from the exit portion of the second ball passage toward the entry port when the shutter is in the non-accepting state. The gaming machine described in any one of.

When the shutter is in the receiving state, the game ball that has flowed out from the exit portion of the second ball passage passes through the entrance as it is. As a result, it is possible to preferably suppress that the reciprocating function shown in feature N1 becomes a factor that causes a delay in entering the ball.

Feature N9. The ball entry part
A detection unit (detection sensor 391d) that detects a game ball that has passed through the ball entry port, and
It is provided so as to face the ball entry port from below, and has a bottom portion that guides the game ball that has flowed into the ball entry port to the detection unit.
The gaming machine according to feature N8, wherein the bottom portion is formed so as to have a downward slope on the same side as the side facing the exit portion of the second ball passage.

According to the feature N9, when the shutter is in the receiving state, the flow of passing through the opening → detection can be smoothed. It is preferable to suppress the delay in detection in this way in order to suppress the occurrence of so-called over-winning and enhance the soundness of the game.

Feature N10. The gaming machine according to any one of features N1 to N9, wherein the inclined portion is provided with a stopper portion that regulates the movement of the game ball to a side opposite to the predetermined direction.

In the configuration in which the game ball is reversed as described above, the preceding game ball and the succeeding game ball may collide with each other depending on the timing at which the game ball is guided to the first ball passage. It is not preferable that the preceding game ball is ejected from the shutter due to this collision in order to suppress the spilling ball. Therefore, as shown in this feature, by restricting the movement of the game ball to the side opposite to the predetermined direction by the stopper portion, the effect of suppressing the generation of the spilling ball can be suitably exhibited.

Feature N11. A partition (partition) that partitions the flow path of the game ball on the shutter into a first flow path on the front side of the game machine (front side passage portion 324FD) and a second flow path on the back side of the game machine (back side passage portion 324BD). With part 329D)
The first flow path and the second flow path are connected at the inclined portion, and a guide for guiding the game ball from one of the first flow path and the second flow path to the other at the connected portion. A part (guide part 328D) is provided,
The second ball passage is described in any one of the feature N1 to the feature N10, which is characterized in that the game ball is guided to one of the first flow path and the second flow path. Aisle machine.

According to the feature N11, the game ball guided to the first ball passage moves to one of the first flow path and the second flow path → the inclined portion → the other of the first flow path and the second flow path. With such a configuration, the collision between the preceding game ball and the succeeding game ball is suppressed, and it becomes easy to generate a situation in which a plurality of game balls are located on the shutter.

Feature N12. The gaming machine according to feature N11, wherein the partition portion is provided in a housing forming the first ball passage.

By providing the partition portion on the housing side as shown in this feature, when the shutter is switched from the non-accepted state to the accepted state in a situation where a plurality of game balls are located on the shutter, those game balls are released. It is possible to suppress a collision near the entrance. As a result, when a plurality of game balls flow into the ball entrance at the same time, smooth entry can be realized. This is an advantageous deal in shortening the period during which the shutter is in the receiving state while generating the ball entering the ball entrance.

The technical ideas shown in the features N1 to N12 may be applied to the features A to M.

<Characteristic P group>
The following feature P group is described in that "a game machine such as a pachinko machine has a game board in which a game area is formed and a game ball launching means for launching a game ball into the game area based on a launch operation by the player. Some of them are provided. When a game ball launched from a game ball launching means enters a ball entry portion provided in the game area, a privilege such as paying out a predetermined number of game balls is given to the player. The game is diversified by making the ball entry section variable and switching between a guidance state in which the game ball is guided to the ball entry section and a non-guidance state in which the guidance is not performed according to the game situation ( For example, regarding the background technology of "Patent Document 1)", "In the above-mentioned type of gaming machine, there is still room for improvement in the configuration related to the ball entry portion in order to increase the degree of attention to the game." It was made with the problem that the invention is trying to solve.

Features P1. A game board (game board 60) having a game area (game area PE) formed on the front surface is provided, and a ball entry unit (variable winning device 65A) capable of entering a game ball flowing down the game area is provided on the game board. It is a game machine that is provided
The ball entry part
A horizontally long entrance (lower prize opening 341A) formed so as to open above the game machine,
A non-accepting state (closed state) in which the ball is displaceably held in the thickness direction of the game board and the ball entry port is covered from above the game machine to prevent entry into the ball entry port, and the ball entry port. It has a plate-shaped shutter (shutter 345A) that recedes from the ball and switches to a receiving state (open state) that allows the ball to enter the ball entrance.
In the game area, a first ball passage (downstream side passage portion 324A) and a second ball passage (upstream side passage portion 322A) for guiding the game ball to the first ball passage are provided.
When the shutter is in the non-accepting state, the plate surface of the shutter forms a part of the rolling surface of the game ball in the first ball passage, and the plate surface descends in a predetermined direction (right side). It is arranged so that it is inclined,
The outlet portion (exit portion 322aA) of the second ball passage faces the side (left side) opposite to the side where the plate surface of the shutter is inclined downward.
The game ball guided from the second ball passage to the first ball passage moves on the plate surface to the side opposite to the predetermined direction, and then the moving direction of the game ball is reversed on the plate surface. A game machine characterized in that it is configured as such.

According to the feature P1, the rolling surface of the game ball is formed by the plate-shaped shutter, and when the shutter is switched from the non-accepted state to the accepted state, the game ball located on the shutter moves to the entrance. Fall (enter). With such a configuration, it is possible to preferably prevent the game ball from passing through the ball entry portion (the occurrence of a spill ball), for example, during an interval period in which the shutter is maintained in a non-accepting state. This is preferable in order to improve the degree of attention to the game.

Here, the above-mentioned effect of suppressing the spilling ball can be preferably exerted by increasing the width of the shutter and increasing the moving distance of the game ball on the shutter. However, increasing the size of the shutter makes it difficult to coexist with other game parts and the like in the game area, and becomes a factor that reduces the degree of freedom in arranging the shutter. This is not preferable in order to improve the degree of attention to the game. In this regard, according to the configuration shown in this feature, the game ball supplied to the first ball passage via the second ball passage moves so as to reciprocate on the shutter. By moving on the shutter on both the outbound and inbound routes, the period of being on the shutter can be earned. Therefore, it is possible to suppress the generation of the spilling sphere while suppressing the increase in size of the shutter, and to preferably improve the degree of attention to the game.

Feature P2. The gaming machine according to feature P1, wherein the guide position of the game ball to the first ball passage by the second ball passage is defined to be a position on the plate surface of the shutter.

As shown in feature P1, in the configuration in which the game ball is reversed, the preceding game ball and the succeeding game ball may collide with each other depending on the timing at which the game ball is guided to the first ball passage. It is feared that the fact that the game ball, which should have flowed into the entrance, deviates from the inflow route due to such a collision may cause a decrease in the player's willingness to play. In this respect, as shown in this feature, according to the configuration in which the game ball from the second ball passage lands on the plate surface of the shutter, it is a case where the preceding game ball and the succeeding game ball collide with each other. Also, it is possible to preferably prevent the game balls from deviating from the inflow path to the entrance. As a result, it is possible to suppress a decrease in the motivation to play and suitably contribute to an increase in the degree of attention to the game.

Feature P3. The gaming machine according to feature P2, wherein the guide position is a position closer to the downstream end of the first ball passage in the passage direction on the plate surface of the shutter.

According to the feature P3, the total movement distance (outward route + return route) on the shutter of the game ball guided from the second ball passage to the first ball passage can be suitably earned. This is preferable in suppressing the increase in size of the shutter.

Feature P4. By abutting the game ball that has moved on the plate surface of the shutter to the side opposite to the predetermined direction from the side opposite to the predetermined direction, the game ball further to the side opposite to the predetermined direction. The gaming machine according to any one of feature P1 to feature P3, which comprises a stopper portion for restricting movement.

In the configuration in which the game ball is reversed as described above, the preceding game ball and the succeeding game ball may collide with each other depending on the timing at which the game ball is guided to the first ball passage. It is not preferable that the preceding game ball is ejected from the shutter due to this collision in order to suppress the spilling ball. Therefore, as shown in this feature, by restricting the movement of the game ball to the side opposite to the predetermined direction by the stopper portion, the effect of suppressing the generation of the spilling ball can be suitably exhibited.

Feature P5. Described in feature P4, wherein the stopper portion abuts on a game ball that has moved to an upper limit position on the shutter to restrict further movement of the game ball to a side opposite to the predetermined direction. Game machine.

As shown in feature P4, in the configuration in which the movement of the game ball is restricted by the stopper portion, the regulation is performed on the game ball that has moved to the upper limit position of the shutter, so that the game ball on the shutter is regulated. The original aim of gaining a moving distance can be preferably realized.

In addition, each technical idea shown in feature P1 to feature P5 may be applied to the said feature A group to N group.

<Characteristic Q group>
The following feature Q group is described in that "a game machine such as a pachinko machine has a game board in which a game area is formed and a game ball launching means for launching a game ball into the game area based on a launch operation by the player. Some of them are provided. When a game ball launched from a game ball launching means enters a ball entry portion provided in the game area, a privilege such as paying out a predetermined number of game balls is given to the player. The game is diversified by making the ball entry section variable and switching between a guidance state in which the game ball is guided to the ball entry section and a non-guidance state in which the guidance is not performed according to the game situation ( For example, regarding the background technology of "Patent Document 1)", "In the above-mentioned type of gaming machine, there is still room for improvement in the configuration related to the ball entry portion in order to increase the degree of attention to the game." It was made with the problem that the invention is trying to solve.

Features Q1. A game machine provided with a game board (game board 60) in which a game area (game area PE) is formed, and the game board is provided with a ball passage (guide passage 500E) through which a game ball flowing down the game area passes. And
The ball passage includes a horizontal passage portion (upstream passage portion 501E) constituting the upstream side of the ball passage and a vertical passage portion (intermediate passage portion 502E) extending downward from the downstream end of the horizontal passage portion. Have
In the thickness direction of the game board, the ball entry port (upper grand prize opening 311E) located on the extension of the horizontal passage portion and provided so as to be side by side with the passage area of the game ball in the vertical passage portion. A shutter (shutter 315E) that switches between a receiving state (open state) that allows the ball to enter the ball entry port and a non-accepting state (closed state) that prevents the ball from entering the ball entry port by being displaced. Equipped with a variable ball entry unit (upper variable winning device 64E)
The shutter has a plate shape, and is arranged so that the plate surface faces sideways and faces the outlet portion of the lateral passage portion.
When the shutter is in the receiving state, the passing area and the ball entry port are communicated with each other, and when the shutter is in the non-receiving state, the shutter is in the passing area and the ball entering state. Functions as a partition that separates the mouth
When the shutter is switched from the non-accepting state to the receiving state under the situation where the game ball is located in the passing area, the game ball located in the passing area flows into the entrance. A game machine characterized by having a structure.

According to the configuration shown in the feature Q1, when the shutter is switched from the non-receiving state to the receiving state, the game ball located in the passing region flows into the ball entrance. As a result, the generation of spilled spheres can be suppressed. This is preferable in promoting the continuation of the firing operation of the game ball and facilitating the progress of the game. In the above configuration, the effect of suppressing the occurrence of spill depends on the shutter and the vertical width of the specific region. Even if the vertical width of the shutter and the specific region is increased to enhance the effect of suppressing the spilling sphere, it can be applied to a portion where the horizontal width of the flow path is limited, such as the side of a display device such as a liquid crystal. This is advantageous in improving the degree of attention to the variable ball entry portion.

Features Q2. On the wall surface portion (right side wall portion 511E) facing the shutter across the passage region in the vertical passage portion, a guide portion (protruding portion) for guiding the game ball passing through the passage region to the shutter side. The gaming machine according to feature Q1, characterized in that 511aE) is provided.

According to the feature Q2, the game ball passing through the passing region is guided to the shutter side by the guide portion provided on the wall surface portion. As a result, the inclination of the shutter with respect to the horizontal plane can be brought close to 90 °. Therefore, it is possible to make the width of the variable ball entry portion as small as possible so that the effect shown in the feature Q1 can be suitably exhibited.

Features Q3. The gaming machine according to feature Q2, wherein the guide portion is a protrusion protruding from a wall surface portion facing the shutter toward the shutter side.

According to the feature Q3, the game ball moving in the passing region is decelerated by hitting the guide portion (projection). With such a configuration, the spill suppressing effect shown in the feature Q1 can be suitably exhibited.

Features Q4. The guide unit is a first guide unit and
The shutter has a second guide portion (protruding portion 315aE) that guides the game ball guided to the shutter side by the first guide portion to the wall surface portion (right side wall portion 511E) facing the shutter. Is provided,
The gaming machine according to feature Q2 or feature Q3, wherein the first guide portion and the second guide portion are arranged alternately in the passage direction of the vertical passage portion.

According to the feature Q4, the game ball moving along the shutter is guided to the side away from the shutter by the second guide unit. As a result, it is possible to prevent the guidance function of the first guide unit from being poorly exerted.

Features Q5. The gaming machine according to feature Q4, wherein a portion of the vertical passage portion that is an extension of the horizontal passage portion is a non-arranged region of the first guide portion and the second guide portion.

As shown in feature Q5, by not arranging the first guide portion and the second guide portion on the extension of the lateral passage portion, the smooth flow of the game ball from the lateral passage portion to the entry port can be achieved. It is possible to suppress the hindrance by the first guide portion and the second guide portion.

Features Q6. A detection means (detection sensor 317aE) for detecting a game ball that has flowed into the ball entrance is provided.
The lateral passage portion moves so that the game ball flowing out from the exit portion of the lateral passage portion crosses above the predetermined portion (third specific region SE3) in which the guide portion is formed in the passage region. It is configured to accelerate the game ball passing through the horizontal passage.
The shutter and the ball entry port are configured so that the game ball flowing out of the lateral passage portion flows into the ball entry port without passing through the predetermined portion under the condition of the receiving state. The gaming machine according to any one of the feature Q1 to the feature Q5, which is characterized by being present.

According to the feature Q6, the game ball that has flowed out from the lateral passage portion flows into the ball entrance as it is under the condition that the shutter is in the receiving state. In this way, the time lag from passing through the entrance to the detection can be reduced by configuring the game ball so as not to interfere with the movement of the game ball.

Features Q7. The ball entry portion guides the game ball that has flowed into the ball entry port to a detection point (for example, a detection position by the detection sensor 317aE) so as to cross above the predetermined portion of the passage region (the first internal passage (the first). 1 passage portion 312aE), a second internal passage (second passage portion 312bE) that guides the game ball that has flowed into the entry port through the predetermined portion to a detection location (for example, a detection position by the detection sensor 317bE), and at least detection. On the upstream side of the location, the first internal passage and the second internal passage are provided with a partition portion (partition portion 520E) for partitioning the first internal passage and the second internal passage so as not to merge with each other. The gaming machine according to the feature Q6.

As shown in feature Q7, a passage for a game ball that has flowed into the ball entrance through a predetermined portion of the passing region and a passage for a game ball that has flowed into the ball entrance without passing through the predetermined portion. With the partitioning configuration, it is possible to prevent the preceding game ball from being ejected from the entrance, such as when the game ball vigorously flowing into the entrance from the lateral passage collides with the preceding game ball. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the player from suffering an unexpected disadvantage due to the reduction of the time lag described above.

Features Q8. As the detection means, a first detection means (detection sensor 317aE) that detects a game ball guided to a detection location by the first internal passage, and a first detection means (detection sensor 317aE) that detects a game ball guided to the detection location by the second internal passage. 2 The gaming machine according to feature Q7, characterized in that a detection means (detection sensor 317bE) is provided.

Feature As shown in Q8, a detection means is provided for each internal passage so that the game balls that have passed through each internal passage do not interfere with each other upstream of the detection point, so that the time lag between passing through the entrance and detection is large. It can be suitably suppressed.

Features Q9. The flow path length from the ball entry port to the detection point by the first detection means is shorter than the flow path length from the ball entry port to the detection point by the second detection means. The gaming machine described in Q8.

In the configuration in which a plurality of detection means are used together as shown in the feature Q8, the flow path length from the ball entry port to the detection point by the first detection means is changed to the flow path from the ball entry port to the detection point by the second detection means. By making it shorter than the length, the responsiveness of the game ball detection can be suitably improved.

Features Q10. The ball entrance is divided into upper and lower halves by the entrance portion of the first internal passage and the entrance portion of the second internal passage.
The upper end of the partition has a surface shape that is inclined downward to the side opposite to the entrance side, and is a first ball receiving portion (inclined portion) that receives a game ball protruding in the passage direction of the lateral passage portion. 521E) is provided,
A second ball receiving portion (inclined portion 522E) that has a surface shape that is inclined downward to the same side as the first ball receiving portion and receives a game ball that has fallen from the passing region on the lower side of the first ball receiving portion. ) Is provided,
The second ball receiving portion is formed so as to overlap the passing region in the vertical direction, whereas the first ball receiving portion avoids overlapping with the passing region in the vertical direction. The gaming machine according to any one of the feature Q7 to the feature Q9, which is characterized in that it is formed.

According to the feature Q10, since the second ball receiving portion is formed so as to overlap the passing region in the vertical direction, the game ball located in the passing region of the vertical passage portion changes from the non-accepted state of the shutter to the accepted state. When the game balls fall due to the switching, the game balls are guided to the back side of the second internal passage by the second ball receiving portion. After that, the game ball that has jumped out of the horizontal passage portion is guided to the back side of the first internal passage by the first ball receiving portion. The first ball receiving portion is formed so as to avoid overlapping with the passing region in the vertical direction. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the game ball falling from the passing region toward the second ball receiving portion from hitting the first ball receiving portion and disturbing the behavior. With such a configuration, it is possible to prevent the presence of the first ball receiving portion from hindering the exertion of the guidance function by the second ball receiving portion, and by using the two internal passages together, the above-mentioned various effects can be obtained. It becomes possible to exert it suitably.

In addition, each technical idea shown in feature Q1 to feature Q10 may be applied to the said feature A group to P group.

The basic configuration of the gaming machine to which each of the above features can be applied is shown below.

Pachinko game machine: An operating means operated by a player (game ball launching handle 41), a game ball launching means for launching a game ball based on the operation of the operating means (game ball launching mechanism 110), and the launching thereof. A ball passage (guide passage 103 of the guide rail 100, etc.) that guides the game ball to a predetermined game area (game area PE) and each game part (nails, etc.) arranged in the game area are provided, and each of these game parts. A gaming machine that gives a privilege to a player when a gaming ball passes through a predetermined passing portion (general winning opening 61, etc.).

Rotating game machine such as a slot machine: Equipped with a variable display means for displaying the symbol sequence consisting of a plurality of symbols in a variable manner and then displaying the symbol row in the final stop, and the symbol variation starts due to the operation of the starting operation means. A special game that is advantageous to the player on the condition that the fluctuation of the symbol is stopped due to the operation of the stopping operation means or the predetermined time elapses, and the final stop symbol at the time of the stop is a specific symbol. A game machine that generates a state (bonus game, etc.).

Belt-type game machine using a ball: Equipped with a variable display means for displaying the symbol sequence consisting of a plurality of symbols in a variable manner and then displaying the symbol sequence in the final stop, the symbol variation is started and stopped due to the operation of the starting operation means. A special gaming state (bonus) that is advantageous to the player on the condition that the fluctuation of the symbol is stopped due to the operation of the operation means or the predetermined time elapses, and the final stop symbol at the time of the stop is a specific symbol. (Game, etc.) is generated, and further, a throwing device provided with a ball saucer and a throwing device for taking in a game ball from the ball saucer and a payout device for paying out the game ball to the ball saucer is provided. A game machine configured so that the operation of the starting operation means becomes effective when the game ball is thrown in.

10 ... Pachinko machine as a game machine, 41 ... Game ball launch handle, 60 ... Game board, 62 ... Lower actuating ball entry section, 62a ... Lower actuating port, 63 ... Right actuating ball entry section, 63a ... Right actuating port, 64 ... Upper variable winning device, 65 ... Lower variable winning device, 70 ... Ball winning unit, 75 ... Symbol display device, 75a ... Display screen, 81 ... Main display unit, 110 ... Game ball launching mechanism as a game ball launching means , 162 ... Main control device, 191 ... Power supply / launch control device, 311 ... Upper prize opening, 315 ... Shutter, 315aE ... Protruding part, 325A ... Discharge passage part, 326A ... Extension passage part, 326aA ... Inclined part, 500E ... passage part, 501E ... upstream side passage part, 502E ... intermediate passage part, 503E ... downstream side passage part, 511E ... right side wall part, 511aE ... ridge part, 520E ... partition part, CF ... counter image, D ... main display Unit, DL ... Lower operating port display unit, DR ... Right operating port display unit, DS ... Through gate display unit, IE ... Information display area, LF ... Restraint image, ME1 ... First variable display area, ME2 ... No. 2 Variable display area, ME3 ... 3rd variable display area, PE ... Game area, SE1 ... 1st specific area, SE2 ... 2nd specific area, SE3 ... 3rd specific area, TF ... Target image.

Claims (6)

A game machine provided with a game board on which a game area is formed, and the game board is provided with a ball passage through which a game ball flowing down the game area passes.
The ball passage includes a horizontal passage portion constituting the upstream side of the ball passage and a vertical passage portion extending downward from the downstream end portion of the horizontal passage portion.
The ball entry port is located on the extension of the horizontal passage portion and is provided so as to be side by side with the passage area of the game ball in the vertical passage portion, and the ball entry is displaced in the thickness direction of the game board. It is provided with a variable ball entry section having a shutter that switches between a receiving state that allows ball entry into the mouth and a non-accepting state that prohibits ball entry into the ball entry port.
The shutter has a plate shape, and is arranged so that the plate surface faces sideways and faces the outlet portion of the lateral passage portion.
When the shutter is in the receiving state, the passing area and the ball entry port are communicated with each other, and when the shutter is in the non-receiving state, the shutter is in the passing area and the ball entering state. Functions as a partition that separates the mouth
When the shutter is switched from the non-accepting state to the receiving state under the situation where the game ball is located in the passing area, the game ball located in the passing area flows into the entrance. A game machine characterized by having a structure. A guide portion for guiding a game ball passing through the passing region to the shutter side is provided on the wall surface portion facing the shutter across the passing region in the vertical passage portion. The gaming machine according to claim 1. The gaming machine according to claim 2, wherein the guide portion is a protrusion protruding from a wall surface portion facing the shutter toward the shutter side. The guide unit is a first guide unit and
The shutter is provided with a second guide portion that guides the game ball guided to the shutter side by the first guide portion to the wall surface portion side facing the shutter.
The gaming machine according to claim 2 or 3, wherein the first guide portion and the second guide portion are arranged alternately in the passage direction of the vertical passage portion. The gaming machine according to claim 4, wherein a portion of the vertical passage portion that is an extension of the horizontal passage portion is a non-arranged region of the first guide portion and the second guide portion. .. A detection means for detecting a game ball that has flowed into the ball entrance is provided.
In the lateral passage portion, the game ball flowing out from the outlet portion of the lateral passage portion moves so as to cross above a predetermined portion in which the first guide portion and the second guide portion are formed in the passage region. It is configured to accelerate the game ball passing through the horizontal passage.
The shutter and the ball entry port are configured so that the game ball flowing out of the lateral passage portion flows into the ball entry port without passing through the predetermined portion under the condition of the receiving state. The gaming machine according to claim 4, wherein the gaming machine is characterized by being

Images